L-2019-076, Technical Specification Bases Control Program Periodic Report of Bases Changes TS 6.8.4.j.4: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
Line 16: Line 16:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:* l=PL. U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Attn: Document Control Desk Washington, DC 20555 RE: St. Lucie Unit 2 Docket No. 50-389 MAR 2 *a 2019 Technical Specification Bases Control Program Periodic Report of Bases Changes TS 6.8.4.j.4 ** *" I ...... , ***'  "*,..... ' ./ L-2019-076 10 CFR 50.71 (e) Pursuant to Technical Specification (TS) 6.8.4.j.4 , Florida Power & Light Company (FPL) is submitting the periodic report of changes made to the St. Lucie Unit 2 TS Bases without prior NRC approval.
{{#Wiki_filter:* ~, .
This periodic report is submitted on a frequency consistent with 10 CFR 50.71(e) for amendments to the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR). This report covers the period of UFSAR Amendment No. 25 (March 23 , 2017 through October 3, 2018). FPL is submitting the current revision of ADM-25.04 , St. Lucie Unit 2 Technical Specification Bases Attachments 1 through 13. Each attachment summarizes the revisions on the attachment cover page. Please contact us if there are any questions regarding this submittal.
                                                                ./
Sincerely ,
* l=PL.                                     MAR 2 *a 2019 L-2019-076 10 CFR 50.71 (e)
Michael J. Snyder Licensing Manager St. Lucie Plant MJS/rcs Attachments Florida Powe*r & Ligh t Compa n y 650 1 S. Ocea n D rive, Jensen Beach, FL 3 4 957 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Attn: Document Control Desk Washington, DC 20555 RE:     St. Lucie Unit 2 Docket No. 50-389 Technical Specification Bases Control Program Periodic Report of Bases Changes TS 6.8.4.j.4 Pursuant to Technical Specification (TS) 6 .8.4.j.4, Florida Power & Light Company (FPL) is submitting the periodic report of changes made to the St. Lucie Unit 2 TS a
2.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
Bases without prior NRC approval. This periodic report is submitted on frequency consistent with 10 CFR 50.71(e) for amendments to the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR). This report covers the period of UFSAR Amendment No. 25 (March 23, 2017 through October 3, 2018).
1 Current Revision No.
FPL is submitting the current revision of ADM-25.04, St. Lucie Unit 2 Technical Specification Bases Attachments 1 through 13. Each attachment summarizes the revisions on the attachment cover page.
7 SAFETY RELATED Title: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS Responsible Department:
Please contact us if there are any questions regarding this submittal.
Licensing REVISION  
Sincerely, it(~-~p Michael J. Snyder Licensing Manager St. Lucie Plant MJS/rcs Attachments Florida Powe*r & Light Company 6501 S. Ocean Drive, Jensen Beach, FL 34957
 
Section No.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                       2.0 Attachment No.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1
BASES ATTACHMENT 1 Current Revision No.
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                                 7 Title:
SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 2204276 to support use of AREVA fuel. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 2204276 to support use of AREVA fuel.
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1928076 to add "o f load" on Page 7 under Pressurizer Pressure-High to match the description on the same attachment for Unit 1. (Author: N. Elmore)
(Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU cond itions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1928076 to add of load on Page 7 under Pressurizer Pressure-High to match the description on the same attachment for Unit 1.
 
(Author: N. Elmore)
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 05-0059 for PCM 04078 and Tech Spec Amendment No. 138 NRC Letter dated 01/31/05 regarding WCAP-9272 Reload Methodology and Implementing 30% SG Tube Plugging Limi
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
: t. (George Madden, 01/27/05)  
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 05-0059 for PCM 04078 and Tech Spec Amendment No. 138 NRC Letter dated 01/31/05 regarding WCAP-9272 Reload Methodology and Implementing 30% SG Tube Plugging Limit. (George Madden, 01/27/05)
 
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 03-1731 to change pressure to steam generator and reflect technical specification setpoint value. (Edgard Hernandez, 07/18/03)
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 03-1731 to change pres sure to steam generator and reflect technical specification setpoint value. (Edgard Hernandez, 07/18/03)  
Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 03-1249 to revise Section 2.1.1, Figure B2.1-1 and Section 2.2.1 in accordance with Tech Spec Amendment 131; LAR 2002-06; NRC letter dated 4/18/03 regarding reduction in minimum RCS flow. (M. DiMarco, 05/02/03)
 
Revision 1 - Modified to reflect use of the ABB-NV critical heat flux correlation in satisfying the departure from nucleate boiling reactor core safety limit approved by License Amendment No. 118. (M. DiMarco, 11/08/01)
Revision 2  
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
- Incorporated PCR 03-1249 to revise Secti on 2.1.1, Figure B2.1-1 and Section 2.2.1 in accordance with Tech Spec Amendment 131; LAR 2002-06; NRC letter dated 4/18/03 regarding reduction in minimum RCS flow. (M. DiMarco, 05/02/03)
Revision             Approved By             Approval Date       UNIT #           UNIT 2 DATE 0                 R.G. West                 08/30/01         DOCT           PROCEDURE DOCN           SECTION 2.0 SYS 7                   R. Coffey                 12/15/14         STATUS         COMPLETED REV                 7
Revision 1 - Modified to reflect use of the ABB-NV cr itical heat flux corre lation in satisfying the departure from nucleate boilin g reactor core safety limit approved by License Amendment No. 118. (M. DiMarco, 11/08/01)
                                                                      # OF PGS
 
Revision 0
- Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01) Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2       DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE       DOCN SECTION 2.0 SYS   7 R. Coffey 12/15/14 STATUS COMPLETED REV 7       # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 2.0 2 of 10 REVISION NO.:
7  TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 2.0 ...................................................................................... 3 2.1 SAFETY LIMITS ................................................................................ 3
 
BASES ............................................................................................... 3
 
2.1.1 REACTOR CORE ................................................................ 3
 
2.1.2 REACTOR COOLAN T SYSTEM PRESSURE ..................... 4
 
FIGURE B 2.1-1  AXIAL POWER DISTRIBUTIONS FOR THERMAL MARGIN SAF ETY LIMITS ............................................... 5
 
2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SE TTINGS .......................................... 6
 
BASES ............................................................................................... 6
 
2.2.1 REACTOR TR IP SETPOINTS ............................................. 6
 
Manual Reactor Trip ............................................................. 6
 
Variable Po wer Level-High ................................................... 6
 
Pressurizer Pressure-High ................................................... 7


Thermal Margin
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
/Low Pressure ............................................. 7  
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0              BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04                                                    2 of 10 REVISION NO.:      SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 2.0 ...................................................................................... 3 2.1 SAFETY LIMITS ................................................................................ 3 BASES ............................................................................................... 3 2.1.1    REACTOR CORE ................................................................ 3 2.1.2    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE ..................... 4 FIGURE B 2.1-1 AXIAL POWER DISTRIBUTIONS FOR THERMAL MARGIN SAFETY LIMITS ............................................... 5 2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS .......................................... 6 BASES ............................................................................................... 6 2.2.1    REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS ............................................. 6 Manual Reactor Trip ............................................................. 6 Variable Power Level-High ................................................... 6 Pressurizer Pressure-High ................................................... 7 Thermal Margin/Low Pressure ............................................. 7 Containment Pressure-High ................................................. 8 Steam Generator Pressure-Low ........................................... 8 Steam Generator Level-Low................................................. 8 Local Power Density-High .................................................... 9 RCP Loss of Component Cooling Water .............................. 9 Rate of Change of Power-High............................................. 9 Reactor Coolant Flow-Low ................................................. 10 Loss of Load (Turbine) ....................................................... 10 Asymmetric Steam Generator Transient Protective Trip Function (ASGTPTF) .......................................................... 10


Containment Pressure-High ................................................. 8
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0                  BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04                        3 of 10 REVISION NO.:          SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 2.0 2.1      SAFETY LIMITS BASES 2.1.1    REACTOR CORE The restrictions of this safety limit prevent overheating of the fuel cladding and possible cladding perforation which would result in the release of fission products to the reactor coolant. Overheating of the fuel is prevented by maintaining the steady-state peak linear heat rate below the level at which centerline fuel melting will occur. Overheating of the fuel cladding is prevented by restricting fuel operation to within the nucleate boiling regime where the heat transfer coefficient is large and the cladding surface temperature is slightly above the coolant saturation temperature.
Operation above the upper boundary of the nucleate boiling regime could result in excessive cladding temperatures because of the onset of departure from nucleate boiling (DNB) and the resultant sharp reduction in heat transfer coefficient. DNB is not a directly measurable parameter during operation and therefore THERMAL POWER and Reactor Coolant Temperature and Pressure have been related to DNB through the HTP correlation. The HTP DNB correlation has been developed to predict the DNB heat flux and the location of DNB for axially uniform and non-uniform heat flux distributions. The local DNB heat flux ratio, DNBR, defined as the ratio of the heat flux that would cause DNB at a particular core location to the local heat flux, is indicative of the margin to DNB.
The minimum value of the DNBR during steady state operation, normal operational transients, and anticipated transients is limited to the appropriate correlation limit for Specified Acceptable Fuel Design Limit for DNB (DNB-SAFDL). This value is derived through a statistical combination of the system parameter probability distribution functions with the HTP DNB correlation uncertainties. This value corresponds to a 95% probability at a 95%
confidence level that DNB will not occur and is chosen as an appropriate margin to DNB for all operating conditions.


Steam Generator Pressure-Low ........................................... 8
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0                  BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04                        4 of 10 REVISION NO.:          SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.1      SAFETY LIMITS (continued)
BASES (continued) 2.1.1    REACTOR CORE (continued)
The curves of Figure 2.1-1 show conservative loci of points of THERMAL POWER, Reactor Coolant System pressure and vessel inlet temperature with four Reactor Coolant Pumps operating for which the DNB-SAFDL is not violated based on the HTP CHF correlation for the reference 1.55 Chopped Cosine Axial Shape and Design Limit FrT limit shown in Figure B 2.1-1. The dashed line is not a safety limit; however, operation above this line is not possible because of the actuation of the main steam line safety valves which limit the maximum value of reactor inlet temperature. Reactor operation at THERMAL POWER levels higher than 107% of RATED THERMAL POWER is prohibited by the high power level trip setpoint specified in Table 2.2-1. The area of safe transient condition is below and to the left of these lines.
The conditions for the Thermal Margin Safety Limit curves in Figure 2.1-1 to be valid are shown on the figure.
The Thermal Margin/Low Pressure and Local Power Density Trip Systems, in conjunction with Limiting Conditions for Operation, the Variable Overpower Trip and the Power Dependent Insertion Limits, assure that the DNB-SAFDL and Fuel Centerline Melt are not exceeded during normal operation and design basis Anticipated Operational Occurrences. Specific verification of the DNB-SAFDL limit using an appropriate DNB correlation ensures that the reactor core safety limit is satisfied.
2.1.2    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE The restriction of this Safety Limit protects the integrity of the Reactor Coolant System from overpressurization and thereby prevents the release of radionuclides contained in the reactor coolant from reaching the containment atmosphere.
The Reactor Coolant System components are designed to Section III, 1971 Edition including Addenda to the Summer, 1973, of the ASME Code for Nuclear Power Plant Components which permits a maximum transient pressure of 110% (2750 psia) of design pressure. The Safety Limit of 2750 psia is therefore consistent with the design criteria and associated code requirements.
The entire Reactor Coolant System was hydrotested at 3125 psia to demonstrate integrity prior to initial operation.


Steam Generator Level-Low
SECTION NO.:                                                PAGE:
................................................. 8
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0          BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04          5 of 10 REVISION NO.:    SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7                    ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 FIGURE B 2.1-1 AXIAL POWER DISTRIBUTIONS FOR THERMAL MARGIN SAFETY LIMITS


Local Power Density-High .................................................... 9
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04                        6 of 10 REVISION NO.:          SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2      LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS BASES 2.2.1    REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS The Reactor Trip Setpoints specified in Table 2.2-1 are the values at which the Reactor Trips are set for each functional unit. The Trip Setpoints have been selected to ensure that the reactor core and reactor coolant system are prevented from exceeding their Safety Limits during normal operation and design basis anticipated operational occurrences and to assist the Engineered Safety Features Actuation System in mitigating the consequences of accidents.
Operation with a trip set less conservative than its Trip Setpoint but within its specified Allowable Value is acceptable on the basis that the difference between each Trip Setpoint and the Allowable Value is equal to or less than the drift allowance assumed for each trip in the safety analyses.
Manual Reactor Trip The Manual Reactor Trip is a redundant channel to the automatic protective instrumentation channels and provides manual reactor trip capability.
Variable Power Level-High A Reactor trip on Variable Overpower is provided to protect the reactor core during rapid positive reactivity addition excursions which are too rapid to be protected by a Pressurizer Pressure - High or Thermal Margin/Low Pressure Trip.
The Variable Power Level High trip setpoint is operator adjustable and can be set no higher than 9.61% above the indicated THERMAL POWER level.
Operator action is required to increase the trip setpoint as THERMAL POWER is increased. The trip setpoint is automatically decreased as THERMAL POWER decreases. The trip setpoint has a maximum value of 107.0% of RATED THERMAL POWER and a minimum setpoint of 15.0% of RATED THERMAL POWER. Adding to this maximum value the possible variation in trip point due to calibration and instrument errors, the maximum actual steady-state THERMAL POWER level at which a trip would be actuated is higher than 107% of RATED THERMAL POWER, which is the value used in the safety analysis.


RCP Loss of Com ponent Cooling Water .............................. 9
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0                  BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04                        7 of 10 REVISION NO.:          SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2      LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued)
BASES (continued) 2.2.1    REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued)
Pressurizer Pressure-High The Pressurizer Pressure-High trip, in conjunction with the pressurizer safety valves and main steam line safety valves, provides Reactor Coolant System protection against overpressurization in the event of loss of load without reactor trip. This trips setpoint is at less than or equal to 2375 psia which is below the nominal lift setting 2500 psia of the pressurizer safety valves and its operation minimizes the undesirable operation of the pressurizer safety valves.
Thermal Margin/Low Pressure The Thermal Margin/Low Pressure trip is provided to prevent operation when the DNBR is less than the appropriate correlation limit for DNB-SAFDL.
The trip is initiated whenever the Reactor Coolant System pressure signal drops below either 1900 psia or a computed value as described below, whichever is higher. The computed value is a function of the higher of T power or neutron power, reactor inlet temperature, the number of reactor coolant pumps operating and the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX. The minimum value of reactor coolant flow rate, the maximum AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT and the maximum CEA deviation permitted for continuous operation are assumed in the generation of this trip function. In addition, CEA group sequencing in accordance with Specifications 3.1.3.5 and 3.1.3.6 is assumed. Finally, the maximum insertion of CEA banks which can occur during any anticipated operational occurrence prior to a Power Level-High trip is assumed.
The Thermal Margin/Low Pressure trip setpoints are derived from the core safety limits through application of appropriate allowances for equipment response time, measurement uncertainties and processing error. The allowances include: a variable (power dependent) allowance to compensate for potential power measurement error, an allowance to compensate for potential temperature measurement uncertainty; an allowance to compensate for pressure measurement error; and an allowance to compensate for the time delay associated with providing effective termination of the occurrence that exhibits the most rapid decrease in margin to the safety limit.


Rate of Change of Power-High
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
............................................. 9
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0                  BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04                        8 of 10 REVISION NO.:          SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2      LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued)
BASES (continued) 2.2.1    REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued)
Containment Pressure-High The Containment Pressure-High trip provides assurance that a reactor trip is initiated prior to or concurrently with a safety injection (SIAS). This also provides assurance that a reactor trip is initiated prior to or concurrently with an MSIS.
Steam Generator Pressure-Low The Steam Generator Pressure-Low trip provides protection against an excessive rate of heat extraction from the steam generators and subsequent cooldown of the reactor coolant. The setting of 626 psia is sufficiently below the full load operating point so as not to interfere with normal operation, but still high enough to provide the required protection in the event of excessively high steam flow.
Steam Generator Level-Low The Steam Generator Level-Low trip provides protection against a loss of feedwater flow incident and assures that the design pressure of the Reactor Coolant System will not be exceeded due to loss of the steam generator heat sink. This specified setpoint provides allowance that there will be sufficient water inventory in the steam generator at the time of the trip to provide sufficient time for any operator action to initiate auxiliary feedwater before reactor coolant system subcooling is lost. This trip also protects against violation of the specified acceptable fuel design limits (SAFDL) for DNBR, offsite dose and the loss of shutdown margin for asymmetric steam generator transients such as the opening of a main steam safety valve or atmospheric dump valve. The trip setpoint is bounding relative to the accident and transient analyses which were performed using a lower, conservative trip setpoint.


Reactor Coolant Flow-Low ................................................. 10
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0                  BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04                        9 of 10 REVISION NO.:            SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2      LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued)
BASES (continued) 2.2.1    REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued)
Local Power Density-High The Local Power Density-High trip, functioning from AXIAL SHAPE INDEX monitoring, is provided to ensure that the peak local power density in the fuel which corresponds to fuel centerline melting will not occur as a consequence of axial power maldistributions. A reactor trip is initiated whenever the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX exceeds the allowable limits of Figure 2.2-2. The AXIAL SHAPE INDEX is calculated from the upper and lower excore neutron detector channels. The calculated setpoints are generated as a function of THERMAL POWER level with the allowed CEA group position being inferred from the THERMAL POWER level. The trip is automatically bypassed below 15%
power.
The maximum AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT and maximum CEA misalignment permitted for continuous operation are assumed in generation of the setpoints.
In addition, CEA group sequencing in accordance with the Specifications 3.1.3.5 and 3.1.3.6 is assumed. Finally, the maximum insertion of CEA banks which can occur during any anticipated operational occurrence prior to a Power Level-High trip is assumed.
RCP Loss of Component Cooling Water A loss of component cooling water to the reactor coolant pumps causes a delayed reactor trip. This trip provides protection to the reactor coolant pumps by ensuring that plant operation is not continued without cooling water available. The trip is delayed 10 minutes following a reduction in flow to below the trip setpoint and the trip does not occur if flow is restored before 10 minutes elapses. No credit was taken for this trip in the safety analysis. Its functional capability at the specified trip setting is required to enhance the overall reliability of the Reactor Protective System.
Rate of Change of Power-High The Rate of Change of Power-High trip is provided to protect the core during startup operations and its use serves as a backup to the administratively enforced startup rate limit. The trip is not credited in any design basis accident evaluated in UFSAR Chapter 15; however, the trip is considered in the safety analysis in that the presence of this trip function precluded the need for specific analyses of other events initiated from subcritical conditions.


Loss of Load (Turbine) ....................................................... 10
SECTION NO.:                                                                         PAGE:
 
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0                 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04                           10 of 10 REVISION NO.:           SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2       LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued)
Asymmetric Steam Generator Transient Protective Trip Function (ASGTPTF) .......................................................... 10
BASES (continued) 2.2.1     REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued)
 
Reactor Coolant Flow-Low The Reactor Coolant Flow-Low trip provides core protection against DNB in the event of a sudden significant decrease in RCS flow. The Reactor trip setpoint on low RCS flow is calculated by a relationship between steam generator differential pressure, core inlet temperature, instrument errors and response times. When the calculated RCS flow falls below the trip setpoint in an automatic reactor trip signal is initiated. The trip setpoint and allowable values ensure that for a degradation of RCS flow resulting from expected transients, a reactor trip occurs to prevent violation of local power density or DNBR safety limits. The minimum reactor coolant flow with four pumps operating is specified in LCO 3.2.5.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 2.0 3 of 10 REVISION NO.:
7  BASES FOR SECTION 2.0 2.1 SAFETY LIMITS BASES 2.1.1 REACTOR CORE The restrictions of this safety limit prevent overheating of the fuel cladding and possible cladding perforation which would result in the release of fission products to the reactor coolant. Overheating of the fuel is prevented by maintaining the steady-state peak linear heat rate below the level at which centerline fuel melting will occur. Overheating of the fuel cladding is prevented by restricting fuel operation to within the nucleate boiling regime where the heat
 
transfer coefficient is large and the cladding surface temperature is slightly above the coolant saturation temperature.
Operation above the upper boundar y of the nucleate boiling regime could result in excessive cladding temperatures becaus e of the onset of departure from nucleate boiling (DNB) and the resultant sharp reduction in heat transfer coefficient. DNB is not a directly m easurable parameter during operation and therefore THERMAL POWER and Reactor Coolant Temperature and Pressure have been related to DNB through t he HTP correlation. The HTP DNB correlation has been developed to predict the DNB heat flux and the location of DNB for axially uniform and non-uniform heat flux distributions. The local DNB heat flux ratio, DNBR, defined as the ra tio of the heat flux that would cause DNB at a particular core location to the local heat flux, is indicative of the margin to DNB.
The minimum value of the DNBR duri ng steady state operation, normal operational transients, and ant icipated transients is lim ited to the appropriate correlation limit for Specified Acceptable Fuel Design Limit for DNB (DNB-SAFDL). This value is derived through a statistical combinat ion of the system parameter probability distri bution functions with the HTP DNB correlation uncertainties. This value corresponds to a 95% probability at a 95%
 
confidence level that DNB will not o ccur and is chosen as an appropriate margin to DNB for all operating conditions.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 2.0 4 of 10 REVISION NO.:
7  2.1 SAFETY LIMITS (continued) BASES (continued) 2.1.1 REACTOR CORE (continued)
The curves of Figure 2.1-1 show cons ervative loci of points of THERMAL
 
POWER, Reactor Coolant System pressu re and vessel inlet temperature with four Reactor Coolant Pumps operating for which the DNB-SAFDL is not violated based on the HTP CHF correlation for the reference 1.55 Chopped Cosine Axial Shape and Design Limit              shown in Figure B 2.1-1. The dashed line  is not a safety limit; however, operation above this line is not possible because of the
 
actuation of the main steam line safety valves which limit the maximum value of reactor inlet temperature. Reactor oper ation at THERMAL POWER levels higher than 107% of RATED THERMAL POWER is prohibited by the high power level trip setpoint specified in Table 2.2-1.
The area of safe transient condition is below and to the left of these lines.
The conditions for the Thermal Margin Safety Limit curves in Figure 2.1-1 to be valid are shown on the figure.
 
The Thermal Margin/Low Pressure and Loc al Power Density Trip Systems, in conjunction with Limiting Conditions for Operation, the Variable Overpower Trip and the Power Dependent Insertion Limi ts, assure that the DNB-SAFDL and Fuel Centerline Melt are not exc eeded during normal operation and design basis Anticipated Operational Occurrences. Specific verification of the DNB-SAFDL limit using an appropriate DNB corre lation ensures that the reactor core safety limit is satisfied. 2.1.2 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE The restriction of this Safety Limit prot ects the integrity of the Reactor Coolant System from overpressurization and thereby prevents the release of radionuclides contained in the reactor coolant from reachi ng the containment atmosphere.
The Reactor Coolant System component s are designed to Section III, 1971 Edition including Addenda to the Summer, 1973, of t he ASME Code for Nuclear Power Plant Components which permits a maximum transient pressure of 110% (2750 psia) of design pressure. The Safety Limit of 2750 psia is therefore consistent with the design criteria and associated code requirements.
The entire Reactor Coolant System was hydrotested at 3125 psia to demonstrate integrity prio r to initial operation.
limitF T r SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 2.0 5 of 10 REVISION NO.:
7  FIGURE B 2.1-1 AXIAL POWER DISTRIBUTIONS FOR TH ERMAL MARGIN SAFETY LIMITS
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 2.0 6 of 10 REVISION NO.:
7  2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS BASES 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS The Reactor Trip Setpoints specified in Table 2.2-1 are the va lues at which the Reactor Trips are set for each functional unit. The Trip Setpoints have been selected to ensure that the reactor core and reactor coolant system are prevented from exceeding their Safety Limits during normal operation and design basis anticipated operational occurr ences and to assist the Engineered Safety Features Actuation System in mi tigating the consequences of accidents.
Operation with a trip set less conservative than its Trip Setpoint but within its
 
specified Allowable Value is accept able on the basis that the difference between each Trip Setpoint and the Allowable Value is equal to or less than the drift allowance assumed for each trip in the safety analyses.
Manual Reactor Trip The Manual Reactor Trip is a redundant ch annel to the automatic protective  instrumentation channels and provides manual reactor trip capability. Variable Power Level-High A Reactor trip on Variable Overpower is provided to protect the reactor core during rapid positive reactivity addition excursions which are too rapid to be protected by a Pressurizer Pressure -
High or Thermal Margin/Low Pressure Trip. The Variable Power Level High trip set point is operator adjustable and can be set no higher than 9.61% above the indicated THERMAL POWER level.
Operator action is required to increase the trip setpoint as THERMAL POWER is increased. The trip setpoint is automatically decreased as THERMAL POWER decreases. The trip setpoint has a maximum value of 107.0% of RATED THERMAL POWER and a minimum setpoint of 15.0% of RATED THERMAL POWER. Adding to this maxi mum value the possible variation in trip point due to calibration and instrument errors, the maximum actual steady-state THERMAL POWER level at which a tr ip would be actuated is higher than 107% of RATED THERMAL POWER, which is the value used in the safety analysis.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 2.0 7 of 10 REVISION NO.:
7   2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued) BASES (continued) 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued)
Pressurizer Pressure-High The Pressurizer Pressure-High trip, in conjunction with the pressurizer safety valves and main steam line safety valves, provides Reactor Coolant System protection against overpressurization in the event of loss of load without reactor
 
trip. This trip's setpoint is at less than or equal to 2375 psia which is below the nominal lift setting 2500 psia of the pressurizer safety valves and its operation minimizes the undesirable operation of the pressurizer safety valves. Thermal Margin/Low Pressure The Thermal Margin/Low Pressure trip is provided to prevent operation when
 
the DNBR is less than the appropriate correlation limit for DNB-SAFDL. The trip is initiated whenever the Reactor Coolant System pressure signal
 
drops below either 1900 psia or a computed value as described below, whichever is higher. The computed va lue is a function of the higher of T power or neutron power, reactor inlet te mperature, the nu mber of reactor coolant pumps operating and the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX. The minimum value
 
of reactor coolant flow rate, the ma ximum AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT and the maximum CEA deviation permitted for continuous operation are assumed in the
 
generation of this trip function. In addition, CEA group sequencing in accordance with Specificati ons 3.1.3.5 and 3.1.
3.6 is assumed. Finally, the maximum insertion of CEA banks whic h can occur during any anticipated operational occurrence prior to a Power Level-High trip is assumed.
The Thermal Margin/Low Pressure trip setpoints are derived from the core safety limits through application of appropriate allowances for equipment
 
response time, measurement uncertain ties and processing error. The allowances include:  a variable (pow er dependent) allowance to compensate for potential power measurement erro r, an allowance to compensate for potential temperature meas urement uncertainty; an allowance to compensate for pressure measurement error; and an allowance to compensate for the time delay associated with providing effective termination of the occurrence that
 
exhibits the most rapid decrease in margin to the safety limit.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 2.0 8 of 10 REVISION NO.:
2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued) BASES (continued) 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued) Containment Pressure-High The Containment Pressure-High trip provid es assurance that a reactor trip is initiated prior to or concurrently with a safety injection (SIAS). This also provides assurance that a reactor trip is initiated prior to or concurrently with an MSIS. Steam Generator Pressure-Low The Steam Generator Pre ssure-Low trip provides protection against an excessive rate of heat extraction from the steam generators and subsequent cooldown of the reactor coolant. The setting of 626 psia is sufficiently below the full load operating point so as not to interfere with normal operation, but still high enough to provide the required protection in the event of excessively high
 
steam flow. Steam Generator Level-Low The Steam Generator Level-Low trip pr ovides protection against a loss of feedwater flow incident and assures that the design pressure of the Reactor Coolant System will not be exceeded due to loss of the steam generator heat sink. This specified setpoint provides allowance that there will be sufficient water inventory in the st eam generator at the time of the trip to provide sufficient time for any operator action to initiate auxiliary feedwater before reactor coolant system subcooling is lost. This trip also protects against violation of the specified acceptable fuel design limits (SAFDL) for DNBR, offsite dose and the loss of shutdown ma rgin for asymmetric steam generator transients such as the opening of a main steam safety valve or atmospheric dump valve. The trip setpoint is bounding relative to the accident and transient analyses which were performed using a lo wer, conservative trip setpoint.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 2.0 9 of 10 REVISION NO.:
7  2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued) BASES (continued) 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued) Local Power Density-High The Local Power Density-High trip, functioning from AXIAL SHAPE INDEX monitoring,  is provided to ensure that the peak local power density in the fuel which corresponds to fuel centerline me lting will not occur as a consequence of axial power maldistributions. A reactor trip is initiated whenever the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX exceeds the allowable limits of Figure 2.2-2. The AXIAL SHAPE INDEX is calculated from the upper and lower excore neutron detector channels. The calculated setpoints ar e generated as a function of THERMAL POWER level with the allo wed CEA group position be ing inferred from the THERMAL POWER level. The trip is automatically bypassed below 15%
power. The maximum AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT and maximum CEA misalignment permitted for continuous operation are assu med in generation of the setpoints.
In addition, CEA group sequencing in accordance with the Specifications 3.1.3.5 and 3.1.3.6 is assu med. Finally, the maximum insertion of CEA banks which can occur during any anticipated operational occurrence prior to a Power Level-High trip is assumed.
RCP Loss of Component Cooling Water A loss of component cooling water to the reactor coolant pumps causes a delayed reactor trip. This trip provides protection to the reactor coolant pumps by ensuring that plant operation is not continued without cooling water available. The trip is delayed 10 minut es following a reduction in flow to below the trip setpoint and the trip does not occu r if flow is restored before 10 minutes elapses. No credit was taken for this trip in the safety anal ysis. Its functional capability at the specified trip setti ng is required to enhance the overall reliability of the Reactor Protective System.
Rate of Change of Power-High The Rate of Change of Power-High trip is provided to protect the core during startup operations and its use serves as a backup to the administratively enforced startup rate limit. The trip is not credited in any design basis accident evaluated in UFSAR Chapter 15; however, the trip is considered in the safety analysis in that the presence of this trip function precluded the need for specific analyses of other events initiated from subcritical conditions.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 2.0 10 of 10 REVISION NO.:
7  2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued) BASES (continued) 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued) Reactor Coolant Flow-Low The Reactor Coolant Flow-Low trip prov ides core protection against DNB in the event of a sudden significant decrease in RCS flow. The Reactor trip setpoint on low RCS flow is calculated by a relationship between steam generator differential pressure, core inlet temper ature, instrument errors and response times. When the calculat ed RCS flow falls below the trip setpoint in an automatic reactor trip signal is initiated. The trip setpoint and allowable values ensure that for a degradation of RCS flow resulting from expected transients, a reactor trip occurs to prevent violati on of local power density or DNBR safety limits. The minimum reactor coolant flow with four pumps operating is specified in LCO 3.2.5.
Loss of Load (Turbine)
Loss of Load (Turbine)
The Loss of Load (Turbine) trip is provided to trip the reactor when the turbine is tripped above a predetermined power level. This trip is an equipment protective trip only and is not required for plant safety. This trip's setpoint does not correspond to a Safety Limit and no cr edit was taken in the safety analyses for operation of this trip.
The Loss of Load (Turbine) trip is provided to trip the reactor when the turbine is tripped above a predetermined power level. This trip is an equipment protective trip only and is not required for plant safety. This trips setpoint does not correspond to a Safety Limit and no credit was taken in the safety analyses for operation of this trip. Its functional capability at the specified trip setting is required to enhance the overall reliability of the Reactor Protection System.
Its functional capability at t he specified trip setting is required to enhance the overall reliability of the Reactor Protection System. Asymmetric Steam Generator Tr ansient Protective Trip Function (ASGTPTF) The ASGTPTF utilizes steam generator pressure inputs to the TM/LP calculator, which causes a reactor trip when the difference in pressure between the two steam generators exceeds the trip setpoint. The ASGTPTF is designed to provide a reactor trip for thos e Anticipated Operational Occurrences associated with secondary system malfunctions which result in asymmetric primary loop coolant temperat ures. The most limiting ev ent is the loss of load to one steam generator caused by a single Main Steam Isolation Valve closure.
Asymmetric Steam Generator Transient Protective Trip Function (ASGTPTF)
The ASGTPTF utilizes steam generator pressure inputs to the TM/LP calculator, which causes a reactor trip when the difference in pressure between the two steam generators exceeds the trip setpoint. The ASGTPTF is designed to provide a reactor trip for those Anticipated Operational Occurrences associated with secondary system malfunctions which result in asymmetric primary loop coolant temperatures. The most limiting event is the loss of load to one steam generator caused by a single Main Steam Isolation Valve closure.
The equipment trip setpoint and allowable values are calculated to account for instrument uncertainties, and will ensure a trip at or before reaching the analysis setpoint.
The equipment trip setpoint and allowable values are calculated to account for instrument uncertainties, and will ensure a trip at or before reaching the analysis setpoint.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Sections No.
 
3.0 & 4.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
Sections No.
2 Current Revision No.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                               3.0 & 4.0 Attachment No.
5 SAFETY RELATED Title: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS Responsible Department:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2
Licensing REVISION  
BASES ATTACHMENT 2 Current Revision No.
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                             5 Title:
LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2246735 to make upda tes per TS Amendments 243 and 194. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2246735 to make updates per TS Amendments 243 and 194.
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 1947991 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR  
(Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 1947991 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)
AND Incorporated PCR 2003212 to update NRC Regulatory Guide reference. (Author: N. Elmore)
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1855383 to update editorial changes. (Author: R. Sciscente)
Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 09-1217 for CR 2009-4976 to incorporate TSTF-434 -
Overlap Testing - in Bases for SR 4.0.1. (Author: Ken Frehafer)
Revision 1 - Updated TS Bases for TS Amendment No. 129 - missed surveillances.
(Larry Donghia, 01/03/03)
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
Revision            Approved By              Approval Date  UNIT #          UNIT 2 DATE 0                  R.G. West                08/30/01      DOCT        PROCEDURE DOCN        Sections 3.0 & 4.0 SYS 5                  D. DeBoer                01/24/17      STATUS        COMPLETED REV                5
                                                                  # OF PGS


====4.0.4. (Author====
SECTION NO.:        TITLE:          TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                                              PAGE:
N. Elmore)
3.0 & 4.0              BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:              LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                                                    2 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
AND Incorporated PCR 2003212 to update NRC Regulatory Guide reference. (Author: N. Elmore)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                                      PAGE BASES FOR SECTIONS 3.0 & 4.0 .................................................................................... 3 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY ........................................................................................... 3 BASES ......................................................................................................... 3 3.0.1 ........................................................................................................... 3 3.0.2 ........................................................................................................... 3 3.0.3 ........................................................................................................... 5 3.0.4 ........................................................................................................... 7 3.0.5 ......................................................................................................... 10 4.0.1 ......................................................................................................... 12 4.0.2 ......................................................................................................... 14 4.0.3 ......................................................................................................... 14 4.0.4 ......................................................................................................... 16 4.0.5 ......................................................................................................... 17


Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1855383 to update editorial changes. (Author: R. Sciscente)  
SECTION NO.:            TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                      PAGE:
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                  LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                      3 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTIONS 3.0 & 4.0 3/4.0    APPLICABILITY BASES The specifications of this section establish the general requirements applicable to Limiting Conditions for Operation. These requirements are based on the requirements for Limiting Conditions for Operation stated in the Code of Federal Regulations, 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2):
          "Limiting conditions for operation are the lowest functional capability or performance levels of equipment required for safe operation of the facility.
When a limiting condition for operation of a nuclear reactor is not met, the licensee shall shut down the reactor or follow any remedial action permitted by the technical specification until the condition can be met."
3.0.1    LCO 3.0.1 establishes the Applicability statement within each individual Specification as the requirement for when the LCO is required to be met (i.e. when the unit is in the MODES of other specified condition of the Applicability statement for each Specification).
3.0.2    This specification establishes that noncompliance with a specification exists when the requirements of the Limiting Condition for Operation are not met and the associated ACTION requirements have not been implemented within the specified time interval. The purpose of this specification is to clarify that (1) implementation of the ACTION requirements within the specified time interval constitutes compliance with a specification and (2) completion of the remedial measures of the ACTION requirements is not required when compliance with a Limiting Condition for Operation is restored within the time interval specified in the associated ACTION requirements.
There are two basic types of ACTION requirements. The first specifies the remedial measures that permit continued operation of the facility which is not further restricted by the time limits of the ACTION requirements. In this case, conformance to the ACTION requirements provides an acceptable level of safety for unlimited continued operation as long as the ACTION requirements continue to be met. The second type of ACTION requirement specifies a time limit in which conformance to the conditions of the Limiting Condition for Operation must be met. This time limit is the allowable outage time to restore an inoperable system or component to OPERABLE status or for restoring parameters within specified limits. If these actions are not completed within the allowable outage time limits, a shutdown is required to place the facility in a MODE or condition in which the specification no longer applies. It is not intended that the shutdown ACTION requirements be used as an operational convenience which permits (routine) voluntary removal of a system(s) or component(s) from service in lieu of other alternatives that would not result in redundant systems or components being inoperable.


Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 09-1217 for CR 2009-4976 to incorporate TSTF-434 - Overlap Testing - in Bases for SR 4.0.1. (Author
SECTION NO.:            TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                      PAGE:
:  Ken Frehafer)
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                  LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                        4 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0    APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 3.0.2    (continued)
The specified time limits of the ACTION requirements are applicable from the point in time it is identified that a Limiting Condition for Operation is not met.
The time limits of the ACTION requirements are also applicable when a system or component is removed from service for surveillance testing or investigation of operational problems. Individual specifications may include a specified time limit for the completion of a Surveillance Requirement when equipment is removed from service. In this case, the allowable outage time limits of the ACTION requirements are applicable when this limit expires if the surveillance has not been completed. When a shutdown is required to comply with ACTION requirements, the plant may have entered a MODE in which a new specification becomes applicable. In this case, the time limits of the ACTION requirements would apply from the point in time that the new specification becomes applicable if the requirements of the Limiting Condition for Operation are not met.
LCO 3.0.5 provides for an exception to LCO 3.0.2 for the limited purpose of performing required testing to demonstrate either the OPERABILITY of equipment being returned to service or the OPERABILITY of other equipment. Refer to the LCO 3.0.5 discussion for use.


Revision 1
SECTION NO.:            TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                      PAGE:
- Updated TS Bases for TS Amendment No. 129 - missed surveillances.   (Larry Donghia, 01/03/03)
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                  LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                        5 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0    APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 3.0.3    This specification establishes the shutdown ACTION requirements that must be implemented when a Limiting Condition for Operation is not met and the condition is not specifically address by the associated ACTION requirements.
The purpose of this specification is to delineate the time limits for placing the unit in a safe shutdown MODE when plant operation cannot be maintained within the limits for safe operation defined by the Limiting Conditions for Operation and its ACTION requirements. It is not intended to be used as an operational convenience which permits (routine) voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service in lieu of other alternatives that would not result in redundant systems or components being inoperable. One hour is allowed to prepare for an orderly shutdown before initiating a change in plant operation. This time permits the operator to coordinate the reduction in electrical generation with the load dispatcher to ensure the stability and availability of the electrical grid. The time limits specified to reach lower MODES of operation permit the shutdown to proceed in a controlled and orderly manner that is well within the specified maximum cooldown rate and within the cooldown capabilities of the facility assuming only the minimum required equipment is OPERABLE. This reduces thermal stresses on components of the primary coolant system and the potential for a plant upset that could challenge safety systems under conditions for which this specification applies.
If remedial measures permitting limited continued operation of the facility under the provisions of the ACTION requirements are completed, the shutdown may be terminated. The time limits of the ACTION requirements are applicable from the point in time there was a failure to meet a Limiting Condition for Operation. Therefore, the shutdown may be terminated if the ACTION requirements have been met or the time limits of the ACTION requirements have not expired, thus providing an allowance for the completion of the required actions.


Revision 0
SECTION NO.:            TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                    PAGE:
- Bases for Technical Specifications.  (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)  Revision  Approved By  Approval Date  UNIT # UNIT 2        DATE 0  R.G. West  08/30/01  DOCT PROCEDURE        DOCN Sections 3.0 & 4.0 SYS  5  D. DeBoer  01/24/17  STATUS COMPLETED REV 5        # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
3.0 & 4.0                 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                  LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                     6 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 2 of 17 REVISION NO.:
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0     APPLICABILITY (continued)
5  TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTIONS 3.0 & 4.0 .................................................................................... 3 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY ........................................................................................... 3 BASES ......................................................................................................... 3 3.0.1  ........................................................................................................... 3 3.0.2 ........................................................................................................... 3 3.0.3 ........................................................................................................... 5 3.0.4  ........................................................................................................... 7 3.0.5  ......................................................................................................... 10 4.0.1  ......................................................................................................... 12 4.0.2  ......................................................................................................... 14 4.0.3  ......................................................................................................... 14 4.0.4  ......................................................................................................... 16 4.0.5  ......................................................................................................... 17
BASES (continued) 3.0.3     (continued)
The time limits of Specification 3.0.3 allow 37 hours for the plant to be in the COLD SHUTDOWN MODE when a shutdown is required during the POWER MODE of operation. If the plant is in a lower MODE of operation when a shutdown is required, the time limit for reaching the next lower MODE of operation applies. However, if a lower MODE of operation is reached in less time than allowed, the total allowable time to reach COLD SHUTDOWN, or other applicable MODE, is not reduced. For example, if HOT STANDBY is reached in 2 hours, the time allowed to reach HOT SHUTDOWN is the next 11 hours because the total time to reach HOT SHUTDOWN is not reduced from the allowable limit of 13 hours. Therefore, if remedial measures are completed that would permit a return to POWER operation, a penalty is not incurred by having to reach a lower MODE of operation in less than the total time allowed.
The same principle applies with regard to the allowable outage time limits of the ACTION requirements, if compliance with the ACTION requirements for one specification results in entry into a MODE or condition of operation for another specification in which the requirements of the Limiting Condition for Operation are not met. If the new specification becomes applicable in less time than specified, the difference may be added to the allowable outage time limits of the second specification. However, the allowable outage time limits of ACTION requirements for a higher MODE of operation may not be used to extend the allowable outage time that is applicable when a Limiting Condition for Operation is not met in a lower MODE of operation.
The shutdown requirements of Specification 3.0.3 do not apply in MODES 5 and 6, because the ACTION requirements of individual specifications define the remedial measures to be taken.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:           TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                     PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 3 of 17 REVISION NO.:
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                     7 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
BASES FOR SECTIONS 3.0 & 4.0 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY BASES The specifications of this section establish the general requirements applicable to Limiting Conditions for O peration. These requirements are based on the requirements for Limiting Cond itions for Operation stated in the Code of Federal Regulations, 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2): "Limiting conditions for operation are the lowest functional capability or performance levels of equipm ent required for safe operation of the facility.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0     APPLICABILITY (continued)
When a limiting condition fo r operation of a nuclear reactor is not met, the licensee shall shut down the reactor or follow any remedial action permitted by the technical specification until the condition can be met." 3.0.1 LCO 3.0.1 establishes the Applicability statement within each individual Specification as the requirement fo r when the LCO is required to be met (i.e. when the unit is in the MODES of other specified condition of the Applicability statement for each Specification).
BASES (continued) 3.0.4     LCO 3.0.4 establishes limitations on changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability when an LCO is not met. It allows placing the unit in a MODE or other specified condition stated in that Applicability (e.g., the Applicability desired to be entered) when unit conditions are such that the requirements of the LCO would not be met, in accordance with LCO 3.0.4.a, LCO 3.0.4.b, or LCO 3.0.4.c.
3.0.2 This specification establishes that nonc ompliance with a specification exists when the requirements of the Limiting Co ndition for Operation are not met and the associated ACTION requirement s have not been implemented within the specified time interval. The purpose of this specification is to clarify that (1) implementation of the ACTION r equirements within the specified time interval constitutes compliance with a specification and (2) completion of the remedial measures of the ACTION requirements is not required when compliance with a Limiting Condition for Operation is restored within the time interval specified in the associated ACTION requirements.
LCO 3.0.4.a allows entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met when the associated ACTIONS to be entered permit continued operation in the MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability for an unlimited period of time. Compliance with required Actions that permit continued operation of the unit for an unlimited period of time in a MODE or other specified condition provides an acceptable level of safety for continued operation. This is without regard to the status of the unit before or after the MODE change. Therefore, in such cases, entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability may be made in accordance with the provisions of the required Actions.
There are two basic types of ACTION r equirements. The first specifies the remedial measures that permit continued operation of the facility which is not further restricted by the time limits of the ACTION requi rements. In this case, conformance to the ACTION requirement s provides an acceptable level of safety for unlimited conti nued operation as long as the ACTION requirements continue to be met. The second type of ACTION requirement specifies a time limit in which conformance to the c onditions of the Limiting Condition for Operation must be met. This time limit is the allowable outage time to restore an inoperable system or component to OPERABLE status or for restoring parameters within specified limits. If these actions are not completed within the allowable outage time limits, a shutdow n is required to place the facility in a MODE or condition in which the specification no longer applies. It is not intended that the shutdown ACTION requirements be used as an operational convenience which permits (routine) vo luntary removal of a system(s) or component(s) from service in lieu of other alternatives that would not result in redundant systems or components being inoperable.  
LCO 3.0.4.b allows entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering the MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:           TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                     PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 4 of 17 REVISION NO.:
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                       8 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0    APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued)  
BASES (continued) 3.0.4     (continued)
The risk assessment may use quantitative, qualitative, or blended approaches, and the risk assessment will be conducted using the plant program, procedures, and criteria in place to implement 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4), which requires that risk impacts of maintenance activities to be assessed and managed. The risk assessment for the purposes of LCO 3.0.4.b, must take into account all inoperable Technical Specification equipment regardless of whether the equipment is included in the normal 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4) risk assessment scope.
The risk assessments will be conducted using the procedures and guidance endorsed by Regulatory Guide 1.160, Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants. Regulatory Guide 1.160 endorses Revision 4A of NUMARC 93-01 dated April 2011, Industry Guideline for Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants. These documents address general guidance for conduct of the risk assessment, quantitative and qualitative guidelines for establishing risk management actions, and example risk management actions. These include actions to plan and conduct other activities in a manner that controls overall risk, increased risk awareness by shift and management personnel, actions to reduce the duration of the condition, actions to minimize the magnitude of risk increases (establishment of backup success paths or compensatory measures), and determination that the proposed MODE change is acceptable. Consideration should also be given to the probability of completing restoration such that the requirements of the LCO would be met prior to the expiration of ACTIONS completion times that would require exiting the Applicability.
LCO 3.0.4.b may be used with single or multiple systems and components unavailable. NUMARC 93-01 provides guidance relative to consideration of simultaneous unavailability of multiple systems and components.
The results of the risk assessment shall be considered in determining the acceptability of entering the MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability, and any corresponding risk management actions. The LCO 3.0.4.b risk assessments do not have to be documented.


3.0.2 (continued) The specified time limits of the ACTION requirements are applicable from the point in time it is identified that a Li miting Condition for Oper ation is not met.
SECTION NO.:           TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                     PAGE:
The time limits of the ACTION requirements are also applicable when a system or component is removed from service for surveillance testing or investigation of operational problems. Individual specifications may include a specified time limit for the completi on of a Surveillance Requirement when equipment is removed from service. In this case, the allowable outage time limits of the ACTION requirements are applicable when this limit expires if the surveillance has not been completed. When a shutdown is required to
3.0 & 4.0                 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                 LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                     9 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0     APPLICABILITY (continued)
comply with ACTION requirements, t he plant may have entered a MODE in which a new specification becomes applicable. In this case, the time limits of the ACTION requirements would apply from the point in time that the new specification becomes applicab le if the requirements of the Limiting Condition for Operation are not met.
BASES (continued) 3.0.4     (continued)
LCO 3.0.5 provides for an exception to LCO 3.0.2 for the limited purpose of performing required testing to demonstr ate either the OPERABILITY of equipment being returned to service or the OPERABILITY of other equipment. Refer to the LCO 3.0.5 discussion for use.
The Technical Specifications allow continued operation with equipment unavailable in MODE 1 for the duration of the completion time. Since this is allowable, and since in general the risk impact in that particular MODE bounds the risk of transitioning into and through the applicable MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability of the LCO, the use of the LCO 3.0.4.b allowance should be generally acceptable, as long as the risk is assessed and managed as stated above. However, there is a small subset of systems and components that have been determined to be more important to risk and use of the LCO 3.0.4.b allowance is prohibited. The LCOs governing these systems and components contain notes prohibiting the use of LCO 3.0.4.b by stating LCO 3.0.4.b is not applicable.
SECTION NO.:
LCO 3.0.4.c allows entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met based on a note in the Specification which states LCO 3.0.4.c is applicable. These specific allowances permit entry into MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability when the associated ACTIONS to be entered do not provide for continued operation for an unlimited period of time and a risk assessment has not been performed. This allowance may apply to all the ACTIONS or to a specific required Action of a Specification.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 5 of 17 REVISION NO.:
5  3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 3.0.3 This specification establishes the shut down ACTION requirem ents that must be implemented when a Limiting Condition fo r Operation is not met and the condition is not specifically address by the associated ACTION requirements.
The purpose of this specification is to delineate the time limits for placing the unit in a safe shutdown MODE when plant operation cannot be maintained
 
within the limits for safe operation defined by the Limiting Conditions for Operation and its ACTION r equirements. It is not intended to be used as an operational convenience which permits (routine) voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service in lieu of other alternatives that would not result in redundant systems or components being inoperable. One hour is allowed to prepare for an orderly shutdown before initiating a change in plant operation. This time permits the operator to coordinate the reduction in electrical generation with the load dispatcher to ensure the stability and availability of the electric al grid. The time limits specified to reach lower MODES of operation permit the shutdow n to proceed in a controlled and orderly manner that is well within t he specified maximum cooldown rate and within the cooldown capabilities of the facility assuming only the minimum required equipment is OPERABLE.
This reduces thermal stresses on components of the primary coolant system and the potential for a plant upset that could challenge safety systems under conditions for which this specification applies.
If remedial measures permitting limit ed continued operation of the facility under the provisions of the ACTION requirements are completed, the shutdown may be terminated. The time limits of the ACTION requirements are applicable from the point in time there was a failure to meet a Limiting Condition for Operation.
Therefore, the shutdown may be terminated if the ACTION requirements have been met or the time limits of the ACTION requirements have not expired, thus providing an allowance for the completion of the required actions.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 6 of 17 REVISION NO.:
5  3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued)
 
3.0.3 (continued)
The time limits of Specification 3.0.3 a llow 37 hours for the plant to be in the COLD SHUTDOWN MODE when a shutdown is required during the POWER MODE of operation. If the plant is in a lower MODE of operation when a shutdown is required, the time limit for reaching the next lower MODE of operation applies. However, if a lowe r MODE of operation is reached in less time than allowed, the total allowable time to reach COLD SHUTDOWN, or other applicable MODE, is not reduced. For example, if HOT STANDBY is reached in 2 hours, the time allowed to reach HOT SHUTDOWN is the next 11 hours because the total time to reach HOT SHUTDOWN is not reduced from the allowable limit of 13 hours. Therefore, if remedial measures are completed that would permit a return to POWER operation, a penalty is not incurred by having to reach a lower MODE of operation in less than the total time allowed.
The same principle applies with regard to the allowable outage time limits of the ACTION requirements, if compliance with the ACTION requirements for one specification results in entry into a MODE or condition of operation for another specification in which the require ments of the Limiting Condition for Operation are not met. If the new specification becomes applicable in less time than specified, the difference may be added to the allowable outage time
 
limits of the second specification. Ho wever, the allowable outage time limits of ACTION requirements for a higher MODE of operation may not be used to extend the allowable outage time that is applicable wh en a Limiting Condition for Operation is not met in a lower MODE of operation. The shutdown requirements of Specification 3.0.3 do not apply in MODES 5 and 6, because the ACTION requirements of individual specifications define the remedial measures to be taken.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 7 of 17 REVISION NO.:
5  3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 3.0.4 LCO 3.0.4 establishes limitations on changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability when an LCO is not met. It allows placing the unit in a MODE or other specified condition stated in that Applicability (e.g., the Applicability desired to be entered) when unit conditions are such that the
 
requirements of the LCO would not be me t, in accordance with LCO 3.0.4.a, LCO 3.0.4.b, or LCO 3.0.4.c.
LCO 3.0.4.a allows entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met when the associated ACTIONS to be entered permit continued operation in the MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability for an unlimited period of time. Compliance with required Actions that permit continued operati on of the unit for an unlimited period of time in a MODE or other specified condition prov ides an acceptable level of safety for continued operation. This is without regard to the stat us of the unit before or after the MODE change. Ther efore, in such cases, entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability may be made in accordance with the provisions of the required Actions.
 
LCO 3.0.4.b allows entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met a fter performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, considerat ion of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering the MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 8 of 17 REVISION NO.:
5   3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued) BASES (continued) 3.0.4 (continued)
The risk assessment may use quantitative, qualitative, or blended approaches, and the risk assessment will be conducted us ing the plant program, procedures, and criteria in place to implement 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4), which requires that risk impacts of maintenance activities to be assessed and managed. The risk assessment for the purposes of LCO 3.0.
4.b, must take into account all inoperable Technical Spec ification equipment regardless of whether the equipment is included in the normal 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4) risk assessment scope.
The risk assessments will be conducted using the procedures and guidance endorsed by Regulatory Guide 1.160, "Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants.
"  Regulatory Guide 1.160 endorses Revision 4A of NUMARC 93-01 dated Ap ril 2011, "Industry Guideline for Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenanc e at Nuclear Power Plants."  These documents address general guidance fo r conduct of the risk assessment, quantitative and qualitative guidelines for establishing risk management actions, and example risk management actions. T hese include actions to plan and conduct other activities in a manner that controls overall risk, increased risk awareness by shift and management personnel, actions to reduce the duration of the condition, actions to minimize the magnitude of risk increases (establishment of backup success paths or compensatory measures), and determination that the proposed MODE change is acceptable. Consideration should also be given to the probability of completing restoration such that t he requirements of the LCO would be met prior to the expiration of ACTIONS completion times that would
 
require exiting the Applicability. LCO 3.0.4.b may be used with single or multiple systems and components unavailable. NUMARC 93-01 provides guidance relative to consideration of
 
simultaneous unavailability of multiple systems and components.
The results of the risk assessment s hall be considered in determining the acceptability of entering the MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability, and any corresponding risk management actions. The LCO 3.0.4.b risk assessments do not have to be documented.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 9 of 17 REVISION NO.:
3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued) BASES (continued) 3.0.4 (continued) The Technical Specifications allo w continued operation with equipment unavailable in MODE 1 for t he duration of the completion time. Since this is allowable, and since in general the risk impact in that particular MODE bounds the risk of transitioning into and through the applicable MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability of the LC O, the use of the LCO 3.0.4.b allowance should be generally acceptable, as long as the risk is assessed and managed as stated above. However, ther e is a small subset of sys tems and components that have been determined to be more important to risk and use of the LCO 3.0.4.b allowance is prohibited. The LCOs governing these systems and components contain notes prohibiting the use of LCO 3.0.4.b by stating LCO 3.0.4.b is not applicable.
LCO 3.0.4.c allows entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met based on a note in the Specification which states LCO 3.0.4.c is applicable. These specific allowances permit entry into MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability when the associated ACTIONS to be entered do not provide for continued operation for an unlimited period of time and a risk assessment has not been performed. This allowance may apply to all the ACTIONS or to a specif ic required Action of a Specification.
The risk assessments performed to justify the use of LCO 3.0.4.b usually only consider systems and components. For this reason, LCO 3.0.4.c is typically applied to Specifications which describe values and parameters (e.g., Reactor Coolant System Specific Activity), and may be applied to other Specifications based on NRC plant-specific approval.
The risk assessments performed to justify the use of LCO 3.0.4.b usually only consider systems and components. For this reason, LCO 3.0.4.c is typically applied to Specifications which describe values and parameters (e.g., Reactor Coolant System Specific Activity), and may be applied to other Specifications based on NRC plant-specific approval.
The provisions of this Specification should not be interpreted as endorsing the failure to exercise the good practice of restoring systems or components to OPERABLE status before entering an associated MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability.  
The provisions of this Specification should not be interpreted as endorsing the failure to exercise the good practice of restoring systems or components to OPERABLE status before entering an associated MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability.
The provisions of LCO 3.0.4 shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS. In addition, the provisions of LCO 3.0.4 shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that result from any unit shutdown. In this context, a unit shutdown is defined as a change in MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability associated with transitioning from MODE 1 to MODE 2, MODE 2 to MODE 3, MODE 3 to MODE 4, and MODE 4 to MODE 5.


The provisions of LCO 3.0.4 shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicabili ty that are required to comply with ACTIONS. In addition, the provisions of LCO 3.0.4 shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that result from any unit shutdown. In this context, a unit shut down is defined as a change in MODE or other specified condition in the Applic ability associated with transitioning from MODE 1 to MODE 2, MODE 2 to MODE 3, MODE 3 to MODE 4, and MODE 4 to MODE 5.
SECTION NO.:           TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                       PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                  LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                       10 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 10 of 17 REVISION NO.:
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0     APPLICABILITY (continued)
3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued) BASES (continued) 3.0.4 (continued)
BASES (continued) 3.0.4     (continued)
Upon entry into a MODE or other specifi ed condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met, LCO 3.0.1 and LCO 3.0.2 require entry into the applicable Conditions and Required Acti ons until the Condition is re solved, until the LCO is met, or until the unit is not within the Applicability of the Tec hnical Specification. Surveillances do not have to be perform ed to be performed on the associated inoperable equipment (or on va riables outside the specified limits), as permitted by SR 4.0.4 Therefore, ut ilizing LCO 3.0.4 is not a viol ation of SR 4.0.1 or SR 4.0.4 for any Surveillances that have not been performed on inoperable equipment. However, SRs must be me t to ensure OPERABILITY prior to declaring the associated equipment OPERABLE (or variable within limits) and restoring compliance with the affected LCO.
Upon entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met, LCO 3.0.1 and LCO 3.0.2 require entry into the applicable Conditions and Required Actions until the Condition is resolved, until the LCO is met, or until the unit is not within the Applicability of the Technical Specification.
3.0.5 LCO 3.0.5 establishes the allowance fo r restoring equipment to service under administrative controls when it has been removed from service or declared inoperable to comply with ACTIONS. The sole purpose of this Specification is to provide an exception to LCO 3.0.2 (e.g. to not comply with the applicable Required Action(s)) to allo w the performance of requir ed testing to demonstrate either: 1. The OPERABILITY of the equipment being returned to service or, 2. The OPERABILITY of other equipment. The administrative controls ensure the time the equipment is returned to service in conflict with the requirem ents of the ACTIONS is limited to the time absolutely necessary to perform the required test ing to demonstrate OPERABILITY. This Specification does not provide time to per form any other preventive or corrective maintenance. LCO 3.0 .5 specifically st ates that equipment removed from service or declared inoperable to comply with ACTION(s) may be returned to service under administrative control solely to perfo rm testing required to demonstrate the OPERABILITY of the equipment or that of other equipm ent. LCO 3.0.5 is limited to plant conditions where simultaneous te sting and compliance with the required ACTION(s) is not possible. Hence LCO 3.
Surveillances do not have to be performed to be performed on the associated inoperable equipment (or on variables outside the specified limits), as permitted by SR 4.0.4 Therefore, utilizing LCO 3.0.4 is not a violation of SR 4.0.1 or SR 4.0.4 for any Surveillances that have not been performed on inoperable equipment. However, SRs must be met to ensure OPERABILITY prior to declaring the associated equipment OPERABLE (or variable within limits) and restoring compliance with the affected LCO.
0.5 may only be used if it is the only alternative to performing the required te sting, regardless of whether the other alternatives present higher risk to the plant.
3.0.5     LCO 3.0.5 establishes the allowance for restoring equipment to service under administrative controls when it has been removed from service or declared inoperable to comply with ACTIONS. The sole purpose of this Specification is to provide an exception to LCO 3.0.2 (e.g. to not comply with the applicable Required Action(s)) to allow the performance of required testing to demonstrate either:
: 1.     The OPERABILITY of the equipment being returned to service or,
: 2.     The OPERABILITY of other equipment.
The administrative controls ensure the time the equipment is returned to service in conflict with the requirements of the ACTIONS is limited to the time absolutely necessary to perform the required testing to demonstrate OPERABILITY. This Specification does not provide time to perform any other preventive or corrective maintenance.
LCO 3.0 .5 specifically states that equipment removed from service or declared inoperable to comply with ACTION(s) may be returned to service under administrative control solely to perform testing required to demonstrate the OPERABILITY of the equipment or that of other equipment. LCO 3.0.5 is limited to plant conditions where simultaneous testing and compliance with the required ACTION(s) is not possible. Hence LCO 3.0.5 may only be used if it is the only alternative to performing the required testing, regardless of whether the other alternatives present higher risk to the plant.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:           TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                     PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 11 of 17 REVISION NO.:
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                  LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                     11 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued) BASES (continued) 3.0.5 (continued) An example of demonstrating the OPERABILITY of equipment being returned to service is reopening a containment is olation valve that has been closed to comply with required ACTION(s) and must be reopened to perform the required testing. An example of demonstrating the OPERABILITY of other equipment is taking an inoperable channel or trip syst em out of the tripped condit ion to prevent the trip function from occurring during the per formance of required testing on another channel in the other trip system A si milar example of demonstrating the OPERABILITY of other equipment is taki ng an inoperable channel or trip system out of the tripped condition to permit the logic to function and indicate the appropriate response during the perform ance of required testing on another channel in the same trip system.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0     APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 3.0.5     (continued)
An example of demonstrating the OPERABILITY of equipment being returned to service is reopening a containment isolation valve that has been closed to comply with required ACTION(s) and must be reopened to perform the required testing.
An example of demonstrating the OPERABILITY of other equipment is taking an inoperable channel or trip system out of the tripped condition to prevent the trip function from occurring during the performance of required testing on another channel in the other trip system A similar example of demonstrating the OPERABILITY of other equipment is taking an inoperable channel or trip system out of the tripped condition to permit the logic to function and indicate the appropriate response during the performance of required testing on another channel in the same trip system.


==References:==
==References:==
: 1. NUREG 1432, Standard Technical Specifications - Combustion Engineering Plants, Revision 4, Volume 2, Bases (ML12102A169)
: 1.     NUREG 1432, Standard Technical Specifications - Combustion Engineering Plants, Revision 4, Volume 2, Bases (ML12102A169)
: 2. Enclosure 10: Case Study 6: AN O 1 Use of LCO 3.0.5 Meeting Summary of the January 27  
: 2.     Enclosure 10: Case Study 6: ANO 1 Use of LCO 3.0.5 Meeting Summary of the January 27 & 28 Meeting with NRC/TSTF (ML090640444)
& 28 Meeting with NRC/TSTF (ML090640444)
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 12 of 17 REVISION NO.:
5  3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 4.0.1 SR 4.0.1 establishes the requirement that Surveillance Requirements (SR) must be met during the MODES or other specified conditions in the applicability for which the requirements of the Limi ting Condition for Operation apply, unless otherwise specified in the individual SRs. This Specification is to ensure that SRs are performed to verify the OPERABILITY of systems and components, and that variables are within specified lim its. Failure to meet a SR within the specified frequency, in accordance with SR 4.
0.2, constitutes a failure to meet a Limiting Condition for Operation (except as allowed by SR 4.0.3). Surveillances may be performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total steps provided the entire Surveillanc e is performed within the specified Frequency. Additionally, the definitions related to instrument testing (e.g., CHANNEL CALIBRATION) specify that these tests are performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total steps.
Systems and components are assum ed to be OPERABLE when the associated SRs have been met. Nothing in this Specification, however, is to be construed as implying that system s or components are OPERABLE when either:  a. the systems or components are known to be inoperable, although still meeti ng the SRs, or
: b. the requirements of the SR(s) are known to be not met between required SR performances.
SRs do not have to be performed when t he unit is in a MODE or other specified condition for which the requirements of the associated Limiting Condition for Operation are not applicable, unless otherwise specified. The SRs associated with a SPECIAL T EST EXCEPTION (STE) are only applicable when the STE is used as an allowable exception to the requirements of a Specification.
Unplanned events may satisfy the requirements (including applicable acceptance criteria) for a given SR. In this case, the unplanned event may be credited as fulfilling the performance of the SR. This allowance includes those SRs whose performance is normally prec luded in a given MODE or other specified condition. SRs, including SRs invoked by Requi red Actions, do not have to be performed on inoperable equipment because the ACTIONS define the remedial measures that apply. SR s have to be met and performed in accordance with SR 4.0.2, prior to retu rning equipment to OPERABLE status.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:           TITLE:       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                   PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 13 of 17 REVISION NO.:
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                     12 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
5  3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0    APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued)  
BASES (continued) 4.0.1    SR 4.0.1 establishes the requirement that Surveillance Requirements (SR) must be met during the MODES or other specified conditions in the applicability for which the requirements of the Limiting Condition for Operation apply, unless otherwise specified in the individual SRs. This Specification is to ensure that SRs are performed to verify the OPERABILITY of systems and components, and that variables are within specified limits. Failure to meet a SR within the specified frequency, in accordance with SR 4.0.2, constitutes a failure to meet a Limiting Condition for Operation (except as allowed by SR 4.0.3). Surveillances may be performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total steps provided the entire Surveillance is performed within the specified Frequency. Additionally, the definitions related to instrument testing (e.g., CHANNEL CALIBRATION) specify that these tests are performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total steps.
Systems and components are assumed to be OPERABLE when the associated SRs have been met. Nothing in this Specification, however, is to be construed as implying that systems or components are OPERABLE when either:
: a.       the systems or components are known to be inoperable, although still meeting the SRs, or
: b.      the requirements of the SR(s) are known to be not met between required SR performances.
SRs do not have to be performed when the unit is in a MODE or other specified condition for which the requirements of the associated Limiting Condition for Operation are not applicable, unless otherwise specified. The SRs associated with a SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTION (STE) are only applicable when the STE is used as an allowable exception to the requirements of a Specification.
Unplanned events may satisfy the requirements (including applicable acceptance criteria) for a given SR. In this case, the unplanned event may be credited as fulfilling the performance of the SR. This allowance includes those SRs whose performance is normally precluded in a given MODE or other specified condition.
SRs, including SRs invoked by Required Actions, do not have to be performed on inoperable equipment because the ACTIONS define the remedial measures that apply. SRs have to be met and performed in accordance with SR 4.0.2, prior to returning equipment to OPERABLE status.


4.0.1 (continued) Upon completion of maintenance, appropr iate post maintenance testing is required to declare equipment OPERABLE. This includes ensuring applicable SRs are not failed and their most rec ent performance is in accordance with SR 4.0.2. Post maintenance testing ma y not be possible in the current MODE or other specified conditions in the applicability due to the necessary unit parameters not having been es tablished. In these si tuations, the equipment may be considered OPERABLE provided testing has been satisfactorily completed to the extent possible and the equipment is not otherwise believed to be incapable of performing its function.
SECTION NO.:          TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                      PAGE:
This will allow operation to proceed to a MODE or other specified co ndition where other necessary post maintenance tests can be completed.
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                      13 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0    APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 4.0.1     (continued)
Upon completion of maintenance, appropriate post maintenance testing is required to declare equipment OPERABLE. This includes ensuring applicable SRs are not failed and their most recent performance is in accordance with SR 4.0.2. Post maintenance testing may not be possible in the current MODE or other specified conditions in the applicability due to the necessary unit parameters not having been established. In these situations, the equipment may be considered OPERABLE provided testing has been satisfactorily completed to the extent possible and the equipment is not otherwise believed to be incapable of performing its function. This will allow operation to proceed to a MODE or other specified condition where other necessary post maintenance tests can be completed.
Some examples of this process follow.
Some examples of this process follow.
: a. Auxiliary feedwater (AFW) pum p turbine maintenance during refueling that requires testing at steam pressures > 800 psi. However, if other appropriate testing is satisfactorily completed, the AFW System can be considered OPERABLE. This allows startup and other necessary testing to proceed  
: a.       Auxiliary feedwater (AFW) pump turbine maintenance during refueling that requires testing at steam pressures > 800 psi.
However, if other appropriate testing is satisfactorily completed, the AFW System can be considered OPERABLE.
This allows startup and other necessary testing to proceed until the plant reaches the steam pressure required to perform the testing.
: b.      High pressure safety injection (HPSI) maintenance during shutdown that requires system functional tests at a specified pressure. Provided other appropriate testing is satisfactorily completed, startup can proceed with HPSI considered OPERABLE. This allows operation to reach the specified pressure to complete the necessary post maintenance testing.


until the plant reaches the steam pressure required to perform the testing.
SECTION NO.:            TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                      PAGE:
: b. High pressure safety injection (HPSI) maintenance during shutdown that requires system functional tests at a specified
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                  LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                      14 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0    APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 4.0.2    This specification establishes the limit for which the specified time interval for Surveillance Requirements may be extended. It permits an allowable extension of the normal surveillance interval to facilitate surveillance scheduling and consideration of plant operating conditions that may not be suitable for conducting the surveillance; e.g., transient conditions or other ongoing surveillance or maintenance activities. It also provides flexibility to accommodate the length of a fuel cycle for surveillances that are performed at each refueling outage and are specified within an 18-month surveillance interval. It is not intended that this provision be used repeatedly as a convenience to extend the surveillance intervals beyond that specified for surveillances that are not performed during refueling outages. The limitation of Specification 4.0.2 is based on engineering judgment and the recognition that most probable result of any particular surveillance being performed is the verification of conformance with the Surveillance Requirements. This provision is sufficient to ensure that the reliability ensured through surveillance activities is not significantly degraded beyond that obtained from the specified surveillance interval.
4.0.3    SR 4.0.3 establishes the flexibility to defer declaring affected equipment inoperable or an affected variable outside the specified limits when a SR has not been completed within the specified frequency. A delay period of up to 24 hours or up to the limit of the specified frequency, whichever is greater, applies from the point in time that it is discovered that the SR has not been performed in accordance with SR 4.0.2, and not at the time that the specified frequency was not met.
This delay period provides adequate time to complete SRs that have been missed. This delay period permits the completion of a SRs requirement before complying with required ACTION(s) or other remedial measures that might preclude completion of the SR.
The basis for this delay period includes consideration of unit conditions, adequate planning, availability of personnel, the time required to perform the SR, the safety significance of the delay in completing the required SR, and the recognition that the most probable result of any particular SR being performed is the verification of conformance with the requirements.


pressure. Provided other appropriate testing is satisfactorily completed, startup can pr oceed with HPSI considered OPERABLE. This allows operation to reach the specified
SECTION NO.:            TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                    PAGE:
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                  LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                      15 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0    APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 4.0.3    (continued)
When a SR with a frequency based not on time intervals, but upon specified unit conditions, operating situations, or requirements of regulations (e.g., prior to entering MODE 1 after each fuel loading, or in accordance with 10 CFR 50, Appendix J, as modified by approved exemptions, etc.) is discovered to not have been performed when specified, SR 4.0.3 allows for the full delay period of up to the specified frequency to perform the SR. However, since there is not a time interval specified, the missed SR should be performed at the first reasonable opportunity.
SR 4.0.3 provides a time limit for, and allowances for the performance of, a SR that becomes applicable as a consequence of MODE changes imposed by required ACTION(s).
Failure to comply with the specified frequency for a SR is expected to be an infrequent occurrence. Use of the delay period established by SR 4.0.3 is a flexibility which is not intended to be used as an operational convenience to extend surveillance intervals. While up to 24 hours or the limit of the specified frequency is provided to perform the missed surveillance, it is expected that the missed SR will be performed at the first reasonable opportunity. The determination of the first reasonable opportunity should include consideration of the impact on plant risk (from delaying the surveillance as well as any plant configuration changes required or shutting the plant down to perform the SR) and impact on any analysis assumptions, in addition to unit conditions, planning, availability of personnel, and the time required to perform the SR. This risk impact should be managed through the program in place to implement 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4) and its implementation guidance, NRC Regulatory Guide 1.160, Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants. This Regulatory Guide addresses consideration of temporary and aggregate risk impacts, determination of risk management action thresholds, and risk management action up to and including plant shutdown. The missed surveillance should be treated as an emergent condition as discussed in the Regulatory Guide. The risk evaluation may use quantitative, qualitative, or blended methods. The degree of depth and rigor of the evaluation should be commensurate with the importance of the component. Missed SRs for important components should be analyzed quantitatively. If the results of the risk evaluation determine the risk increase is significant, this evaluation should be used to determine the course of action. All cases of a missed SR will be placed in the licensee's Corrective Action Program.


pressure to complete the nece ssary post maintenance testing.  
SECTION NO.:          TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                      PAGE:
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                      16 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0    APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 4.0.3    (continued)
If a SR is not completed within the allowed delay period, then the equipment is considered inoperable or the variable is considered outside the specified limits and the completion times of the required ACTION(s) for the applicable Limiting Condition for Operation begin immediately upon expiration of the delay period. If a surveillance is failed within the delay period, then the equipment is inoperable, or the variable is outside the specified limits and the completion times of the required ACTION(s) for the applicable Limiting Condition for Operation begin immediately upon the failure of the surveillance.
Completion of the SR within the delay period allowed by this specification, or within the completion time of the ACTIONS, restores compliance with SR 4.0.1.
4.0.4    SR 4.0.4 establishes the requirement that all applicable SRs must be met before entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability.
This Specification ensures that system and component OPERABILITY requirements and variable limits are met before entry into MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability for which these systems and components ensure safe operation of the unit. The provisions of this Specification should not be interpreted as endorsing the failure to exercise the good practice of restoring systems or components to OPERABLE status before entering an associated MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability.
A provision is included to allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability when an LCO is not met due to Surveillance not being met in accordance with LCO 3.0.4.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:           TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS                     PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 14 of 17 REVISION NO.:
3.0 & 4.0                BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.:                LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION                     17 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5
3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0     APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 4.0.2 This specification establishes the limit for which the specified time interval for Surveillance Requirements may be extended. It permits an allowable extension of the normal surveillance interval to facilitate surveillance scheduling and consideration of plant operating condi tions that may not be suitable for conducting the surveillance; e.g., trans ient conditions or other ongoing surveillance or maintenance activities.
BASES (continued) 4.0.4    (continued)
It also provides flexibility to accommodate the length of a fuel cycle for surveillances that are performed at each refueling outage and ar e specified within an 18-month surveillance interval. It is not intended that this provision be used repeatedly as a convenience to extend the surveillanc e intervals beyond that specified for surveillances that are not performed during refueling outages. The limitation of Specification 4.0.2 is ba sed on engineering judgment and the recognition that most probable result of any particula r surveillance being performed is the verification of conformance with the Surv eillance Requirements. This provision is sufficient to ensure that the reliability ensured through surveillance activities is not significantly degraded beyond t hat obtained from the specified surveillance interval.
However, in certain circumstances, failing to meet an SR will not result in SR 4.0.4 restricting a MODE change or other specified condition change. When a system, subsystem, division, component, device, or variable is inoperable or outside its specified limits, the associated SR(s) are not required to be performed, per SR 4.0.1, which states that surveillances do not have to be performed on inoperable equipment. When equipment is inoperable, SR 4.0.4 does not apply to the associated SR(s) since the requirement for the SR(s) to be performed is removed. Therefore, failing to perform the Surveillance(s) within the specified frequency does not result in an SR 4.0.4 restriction to changing MODES or other specified conditions of the Applicability. However, since the LCO is not met in this instance, LCO 3.0.4 will govern any restrictions that may (or may not) apply to MODE or other specified condition changes. SR 4.0.4 does not restrict changing MODES or other specified conditions of the Applicability when a Surveillance has not been performed within the specified frequency, provided the requirement to declare the LCO not met has been delayed in accordance with SR 4.0.3.
4.0.3 SR 4.0.3 establishes the flexibility to defer declaring affected equipment inoperable or an affected variable outside the specified limits when a SR has not been completed within the specified frequency. A delay period of up to 24 hours or up to the limit of the specified frequency, whichever is greater, applies from the point in time that it is di scovered that the SR has not been performed in accordance with SR 4.0.2, and not at the time that the specified frequency was not met. This delay period provides adequate ti me to complete SRs that have been missed. This delay period permits the completion of a SRs requirement before complying with required ACTION(s) or other remedial measures that might preclude completion of the SR. The basis for this delay period includes consideration of unit conditions, adequate planning, availability of personnel, the time required to perform the SR, the safety significance of the delay in completing the required SR, and the recognition that the most probabl e result of any particular SR being performed is the verification of c onformance with the requirements.
The provisions of SR 4.0.4 shall not prevent entry into MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS. In addition, the provisions of SR 4.0.4 shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that result from any unit shutdown. In this context, a unit shutdown is defined as a change in MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability associated with transitioning from MODE 1 to MODE 2, MODE 2 to MODE 3, MODE 3 to MODE 4, and MODE 4 to MODE 5.
4.0.5    This specification ensures that inservice inspection of ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 components will be performed in accordance with a periodically updated version of Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and Addenda as required by 10 CFR 50.55a. Relief from any of the above requirements has been provided in writing by the Commission and is not part of these Technical Specifications.


SECTION NO.:
Section No.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 15 of 17 REVISION NO.:
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                     3/4.1 Attachment No.
3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3
BASES (continued)
BASES ATTACHMENT 3 Current Revision No.
 
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                               8 Title:
4.0.3 (continued)
REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  
When a SR with a frequency based not on time intervals, but upon specified unit conditions, operating situat ions, or requirements of regulations (e.g., prior to entering MODE 1 after each fuel loading, or in accordance with 10 CFR 50, Appendix J, as modified by approved exem ptions, etc.) is discovered to not have been performed when specified, SR 4.0.3 allows for the full delay period of up to the specified frequency to perform the SR. However, since there is not a time interval specified, the mi ssed SR should be performed at the first reasonable opportunity.
SR 4.0.3 provides a time limit for, and allowances for the performance of, a SR that becomes applicable as a consequence of MODE changes imposed by required ACTION(s).
 
Failure to comply with the specified fr equency for a SR is expected to be an infrequent occurrence. Use of the delay period established by SR 4.0.3 is a flexibility which is not intended to be used as an operational convenience to extend surveillance intervals. While up to 24 hours or the limit of the specified frequency is provided to perform the missed surveillance, it is expected that the missed SR will be performed at the first reasonable opportunity. The determination of the first reasonable opportunity should include consideration of the impact on plant risk (from delaying the surveillance as well as any plant conf iguration changes required or shutting the plant down to perform the SR) and impact on any analysis assumptions, in addition to unit conditions, planning, availability of personnel, and the time required to perform the SR. This risk impact should be managed through the program in place to im plement 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4) and its implementation guidance, NRC Regulatory Guide 1.160, Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants. This Regulatory Guide addresses consideration of temporary and aggregate risk impacts, determination of risk
 
management action thresholds, and risk management action up to and including plant shutdown. The missed surveillance should be treated as an emergent condition as discussed in the Regulatory Guide. The risk evaluation may use quantitat ive, qualitative, or bl ended methods. The degree of depth and rigor of t he evaluation should be commensurate with the importance of the component. Missed SRs for important components should be analyzed quantitatively. If the results of the risk evaluation determine the risk increase is significant, this evaluation should be used to determine the
 
course of action. All cases of a missed SR will be placed in the licensee's Corrective Action Program.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 16 of 17 REVISION NO.:
5  3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued)
 
4.0.3 (continued)
If a SR is not completed within the a llowed delay period, then the equipment is considered inoperable or the variable is considered outside the specified limits and the completion times of the required ACTION(s) for the applicable Limiting Condition for Operation begin immediately upon expiration of the delay period. If a surveillance is fa iled within the delay period, then the equipment is inoperable, or the variable is outside the specified limits and the completion times of the required ACT ION(s) for the applicable Limiting Condition for Operation begin imm ediately upon the failure of the surveillance.
Completion of the SR within the delay period allowed by this specification, or within the completion time of the ACT IONS, restores compliance with SR 4.0.1. 4.0.4 SR 4.0.4 establishes the requirement that all applicable SRs must be met before entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability. This Specification ensures that system and component OPERABILITY requirements and variable limits are me t before entry into MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability for which these systems and components ensure safe operation of the unit. The provisions of this Specification should not be interpreted as endorsing the failure to exercise the good practice of restoring systems or components to OPERABLE status before entering an associated MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability.
A provision is included to allow entry in to a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability when an LCO is not met due to Surveillance not being met in accordance with LCO 3.0.4.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 LIMITING CONDITION S FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3.0 & 4.0 17 of 17 REVISION NO.:
5  3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)
BASES (continued) 4.0.4 (continued) However, in certain circumstances, failing to meet an SR will not result in SR 4.0.4 restricting a MODE change or other specified condition change. When a system, subsystem, division, component, device, or variable is inoperable or outside its specified limit s, the associated SR(s) are not required to be performed, per SR 4.0.1, which states that surveillances do not have to be performed on inoperable equipment. W hen equipment is inoperable, SR 4.0.4 does not apply to the associated SR(s) si nce the requirement for the SR(s) to be performed is removed. Therefore, failing to perform the Surveillance(s) within the specified frequency does not re sult in an SR 4.0.4 restriction to changing MODES or other specified conditions of the Applicability. However, since the LCO is not met in this instance, LCO 3.0.4 will govern any restrictions that may (or may not) apply to MODE or other specified condition changes. SR 4.0.4 does not restrict c hanging MODES or other spec ified conditions of the Applicability when a Surveillance has not been performed within the specified frequency, provided the requi rement to declare the LCO not met has been delayed in accordance with SR 4.0.3.
The provisions of SR 4.0.4 shall not prevent entry into MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicabili ty that are required to comply with ACTIONS. In addition, the provisions of SR 4.0.4 shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicabilit y that result from any unit shutdown. In this context, a uni t shutdown is defined as a change in MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability associated with transitioning from MODE 1 to MODE 2, MODE 2 to MODE 3, MODE 3 to MODE 4, and MODE 4 to MODE 5.
4.0.5 This specification ensures that inse rvice inspection of ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 components will be performed in accordance with a periodically updated version of Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and Addenda as required by 10 CFR 50.55a. Relief from any of the above requirements has been provided in writing by the Commission and is not part of these Technical Specifications.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
3/4.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
3 Current Revision No.
8 SAFETY RELATED Title: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS Responsible Department:
Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 8 - Incorporated PCR 2157116 based on NRC approval of the EOC MTC test elimination. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 8 - Incorporated PCR 2157116 based on NRC approval of the EOC MTC test elimination. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency c ontrol Program. (Aut hor: K. Frehafer)  
Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)
 
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1998896 to reflect changes to the MTC surveillance testing.
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1998896 to reflect changes to the MTC surveillance testing. (Author: N. Elmore)
(Author: N. Elmore)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU cond itions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
 
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 597926 to clarify actions to be taken with misaligned CEAs.
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 597926 to clarify acti ons to be taken with misaligned CEAs. (Author: K. Frehafer)
(Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 06-1727 for PCM 05197, CR 2006-15180 to update reactivity controls and RCS bases, and make correcti ons per CR. (Ken Frehafer, 05/25/06)  
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 06-1727 for PCM 05197, CR 2006-15180 to update reactivity controls and RCS bases, and make corrections per CR. (Ken Frehafer, 05/25/06)
 
Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 04-3132 to implement amendments 194/136. (K. W. Frehafer, 11/24/04)
Revision 2
Revision 1 - Changes made to reflect TS Amendment #122. (K.W. Frehafer, 11/30/01)
- Incorporated PCR 04-3132 to implement amendments 194/136. (K. W. Frehafer, 11/24/04)
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
Revision 1 - Changes made to reflect TS Amendm ent #122. (K.W. Fr ehafer, 11/30/01)
Revision           Approved By             Approval Date     UNIT #         UNIT 2 DATE 0                 R.G. West                 08/30/01       DOCT         PROCEDURE DOCN         Section 3/4.1 SYS 8                 R. Coffey                 01/14/16       STATUS       COMPLETED REV                 8
Revision 0
                                                                    # OF PGS
- Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01) Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2       DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE       DOCN Section 3/4.1 SYS   8 R. Coffey 01/14/16 STATUS COMPLETED REV 8       # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.1 2 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  TABLE OF CONTENTS  SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.1 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................................. 3
 
BASES  ........................................................................................ 3
 
3/4.1.1 BORAT ION CONTROL ................................................... 3
 
3/4.1.1.1 and 3/4.1.1.2    SHUTDOWN MARGIN ............ 3
 
3/4.1.1.3 BORA TION DILUTION ................................. 3
 
3/4.1.1.4 MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT ............................................. 4
 
3/4.1.1.5 MINI MUM TEMPERATURE FOR CRITICALITY ............................................... 5
 
3/4.1.2 BORA TION SYSTEMS ................................................... 6


3/4.1.3 MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES  
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
............................. 8  
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1            BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04                                                    2 of 10 REVISION NO.:                REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.1 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................................. 3 BASES      ........................................................................................ 3 3/4.1.1    BORATION CONTROL ................................................... 3 3/4.1.1.1 and 3/4.1.1.2                SHUTDOWN MARGIN ............ 3 3/4.1.1.3        BORATION DILUTION ................................. 3 3/4.1.1.4        MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT ............................................. 4 3/4.1.1.5        MINIMUM TEMPERATURE FOR CRITICALITY ............................................... 5 3/4.1.2    BORATION SYSTEMS ................................................... 6 3/4.1.3   MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES............................. 8


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.1 3 of 10 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1                BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04                         3 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.1 3/4.1         REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.1.1       BORATION CONTROL 3/4.1.1.1 and 3/4.1.1.2 SHUTDOWN MARGIN A sufficient SHUTDOWN MARGIN ensures that 1) the reactor can be made subcritical from all operating conditions, 2) the reactivity transients associated with postulated accident conditions are controllable within acceptable limits, and 3) the reactor will be maintained sufficiently subcritical to preclude inadvertent criticality in the shutdown condition.
BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.1 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.1.1 BORATION CONTROL 3/4.1.1.1 and 3/4.1.1.2 SHUTDOWN MARGIN A sufficient SHUTDOWN MARGIN ensures that 1) the reactor can be made subcritical from all operating conditions, 2) the reactivity tran sients associated with postulated accident conditions are c ontrollable within a cceptable limits, and 3) the reactor will be maintained sufficiently subcritical to preclude inadvertent criticality in the shutdown condition. SHUTDOWN MARGIN requirements vary th roughout core life as a function of fuel depletion, RCS boron concentration, and RCS T avg. The most restrictive condition occurs at EOL, with Tavg at no load operating temperature, and is associated with a postulated steam line break accident and resulting uncontrolled RCS cooldown. In the analysis of this accident, a minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN as specified in the COLR for Specification 3.1.1.1 is required to control the reactivity tr ansient. Accordingly, the SHUTDOWN MARGIN requirement is based upon this limiting condition and is consistent with FSAR safety analysis assumptions.
SHUTDOWN MARGIN requirements vary throughout core life as a function of fuel depletion, RCS boron concentration, and RCS Tavg. The most restrictive condition occurs at EOL, with Tavg at no load operating temperature, and is associated with a postulated steam line break accident and resulting uncontrolled RCS cooldown. In the analysis of this accident, a minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN as specified in the COLR for Specification 3.1.1.1 is required to control the reactivity transient. Accordingly, the SHUTDOWN MARGIN requirement is based upon this limiting condition and is consistent with FSAR safety analysis assumptions. At earlier times in core life, the minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN required for the most restrictive conditions is less than that at EOL. With Tavg less than or equal to 200F, the reactivity transients resulting from any postulated accident are minimal and a SHUTDOWN MARGIN as specified in the COLR for Specification 3.1.1.2 provides adequate protection.
At earlier times in core life, the minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN required for the most restrictive conditions is less than that at EOL. With T avg less than or equal to 200 F, the reactivity transients resulting from any postulated accident are minimal and a SHUTDOWN MARGIN as specified in the COLR for Specification 3.1.1.2 provides adequate protection. 3/4.1.1.3 BORATION DILUTION A minimum flow rate of at least 3000 gpm provides adequate mixing, prevents stratification and ensures that reactivity changes will be gradual during boron concentration reductions in the Reactor C oolant System. A flow rate of at least 3000 gpm will circulate an equivalent Reactor Coolant System volume of 10,931 cubic feet in approximately 26 mi nutes. The reactivity change rate associated with boron concentration reduc tions will therefore be within the capability of operator re cognition and control.  
3/4.1.1.3     BORATION DILUTION A minimum flow rate of at least 3000 gpm provides adequate mixing, prevents stratification and ensures that reactivity changes will be gradual during boron concentration reductions in the Reactor Coolant System. A flow rate of at least 3000 gpm will circulate an equivalent Reactor Coolant System volume of 10,931 cubic feet in approximately 26 minutes. The reactivity change rate associated with boron concentration reductions will therefore be within the capability of operator recognition and control.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.1 4 of 10 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1                BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04                       4 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1         REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.1       BORATION CONTROL (continued) 3/4.1.1.4     MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT The limitations on moderator temperature coefficient (MTC) are provided to ensure that the assumptions used in the accident and transient analysis remain valid through each fuel cycle. The surveillance requirements for measurement of the MTC during each fuel cycle are adequate to confirm the MTC value since this coefficient changes slowly due principally to the reduction in RCS boron concentration associated with fuel burnup. The confirmation that the measured MTC value is within its limit provides assurances that the coefficient will be maintained within acceptable values throughout each fuel cycle.
BASES (continued)  
For fuel cycles that meet the applicability requirements in WCAP-16011-P-A Rev. 0, Startup Test Activity Reduction Program, (STAR) and specifically, the acceptance criteria to substitute the measured value of MTC at hot zero power (HZP) with an alternate MTC value, SR 4.1.1.4.1 may be met prior to entering MODE 1 after each fuel loading by confirmation that the predicted MTC, when adjusted for the measured RCS boron concentration, is within the most positive (least negative) MTC limit specified in the LCO. If the adjusted predicted MTC value is used to meet the SR prior to entering MODE 1, a confirmation by measurement that MTC is within the upper MTC limit must be performed in MODE 1 within 7 Effective Full Power Days (EFPD) after reaching 40 EFPD of core burnup. The applicability requirements in WCAP-16011-P-A ensure core designs are not significantly different from those used to benchmark predictions and require that the measured RCS boron concentration meets specific test criteria. This provides assurance that the MTC obtained from the adjusted predicted MTC is accurate.
 
For fuel cycles that do not meet the applicability requirements in WCAP-16011-P-A, the verification of MTC required prior to entering Mode 1 after each fuel cycle loading is performed by calculation of the MTC based on measurement of the isothermal temperature coefficient. In this case, measurement of MTC within 7 EFPD after reaching 40 EFPD of core burnup is not required.
3/4.1.1 BORATION CONTROL (continued) 3/4.1.1.4 MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT The limitations on moderator temperature coefficient (MTC) are provided to  
 
ensure that the assumptions used in the accident and transient analysis remain valid through each fuel cycle.
The surveillance requirements for  
 
measurement of the MTC during each fuel cycle are adequate to confirm the MTC value since this coefficient changes slowly due principally to the reduction in RCS boron concentration associated with fuel burnup. The  
 
confirmation that the measured MTC value is within its limit provides assurances that the coefficient will be maintained within acceptable values throughout each fuel cycle. For fuel cycles that meet the applicability requirements in WCAP-16011-P-A Rev. 0, "
Startup Test Activity Reduction Program," (STAR) and specifically, the acceptanc e criteria to substitute the measured value of MTC at hot zero power (HZP) with an alternate MTC value, SR 4.1.1.4.1 may be met prior to entering MODE 1 after each fuel loading by confirmation that the predicted MTC, when adjusted for the measured RCS boron concentration, is within the most positive (least negative) MTC limit specified in the LCO. If the adjusted predicted MTC value is used to meet the SR prior to entering MODE 1, a confirmation by measurement  
 
that MTC is within the upper MTC lim it must be performed in MODE 1 within 7 Effective Full Power Days (EFP D) after reaching 40 EFPD of core burnup. The applicability requirements in WCAP-16011-P-A ensure core designs are not significantly differ ent from those used to benchmark predictions and require that the measured RCS boron concentration meets specific test criteria. This provides assurance that the MTC obtained from the adjusted predicted MTC is accurate.
For fuel cycles that do not meet the applicability requi rements in WCAP-16011-P-A, the verification of MTC requi red prior to entering Mode 1 after each fuel cycle loading is performed by calculation of the MTC based on measurement of the isot hermal temperature coefficient. In this case, measurement of MTC within 7 EFPD a fter reaching 40 EFPD of core burnup is not required.
The requirements for MTC measurement prior to operation > 5% and/or within 7 EFPDs of reaching 40 EFPD core burnup satisfy the confirmatory check on the most positive (least negative) MTC value.
The requirements for MTC measurement prior to operation > 5% and/or within 7 EFPDs of reaching 40 EFPD core burnup satisfy the confirmatory check on the most positive (least negative) MTC value.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.1 5 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued)


3/4.1.1 BORATION CONTROL (continued) 3/4.1.1.4 MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (continued)
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SR 4.1.1.4.2 is modified by a Note, whic h indicates that if the extrapolated MTC is more negative than the lower limit specified in the COLR, the Surveillance may be repeated, and the shutdown must occur prior to  
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1                BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04                        5 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1        REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.1       BORATION CONTROL (continued) 3/4.1.1.4     MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (continued)
SR 4.1.1.4.2 is modified by a Note, which indicates that if the extrapolated MTC is more negative than the lower limit specified in the COLR, the Surveillance may be repeated, and the shutdown must occur prior to exceeding the minimum allowable boron concentration at which MTC is projected to exceed the lower limit. An evaluation to determine this minimum boron concentration is necessary to ensure the MTC limit used in the safety analyses is not violated.
The requirement for measurement, within 7 EFPD of reaching 2/3 core burnup, satisfies the confirmatory check of the most negative MTC value.
The measurement is performed at any THERMAL POWER, so that the projected EOC MTC may be evaluated before the reactor actually reaches the EOC condition. MTC values may be extrapolated and compensated to permit direct comparison to the MTC limits specified in the COLR.
SR 4.1.1.4.2 is only required if the MTC determined in SR 4.1.1.4.1 is not within +/-1.6 pcm/°F of the corresponding design value when the difference cannot be reconciled. Analysis has shown that if the results of the beginning of cycle moderator temperature coefficient verification fall within
              +/-1.6 pcm/°F of the corresponding design values, then it can be assumed that the end of cycle coefficient will also agree with the design value within
              +/-1.6 pcm/°F and the measurement at EOC is not required.
3/4.1.1.5    MINIMUM TEMPERATURE FOR CRITICALITY This specification ensures that the reactor will not be made critical with the Reactor Coolant System average temperature less than 515F. This limitation is required to ensure (1) the moderator temperature coefficient is within its analyzed temperature range, (2) the protective instrumentation is within its normal operating range, (3) the pressurizer is capable of being in an OPERABLE status with a steam bubble, and (4) the reactor pressure vessel is above its minimum RTNDT temperature.


exceeding the minimum allowable boron concentration at which MTC is projected to exceed the lower limit.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
An evaluation to determine this minimum boron concentration is necessary to ensure the MTC limit used
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1                  BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04                        6 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1        REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.2      BORATION SYSTEMS The boron injection system ensures that negative reactivity control is available during each mode of facility operation. The components required to perform this function include (1) borated water sources, (2) charging pumps, (3) separate flow paths, (4) boric acid makeup pumps, and (5) an emergency power supply from OPERABLE diesel generators.
With the RCS average temperature above 200F, a minimum of two separate and redundant boron injection systems are provided to ensure single functional capability in the event an assumed failure renders one of the systems inoperable. Allowable out-of-service periods ensure that minor component repair or corrective action may be completed without undue risk to overall facility safety from injection system failures during the repair period.
The boration capability of either system is sufficient to provide a SHUTDOWN MARGIN from expected operating conditions of the limit specified in the COLR after xenon decay and cooldown to 200F. The maximum expected boration capability requirement occurs at EOL from full power equilibrium xenon conditions. This requirement can be met for a range of boric acid concentrations in the Boric Acid Makeup Tank (BAMT) and Refueling Water Tank (RWT). This range is bounded by 8,750 gallons of 3.1 weight percent (5420 ppm boron) from the BAMT and 10,492 gallons of 1900 ppm borated water from the RWT to 7,550 gallons of 3.5 weight percent (6119 ppm boron) boric acid from BAMT and 11,692 gallons of 1900 ppm borated water from the RWT. A minimum of 33,000 gallons of 1900 ppm boron is required from the RWT if it is to be used to borate the RCS alone. This volume requirement, however, is expected to always be bounded by the ECCS RWT volume requirements of Specification 3.5.4.
With the RCS temperature below 200F one injection system is acceptable without single failure consideration on the basis of the stable reactivity condition of the reactor and the additional restrictions prohibiting CORE ALTERATIONS and positive reactivity changes in the event the single injection system becomes inoperable.


in the safety analyses is not violated.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
The requirement for measurement, wit hin 7 EFPD of reaching 2/3 core burnup, satisfies the confirmatory che ck of the most negative MTC value.
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1                BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04                          7 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1        REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
The measurement is performed at any THERMAL POWER, so that the projected EOC MTC may be evaluated bef ore the reactor actually reaches the EOC condition. MTC values may be extrapolated and compensated to permit direct comparison to the MT C limits specified in the COLR.
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.2      BORATION SYSTEMS (continued)
SR 4.1.1.4.2 is only required if the MTC determined in SR 4.1.1.4.1 is not within +/-1.6 pcm/°F of the corresponding design value when the difference cannot be reconciled. Analysis has s hown that if the results of the beginning of cycle moderator temperature coefficient verification fall within
Temperature changes in the RCS impose reactivity changes by means of the moderator temperature coefficient. Plant temperature changes are allowed provided the temperature change is accounted for in the calculated SDM.
+/-1.6 pcm/°F of the corresponding design values, then it can be assumed that the end of cycle coefficient will al so agree with the design value within
Small changes in RCS temperature are unavoidable and so long as the required SDM is maintained during these changes, any positive reactivity additions will be limited to acceptable levels. Introduction of temperature changes must be evaluated to ensure they do not result in a loss of required SDM.
+/-1.6 pcm/°F and the measurement at EOC is not required.
The boron capability required below 200F is based upon providing a SHUTDOWN MARGIN corresponding to its COLR limit after xenon decay and cooldown from 200F to 140F. This condition can be satisfied by maintaining either 1443 gallons of 1900 ppm borated water from the refueling water tank or 1433 gallons of 3.1 weight percent boric acid solution from the boric acid makeup tanks.
3/4.1.1.5 MINIMUM TEMPERATURE FOR CRITICALITY  This specification ensures that the reactor will not be made critical with the Reactor Coolant System aver age temperature less than 515 F. This limitation is required to ensure (1) the moderator te mperature coefficient is within its analyzed temperat ure range, (2) the protecti ve instrumentation is within its normal operating range, (3) the pressurizer is capable of being in an
The contained water volume limits includes allowance for water not available because of discharge line location and other physical characteristics.
The OPERABILITY of one boron injection system during REFUELING ensures that this system is available for reactivity control while in MODE 6.
The limits on contained water volume and boron concentration of the RWT also ensure a pH value of between 7.0 and 8.1 for the solution recirculated within containment after a LOCA. This pH band minimizes the evolution of iodine and minimizes the effect of chloride and caustic stress corrosion on mechanical systems and components.
Ensuring that the BAM pump discharge pressure is met satisfies the periodic surveillance requirement to detect gross degradation caused by impeller structural damage or other hydraulic component problems. Along with this requirement, Section XI of the ASME Code verifies the pump developed head at one point on the pump characteristic curve to verify both that the measured performance is within an acceptable tolerance of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the unit safety analysis. Surveillance Requirements are specified in the In-service Testing Program, which encompasses Section XI of the ASME Code. Section XI of the ASME Code provides the activities and frequencies necessary to satisfy the requirements.


OPERABLE status with a steam bubble, and (4) the re actor pressure vessel is above its minimum RTNDT temperature.  
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1                BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04                        8 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1        REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.3      MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES The specifications of this section ensure that (1) acceptable power distribution limits are maintained, (2) the minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN is maintained, and (3) the potential effects of CEA misalignments are limited to acceptable levels.
The ACTION statements which permit limited variations from the basic requirements are accompanied by additional restrictions which ensure that the original design criteria are met.
The ACTION statements applicable to a stuck or untrippable CEA, to two or more inoperable CEAs and to a large misalignment (greater than or equal to 15 inches) of two or more CEAs, require a prompt shutdown of the reactor since either of these conditions may be indicative of a possible loss of mechanical functional capability of the CEAs and in the event of a stuck or untrippable CEA, the loss of SHUTDOWN MARGIN.
For small misalignments (less than 15 inches) of the CEAs, there is (1) a small effect on the time-dependent long-term power distributions relative to those used in generating LCOs and LSSS setpoints, (2) a small effect on the available SHUTDOWN MARGIN, and (3) a small effect on the ejected CEA worth used in the safety analysis. Therefore, the ACTION statement associated with small misalignments of CEAs permits a 1-hour time interval during which attempts may be made to restore the CEA to within its alignment requirements. The 1-hour time limit is sufficient to (1) identify causes of a misaligned CEA, (2) take appropriate corrective action to realign the CEAs, and (3) minimize the effects of xenon redistribution.
Overpower margin is provided to protect the core in the event of a large misalignment (> 15 inches) of a CEA. However, this misalignment would cause distortion of the core power distribution. This distribution may, in turn, have a significant effect on (1) the available SHUTDOWN MARGIN, (2) the time-dependent long-term power distributions relative to those used in generating LCOs and LSSS setpoints, and (3) the ejected CEA worth used in the safety analysis. Once the time constraint shown in COLR Figure 3.1-1a is exceeded, the ACTION statement associated with the large misalignment of a CEA requires a prompt downpower to  70% of RATED THERMAL POWER.
Once started, the downpower must continue at the maximum rate permitted by plant conditions not to exceed 5 hours.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                          PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.1 6 of 10 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1                  BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04                           9 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1         REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.3      MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.2 BORATION SYSTEMS The boron injection system ensures t hat negative reactivity control is available during each mode of facility operation. The components required to perform this function include (1) borated water sources, (2) charging pumps, (3) separate flow paths, (4) boric ac id makeup pumps, and (5) an emergency power supply from OPER ABLE diesel generators.
The ACTION statements applicable to misaligned or inoperable CEAs include requirements to align the OPERABLE CEAs in a given group with the inoperable CEA. Conformance with these alignment requirements brings the core, within a short period of time, to a configuration consistent with that assumed in generating LCO and LSSS setpoints. However, extended operation with CEAs significantly inserted in the core may lead to perturbations in (1) local burnup, (2) peaking factors, and (3) available shutdown margin which are more adverse than the conditions assumed to exist in the safety analyses and LCO and LSSS setpoints determination.
With the RCS average temperature above 200 F, a minimum of two separate and redundant boron injection systems ar e provided to ensure single functional capability in the event an assumed failure renders one of the systems inoperable. Allowable out-of-s ervice periods ensure that minor component repair or corrective action may be completed without undue risk to
Therefore, time limits have been imposed on operation with inoperable CEAs to preclude such adverse conditions from developing.
The requirement to reduce power in certain time limits depending upon the previous F Tr is to eliminate a potential nonconservatism for situations when a CEA has been declared inoperable. A worst-case analysis has shown that a DNBR SAFDL violation may occur after the CEA misalignment if this time requirement is not met. This potential DNBR SAFDL violation is eliminated by limiting the time operation is permitted at full power before power reductions are required. These reductions will be necessary once the deviated CEA has been declared inoperable. This time allowed to continued operation at a reduced power level can be permitted for the following reasons:
: 1.      The margin calculations that support the Technical Specifications are based on a steady-state radial peak of F Tr = the limits of Specification 3.2.3.
: 2.     When the actual F Tr < the limits of Specification 3.2.3, significant additional margin exists.
: 3.      This additional margin can be credited to offset the increase in F Tr with time that can occur following a CEA misalignment.
: 4.      This increase in F Tr is caused by xenon redistribution.
: 5.      The present analysis can support allowing a misalignment to exist without correction, if the time constraints and initial F Tr limits of COLR Figure 3.1-1a are met.


overall facility safety from injection system failures during the repair period. The boration capability of either system is sufficient to provide a SHUTDOWN MARGIN from expected operating conditi ons of the limit specified in the COLR after xenon decay and cooldown to 200 F. The maximum expected boration capability requirement occurs at EOL from full power equilibrium xenon conditions. This requirement can be met for a range of boric acid concentrations in the Boric Acid Mak eup Tank (BAMT) and Refueling Water Tank (RWT). This range is bounded by 8,750 gallons of 3.1 weight percent (5420 ppm boron) from the BAMT and 10,492 gallons of 1900 ppm borated water from the RWT to 7,550 gallons of 3.5 weight perce nt (6119 ppm boron) boric acid from BAMT and 11,692 gallons of 1900 ppm borated water from the RWT. A minimum of 33,000 gallons of 1900 ppm boron is required from the RWT if it is to be used to bor ate the RCS alone. This volume requirement, however, is expected to always be bounded by the ECCS RWT volume requirements of Specification 3.5.4.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
With the RCS temperature below 200F one injection system is acceptable without single failure consideration on the basis of the stable reactivity condition of the reactor and the additional restrictions prohibiting CORE ALTERATIONS and positive reactivity changes in the event the single injection system becomes inoperable.  
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1                BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04                        10 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1        REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.3      MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES (continued)
Operability of at least two CEA position indicator channels is required to determine CEA positions and thereby ensure compliance with the CEA alignment and insertion limits. The CEA "Full In" and "Full Out" limits provide an additional independent means for determining the CEA positions when the CEAs are at either their fully inserted or fully withdrawn positions. Therefore, the ACTION statements applicable to inoperable CEA position indicators permit continued operations when the positions of CEAs with inoperable position indicators can be verified by the "Full In" or "Full Out" limits.
CEA positions and OPERABILITY of the CEA position indicators are required to be verified on a nominal basis of once per 12 hours with more frequent verifications required if an automatic monitoring channel is inoperable. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. These verification frequencies are adequate for assuring that the applicable LCOs are satisfied.
The maximum CEA drop time restriction is consistent with the assumed CEA drop time used in the safety analyses. Measurement with Tavg greater than or equal to 515F and with all reactor coolant pumps operating ensures that the measured drop times will be representative of insertion times experienced during a reactor trip at operating conditions.
The LSSS setpoints and the power distribution LCOs were generated based upon a core burnup which would be achieved with the core operating in an essentially unrodded configuration. Therefore, the CEA insertion limit specifications require that during MODES 1 and 2, the full length CEAs be nearly fully withdrawn. The amount of CEA insertion permitted by the Long Term Steady State Insertion Limits of Specification 3.1.3.6 will not have a significant effect upon the unrodded burnup assumption but will still provide sufficient reactivity control. The Power Dependent Insertion Limits of Specification 3.1.3.6 are provided to ensure that (1) acceptable power distribution limits are maintained, (2) the minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN is maintained, and (3) the potential effects of a CEA ejection accident are limited to acceptable levels; however, long-term operation at these insertion limits could have adverse effects on core power distribution during subsequent operation in an unrodded configuration.


SECTION NO.:
Section No.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.1 7 of 10 REVISION NO.:
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                     3/4.2 Attachment No.
8  3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 4
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.2 BORATION SYSTEMS (continued) Temperature changes in the RCS impose r eactivity changes by means of the moderator temperature coefficient.
BASES ATTACHMENT 4 Current Revision No.
Plant temperature changes are allowed provided the temperature change is accounted for in the calculated SDM. 
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                               5 Title:
 
POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  
Small changes in RCS temperature are unavoidable and so long as the required SDM is maintained during t hese changes, any positive reactivity additions will be limited to acceptable levels. Introduction of temperature
 
changes must be evaluated to ensure they do not result in a loss of required SDM. The boron capability required below 200 F is based upon providing a SHUTDOWN MARGIN corresp onding to its COLR limit after xenon decay and cooldown from 200 F to 140 F. This condition can be satisfied by maintaining either 1443 gallons of 1900 ppm borated wa ter from the refueling water tank or 1433 gallons of 3.1 weight percent boric acid solution from the boric acid makeup tanks. The contained water volume limits includes allowance for water not available because of discharge line location and other physical characteristics.
The OPERABILITY of one boron inje ction system during REFUELING ensures that this system is available fo r reactivity control while in MODE 6.
The limits on contained water volume and boron concentration of the RWT also ensure a pH value of between 7.0 and 8.1 for the solution recirculated within containment after a LOCA. This pH band minimizes the evolution of iodine and minimizes the effect of ch loride and caustic stress corrosion on mechanical systems and components.
 
Ensuring that the BAM pump discharge pressure is met satisfies the periodic surveillance requirement to detect gross degradation caused by impeller structural damage or other hydraulic component problems.
Along with this requirement, Section XI of the ASME Code verifies the pump developed head
 
at one point on the pump characteristic cu rve to verify both that the measured performance is within an acceptable tolera nce of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the unit safety analysis. Surveillance
 
Requirements are specified in the In-service Testing Program, which encompasses Section XI of the ASME Code. Section XI of the ASME Code provides the activities and frequencies nec essary to satisfy the requirements.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.1 8 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.3 MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES The specifications of this section ensure that (1) acceptable power distribution limits are maintained, (2) the minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN is maintained, and (3) the potential effects of CEA misalignments are limited to acceptable levels. The ACTION statements which permit limited variations from the basic requirements are accompanied by additional restrictions which ensure that the original design criteria are met.
 
The ACTION  statements applicable to a stuck or untrippable CEA, to two or more inoperable CEAs and to a large misa lignment (greater than or equal to 15 inches) of two or more CEAs, require a prompt shutdown of the reactor since either of these conditions may be indicative of a possible loss of mechanical functional capability of the C EAs and in the event of a stuck or untrippable CEA, the loss of SHUTDOWN MARGIN.
For small misalignments (less than 15 in ches) of the CEAs, there is (1) a small effect on the time-dependent long-te rm power distributions relative to those used in generating LCOs and LSSS set points, (2) a small effect on the available SHUTDOWN MARGIN, and (3) a small effect on the ejected CEA worth used in the safety analysis.
Therefore, the ACTION statement associated with small misalig nments of CEAs permits a 1-hour time interval during which attempts may be made to re store the CEA to wit hin its alignment requirements. The 1-hour time limit is sufficient to (1) identify causes of a misaligned CEA, (2) take appropriate corrective action to realign the CEAs, and (3) minimize the effects of xenon redistribution.  
 
Overpower margin is provided to protec t the core in the event of a large misalignment (> 15 inches) of a CEA. However, this misalignment would cause distortion of the core power distribution. This distribution may, in turn, have a significant effect on (1) the available SHUTDOWN MARGIN, (2) the time-dependent long-term power distribut ions relative to those used in generating LCOs and LSSS setpoints, and (3) the ejected CEA worth used in the safety analysis. Once the time cons traint shown in COLR Figure 3.1-1a is exceeded, the ACTION statement associ ated with the large misalignment of a CEA requires a prompt downpower to  70% of RATED THERMAL POWER.
Once started, the downpower must c ontinue at the maximum rate permitted by plant conditions not to exceed 5 hours.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.1 9 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.1.3 MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES (continued)
The ACTION statements applicable to mi saligned or inoperable CEAs include requirements to align the OPERABLE CEAs in a given group with the inoperable CEA. Conform ance with these alignment requirements brings the core, within a short period of time, to a configuration cons istent with that assumed in generating LCO and LSSS setpoints. However, extended operation with CEAs significantly in serted in the core may lead to perturbations in (1) local burnup, (2) peaking factors, and (3) available shutdown margin which are more adverse than the conditions assumed to exist in the safety analyses and LCO and LSSS setpoints determination. 
 
Therefore, time limit s have been imposed on operation with inoperable CEAs to preclude such adverse conditions from developing.
The requirement to reduce power in certain time limits depending upon the previous      is to eliminate a pot ential nonconservatism for situations when a CEA has been declared inoperable. A worst-case analysis has shown that a DNBR SAFDL violation may occur after the CEA misalignment if this time requirement is not met. This potential DNBR SAFDL violation is eliminated by limiting the time operation is permitted at full power before power reductions are required. These reductions will be necessary once the deviated CEA has been declared inoperable. This time allowed to continued operation at a reduced power level can be permitted for the following reasons:
: 1. The margin calculations that suppor t the Technical Sp ecifications are based on a steady-state radial peak of 
    = the limits of Specification 3.2.3. 2. When the actual      < the limits of Specification 3.
2.3, significant additional margin exists.
: 3. This additional margin can be credited to offset the increase in      with time that can occur follo wing a CEA misalignment.
: 4. This increase in      is caused by xenon redistribution.
: 5. The present analysis can support a llowing a misalignment to exist
 
without correction, if the time constrai nts and initial      limits of COLR Figure 3.1-1a are met.
T r F T r F T r F T r F T r F T r F SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.1 10 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)  BASES (continued) 3/4.1.3 MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES (continued) Operability of at least two CEA position indicator channels is required to determine CEA positions and thereby ensure compliance with the CEA alignment and insertion limits. The CEA "Full In" and "Full Out" limits provide an additional independent means for determining the CEA positions when the CEAs are at either their fully inserted or fully withdrawn posit ions. Therefore, the ACTION statements applicable to inoperable CEA position indicators permit continued operations when the positions of CEAs with inoperable position indicators can be verified by the "Full In" or "Full Out" limits. CEA positions and OPERABILITY of the CEA position indicators are required to be verified on a nominal basis of once per 12 hours with more frequent verifications required if an automatic m onitoring channel is inoperable. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency
 
Control Program. These verificati on frequencies are adequate for assuring that the applicable LCOs are satisfied. The maximum CEA drop time restriction is consistent with the assumed CEA drop time used in the safety analyses. Measurement with T avg greater than or equal to 515 F and with all reactor coolant pumps operating ensures that the measured drop times will be representative of insertion times experienced during a reactor trip at operating conditions.
The LSSS setpoints and the power di stribution LCOs were generated based upon a core burnup which would be achieved with the core operating in an essentially unrodded configuration. Therefore, the CEA insertion limit specifications require that during MO DES 1 and 2, the full length CEAs be nearly fully withdrawn. The amount of CEA insertion permitted by the Long Term Steady State Insertion Limits of Specification 3.1.3.6 will not have a significant effect upon the unrodded burnup assumption but will still provide
 
sufficient reactivity control. The Power Dependent Insertion Limits of Specification 3.1.3.6 ar e provided to ensure that (1) acceptable power distribution limits are ma intained, (2) the minimu m SHUTDOWN MARGIN is maintained, and (3) the potential effects of a CEA ejection accident are limited to acceptable levels; however, long-term operation at these insertion limits could have adverse effects on core power distribution during subsequent operation in an unrodded configuration.
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
3/4.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
4 Current Revision No.
5 SAFETY RELATED Title: POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS Responsible Department:
Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2204276 to support use of AREVA fuel. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2204276 to support use of AREVA fuel.
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency c ontrol Program. (Aut hor: K. Frehafer)  
(Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 05-0059 for PCM 04078 and Tech Spec Amendment No. 138 NRC Letter dated 01/31/05 regarding WCAP-9272 Reload Methodology and Implementing 30% SG Tube Plugging Limit. (George Madden, 01/27/05)
Revision 1 - Incorporated PCR 03-1249 to revise Section 3/4.2.5 in accordance with Tech Spec Amendment 131; LAR 2002-06; NRC letter dated 4/18/03 regarding reduction in minimum RCS flow. (M. DiMarco, 05/02/03)
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
Revision          Approved By              Approval Date    UNIT #          UNIT 2 DATE 0                R.G. West                  08/30/01        DOCT          PROCEDURE DOCN          Section 3/4.2 SYS 5                R. Coffey                12/15/14        STATUS        COMPLETED REV                5
                                                                    # OF PGS


Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU cond itions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2            BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04                                                    2 of 6 REVISION NO.:                  POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.2 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS .................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.2.1    LINEAR HEAT RATE ...................................................... 3 3/4.2.3 and 3/4.2.4 TOTAL INTEGRATED RADIAL PEAKING FACTORS - F Tr AND AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT - Tq .... 5 3/4.2.5    DNB PARAMETERS ....................................................... 6


Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 05-0059 for PCM 0407 8 and Tech Spec Amendment No. 138 NRC Letter dated 01/31/05 regarding WCAP-9272 Reload Methodology and Implementing 30% SG Tube Plugging Limi
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
: t. (George Madden, 01/27/05)  
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2                 BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04                          3 of 6 REVISION NO.:                      POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.2 3/4.2        POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS BASES 3/4.2.1      LINEAR HEAT RATE The limitation on linear heat rate ensures that in the event of a LOCA, the peak temperature of the fuel cladding will not exceed 2200F.
Either of the two core power distribution monitoring systems, the Excore Detector Monitoring System and the Incore Detector Monitoring System, provides adequate monitoring of the core power distribution and are capable of verifying that the linear heat rate does not exceed its limits. The Excore Detector Monitoring System performs this function by continuously monitoring the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX with the OPERABLE quadrant symmetric excore neutron flux detectors and verifying that the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX is maintained within the allowable limits of COLR Figure 3.2-2. In conjunction with the use of the excore monitoring system and in establishing the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX limits, the following assumptions are made: (1) the CEA insertion limits of Specifications 3.1.3.5 and 3.1.3.6 are satisfied, (2) the AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT restrictions of Specification 3.2.4 are satisfied, and (3) the measured linear heat rate obtained from a previous power distribution map using incore detectors meets the criteria of Specification 3.2.1.


Revision 1
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
- Incorporated PCR 03-1249 to revise Sect ion 3/4.2.5 in accordance with Tech Spec Amendment 131; LAR 2002-06; NRC letter dated 4/18/03 regarding reduction in minimum RCS flow.  (M. DiMarco, 05/02/03)
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2                 BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04                         4 of 6 REVISION NO.:                     POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5                             ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.2         POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS (continued)
 
Revision 0
- Bases for Technical Specifications.  (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)  Revision  Approved By  Approval Date  UNIT # UNIT 2        DATE 0  R.G. West  08/30/01  DOCT PROCEDURE        DOCN Section 3/4.2 SYS  5  R. Coffey  12/15/14  STATUS COMPLETED REV 5        # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.2 2 of 6 REVISION NO.:
5  TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.2 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.2 POWER DISTRI BUTION LIMITS .................................................... 3
 
BASES ............................................................................................ 3
 
3/4.2.1 LINEAR HEAT RATE ...................................................... 3
 
3/4.2.3 and 3/4.2.4 TOTAL INTEGRATED RADIAL PEAKING FACTORS -      AND AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT - T q .... 5 3/4.2.5 DNB PARAMETERS ....................................................... 6 T r F SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.2 3 of 6 REVISION NO.:
5  BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.2 3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS BASES 3/4.2.1 LINEAR HEAT RATE The limitation on linear heat rate ensures that in t he event of a LOCA, the peak temperature of the fuel cladding will not exceed 2200 F. Either of the two core power distribution monitoring systems, the Excore Detector Monitoring System and the In core Detector Monitoring System, provides adequate monitoring of the core power distribution and are capable of verifying that the linear heat rate does not exceed its limits. The Excore Detector Monitoring System performs this function by continuously monitoring the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX with the OPERABLE quadrant symmetric excore neutron flux detectors and verifyi ng that the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX is maintained within the allowable limits of COLR Figure 3.2-2. In conjunction with the use of the excore monitoring system and in establishing the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX limits, the following assumptions are made:  (1) the CEA
 
insertion limits of Specifications 3.
1.3.5 and 3.1.3.6 are satisfied, (2) the AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT restrictions of Specification 3.2.
4 are satisfied, and (3) the measured linear heat rate obtained from a previous power distribution map using incore detectors meets the criteria of Specification 3.2.1.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.2 4 of 6 REVISION NO.:
3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS (continued)
BASES (continued)
BASES (continued)
The Incore Detector Monitoring System continuously provides a direct measure of the peaking factors and the alarms which have been established for the individual incore detector s egments ensure that the peak linear heat rates will be maintained within the allowable limits of COLR Fi gure 3.2-1. The setpoints for these alarms include allowances, set in conservative directions, for (1) a measurement-calculational uncertainty factor, (2) an engineering uncertainty factor, (3) an allowance fo r axial fuel densification and thermal expansion, and (4) a THERMAL POWER measurement uncertainty factor.  
The Incore Detector Monitoring System continuously provides a direct measure of the peaking factors and the alarms which have been established for the individual incore detector segments ensure that the peak linear heat rates will be maintained within the allowable limits of COLR Figure 3.2-1. The setpoints for these alarms include allowances, set in conservative directions, for (1) a measurement-calculational uncertainty factor, (2) an engineering uncertainty factor, (3) an allowance for axial fuel densification and thermal expansion, and (4) a THERMAL POWER measurement uncertainty factor.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.2 5 of 6 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2                BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04                         5 of 6 REVISION NO.:                      POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.2         POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS (continued)
3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.2.3 and 3/4.2.4 TOTAL INTEGRATED RADIAL PEAKING FACTOR - F Tr AND AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT - Tq The limitation on Tq is provided to ensure that the assumptions used in the analysis for establishing the Linear Heat Rate and Local Power Density - High LCOs and LSSS setpoints remain valid during operation at the various allowable CEA group insertion limits. The limitations on F Tr and Tq are provided to ensure that the assumptions used in the analysis establishing the DNB Margin LCO, the Thermal Margin/Low Pressure LSSS setpoints remain valid during operation at the various allowable CEA group insertion limits. If F Tr or Tq exceed their basic limitations, operation may continue under the additional restrictions imposed by the ACTION statements since these additional restrictions provide adequate provisions to assure that the assumptions used in establishing the Linear Heat Rate, Thermal Margin/Low Pressure and Local Power Density - High LCOs and LSSS setpoints remain valid.
BASES (continued) 3/4.2.3 and 3/4.2.4 TOTAL INTEGRATED RADIAL PEAKING FACTOR -       AND   AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT - T q The limitation on T q is provided to ensure that the assumptions used in the analysis for establishing the Linear Heat Rate and Local Power Density - High LCOs and LSSS setpoints remain valid during operation at the various  
An AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT > 0.10 is not expected and if it should occur, subsequent operation would be restricted to only those operations required to identify the cause of this unexpected tilt.
The requirement that the measured value of Tq be multiplied by the calculated values of Fr to determine F Tr is applicable only when Fr is calculated with a non-full core power distribution analysis code. When monitoring a reactor core power distribution, Fr with a full core power distribution analysis code the azimuthal tilt is explicitly accounted for as part of the radial power distribution used to calculate Fr.
The Surveillance Requirements for verifying that F Tr and Tq are within their limits provide assurance that the actual values of Fr and Tq do not exceed the assumed values. Verifying F Tr after each fuel loading prior to exceeding 75%
of RATED THERMAL POWER provides additional assurance that the core was properly loaded.


allowable CEA group insertion limits.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
The limitations on     and T q are provided to ensure that the assumptions used in the analysis establishing the DNB Margin LCO, the Thermal Margin/
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2                  BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04                          6 of 6 REVISION NO.:                      POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.2        POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS (continued)
Low Pressure LSSS setpoints remain valid during operation at the various allowabl e CEA group insertion limits. If or T q  exceed their basic limitations, operation may continue under the additional restrictions imposed by the ACTION statements since these additional restrictions provide adequat e provisions to assure that the assumptions used in establishing the Li near Heat Rate, Thermal Margin/Low Pressure and Local Power Density - High LCOs and LSSS setpoints remain
BASES (continued) 3/4.2.5      DNB PARAMETERS The limits on the DNB-related parameters assure that each of the parameters are maintained within the normal steady-state envelope of operation assumed in the transient and safety analyses. The limits are consistent with the safety analyses assumptions and have been analytically demonstrated adequate to maintain a minimum DNBR of greater than or equal to the appropriate correlation limit for DNB-SAFDL throughout each analyzed transient. The limit for Reactor Coolant System total flow rate is maintained in the LCO. The remaining DNB parameter limits are cycle-specific and have been relocated to the COLR.
These variables are contained in the COLR to provide operating and analysis flexibility from cycle to cycle. Operating within these limits will result in meeting the DNBR criterion in the event of a DNB limited transient.
The Surveillance Frequencies are controlled under the Surveillance Frequency control Program.


valid. An AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT > 0.10 is not expected and if it should occur, subsequent operation would be restricted to only those operations required to identify the cause of this unexpected tilt.  
Section No.
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                     3/4.3 Attachment No.
The requirement that t he measured value of T q be multiplied by the calculated values of F r to determine      is applicable only when F r  is calculated with a non-full core power distribution analysi s code. When monitoring a reactor core power distribution, F r with a full core power distribution analysis code the azimuthal tilt is explicitly accounted for as part of the radial power distribution used to calculate F
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 5
: r. The Surveillance Requirements for verifying that      and T q are within their limits provide assurance that the actual values of F r and T q do not exceed the assumed values. Verifying      after each fuel loading prior to exceeding 75%
BASES ATTACHMENT 5 Current Revision No.
of RATED THERMAL POWER provides additional assurance that the core was properly loaded.
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                               6 Title:
T r F T r F T r F T r F T r F T r F SECTION NO.:
INSTRUMENTATION Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.2 6 of 6 REVISION NO.:
5   3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.2.5 DNB PARAMETERS The limits on the DNB-related parameters assure that each of the parameters are maintained within the normal steady-s tate envelope of operation assumed in the transient and safety analyses. T he limits are consistent with the safety analyses assumptions and have been analytically demonstrated adequate to maintain a minimum DNBR of greater than or equal to the appropriate correlation limit for DNB-SAFDL throughout each analyzed transient. The limit for Reactor Coolant System total fl ow rate is maintained in the LCO. The remaining DNB parameter limits are cycle-specific and have been relocated to the COLR.
These variables are contained in the COLR to provide operating and analysis flexibility from cycle to cycle. Oper ating within these limits will result in meeting the DNBR criterion in the event of a DNB limited transient. The Surveillance Frequencies are c ontrolled under the Surveillance Frequency control Program.
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
3/4.3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
5 Current Revision No.
6 SAFETY RELATED Title: INSTRUMENTATION Responsible Department:
Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 2225600 for Unit 1 Alternative Source Term licensing amendment 152 that incorporated response time testing surveillance requirements for the CROAI radiation monitors. At t hat time no Tech Spec Bases for the response time testing were documented. This PCR is intended to update the Unit 1 & 2 Tech Spec Bases documents, Section 4.3.3.
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 2225600 for Unit 1 Alternative Source Term licensing amendment 152 that incorporated response time testing surveillance requirements for the CROAI radiation monitors. At that time no Tech Spec Bases for the response time testing were documented. This PCR is intended to update the Unit 1 & 2 Tech Spec Bases documents, Section 4.3.3.2, to capture the unique response time testing methodology of the CROAI radiation monitors. (Author: K. Frehafer)
2, to capture the unique response time testing methodology of the CROAI radiation monitors. (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)  
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)
 
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 4  
Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 08-6765 for CR 2007-32178 for Bases changes to Technical Specifications 155 for License Amendments 152 and 153. Procedure changes to implement AST were reviewed in ORG 07-041 on 5/29/07 as part of the license amendment submittal.
- Incorporated PCR 2053666 ba sed on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency c ontrol Program. (Aut hor: K. Frehafer)  
(Author: Ken Frehafer)
 
Revision 1 - Bases for Technical Specifications 137. (M. DiMarco, 12/21/04)
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU cond itions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
 
Revision             Approved By             Approval Date     UNIT #         UNIT 2 DATE 0                 R.G. West               08/30/01         DOCT         PROCEDURE DOCN         Section 3/4.3 SYS 6                 M. Jones                 03/22/18         STATUS       COMPLETED REV                 6
Revision 2
                                                                    # OF PGS
- Incorporated PCR 08-6765 for CR 2007-3 2178 for Bases changes to Technical Specifications 155 for Lic ense Amendments 152 and 153. Proc edure changes to implement AST were reviewed in ORG 07-041 on 5/29/07 as part of the license amendment submittal. (Author: Ken Frehafer)  
 
Revision 1
- Bases for Technical Specificat ions 137. (M. DiMarco, 12/21/04)
Revision 0
- Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01) Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2       DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE       DOCN Section 3/4.3 SYS   6 M. Jones 03/22/18 STATUS COMPLETED REV 6       # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 INSTRUMENTATION ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.3 2 of 7 REVISION NO.:
6  TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.3 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION ...................................................................... 3
 
BASES  ............................................................................................ 3
 
3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 REACTOR PROTECTIVE AND ENGINEERED SAFETY FEATURES ACTUATION SYSTEMS
 
INSTRUMENTATION ................................ 3
 
3/4.3.3 RADIATION MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION ......... 6
 
3/4.3.5 REMOTE SHUTDOWN IN STRUMENTATION ............................... 6


3/4.3.6 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION .......................... 7  
SECTION NO.:                                                                                            PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3              BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04                                                    2 of 7 REVISION NO.:                              INSTRUMENTATION 6                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                                PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.3 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.3  INSTRUMENTATION ...................................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2            REACTOR PROTECTIVE AND ENGINEERED SAFETY FEATURES ACTUATION SYSTEMS INSTRUMENTATION ................................ 3 3/4.3.3    RADIATION MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION ......... 6 3/4.3.5 REMOTE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION ............................... 6 3/4.3.6 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION .......................... 7 3/4.3.7 DELETED ....................................................................................... 7 3/4.3.8 DELETED ....................................................................................... 7


3/4.3.7 DELETED ....................................................................................... 7
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3                 BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04                        3 of 7 REVISION NO.:                            INSTRUMENTATION 6                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.3 3/4.3        INSTRUMENTATION BASES 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 REACTOR PROTECTIVE AND ENGINEERED SAFETY FEATURES ACTUATION SYSTEMS INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the reactor protective and Engineered Safety Features Actuation Systems instrumentation and bypasses ensure that (1) the associated Engineered Safety Features Actuation action and/or reactor trip will be initiated when the parameter monitored by each channel or combination thereof reaches its setpoint, (2) the specified coincidence logic is maintained, (3) sufficient redundancy is maintained to permit a channel to be out of service for testing or maintenance, and (4) sufficient system functional capability is available from diverse parameters.
The OPERABILITY of these systems is required to provide the overall reliability, redundancy, and diversity assumed available in the facility design for the protection and mitigation of accident and transient conditions.
The integrated operation of each of these systems is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.
The Surveillance Requirements specified for these systems ensure that the overall system functional capability is maintained comparable to the original design standards. The periodic surveillance tests are sufficient to demonstrate this capability. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. For the Steam Generator Water Level Low Functional Unit, the trip setpoint and methodology used to determine the trip setpoint, the as-found acceptance criteria band, and the as-left acceptance criteria are specified in the UFSAR. The two table notations are consistent with the recommended notes provided in NRCs letter to NEI Technical Specifications Methods Task Force for Setpoint Allowances dated September 5, 2005.


3/4.3.8 DELETED ....................................................................................... 7
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
 
TITLE:   TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3                  BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04                           4 of 7 REVISION NO.:                           INSTRUMENTATION 6                             ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.3         INSTRUMENTATION (continued)
SECTION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 INSTRUMENTATION ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.3 3 of 7 REVISION NO.:
6   BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.3 3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION BASES 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 REACTOR PROTECTIVE AND ENGINEERED SAFETY FEATURES ACTUATION SYSTEMS INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the reactor protective and Engineered Safety Features Actuation Systems instrumentati on and bypasses ensure that (1) the associated Engineered Safety Features Actuation action and/or reactor trip will be initiated when t he parameter monitored by each channel or combination thereof reaches its setpoint, (2) the specified coincidence logic is maintained, (3) sufficient redundancy is maintained to permit a channel to be out of service for testing or maintenance, and (4) sufficient system functional capability is available fr om diverse parameters.
The OPERABILITY of these systems is required to provide the overall reliability, redundancy, and diversity assu med available in the facility design for the protection and mitigation of accident and transient conditions.
The integrated operation of each of t hese systems is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.
The Surveillance Requirem ents specified for these systems ensure that the overall system functional capability is maintained comparable to the original design standards. The periodic surveillance tests are sufficient to demonstrate this capability. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. For the Steam Generator Water Level Low Functional Unit, the trip setpoint and methodology used to determine the trip setpoint, the as-found acceptance criteria band, and the as-left acceptance criteria are specified in the UFSAR. The two table notations are consistent with the recommended notes provided in NRC's letter to NEI Technical Specifications Methods Task Force for Setpoint Allowances dated September 5, 2005.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 INSTRUMENTATION ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.3 4 of 7 REVISION NO.:
3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 (continued)
ESFAS subgroup relay testing is performed in accordance with the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
ESFAS subgroup relay testing is performed in accordance with the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
The measurement of response time at the specified frequencies provides assurance that the protective and ESF action function associated with each channel is completed within the time limit assumed in the safety analyses.
The measurement of response time at the specified frequencies provides assurance that the protective and ESF action function associated with each channel is completed within the time limit assumed in the safety analyses.
No credit was taken in the analyses fo r those channels with response times indicated as not applicable. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequ ency control Program. Response time may be demonstrated by any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, includ ing allocated sensor response time, provided that such tests demonstrate tota l channel response time as defined. CEOG Topical Report CE NPSD-1167, and FPL No Significant Hazards Evaluation PSL-ENG-SEIS-03-043 provide the basis and methodology for using allocated sensor response times in the overall verification of the  
No credit was taken in the analyses for those channels with response times indicated as not applicable. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency control Program.
Response time may be demonstrated by any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, including allocated sensor response time, provided that such tests demonstrate total channel response time as defined.
CEOG Topical Report CE NPSD-1167, and FPL No Significant Hazards Evaluation PSL-ENG-SEIS-03-043 provide the basis and methodology for using allocated sensor response times in the overall verification of the channel response time for specific sensors identified in these documents.
The allocated sensor response time must be verified prior to placing a new component in operation and re-verified after maintenance that may adversely affect the sensor response time (e.g., replacement of a transmitter DP cell or variable damping circuits). Sensor response time verification may be demonstrated by either 1) in place, onsite or offsite test measurements or
: 2) utilizing replacement sensors with certified response times.
The CEOG topical report and FPL evaluation only cover certain sensor model numbers. If sensors are replaced with types not previously evaluated, then periodic response time testing (RTT) for the new sensor must either be performed and the appropriate changes made to plant procedures, or an additional request for RTT elimination must be submitted and approved by the NRC. If, however, the replacement sensor is one for which RTT elimination has been approved, then FPL may modify the plant procedures, using an allocated response time based upon a vendor-supplied response time value, or upon statistical analysis of historical data for that transmitter type and model.
The Safety Injection Actuation Signal (SIAS) provides direct actuation of the Containment Isolation Signal (CIS) to ensure containment isolation in the event of a small break LOCA.


channel response time for specific sens ors identified in t hese documents. The allocated sensor response time must be verified prior to placing a new component in operation and re-verified after maintenance that may adversely affect the sensor response time (e.g., replacement of a transmitter DP cell or variable damping circuits). Sensor response time verification may be demonstrated by either 1) in place, ons ite or offsite test measurements or 2) utilizing replacement sensors with certified response times.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
The CEOG topical report and FPL evaluatio n only cover certain sensor model numbers. If sensors are replaced with types not previously evaluated, then periodic response time testing (RTT) for the new sensor must either be performed and the appropriate changes made to plant procedures, or an additional request for RTT elimination must be submitted and approved by the NRC. If, however, the replacement s ensor is one for which RTT elimination has been approved, then FPL may modify the plant procedures, using an allocated response time based upon a vendor-supplied response time value, or upon statistical analysis of historical data for that transmitter type and model. The Safety Injection Actuation Signal (SIAS) provides direct actuation of the Containment Isolation Signal (CIS) to ensure containment isolation in the event of a small break LOCA.
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3                BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04                       5 of 7 REVISION NO.:                           INSTRUMENTATION 6                             ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.3         INSTRUMENTATION (continued)
SECTION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 INSTRUMENTATION ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.3 5 of 7 REVISION NO.:
For channels not restored to an OPERABLE status in accordance with ACTION 15, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. ACTION 11 is modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.
6   3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION (continued)
However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
BASES (continued) 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 (continued)
For channels not restored to an OPER ABLE status in accordance with ACTION 15, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status , the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicabil ity of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required plant conditions from  


full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. ACTION 11 is modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires perform ance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and co mponents, considerati on of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions , if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not pr eclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicabili ty that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3                BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04                           6 of 7 REVISION NO.:                             INSTRUMENTATION 6                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.3         INSTRUMENTATION (continued)
 
BASES (continued) 3/4.3.3       RADIATION MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the radiation monitoring channels ensures that: (1) the radiation levels are continually measured in the areas served by the individual channels; and (2) the alarm or automatic action is initiated when the radiation level trip setpoint is exceeded; and (3) sufficient information is available on selected plant parameters to monitor and assess these variables following an accident. This capability is consistent with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.97, "Instrumentation for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants to Assess Plant and Environs Conditions During and Following an Accident," December 1980 and NUREG-0737, "Clarification of TMI Action Plan Requirements," November 1980.
SECTION NO.:
Surveillance Requirement 4.3.3.2 ensures that the channel actuation response times are less than the maximum times assumed in the analyses.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 INSTRUMENTATION ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.3 6 of 7 REVISION NO.:
6   3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.3.3 RADIATION MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the r adiation monitoring channels ensures that: (1) the radiation levels are conti nually measured in the areas served by the individual channels; and (2) the alarm or automatic action is initiated when the radiation level trip setpoint is exceeded; and (3) sufficient information is available on selected plant parameters to monitor and assess these variables following an accident. This capability is cons istent with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.97, "Instrumenta tion for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants to Assess Plant and Envir ons Conditions During and Following an Accident," December 1980 and NUREG-0737, "Clarification of TMI Action Plan Requirements," November 1980. Surveillance Requirement 4.3.3.2 ens ures that the channel actuation response times are less than the maximum times assumed in the analyses.
Testing of the final actuating devices is included in the surveillance testing.
Testing of the final actuating devices is included in the surveillance testing.
The Control Room Outside Air Inta ke (CROAI) Radiation Monitoring Response Time measurement provides assurance that the Control Room isolation function associated with each CROAI radiation monitoring channel is completed within the time limit assumed in the accident and Control Room habitability analyses. Response time may be demonstrated by applying a simulated step in radioactivity (i.e., detector count rate) above background to the channel. The magnitude of the radioactivity step shall be less than or equal to the radioactivity expected for the accident having the lowest radioactivity (i.e., detector count rate).
The Control Room Outside Air Intake (CROAI) Radiation Monitoring Response Time measurement provides assurance that the Control Room isolation function associated with each CROAI radiation monitoring channel is completed within the time limit assumed in the accident and Control Room habitability analyses. Response time may be demonstrated by applying a simulated step in radioactivity (i.e., detector count rate) above background to the channel. The magnitude of the radioactivity step shall be less than or equal to the radioactivity expected for the accident having the lowest radioactivity (i.e., detector count rate). Note that the count rate step value applied may significantly exceed the Technical Specification setpoint
Note that the count rate step value applied may significantly exceed the Technical Specification setpoint (
(


==Reference:==
==Reference:==
Engineering Evaluation PSL-ENG-SEIS-08-017).
Engineering Evaluation PSL-ENG-SEIS-08-017).
For channels not restored to an OPER ABLE status in accordance with ACTION 26, the control room emergency ventilation system must be initiated and maintained in the recirculation m ode of operation withi n 1 hour. ACTION 26 is modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note pr ohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN duri ng startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.
For channels not restored to an OPERABLE status in accordance with ACTION 26, the control room emergency ventilation system must be initiated and maintained in the recirculation mode of operation within 1 hour. ACTION 26 is modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk as sessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of t he results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUT DOWN, and establishment of risk  


management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3                 BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04                        7 of 7 REVISION NO.:                            INSTRUMENTATION 6                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.3        INSTRUMENTATION (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.3.5      REMOTE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the remote shutdown instrumentation ensures that sufficient capability is available to permit shutdown and maintenance of HOT STANDBY of the facility from locations outside of the control room.
This capability is required in the event control room habitability is lost and is consistent with General Design Criteria 19 of 10 CFR 50.
The OPERABILITY of the remote shutdown system instrumentation ensures that a fire will not preclude achieving safe shutdown. The remote shutdown system instrumentation, control circuits, and transfer switches are independent of areas where a fire could damage systems normally used to shut down the reactor. This capability is consistent with General Design Criterion 3 and Appendix R to 10 CFR Part 50.
3/4.3.6      ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the accident monitoring instrumentation ensures that sufficient information is available on selected plant parameters to monitor and assess these variables following an accident. This capability is consistent with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.97, Instrumentation for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Plants to Assess Plant Conditions During and Following an Accident, December 1975 and NUREG 0578, TMI-2 Lessons Learned Task Force Status Report and Short-Term Recommendations."
3/4.3.7      DELETED 3/4.3.8      DELETED


Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to co mply with ACTIONS or that are part of
Section No.
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                     3/4.4 Attachment No.
a shutdown of the unit.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 6
SECTION NO.:
BASES ATTACHMENT 6 Current Revision No.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 INSTRUMENTATION ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.3 7 of 7 REVISION NO.:
OF ADM-25.04 Before use, verify revision and change documentation DATE VERIFIED__________ INITIAL__________
6   3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION (continued)
SAFETY RELATED                             17 INFORMATION USE FOR INFORMATION ONLY Title:
BASES (continued) 3/4.3.5 REMOTE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the remote shut down instrumentation ensures that sufficient capability is available to permit shutdown and maintenance of HOT STANDBY of the facility from locations outside of the control room. This capability is required in the event control room habitability is lost and is consistent with General Desi gn Criteria 19 of 10 CFR 50.
REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM Responsible Department: Licensing (if applicable) with a controlled index or document.
The OPERABILITY of the remote shutdown system instrumentation ensures that a fire will not precl ude achieving safe shutdown. The remote shutdown system instrumentation, control circuits, and transfer switches are independent of areas wher e a fire could damage systems normally used to shut down the reactor. This capabili ty is consistent with General Design Criterion 3 and Appendix R to 10 CFR Part 50. 3/4.3.6 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the accident monitoring instrumentation ensures that sufficient information is available on sele cted plant parameter s to monitor and assess these variables following an accident. This capability is consistent
REVISION  
 
with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.97, "Instrumentation for
 
Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Plants to Assess Plant Conditions During and Following an Accident," December 1975 and NUREG 0578, "TMI-2 Lessons Learned Task Force Status Report and Short-Term Recommendations." 3/4.3.7 DELETED 3/4.3.8 DELETED
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
3/4.4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
6 Current Revision No.
17 SAFETY RELATED INFORMATION USE Title: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM Responsible Department:
Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 17 - Incorporated PCR 2210011 based on NRC approval of TSTF-545. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 17 - Incorporated PCR 2210011 based on NRC approval of TSTF-545.
Revision 16 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)  
(Author: N. Davidson)
 
Revision 16 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 15 - Incorporated PCR 2139246 to correct cut and paste error in Section 3/4.4.9. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 15 - Incorporated PCR 2139246 to correct cut and paste error in Section 3/4.4.9.
Revision 14 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verb iage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)  
(Author: N. Davidson)
 
Revision 14 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verbiage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 13 - Incorporated PCR 1996408 to remove Technical Specif ication Limiting Condition for Operation 3/4.4.
Revision 13 - Incorporated PCR 1996408 to remove Technical Specification Limiting Condition for Operation 3/4.4.7, Chemistry. The requirements will be relocated to the UFSAR. (Author: J. Phillabaum)
7, "Chemistry". The requirem ents will be relocated to the UFSAR. (Author: J. Phillabaum)
Revision 12 - Incorporated PCR 02071738 for TSTF-426 as part of the original LAR review and approval (L-2014-160). (Author: M DiMarco)
Revision 12 - Incorporated PCR 02071738 for TSTF-426 as part of the original LAR review and approval (L-2014-160). (Author: M DiMarco)
Revision 11 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency c ontrol Program. (Aut hor: K. Frehafer)
Revision 11 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 10 - Incorporated PCR 1948027 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR  
Revision 10 - Incorporated PCR 1948027 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)
 
Revision             Approved By             Approval Date     UNIT #           UNIT 2 DATE 0               R.G. West                 08/30/01       DOCT         PROCEDURE DOCN         Section 3/4.4 SYS 17               R. Wright                 07/07/16       STATUS       COMPLETED REV                 17
====4.0.4. (Author====
                                                                                                                                                                                                # OF PGS
N. Elmore) Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2       DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE       DOCN Section 3/4.4 SYS   17 R. Wright 07/07/16 STATUS COMPLETED REV 17       # OF PGS FOR INFORMATION ONLY Before use, verify revision and change documentation (if applicable) with a controlled index or document.
DATE VERIFIED__________
INITIAL__________
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 2 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  TABLE OF CONTENTS  SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.4 ............................................................................. 3 3/4.4 REACTOR C OOLANT SYSTEM ............................................................. 3 BASES ............................................................................................................... 3 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION ... 3
 
3/4.4.2 SAFET Y VALVES ........................................................................... 6 3/4.4.3 PRE SSURIZER ............................................................................... 7 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY ........................... 10 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLAN T SYSTEM LEAKAGE ................................. 19 3/4.4.7 DELETED ...................................................................................... 34 3/4.4.8 SPECIFIC ACTIVITY ..................................................................... 34 3/4.4.9 PRESSURE/TEMPER ATURE LIMITS .......................................... 36 3/4.4.10 REACTOR COOLAN T SYSTEM VENTS ...................................... 38 TABLE B 3/4.4-1 REACTOR VESSEL TOUGHNE SS ................................. 39 3/4.4.11 STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY .......................................................... 40
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 3 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.4 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM BASES 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT L OOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION The plant is designed to operate wit h both reactor coolant loops and associated reactor coolant pumps in operation, and maintain DNBR above the DNBR limit during all normal operati ons and anticipated tr ansients. In MODES 1 and 2 with one reactor coolant loop not in operation, this specification requires that the plant be in at least HO T STANDBY within 1 hour. In MODE 3, a single reactor coolant loop provides sufficient heat removal capability for removing decay heat; however, single failure considerations require that two loops be OPERABLE.
In MODE 4, and in MODE 5 with reactor coolant loops filled, a single reactor coolant loop or shutdown cooling l oop provides sufficient heat removal capability for removing decay heat; but single failure considerations require that at least two loops (either s hutdown cooling or RCS) be OPERABLE. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.
In MODE 5 with reactor coolant loops not filled, a single shutdown cooling loop provides sufficient heat removal capability for removing decay heat; but single failure considerations and the unavai lability of the st eam generators as a heat removing component, require that at least two shutdown cooling loops be OPERABLE. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.
The operation of one reactor coolant pump or one shutdown cooling pump provides adequate flow to ensure mixing, prevent stratification and produce


gradual reactivity changes during boron concentration reductions in the Reactor Coolant System. The reactivity change rate associated with boron reductions will, therefore, be within the capability of operator recognition and control. If no coolant loops are in operation during shutdown operations, suspending the introduction of coolant into the RCS with boron concentration less than required to meet the minimum SDM of LC O 3.1.1.1 or 3.1.1.2 is required to assure continued safe operation. Intr oduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentra tion greater than what would be required in the RCS for minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation.
SECTION NO.:                                                                                                  PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:           TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                  BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                                                     2 of 40 REVISION NO.:                          REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                                      ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                                      PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.4 ............................................................................. 3 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ............................................................. 3 BASES ............................................................................................................... 3 3/4.4.1     REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION ... 3 3/4.4.2    SAFETY VALVES ........................................................................... 6 3/4.4.3    PRESSURIZER ............................................................................... 7 3/4.4.5    STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY ........................... 10 3/4.4.6    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE ................................. 19 3/4.4.7    DELETED ...................................................................................... 34 3/4.4.8    SPECIFIC ACTIVITY ..................................................................... 34 3/4.4.9    PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITS .......................................... 36 3/4.4.10    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM VENTS ...................................... 38 TABLE B 3/4.4-1           REACTOR VESSEL TOUGHNESS ................................. 39 3/4.4.11    STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY .......................................................... 40
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 4 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT L OOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)
If only one required shutdown cooling tr ain is OPERABLE and in operation and no required RCS loops are OPERABLE, redundancy for heat removal is lost and the plant must be placed in a configuration that minimizes overall plant risk. This redundancy is obta ined by making at least one steam generator available for decay heat remova l via natural circulation because: 1. MODE 4 operation poses overall lower risk of core damage and large early radiation release than does MODE 5 (reference CE


NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justif ication for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). This is particularly true with shutdown cooling impaired. 2. In MODE 4, RCS and steam generator conditions may be maintained such that failure of the operatin g shutdown cooling train may be mitigated by natural circulation h eat removal through one or more steam generators. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in MODE 4 is similar to or lower than MODE 5 (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). However, voluntary entry into MODE 5 may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LC O 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the result s, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                        3 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.4 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM BASES 3/4.4.1      REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION The plant is designed to operate with both reactor coolant loops and associated reactor coolant pumps in operation, and maintain DNBR above the DNBR limit during all normal operations and anticipated transients. In MODES 1 and 2 with one reactor coolant loop not in operation, this specification requires that the plant be in at least HOT STANDBY within 1 hour.
In MODE 3, a single reactor coolant loop provides sufficient heat removal capability for removing decay heat; however, single failure considerations require that two loops be OPERABLE.
In MODE 4, and in MODE 5 with reactor coolant loops filled, a single reactor coolant loop or shutdown cooling loop provides sufficient heat removal capability for removing decay heat; but single failure considerations require that at least two loops (either shutdown cooling or RCS) be OPERABLE.
Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.
In MODE 5 with reactor coolant loops not filled, a single shutdown cooling loop provides sufficient heat removal capability for removing decay heat; but single failure considerations and the unavailability of the steam generators as a heat removing component, require that at least two shutdown cooling loops be OPERABLE. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.
The operation of one reactor coolant pump or one shutdown cooling pump provides adequate flow to ensure mixing, prevent stratification and produce gradual reactivity changes during boron concentration reductions in the Reactor Coolant System. The reactivity change rate associated with boron reductions will, therefore, be within the capability of operator recognition and control.
If no coolant loops are in operation during shutdown operations, suspending the introduction of coolant into the RCS with boron concentration less than required to meet the minimum SDM of LCO 3.1.1.1 or 3.1.1.2 is required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than what would be required in the RCS for minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation.


appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       4 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 5 of 40 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.1       REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
If only one required shutdown cooling train is OPERABLE and in operation and no required RCS loops are OPERABLE, redundancy for heat removal is lost and the plant must be placed in a configuration that minimizes overall plant risk. This redundancy is obtained by making at least one steam generator available for decay heat removal via natural circulation because:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT L OOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)
: 1.      MODE 4 operation poses overall lower risk of core damage and large early radiation release than does MODE 5 (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). This is particularly true with shutdown cooling impaired.
The restriction on starting a reactor c oolant pump in MODES 4 and 5, with two idle loops and one or more RCS co ld leg temperatures less than or equal to that specified in Table 3.4-3 is provided to prevent RCS pressure transients, caused by ener gy additions from the secondary system from exceeding the limits of Appendix G to 10 CFR 50.
: 2.      In MODE 4, RCS and steam generator conditions may be maintained such that failure of the operating shutdown cooling train may be mitigated by natural circulation heat removal through one or more steam generators.
The RCS will be protected against overpressure transients by (1) sizing each PORV to mitigate the pressure transient of an inadvertent safety injection actuation in a water-solid RCS with pressurizer heaters energized, (2) restricting starting of the RCPs to when the secondary water temperat ure of each steam generator is less than 40F above each of the RCS cold leg temperatures, (3) using SDCRVs to mitigate RCP start transients and the transients caused by inadvertent SIAS actuation and charging water, and (4) rendering o ne HPSI pump inoperable when the RCS is at low temperatures. Shutdown Cooling System piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the required shutdown cooling loops and may al so prevent water hammer, pump cavitation, and pumping of non-condensible gas into the reactor vessel. Selection of Shutdown Cooling Syst em locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including
Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in MODE 4 is similar to or lower than MODE 5 (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001).
However, voluntary entry into MODE 5 may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.


piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The desi gn review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become s ources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration. Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions. The Shutdown Cooling System is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumula ted gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible lo cation (or the volu me of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the sucti on or discharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the Shutdown Cooling System is not rendered inoper able by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met. Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                  BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                      5 of 40 REVISION NO.:                        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 6 of 40 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.1      REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
The restriction on starting a reactor coolant pump in MODES 4 and 5, with two idle loops and one or more RCS cold leg temperatures less than or equal to that specified in Table 3.4-3 is provided to prevent RCS pressure transients, caused by energy additions from the secondary system from exceeding the limits of Appendix G to 10 CFR 50. The RCS will be protected against overpressure transients by (1) sizing each PORV to mitigate the pressure transient of an inadvertent safety injection actuation in a water-solid RCS with pressurizer heaters energized, (2) restricting starting of the RCPs to when the secondary water temperature of each steam generator is less than 40F above each of the RCS cold leg temperatures, (3) using SDCRVs to mitigate RCP start transients and the transients caused by inadvertent SIAS actuation and charging water, and (4) rendering one HPSI pump inoperable when the RCS is at low temperatures.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT L OOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)
Shutdown Cooling System piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the required shutdown cooling loops and may also prevent water hammer, pump cavitation, and pumping of non-condensible gas into the reactor vessel.
Shutdown Cooling System locations su sceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found, the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location. Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of su sceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or
Selection of Shutdown Cooling System locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The design review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become sources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration. Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.
The Shutdown Cooling System is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumulated gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible location (or the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the Shutdown Cooling System is not rendered inoperable by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met.
Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.


environmental conditions, plant configurat ion, or personnel safety concerns.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
For these locations, alternative methods (e
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                  BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                        6 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible loca tions where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The a ccuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be  
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.1      REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)
Shutdown Cooling System locations susceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found, the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location. Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of susceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or environmental conditions, plant configuration, or personnel safety concerns.
For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible locations where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The accuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.
SR 4.4.1.3.4 is modified by a Note that states the Surveillance Requirement is not required to be performed until 12 hours after entering MODE 4. In a rapid shutdown, there may be insufficient time to verify all susceptible locations prior to entering MODE 4.
The Surveillance Frequency Control Program frequency for ensuring locations are sufficiently filled with water takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the SDC System piping and the procedural controls governing system operation.
3/4.4.2      SAFETY VALVES The pressurizer code safety valves operate to prevent the RCS from being pressurized above its Safety Limit of 2750 psia. Each safety valve is designed to relieve 212,182 lbs per hour of saturated steam at the valve setpoint. The relief capacity of a single safety valve is adequate to relieve any overpressure condition which could occur during shutdown. In the event that no safety valves are OPERABLE, an operating shutdown cooling loop, connected to the RCS, provides overpressure relief capability and will prevent RCS overpressurization. In addition, the Overpressure Protection System provides a diverse means of protection against RCS overpressurization at low temperatures.


sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SR 4.4.1.3.4 is modified by a Note that states the Surveillance Requirement is not required to be performed until 12 hours after entering MODE 4. In a rapid shutdown, there may be insufficient time to verify all susceptible locations prior to entering MODE 4. The Surveillance Frequency Control Program frequency for ensuring locations are sufficiently filled with wate r takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the SDC System piping and the procedural controls governing system operation
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       7 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
. 3/4.4.2 SAFETY VALVES The pressurizer code safety valves operate to prevent the RCS from being pressurized above its Safety Limit of 2750 psia. Each safety valve is
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.2       SAFETY VALVES (continued)
 
designed to relieve 212,182 lbs per hour of saturated steam at the valve
 
setpoint. The relief capacity of a singl e safety valve is adequate to relieve any overpressure condition which could occur during shutdown. In the event that no safety valves are OPERABLE, an operating shutdown cooling loop, connected to the RCS, provides overpressure relief capability and will
 
prevent RCS overpressurization. In addition, the Overpressure Protection System provides a diverse m eans of protection against RCS overpressurization at low temperatures.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 7 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.2 SAFETY VALVES (continued)
During operation, all pressurizer code safety valves must be OPERABLE to prevent the RCS from being pressurized above its safety limit of 2750 psia.
During operation, all pressurizer code safety valves must be OPERABLE to prevent the RCS from being pressurized above its safety limit of 2750 psia.
The combined relief capacity of these valv es is sufficient to limit the system pressure to within its Safe ty Limit of 2750 psia following a complete loss of turbine generator load while operat ing at RATED THERMAL POWER and assuming no reactor trip until the first R eactor Protective Syst em trip setpoint (Pressurizer Pressure-High) is reached (i.e., no credit is taken for a direct reactor trip on the loss of turbine) and also assuming no operation of the pressurizer power-operated relie f valve or steam dump valves. Surveillance Requirements are spec ified in the INSERVICE TESTING PROGRAM. Pressurizer code safety va lves are to be tested in accordance with the requirements of Section XI of the ASME Code, which provides the activities and the frequency necessa ry to satisfy the Surveillance Requirements. No additional requirement s are specified.
The combined relief capacity of these valves is sufficient to limit the system pressure to within its Safety Limit of 2750 psia following a complete loss of turbine generator load while operating at RATED THERMAL POWER and assuming no reactor trip until the first Reactor Protective System trip setpoint (Pressurizer Pressure-High) is reached (i.e., no credit is taken for a direct reactor trip on the loss of turbine) and also assuming no operation of the pressurizer power-operated relief valve or steam dump valves.
The pressurizer code safety valve as-found setpoint is 2500 psia +/- 3% for OPERABILITY; however, the valves are reset to 2500 psia  
Surveillance Requirements are specified in the INSERVICE TESTING PROGRAM. Pressurizer code safety valves are to be tested in accordance with the requirements of Section XI of the ASME Code, which provides the activities and the frequency necessary to satisfy the Surveillance Requirements. No additional requirements are specified.
+/- 1% during the Surveillance to allow for drift. The LC O is expressed in units of psig for consistency with implementing procedures.
The pressurizer code safety valve as-found setpoint is 2500 psia +/- 3% for OPERABILITY; however, the valves are reset to 2500 psia +/- 1% during the Surveillance to allow for drift. The LCO is expressed in units of psig for consistency with implementing procedures.
3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER A OPERABLE pressurizer provides pressu re control for the Reactor Coolant System during operations with both forced reactor coolant flow and with natural circulation flow.
3/4.4.3       PRESSURIZER A OPERABLE pressurizer provides pressure control for the Reactor Coolant System during operations with both forced reactor coolant flow and with natural circulation flow. The minimum water level in the pressurizer assures the pressurizer heaters, which are required to achieve and maintain pressure control, remain covered with water to prevent failure, which could occur if the heaters were energized uncovered. The maximum water level in the pressurizer ensures that this parameter is maintained within the envelope of operation assumed in the safety analysis. The maximum water level also ensures that the RCS is not a hydraulically solid system and that a steam bubble will be provided to accommodate pressure surges during operation.
The minimum water level in the pressurizer assures the pressurizer heaters, which are requir ed to achieve and maintain pressure control, remain covered with water to pr event failure, which could occur if the heaters were energized uncovered. The maximum water level in the  
The steam bubble also protects the pressurizer code safety valves against water relief. The requirement to verify that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency power sources is to ensure that the non-Class 1E heaters do not reduce the reliability of or overload the emergency power source. The requirement that a minimum number of pressurizer heaters be OPERABLE enhances the capability to control Reactor Coolant System pressure and establish and maintain natural circulation.
 
pressurizer ensures that this parameter is maintained within the envelope of operation assumed in the safety analysis. The maximum water level also  
 
ensures that the RCS is not a hydrau lically solid system and that a steam bubble will be provided to accommodate pressure surges during operation.
The steam bubble also protects the pressurizer c ode safety valves against water relief. The requirement to verify that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal conc urrent with a loss of offs ite power the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency power sources is to ensure that the non-Class 1E heaters do not reduce the reliability of or overload the emergency power source. The requirement that a minimum number of pressurizer heaters be O PERABLE enhances the capability to control Reactor Coolant System pressure and establish and maintain natural circulation.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 8 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER (continued)
If two required groups of pressurizer heater s are inoperable, restoring at least one group of pressurizer heat ers to OPERABLE status is required within 24 hours. The Action is modified by a No te stating it is not applicable if the second group of required pressurized heaters is intentionally declared inoperable. The Action is not int ended for voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. T he Action is only applicable if one group of required pressurized heaters is inoperable for any reason and the second group of required pressurized heat ers is discovered to be inoperable, or if both groups of required pressurized heaters are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. If both required groups of pressurizer heaters


are inoperable, the pressurizer heaters ma y not be available to help maintain subcooling in the RCS loops during a natural circulat ion cooldown following a loss of offsite power. The inoperability of two groups of required pressurizer heaters during the 24-hours Allowed Ou tage Time has been shown to be acceptable based on the infrequent us e of the Action and the small incremental effects on pl ant risk (Reference 1). References
SECTION NO.:                                                                  PAGE:
: 1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, "Justification for Risk-Informed M odifications to Selected technical Specifications fo r Conditions Leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown," Revision 2, August 2010.  
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                      8 of 40 REVISION NO.:                    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.3      PRESSURIZER (continued)
If two required groups of pressurizer heaters are inoperable, restoring at least one group of pressurizer heaters to OPERABLE status is required within 24 hours. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second group of required pressurized heaters is intentionally declared inoperable. The Action is not intended for voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one group of required pressurized heaters is inoperable for any reason and the second group of required pressurized heaters is discovered to be inoperable, or if both groups of required pressurized heaters are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. If both required groups of pressurizer heaters are inoperable, the pressurizer heaters may not be available to help maintain subcooling in the RCS loops during a natural circulation cooldown following a loss of offsite power. The inoperability of two groups of required pressurizer heaters during the 24-hours Allowed Outage Time has been shown to be acceptable based on the infrequent use of the Action and the small incremental effects on plant risk (Reference 1).
References
: 1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected technical Specifications for Conditions Leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown, Revision 2, August 2010.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 9 of 40 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                         9 of 40 REVISION NO.:                    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.4       PORV BLOCK VALVES The power-operated relief valves (PORVs) and steam bubble function to relieve RCS pressure during all design transients up to and including the design step load decrease with steam dump. Operation of the PORVs in conjunction with a reactor trip on a Pressurizer Pressure-High signal minimizes the undesirable opening of the spring-loaded pressurizer code safety valves. The opening of the PORVs fulfills no safety-related function and no credit is taken for their operation in the safety analysis for MODE 1, 2, or 3.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.4 PORV BLOCK VALVES The power-operated relief valves (PORVs) and steam bubble function to relieve RCS pressure during all desi gn transients up to and including the design step load decrease with steam dum
Each PORV has a remotely operated block valve to provide a positive shutoff capability should a relief valve become inoperable. Since it is impractical and undesirable to actually open the PORVs to demonstrate their reclosing, it becomes necessary to verify OPERABILITY of the PORV block valves to ensure capability to isolate a malfunctioning PORV. As the PORVs are pilot operated and require some system pressure to operate, it is impractical to test them with the block valve closed.
: p. Operation of the PORVs in conjunction with a reactor trip on a Pressurizer Pressure-High signal minimizes the undesirable opening of t he spring-loaded pressurizer code safety valves. The opening of the PORVs fulfills no safety-related function  
The PORVs are sized to provide low temperature overpressure protection (LTOP). Since both PORVs must be OPERABLE when used for LTOP, both block valves will be open during operation with the LTOP range. As the PORV capacity required to perform the LTOP function is excessive for operation in MODE 1, 2, or 3, it is necessary that the operation of more than one PORV be precluded during these MODES. Thus, one block valve must be shut during MODES 1, 2, and 3.


and no credit is taken for their operation in the safety analysis for MODE 1, 2, or 3. Each PORV has a remotely operated block valve to provide a positive shutoff capability should a relief valve become inop erable. Since it is impractical and undesirable to actually open the PORVs to demonstrate their reclosing, it becomes necessary to verify OPERABILITY of the PORV block valves to ensure capability to isolate a malfuncti oning PORV. As the PORVs are pilot operated and require some system pressure to operate, it is impractical to test them with the block valve closed.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
The PORVs are sized to provide low temperature overpressure protection (LTOP). Since both PORVs must be OPERABLE when used for LTOP, both block valves will be open during operation with the LTOP range. As the PORV capacity required to perform the LTOP function is excessive for operation in MODE 1, 2, or 3, it is nec essary that the operation of more than one PORV be precluded during these MODES. Thus, one block valve must be shut during MODES 1, 2, and 3.
TITLE:       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       10 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
SECTION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5       STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 10 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY Background Steam generator (SG) tubes are small diameter, thin walled tubes that carry primary coolant through the primary to secondary heat exchangers. The SG tubes have a number of impor tant safety functions.
SG tubes are an integral part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) and, as such, are


relied on to maintain the primary system's pressure and inventory. The SG tubes isolate the radioactive fission produ cts in the primary coolant from the secondary system. In addition, as par t of the RCPB, t he SG tubes are unique in that they act as the heat transfer surfac e between the primary and secondary systems to remove heat from the primary system. This Specification addresses only the RCPB integrity functi on of the SG. The SG heat removal function is addressed by LCO 3.4.1.1, "Reactor Coolant Loops  
===Background===
Steam generator (SG) tubes are small diameter, thin walled tubes that carry primary coolant through the primary to secondary heat exchangers. The SG tubes have a number of important safety functions. SG tubes are an integral part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) and, as such, are relied on to maintain the primary system's pressure and inventory. The SG tubes isolate the radioactive fission products in the primary coolant from the secondary system. In addition, as part of the RCPB, the SG tubes are unique in that they act as the heat transfer surface between the primary and secondary systems to remove heat from the primary system. This Specification addresses only the RCPB integrity function of the SG. The SG heat removal function is addressed by LCO 3.4.1.1, "Reactor Coolant Loops and Coolant Circulation, Startup and Power Operation," LCO 3.4.1.2, "Hot Standby," LCO 3.4.1.3, "Hot Shutdown," LCO 3.4.1.4.1, "Cold Shutdown
              - Loops Filled," and LCO 3.4.1.4.2, "Cold Shutdown - Loops Not Filled."
SG tube integrity means that the tubes are capable of performing their intended RCPB safety function consistent with the licensing basis, including applicable regulatory requirements.
SG tubing is subject to a variety of degradation mechanism. SG tubes may experience tube degradation related to corrosion phenomena, such as wastage, pitting, intergranular attack, and stress corrosion cracking, along with other mechanically induced phenomena such as denting and wear.
These degradation mechanisms can impair tube integrity if they are not managed effectively. The SG performance criteria are used to manage SG tube degradation.
Specification 6.8.4.l, "Steam Generator (SG) Program," requires that a program be established and implemented to ensure that SG tube integrity is maintained. Pursuant to Specification 6.8.4.l, tube integrity is maintained when the SG performance criteria are met. There are three SG performance criteria: structural integrity, accident induced leakage, and operational leakage. The SG performance criteria are described in Specification 6.8.4.l.
Meeting the SG performance criteria provides reasonable assurance of maintaining tube integrity at normal and accident conditions.


and Coolant Circulation, Startup and Power Operation," LCO 3.4.1.2, "Hot Standby," LCO 3.4.1.3, "Hot Shutdown," LCO 3.4.1.4.1, "Cold Shutdown - Loops Filled," and LCO 3.4.1.4.2, "Cold Shutdown - Loops Not Filled." SG tube integrity means that the tubes are c apable of performing their intended RCPB safety function consistent with the licensing basis, including applicable regulatory requirements.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SG tubing is subject to a variety of degradation mechanism. SG tubes may experience tube degradation related to corrosion phenomena, such as wastage, pitting, intergranular attack, and stress corrosion cracking, along with other mechanically induced phenom ena such as denting and wear. These degradation mechanisms can impair tube integrity if they are not managed effectively. The SG performance criteria are used to manage SG tube degradation.
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       11 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
Specification 6.8.4.l, "S team Generator (SG) Pr ogram," requires that a program be established and implemented to ensure t hat SG tube integrity is maintained. Pursuant to Specification 6.8.4.l, tube integrity is maintained when the SG performance criteria are met. There are th ree SG performance criteria: structural integrity, a ccident induced leakage, and operational leakage. The SG performance criteria ar e described in Specif ication 6.8.4.l.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5       STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
Meeting the SG performance criteria provides reasonable assurance of maintaining tube integrity at nor mal and accident conditions.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 11 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
Background (continued)
Background (continued)
Specification 6.8.4.l has two parts to address the replacement SG and original SG designs. Specification 6.
Specification 6.8.4.l has two parts to address the replacement SG and original SG designs. Specification 6.8.4.l.1. applies to the replacement SG design. TS 6.8.4.l.2 applies to the original SGs and contains requirements such as a sleeving repair method, alternate repair criteria and additional inspection requirements, which apply only to the original SG design and can be removed following SG replacement.
8.4.l.1. applies to the replacement SG design. TS 6.8.4.l.2 applies to the original SGs and contains requirements such as a sleeving repair method, alte rnate repair criteria and additional inspection requirements, which apply only to the original SG design and can be removed following SG replacement.
The processes used to meet the SG performance criteria are defined by the Steam Generator Program Guidelines (Ref. 1).
The processes used to meet the SG perfo rmance criteria are defined by the Steam Generator Program Guidelines (Ref. 1).
Applicable Safety Analyses The steam generator tube rupture (SGTR) accident is the limiting design basis event for SG tubes and avoiding a SGTR is the basis for this Specification. The analysis of a SGTR event assumes a bounding primary-to-secondary leakage rate equal to the operational leakage rate limits in LCO 3.4.6.2, "Reactor Coolant System Operational Leakage," plus the leakage rate associated with a double-ended rupture of a single tube.
Applicable Safety Analyses  
The accident analysis for a SGTR assumes that contaminated secondary fluid is released via the main steam safety valves and/or atmospheric dump valves. The majority of the activity released to the atmosphere results from the tube rupture.
The analysis for design basis accidents and transients other than a SGTR assume the SG tubes retain their structural integrity (i.e., they are assumed not to rupture). In these analyses the activity in the steam discharged to the atmosphere is based on two sources: 1) the total primary-to-secondary leakage from all SGs of 0.5 gpm total and 0.25 gpm through any one SG as a result of accident induced conditions and 2) the pre-existing secondary side fluid inventory. For accidents that do not involve fuel damage, the primary coolant activity is assumed to be equal to the limits in LCO 3.4.8, "Reactor Coolant System Specific Activity," and the secondary coolant system activity is assumed to be equal to the limits in LCO 3.7.1.4, Plant Systems - Activity."
For accidents that assume fuel damage, the primary coolant activity is a function of the amount of activity released from the damaged fuel. The dose consequences of these events are within the limits of GDC 19 (Ref. 2) and the requirements of 10 CFR 50.67 (Ref. 7).
Steam generator tube integrity satisfies Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).


The steam generator tube rupture (SGTR) accident is the limiting design basis event for SG tubes and avoiding a SGTR is the basis for this Specification. The analysis of a SGTR event assumes a bounding primary-to-secondary leakage rate equal to the operational leakage rate limits in LCO 3.4.6.2, "Reactor Coolant S ystem Operational Leakage," plus the leakage rate associated with a double-ended rupture of a single tube. The accident analysis for a SGTR a ssumes that contaminated secondary fluid is released via the main steam sa fety valves and/or atmospheric dump valves. The majority of the activity released to the atmosphere results from the tube rupture. The analysis for design basis accidents and transients other than a SGTR assume the SG tubes retain their structural integrity (i.e
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
., they are assumed not to rupture). In thes e analyses the activity in the steam discharged to the atmosphere is based on two sources:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       12 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
: 1) the total primary-to-secondary leakage from all SGs of 0.5 gpm total and 0.25 gpm through any one SG as a result of accident induced conditions and 2) the pre-existing secondary side fluid inventory. For accidents that do not involve fuel da mage, the primary coolant activity is assumed to be equal to the limits in LCO 3.4.8, "Reactor Coolant System Specific Activity," and the secondary coolant system activity is assumed to be equal to the limits in LC O 3.7.1.4, "Plant Systems - Activity." For accidents that assume fuel damage, the primary coolant activity is a function of the amount of ac tivity released from the damaged fuel. The dose consequences of these events are withi n the limits of GDC 19 (Ref. 2) and the requirements of 10 CFR 50.67 (Ref. 7).
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5       STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
Steam generator tube in tegrity satisfies Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 12 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO)
Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO)
The LCO requires that SG tube integr ity be maintained. The LCO also requires that all SG tubes that sati sfy the repair criter ia be plugged or repaired in accordance with t he Steam Generator Program.
The LCO requires that SG tube integrity be maintained. The LCO also requires that all SG tubes that satisfy the repair criteria be plugged or repaired in accordance with the Steam Generator Program.
During a SG inspection, any inspec ted tube that satisfies the Steam Generator Program repair cr iteria is repaired or removed from service by plugging. If a tube was determined to sa tisfy the repair criteria but was not plugged or repaired, the tube may still have tube integrity. Tube repair (i.e., sleeving) is applicable only to the original SGs.  
During a SG inspection, any inspected tube that satisfies the Steam Generator Program repair criteria is repaired or removed from service by plugging. If a tube was determined to satisfy the repair criteria but was not plugged or repaired, the tube may still have tube integrity. Tube repair (i.e., sleeving) is applicable only to the original SGs.
In the context of this Specification, a SG tube for the replacement SGs is defined as the entire length of the tube, including the tube wall, between the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube inlet and the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube outlet. For the original SGs, when the alternate repair criteria in TS Section 6.8.4.l.2.c.4 are applied a SG tube is defined as the length of the tube, including the tube wall and any repairs made to it, between 10.3 inches below the bottom of the hot leg expansion transition or top of the tubesheet (whichever is lower) and the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube outlet. If a portion of a tube sleeve extends below 10.3 inches from the bottom of the hot leg expansion transition or the top of the tubesheet (whichever is lower) a SG tube is defined as the length of the tube between the bottom of the sleeve to the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube outlet. The tube-to-tubesheet weld is not considered part of the tube.
A SG tube has tube integrity when it satisfies the SG performance criteria.
The SG performance criteria are defined in Specification 6.8.4.l., "Steam Generator Program," and describe acceptable SG tube performance. The Steam Generator Program also provides the evaluation process for determining conformance with the SG performance criteria.
There are three SG performance criteria: structural integrity, accident induced leakage, and operational leakage. Failure to meet any one of these criteria is considered failure to meet the LCO.


In the context of this Specification, a SG tube for the replacement SGs is defined as the entire length of the tube, including the tube wall, between the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube inlet and the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube outlet. For the origin al SGs, when the alternat e repair criteria in TS Section 6.8.4.l.2.c.4 ar e applied a SG tube is defined as the length of the tube, including the tube wall and any r epairs made to it, between 10.3 inches below the bottom of the hot leg expans ion transition or t op of the tubesheet (whichever is lower) and t he tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube outlet. If a portion of a tube sleeve extends below 10.3 inches from the bo ttom of the hot leg expansion transition or the top of the tubesheet (w hichever is lower) a SG tube is defined as the length of the t ube between the bottom of the sleeve to the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube outlet. The tube-to-tubesheet weld is not considered part of the tube.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
A SG tube has tube integrit y when it satisfies the SG performance criteria.
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                      13 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
The SG performance criteria are defined in Specific ation 6.8.4.l., "Steam Generator Program," and describe acceptable SG tube performance. The Steam Generator Program also prov ides the evaluation process for determining conformance with the SG performance criteria.  
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5      STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO) (continued)
The structural integrity performance criterion provides a margin of safety against tube burst or collapse under normal and accident conditions, and ensures structural integrity of the SG tubes under all anticipated transients included in the design specification. Tube burst is defined as, "The gross structural failure of the tube wall. The condition typically corresponds to an unstable opening displacement (e.g., opening area increased in response to constant pressure) accompanied by ductile (plastic) tearing of the tube material at the ends of the degradation." Tube collapse is defined as, "For the load displacement curve for a given structure, collapse occurs at the top of the load versus displacement curve where the slope of the curve becomes zero." The structural integrity performance criterion provides guidance on assessing loads that have a significant effect on burst or collapse. In that context, the term "significant" is defined as "An accident loading condition other than differential pressure is considered significant when the addition of such loads in the assessment of the structural integrity performance criterion could cause a lower structural limit or limiting burst/collapse condition to be established." For tube integrity evaluations, except for circumferential degradation, axial thermal loads are classified as secondary loads. For circumferential degradation, the classification of axial thermal loads as primary or secondary loads will be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. The division between primary and secondary classifications will be based on detailed analysis and/or testing.
Structural integrity requires that the primary membrane stress intensity in a tube not exceed the yield strength for all ASME Code, Section III, Service Level A (normal operating conditions) and Service Level B (upset or abnormal conditions) transients included in the design specification. This includes safety factors and applicable design basis loads based on ASME Code, Section III, Subsection NB (Ref. 4) and Draft Regulatory Guide 1.121 (Ref. 5).
The accident induced leakage performance criterion ensures that the primary-to-secondary leakage caused by a design basis accident, other than a SGTR, is within the accident analysis assumptions. The accident analysis assumes that accident induced leakage does not exceed 0.5 gpm total and 0.25 gpm through any one SG. The accident induced leakage rate includes any primary-to-secondary leakage existing prior to the accident in addition to primary-to-secondary leakage induced during the accident.


There are three SG performanc e criteria: structural int egrity, accident induced leakage, and operational leakage. Failure to meet any one of these criteria is considered failure to meet the LCO.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                     14 of 40 REVISION NO.:                     REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 13 of 40 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5       STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO) (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued) Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO) (continued)
The operational leakage performance criterion provides an observable indication of SG tube conditions during plant operation. The limit on operational leakage is contained in LCO 3.4.6.2, "Reactor Coolant System operational leakage," and limits primary-to-secondary leakage through any one SG to 150 gpd at room temperature. This limit is based on the assumption that a single crack leaking this amount would not propagate to a SGTR under the stress conditions of a LOCA or a main steam line break.
The structural integrity performance crit erion provides a margin of safety against tube burst or collapse under normal and accident conditions, and ensures structural integr ity of the SG tubes under all anticipated transients included in the design spec ification. Tube burst is defined as, "The gross structural failure of the tube wall. The condition typically corresponds to an unstable opening displacement (e.g., opening area increased in response to
If this amount of leakage is due to more than one crack, the cracks are very small, and the above assumption is conservative.
 
Applicability SG tube integrity is challenged when the pressure differential across the tubes is large. Large differential pressures across SG tubes can only be experienced in POWER OPERATION, STARTUP, HOT STANDBY and HOT SHUTDOWN.
constant pressure) accompanied by duc tile (plastic) tearing of the tube material at the ends of the degradation."  Tube collapse is defined as, "For the load displacement curve for a given structure, collapse occurs at the top of the load versus displacem ent curve where the slope of the curve becomes zero."  The structural int egrity performance criterion provides guidance on assessing loads that hav e a significant effect on burst or collapse. In that context, the term "si gnificant" is defined as "An accident loading condition other than differential pressure is considered significant when the addition of such loads in the a ssessment of the structural integrity performance criterion could cause a lo wer structural limit or limiting burst/collapse condition to be established."  For tube integrity evaluations, except for circumferential degradation, axial thermal loads are classified as
RCS conditions are far less challenging in COLD SHUTDOWN and REFUELING than during POWER OPERATION, STARTUP, HOT STANDBY and HOT SHUTDOWN. In COLD SHUTDOWN and REFUELING, primary-to-secondary differential pressure is low, resulting in lower stresses and reduced potential for leakage.
 
secondary loads. For circumferential degrad ation, the classification of axial thermal loads as primary or secondary loads will be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. The division between primary and secondary classifications will be based on detailed analys is and/or testing.
Structural integrity requir es that the primary membra ne stress intensity in a tube not exceed the yield strength for all ASME Code, Section III, Service Level A (normal operating conditions) and Service Level B (upset or abnormal conditions) transients included in the design specification. This
 
includes safety factors and applicable design basis loads based on ASME Code, Section III, Subsection NB (Re
: f. 4) and Draft Regulatory Guide 1.121 (Ref. 5). The accident induced leakage perform ance criterion ens ures that the primary-to-secondary leakage caused by a design basis accident, other than a SGTR, is within the accident analysis assumptions. The accident analysis assumes that accident induced leak age does not exceed 0.5 gpm total and 0.25 gpm through any one SG. The accident induced leakage rate includes
 
any primary-to-secondary leak age existing prior to the accident in addition to primary-to-secondary leakage induced during the accident.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 14 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued) Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO) (continued)
The operational leakage performance criterion provides an observable indication of SG tube conditions duri ng plant operation. The limit on operational leakage is contained in LCO 3.4.6.2, "Reactor Coolant System operational leakage," and limits primary-to-secondar y leakage through any one SG to 150 gpd at room temperature. This limit is based on the assumption that a single crack leaking this amount would not propagate to a SGTR under the stress conditions of a LOCA or a main steam line break.
If this amount of leakage is due to more than one crack, the cracks are very small, and the above assumption is conservative. Applicability  
 
SG tube integrity is challenged when the pressure differential across the tubes is large. Large differential pressures across SG tubes can only be experienced in POWER OPERATION, STARTUP, HOT STANDBY and HOT SHUTDOWN. RCS conditions are far less challenging in COLD SHUTDOWN and REFUELING than during POWER OPERATION, STARTUP, HOT STANDBY and HOT SHUTDOWN. In COLD SHUTDOWN and REFUELING, primary-to-secondary differential pressure is low, resulting in lower stresses and reduced potential for leakage.
ACTIONS The ACTIONS are modified by a Note clarifying that the CONDITIONS may be entered independently for each SG tube. This is acceptable because the required ACTIONS provide appropriate compensatory actions for each affected SG tube. Complying with the required ACTIONS may allow for continued operation, and subsequently affected SG tubes are governed by subsequent Condition entry and application of associated required ACTIONS.
ACTIONS The ACTIONS are modified by a Note clarifying that the CONDITIONS may be entered independently for each SG tube. This is acceptable because the required ACTIONS provide appropriate compensatory actions for each affected SG tube. Complying with the required ACTIONS may allow for continued operation, and subsequently affected SG tubes are governed by subsequent Condition entry and application of associated required ACTIONS.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 15 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued) ACTIONS (continued) a.1 and a.2 ACTIONS a.1 and a.2 apply if it is discovered that one or more SG tubes examined in an inservice inspection satisfy the tube repair cr iteria but were not plugged or repaired in accordance with the Steam Gener ator Program as required by Surveillance Requirem ent (SR) 4.4.5.2.
Tube repair (i.e., sleeving) is applicable only to the original SGs. An evaluation of SG tube integrity of the affe cted tube(s) must be made.
SG tube integrity is based on meeting the SG performance cr iteria described in the Steam Generator Program. T he SG repair criteria define limits on SG tube degradation that allow for flaw growth between inspections while still providing assurance that t he SG performance criteria will continue to be met.
In order to determine if a SG tube t hat should have been plugged or repaired has tube integrity, an eval uation must be completed that demonstrates that the SG performance criteria will continue to be met until the next refueling outage or SG tube inspection. The tube integrity determination is based on the estimated condition of the tube at the time the situation is discovered and


the estimated growth of the degradation pr ior to the next SG tube inspection.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
If it is determined that t ube integrity is not being maintained, ACTION b applies. An allowable completion time of sev en days is sufficient to complete the evaluation while minimizing the risk of plant operation with a SG tube that may not have tube integrity.  
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                  BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                      15 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5      STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
ACTIONS (continued) a.1 and a.2 ACTIONS a.1 and a.2 apply if it is discovered that one or more SG tubes examined in an inservice inspection satisfy the tube repair criteria but were not plugged or repaired in accordance with the Steam Generator Program as required by Surveillance Requirement (SR) 4.4.5.2. Tube repair (i.e., sleeving) is applicable only to the original SGs. An evaluation of SG tube integrity of the affected tube(s) must be made. SG tube integrity is based on meeting the SG performance criteria described in the Steam Generator Program. The SG repair criteria define limits on SG tube degradation that allow for flaw growth between inspections while still providing assurance that the SG performance criteria will continue to be met.
In order to determine if a SG tube that should have been plugged or repaired has tube integrity, an evaluation must be completed that demonstrates that the SG performance criteria will continue to be met until the next refueling outage or SG tube inspection. The tube integrity determination is based on the estimated condition of the tube at the time the situation is discovered and the estimated growth of the degradation prior to the next SG tube inspection.
If it is determined that tube integrity is not being maintained, ACTION b applies.
An allowable completion time of seven days is sufficient to complete the evaluation while minimizing the risk of plant operation with a SG tube that may not have tube integrity.
If the evaluation determines that the affected tube(s) have tube integrity, ACTION a.2 allows plant operation to continue until the next refueling outage or SG inspection provided the inspection interval continues to be supported by an operational assessment that reflects the affected tubes. However, the affected tube(s) must be plugged or repaired prior to entering HOT SHUTDOWN following the next refueling outage or SG inspection. This allowable completion time is acceptable since operation until the next inspection is supported by the operational assessment.


If the evaluation determines that the affected tube(s) have tube integrity, ACTION a.2 allows plant operation to c ontinue until the next refueling outage or SG inspection provided the inspection interval continues to be supported by an operational assessment that reflec ts the affected tubes. However, the affected tube(s) must be plugged or repaired prior to entering HOT SHUTDOWN following the next refueling outage or SG inspection. This allowable completion time is acceptable since operation until the next inspection is supported by the operational assessment.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       16 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 16 of 40 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5       STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
ACTIONS (continued) b.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued) ACTIONS (continued)
If the requirements and associated completion time of ACTION a are not met or if SG tube integrity is not being maintained, the reactor must be brought to HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and COLD SHUTDOWN within the next 30 hours. The allowable completion times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the desired plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.
: b. If the requirements and associated completion time of ACTION a are not met or if SG tube integrity is not being ma intained, the reactor must be brought to HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and COLD SHUTDOWN within the next 30 hours. The allowable completion times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the des ired plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. Surveillance Requirements SR 4.4.5.1 During shutdown periods t he SGs are inspected as required by this SR and the Steam Generator Pr ogram. NEI 97-06, "Steam Generator Program Guidelines" (Ref. 1), and its referenced EPRI Guidelines, establish the content of the Steam Generator Program. Use of the Steam Generator program ensures that t he inspection is appropriate and consistent with accepted industry practices. During SG inspections a condition moni toring assessment of the SG tubes is performed. The condition monitoring assessment determines the "as found" condition of the SG tubes. The purpose of the condition monitoring assessment is to ensure that the SG performance criteria have been met for the previous operating period.
Surveillance Requirements SR 4.4.5.1 During shutdown periods the SGs are inspected as required by this SR and the Steam Generator Program. NEI 97-06, "Steam Generator Program Guidelines" (Ref. 1), and its referenced EPRI Guidelines, establish the content of the Steam Generator Program. Use of the Steam Generator program ensures that the inspection is appropriate and consistent with accepted industry practices.
The Steam Generator Program determines the sc ope of the inspection and the methods used to determine whether t he tubes contain flaws satisfying the tube repair criteria. Inspection scope (i.e., which tubes or areas of tubing within the SG are to be inspected) is a function of existing and potential degradation locations. The Steam Generator Program also specifies the  
During SG inspections a condition monitoring assessment of the SG tubes is performed. The condition monitoring assessment determines the "as found" condition of the SG tubes. The purpose of the condition monitoring assessment is to ensure that the SG performance criteria have been met for the previous operating period.
The Steam Generator Program determines the scope of the inspection and the methods used to determine whether the tubes contain flaws satisfying the tube repair criteria. Inspection scope (i.e., which tubes or areas of tubing within the SG are to be inspected) is a function of existing and potential degradation locations. The Steam Generator Program also specifies the inspection methods to be used to find potential degradation. Inspection methods are a function of degradation morphology, non-destructive examination (NDE) technique capabilities, and inspection locations.


inspection methods to be used to fi nd potential degradation. Inspection methods are a function of degradati on morphology, non-destructive examination (NDE) technique capabilities, and in spection locations.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                         17 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 17 of 40 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5       STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
Surveillance Requirements (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued) Surveillance Requirements (continued)
The Steam Generator Program defines the frequency of SR 4.4.5.1.
The Steam Generator Program defines the freq uency of SR 4.4.5.1.
The frequency is determined by the operational assessment and other limits in the SG examination guidelines (Ref. 6). The Steam Generator Program uses information on existing degradations and growth rates to determine an inspection frequency that provides reasonable assurance that the tubing will meet the SG performance criteria at the next scheduled inspection.
The frequency is determined by the operational assessment and other limits in the SG examination gui delines (Ref. 6). The Steam Generator Program uses information on existing degradations and growth rates to determine an inspection frequency that provides reasonable assurance that the tubing will meet the SG performance criteria at the next scheduled inspection.
In addition, Specification 6.8.4.l contains prescriptive requirements concerning inspection intervals to provide added assurance that the SG performance criteria will be met between scheduled inspections.
In addition, Specification 6.8.4.l c ontains prescriptive requirements  
SR 4.4.5.2 During a SG inspection any inspected tube that satisfies the Steam Generator Program repair criteria is repaired or removed from service by plugging. The tube repair criteria delineated in Specification 6.8.4.I are intended to ensure that tubes accepted for continued service satisfy the SG performance criteria with allowance for error in the flaw size measurement and for future flaw growth. In addition, the tube repair criteria, in conjunction with other elements of the Steam Generator Program, ensure that the SG performance criteria will continue to be met until the next inspection of the subject tube(s). Reference 1 provides guidance for performing operational assessments to verify that the tubes remaining in service will continue to meet the SG performance criteria.
Steam generator tube repairs are only performed using approved repair methods as described in the Steam Generator Program (Specification 6.8.4.l.2.). Tube repair (i.e., sleeving) is applicable only to original SGs.
The frequency of prior to entering HOT SHUTDOWN following a SG tube inspection ensures that the Surveillance has been completed and all tubes meeting the repair criteria are plugged or repaired prior to subjecting the SG tubes to significant primary-to-secondary pressure differential.


concerning inspection intervals to provide added assurance that the SG performance criteria will be met between scheduled inspections. SR 4.4.5.2 During a SG inspection any inspected tube that satisfies the Steam Generator Program r epair criteria is repaired or removed from service by plugging. The tube repair criteria delineated in Specification 6.8.4.I are intended to ensure that tubes accepted for continued service satisfy the SG performance criteria with allowance for error in the flaw size measurement and for future flaw growth.
SECTION NO.:                                                              PAGE:
In addition, the tube repair criteria, in conjunction with other elements of t he Steam Generator Program, ensure that the SG performance criteria will continue to be met until the next inspection of the subject tube(s). Reference 1 provi des guidance for performing operational assessments to verify that the tubes re maining in service will continue to meet the SG performance criteria.
TITLE:   TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4              BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                 18 of 40 REVISION NO.:                  REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                          ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
Steam generator tube repai rs are only performed using approved repair methods as described in the Steam Generator Program (Specification 6.8.4.l.2.). Tube repair (i.e., sleeving) is applic able only to original SGs.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5       STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)
The frequency of prior to entering HOT SHUTDOWN following a SG tube inspection ensures that the Surveill ance has been completed and all tubes meeting the repair criteria are plugged or repaired pr ior to subjecting the SG tubes to significant primary-to-secondary pressure differential.
References
SECTION NO.:
: 1. NEI 97-06, "Steam Generator Program Guidelines"
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 18 of 40 REVISION NO.:
: 2. 10 CFR 50 Appendix A, GDC 19
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
: 3. Deleted
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued) References 1. NEI 97-06, "Steam Generator Program Guidelines" 2. 10 CFR 50 Appen dix A, GDC 19 3. Deleted
: 4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Subsection NB
: 4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section III, Subsection NB 5. Draft Regulatory Guide 1.121, "Bases for Plugging Degraded PWR Steam Generator Tubes," August 1976 6. EPRI "Pressurized Water Reacto r Steam Generator Examination Guidelines"
: 5. Draft Regulatory Guide 1.121, "Bases for Plugging Degraded PWR Steam Generator Tubes," August 1976
: 7. 10 CFR 50.67  
: 6. EPRI "Pressurized Water Reactor Steam Generator Examination Guidelines"
: 7. 10 CFR 50.67


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 19 of 40 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                         19 of 40 REVISION NO.:                    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE 3/4.4.6.1     LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS BACKGROUND GDC 30 of Appendix A to 10 CFR 50 requires means for detecting and, to the extent practical, identifying the location of the source of RCS LEAKAGE. Regulatory Guide 1.45, Revision 0, describes acceptable methods for selecting leakage detection systems. Leakage detection systems must have the capability to detect significant reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) degradation as soon after occurrence as practical to minimize the potential for propagation to a gross failure. Thus, an early indication or warning signal is necessary to permit proper evaluation of all unidentified LEAKAGE.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS BACKGROUND GDC 30 of Appendix A to 10 CFR 50 requires means for detecting and, to the extent practical, identifying t he location of the source of RCS LEAKAGE. Regulatory Guide 1.45, Re vision 0, describes acceptable methods for selecting leakage detection systems. Leakage detection systems must have the capability to det ect significant reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) degradation as soon after occurrence as  
The containment sump used to collect unidentified LEAKAGE is instrumented to alarm for increases in the normal flow rates.
The reactor coolant contains radioactivity that, when released to the containment, may be detected by radiation monitoring instrumentation.
Radioactivity detection systems are included for monitoring both particulate and gaseous activities, because of their sensitivities and rapid responses to RCS LEAKAGE.
Other indications may be used to detect an increase in unidentified LEAKAGE; however, they are not required to be OPERABLE by this LCO.
An increase in humidity of the containment atmosphere would indicate release of water vapor to the containment. Dew point temperature measurements can thus be used to monitor humidity levels of the containment atmosphere as an indicator of potential RCS LEAKAGE.
Since the humidity level is influenced by several factors, a quantitative evaluation of an indicated leakage rate by this means may be questionable and should be compared to observed increases in liquid flow into or from the containment sump. Humidity level monitoring is considered most useful as an indirect alarm or indication to alert the operator to a potential problem.
Humidity monitors are not required by this LCO.


practical to minimize the potential fo r propagation to a gross failure. Thus, an early indication or warning signal is necessary to permit proper evaluation of all unide ntified LEAKAGE.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
The containment sump used to co llect unidentifi ed LEAKAGE is instrumented to alarm for increases in the normal flow rates. The reactor coolant contains radioactivity that, when released to the
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       20 of 40 REVISION NO.:                    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
 
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1     LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
containment, may be detected by radi ation monitoring instrumentation.
Radioactivity detection systems are incl uded for monitoring both particulate and gaseous activities, because of their sensitivities and rapid responses to RCS LEAKAGE.
Other indications may be used to detect an increase in unidentified LEAKAGE; however, they are not r equired to be OPERABLE by this LCO. An increase in humidity of the cont ainment atmosphere would indicate release of water vapor to the c ontainment. Dew point temperature measurements can thus be used to monitor humidity levels of the containment atmosphere as an indi cator of potential RCS LEAKAGE. Since the humidity level is influenced by several factors, a quantitative
 
evaluation of an indicated leakage ra te by this means may be questionable and should be compared to observed increas es in liquid flow into or from the containment sump. Humidity level m onitoring is considered most useful as an indirect alarm or indication to al ert the operator to a potential problem.
Humidity monitors are not required by this LCO.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 20 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
BACKGROUND (continued)
BACKGROUND (continued)
Air temperature and pressure monitoring methods may also be used to infer unidentified LEAKAGE to the containment. Containment temperature and pressure fluctuate slightly during plant operation, but a rise above the normally indicated range of values may indicate RCS LEAKAGE into the  
Air temperature and pressure monitoring methods may also be used to infer unidentified LEAKAGE to the containment. Containment temperature and pressure fluctuate slightly during plant operation, but a rise above the normally indicated range of values may indicate RCS LEAKAGE into the containment. The relevance of temperature and pressure measurements is affected by containment free volume and, for temperature, detector location. Alarm signals from these instruments can be valuable in recognizing rapid and sizable leakage to the containment. Temperature and pressure monitors are not required by this LCO.
The above-mentioned LEAKAGE detection methods or systems differ in sensitivity and response time.
APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSIS The need to evaluate the severity of an alarm or an indication is important to the operators, and the ability to compare and verify with indications from other systems is necessary.
The safety significance of RCS LEAKAGE varies widely depending on its source, rate, and duration. Therefore, detecting and monitoring RCS LEAKAGE into the containment area are necessary. Quickly separating the identified LEAKAGE from the unidentified LEAKAGE provides quantitative information to the operators, allowing them to take corrective action should leakage occur detrimental to the safety of the facility and the public.
RCS leakage detection instrumentation satisfies Criterion 1 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
LCO This LCO requires instruments of diverse monitoring principles to be OPERABLE to provide confidence that small amounts of unidentified LEAKAGE are detected in time to allow actions to place the plant in a safe condition when RCS LEAKAGE indicates possible RCPB degradation.


containment. The relevance of temper ature and pressure measurements is affected by containment free volume and, for temperature, detector location. Alarm signals from these instruments can be valuable in recognizing rapid and sizable leakage to the containment. Temperature and pressure monitors are not required by this LCO. The above-mentioned LEAKAGE detecti on methods or systems differ in sensitivity and response time.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSIS
TITLE:   TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       21 of 40 REVISION NO.:                    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
 
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1     LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
The need to evaluate the severity of an alarm or an indication is important to the operators, and the ability to compare and verify with indications from other systems is necessary.
LCO (continued)
The safety significance of RCS LEAK AGE varies widely depending on its source, rate, and duration. Therefore, detecting and monitoring RCS LEAKAGE into the containment area ar e necessary. Quickly separating the identified LEAKAGE from the unidentified LEAKAGE provides quantitative information to the operators, allowing them to take corrective action should leakage occur detrimental to the safety of the facility and the public.
The LCO requires instruments to be OPERABLE. The containment sump is used to collect unidentified LEAKAGE. The monitor on the containment sump detects flow rate and is instrumented to detect when there is leakage of 1 gpm. The identification of unidentified LEAKAGE will be delayed by the time required for the unidentified LEAKAGE to travel to the containment sump and it may take longer than one hour to detect a 1 gpm increase in unidentified LEAKAGE, depending on the origin and magnitude of the LEAKAGE. This sensitivity is acceptable for containment sump monitor OPERABILITY.
RCS leakage detection inst rumentation satisfies Criterion 1 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
The reactor coolant contains radioactivity that, when released to the containment, can be detected by the gaseous or particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitor. Only one of the two detectors is required to be OPERABLE. Radioactivity detection systems are included for monitoring both particulate and gaseous activities because of their sensitivities and rapid responses to RCS LEAKAGE, but have recognized limitations. Reactor coolant radioactivity levels will be low during initial reactor startup and for a few weeks thereafter, until activated corrosion products have been formed and fission products appear from fuel element cladding contamination or cladding defects. If there are few fuel element cladding defects and low levels of activation products, it may not be possible for the gaseous or particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitors to detect a 1 gpm increase within 1 hour during normal operation. However, the gaseous or particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitor is OPERABLE when it is capable of detecting a 1 gpm increase in unidentified LEAKAGE within 1 hour given an RCS activity equivalent to that assumed in the design calculations for the monitors.
LCO This LCO requires instruments of di verse monitoring principles to be OPERABLE to provide confidence t hat small amounts of unidentified LEAKAGE are detected in time to allow actions to place the plant in a safe condition when RCS LEAKAGE indi cates possible RCPB degradation.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 21 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
LCO (continued) The LCO requires instruments to be OPERABLE. The containment sump is used to collect unidentified LEAKAGE.
The monitor on the containment sump detects flow rate and is instrum ented to detect when there is leakage of 1 gpm. The identification of unidentified LEAKAGE will be delayed by the time required for the unidentified LEAK AGE to travel to the containment sump and it may take longer than one hour to detect a 1 gpm increase in unidentified LEAKAGE, depending on the origin and magnitude of the LEAKAGE. This sensitivity is acceptable for containment sump monitor OPERABILITY. The reactor coolant contains radioactivity that, when released to the containment, can be detected by the gaseous or particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitor. Only one of the two detec tors is required to be OPERABLE. Radioactivity detection systems are included for monitoring both particulate and gaseous activities because of their sensitivities and rapid responses to RCS LEAKAGE, but have recognized limitations. Reactor coolant radioactiv ity levels will be low during initial reactor startup and for a few weeks t hereafter, until activated corrosion  
 
products have been formed and fission produc ts appear from fuel element cladding contamination or cladding defects. If there are few fuel element cladding defects and low levels of ac tivation products, it may not be possible for the gaseous or parti culate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitors to detect a 1 gpm increase within 1 hour during normal operation. However, the gaseous or particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitor is OPERABLE when it is capable of detecting a 1 gpm increase in unidentified LEAKAGE within 1 hour given an RCS activity equivalent to that assumed in the design calculations for the monitors.
The LCO is satisfied when monitors of diverse measurement means are available. Thus, the containment sump monitor, in combination with a particulate or gaseous radioactivity monitor, provides an acceptable minimum. APPLICABILITY Because of elevated RCS temperature and pressure in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, RCS leakage detection instrumentation is required to be OPERABLE.
The LCO is satisfied when monitors of diverse measurement means are available. Thus, the containment sump monitor, in combination with a particulate or gaseous radioactivity monitor, provides an acceptable minimum. APPLICABILITY Because of elevated RCS temperature and pressure in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, RCS leakage detection instrumentation is required to be OPERABLE.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 22 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
LCO (continued) In MODE 5 or 6, the temperature is  200&deg;F and pressure is maintained low or at atmospheric pressure. Since t he temperatures and pressures are far lower than those for MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the likelihood of leakage and crack propagation is much smaller. Ther efore, the requirements of this LCO are not applicable in MODES 5 and 6.
ACTION a If the containment sump monitor is inoperable, no other form of sampling can provide the equivalent information.
For this action, the containment atmosphere particulate radioactivity monitor will provide indications of changes in leakage. Together with the containment particulate atmosphere radioactivity monitor, the periodic surveillance for RCS water inventor y balance must be performed at an increased frequency of 24 hours to prov ide information that is adequate to detect leakage. A Note is added allowin g that the RCS water inventory balance is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishing
steady state operation (stable temperat ure, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and RCP seal injection and return flows). The 12 hour allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established.
Restoration of the sump monitor to O PERABLE status is required to regain the function in an allowed outage time of 30 days after the monitor's failure.
This time is acceptable consider ing the frequency and adequacy of the RCS water inventory balance required by this action.


SECTION NO.:                                                                  PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                    22 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1    LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
LCO (continued)
In MODE 5 or 6, the temperature is  200&deg;F and pressure is maintained low or at atmospheric pressure. Since the temperatures and pressures are far lower than those for MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the likelihood of leakage and crack propagation is much smaller. Therefore, the requirements of this LCO are not applicable in MODES 5 and 6.
ACTION a If the containment sump monitor is inoperable, no other form of sampling can provide the equivalent information.
For this action, the containment atmosphere particulate radioactivity monitor will provide indications of changes in leakage. Together with the containment particulate atmosphere radioactivity monitor, the periodic surveillance for RCS water inventory balance must be performed at an increased frequency of 24 hours to provide information that is adequate to detect leakage. A Note is added allowing that the RCS water inventory balance is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishing steady state operation (stable temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and RCP seal injection and return flows). The 12 hour allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established.
Restoration of the sump monitor to OPERABLE status is required to regain the function in an allowed outage time of 30 days after the monitor's failure.
This time is acceptable considering the frequency and adequacy of the RCS water inventory balance required by this action.
ACTION b If the containment sump monitor is inoperable, no other form of sampling can provide the equivalent information.
ACTION b If the containment sump monitor is inoperable, no other form of sampling can provide the equivalent information.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 23 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
ACTION b (continued) For this action, the containment atmosphere gaseous radioactivity monitor will provide indications of changes in leakage. Together with the containment gaseous atmosphere radioactivity monitor, the periodic surveillance for RCS water invent ory balance must be performed at an increased frequency of 24 hours to provi de information that is adequate to
detect leakage. A Note is added allowin g that the RCS water inventory balance is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishing steady state operation (stable temperat ure, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and RCP seal injection and return flows). The 12 hour allowance provides sufficient time to collect and
process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established. However, the containment atmosphere gaseous radioactivity monitor
typically cannot detect a 1 gpm leak within one hour when RCS activity is low. In addition, this configuration does not provide the required diverse means of leakage detection. Indirect methods of monitoring RCS leakage must be implemented. Grab samples of the containment atmosphere must be taken and analyzed must be performed every 12 hours to provide
alternate periodic information. The 12 hour interval is sufficient to detect increasing RCS leakage. The action provides 7 days to restore another RCS leakage monitor to OPERABLE status to regain the intended leakage detection diversity. If the sump monitor is recovered, the acti on is exited. If the containment atmosphere particulate radioactivity monitor is restored, the action b is
exited, the time spent in action b is subtracted from t he 30-day allowed outage time of action a, and action a is entered. The 7 day allowed outage


time ensures that the plant will not be operated in a degraded configuration for a lengthy time period.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       23 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 24 of 40 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1     LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
ACTION b (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
For this action, the containment atmosphere gaseous radioactivity monitor will provide indications of changes in leakage. Together with the containment gaseous atmosphere radioactivity monitor, the periodic surveillance for RCS water inventory balance must be performed at an increased frequency of 24 hours to provide information that is adequate to detect leakage. A Note is added allowing that the RCS water inventory balance is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishing steady state operation (stable temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and RCP seal injection and return flows). The 12 hour allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established.
ACTION c With both gaseous and particulate c ontainment atmospher e radioactivity monitoring instrumentation channels in operable, alternative action is required. Either grab samples of the containment atmosphere must be taken and analyzed, or water inventory balances, must be performed to provide alternate periodic informati on. With a sample obtained and analyzed or an inventory balance perfo rmed every 24 hours, the reactor may be operated for up to 30 days to allow restoration of at least one of the radioactivity monitors.  
However, the containment atmosphere gaseous radioactivity monitor typically cannot detect a 1 gpm leak within one hour when RCS activity is low. In addition, this configuration does not provide the required diverse means of leakage detection. Indirect methods of monitoring RCS leakage must be implemented. Grab samples of the containment atmosphere must be taken and analyzed must be performed every 12 hours to provide alternate periodic information. The 12 hour interval is sufficient to detect increasing RCS leakage.
The action provides 7 days to restore another RCS leakage monitor to OPERABLE status to regain the intended leakage detection diversity. If the sump monitor is recovered, the action is exited. If the containment atmosphere particulate radioactivity monitor is restored, the action b is exited, the time spent in action b is subtracted from the 30-day allowed outage time of action a, and action a is entered. The 7 day allowed outage time ensures that the plant will not be operated in a degraded configuration for a lengthy time period.


SECTION NO.:                                                                  PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                    24 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1    LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)
ACTION c With both gaseous and particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitoring instrumentation channels inoperable, alternative action is required. Either grab samples of the containment atmosphere must be taken and analyzed, or water inventory balances, must be performed to provide alternate periodic information. With a sample obtained and analyzed or an inventory balance performed every 24 hours, the reactor may be operated for up to 30 days to allow restoration of at least one of the radioactivity monitors.
The 24 hour interval provides periodic information that is adequate to detect leakage. A Note is added allowing that the RCS water inventory balance is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishing steady state operation (stable temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and RCP seal injection and return flows). The 12 hour allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established. The 30 day Completion Time recognizes at least one other form of leakage detection is available.
The 24 hour interval provides periodic information that is adequate to detect leakage. A Note is added allowing that the RCS water inventory balance is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishing steady state operation (stable temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and RCP seal injection and return flows). The 12 hour allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established. The 30 day Completion Time recognizes at least one other form of leakage detection is available.
ACTION d If all required monitors are inoperabl e, no automatic means of monitoring leakage are available and immediate plant shutdown in accordance with LCO 3.0.3 is required.  
ACTION d If all required monitors are inoperable, no automatic means of monitoring leakage are available and immediate plant shutdown in accordance with LCO 3.0.3 is required.
SURVEILLANCE SR 4.4.6.1 REQUIREMENTS SR 4.4.6.1 requires the performance of CHANNEL CHECKs, CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TESTs, and CHANNEL CALIBRATIONs of the required leakage detection monitors. These checks give reasonable confidence the channels are operating properly.


SURVEILLANCE SR 4.4.6.1
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                      25 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2    OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE


REQUIREMENTS
===Background===
Components that contain or transport the coolant to or from the reactor core make up the reactor coolant system (RCS). Component joints are made by welding, bolting, rolling, or pressure loading, and valves isolate connecting systems from the RCS.
During plant life, the joint and valve interfaces can produce varying amounts of reactor coolant leakage, through either normal operational wear or mechanical deterioration. The purpose of the RCS operational leakage LCO is to limit system operation in the presence of leakage from these sources to amounts that do not compromise safety. This LCO specifies the types and amounts of leakage.
10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 30 (Ref. 1), requires means for detecting and, to the extent practical, identifying the sources of reactor coolant leakage.
Regulatory Guide 1.45 (Ref. 2) describes acceptable methods for selecting leakage detection systems.
The safety significance of RCS leakage varies widely depending on its source, rate, and duration. Therefore, detecting and monitoring reactor coolant leakage into the containment area is necessary. Quickly separating the IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE from the UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is necessary to provide quantitative information to the operators, allowing them to take corrective action should a leak occur that is detrimental to the safety of the facility and the public.
A limited amount of leakage inside containment is expected from auxiliary systems that cannot be made 100% leaktight. Leakage from these systems should be detected, located, and isolated from the containment atmosphere, if possible, to not interfere with RCS leakage detection.
This LCO deals with protection of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) from degradation and the core from inadequate cooling, in addition to preventing the accident analyses radiation release assumptions from being exceeded. The consequences of violating this LCO include the possibility of a loss of coolant accident (LOCA).


SR 4.4.6.1 requires the performa nce of CHANNEL CHECKs, CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TESTs, and CHANNEL CALIBRATIONs of the required leakage detection monitors. These c hecks give reasonable confidence the channels are operating properly.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                     26 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 25 of 40 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2     OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
Applicable Safety Analyses The safety analysis for an event resulting in steam discharge to the atmosphere assumes that primary to secondary leakage from all steam generators (SGs) is 0.5 gpm total through all SGs and 0.25 gpm through any one SG or is assumed to increase to 0.5 gpm total through all SGs and 0.25 gpm through any one SG as a result of accident induced conditions.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE Background Components that contain or transport the coolant to or from the reactor core make up the reactor coolant system (RCS
The LCO requirements to limit primary-to-secondary leakage through any one steam generator to less than or equal to 150 gpd is based on room temperature conditions. When this value is adjusted for operating conditions, it is less than the leakage limit of 0.25 gpm (measured at operating temperature) through any one SG assumed in the accident analysis.
). Component joints are made by welding, bolting, rolling, or pressure loading, and valves isolate connecting systems from the RCS.  
Primary to secondary leakage is a factor in the dose releases outside containment resulting from a steam line break (SLB) accident. To a lesser extent, other accidents or transients involve secondary steam release to the atmosphere, such as a steam generator tube rupture (SGTR). The leakage contaminates the secondary fluid.
The UFSAR (Ref. 3) analysis for SGTR assumes the contaminated secondary fluid is released mainly via the safety valves or atmospheric dump valves and only briefly steamed to the condenser. The 0.5 gpm total through all SGs and 0.25 gpm through any one SG primary to secondary leakage safety analysis assumption is relatively inconsequential.
The SLB is more limiting for site radiation releases. The safety analysis for the SLB accident assumes a value of 0.25 gpm primary to secondary leakage through each generator as an initial condition. The dose consequences resulting from the SLB accident are well within the limits defined in GDC 19 and the requirements of 10 CFR 50.67.
The RCS operational leakage satisfies Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).


During plant life, the join t and valve interfaces can produce varying amounts of reactor coolant leakage, through either normal operational wear or mechanical deterioration. The purpose of the RCS operational leakage LCO is to limit system operation in the pr esence of leakage from these sources to amounts that do not compromise safety. This LCO specifies the types and amounts of leakage.
SECTION NO.:                                                                  PAGE:
10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 30 (Ref. 1), requires means for detecting and, to the extent practical, identifying the sources of r eactor coolant leakage. Regulatory Guide 1.45 (Ref. 2) describes acceptable methods for selecting leakage detection systems. The safety significance of RCS le akage varies widely depending on its source, rate, and duration. Therefore, detecting and monitoring reactor coolant leakage into the containment area is necessary. Quickly separating the IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE from the UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is necessary to provide quantitative information to t he operators, allowin g them to take corrective action should a leak occur that is detrimental to the safety of the facility and the public. A limited amount of leakage inside cont ainment is expected from auxiliary systems that cannot be made 100% leak tight. Leakage from these systems should be detected, located, and isolat ed from the containment atmosphere, if possible, to not interfere with RCS leakage detection.
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                     27 of 40 REVISION NO.:                     REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
 
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2     OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
This LCO deals with protection of t he reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) from degradation and the core from inadequate cooling, in addition to preventing the accident anal yses radiation release assumptions from being exceeded. The consequences of violating this LCO include the possibility of a loss of coolant accident (LOCA).
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 26 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
Applicable Safety Analyses The safety analysis for an event re sulting in steam discharge to the atmosphere assumes that primary to secondary leakage from all steam generators (SGs) is 0.5 gpm total through all SGs and 0.25 gpm through any one SG or is assumed to increase to 0.5 gpm total through all SGs and 0.25 gpm through any one SG as a result of accident induced conditions. The LCO requirements to limit primary-to-secondary leakage through any
 
one steam generator to le ss than or equal to 150 gpd is based on room
 
temperature conditions.
When this value is adjust ed for operating conditions, it is less than the leakage limit of 0.25 gpm (measured at operating temperature) through any one SG assumed in the accident analysis.
Primary to secondary leakage is a fact or in the dose releases outside containment resulting from a steam li ne break (SLB) accident. To a lesser extent, other accidents or transients in volve secondary steam release to the atmosphere, such as a st eam generator tube ruptur e (SGTR). The leakage contaminates the secondary fluid. The UFSAR (Ref. 3) analysis for SGTR assumes the contaminated secondary fluid is released mainly via t he safety valves or atmospheric dump valves and only briefly steamed to the condenser. The 0.5 gpm total through all SGs and 0.25 gpm through any one SG primary to secondary leakage safety analysis assumption is relatively inconsequential. The SLB is more limiting for site radiat ion releases. The safety analysis for the SLB accident assumes a value of 0.25 gpm primary to secondary leakage through each generator as an initial condition. The dose consequences resulting from the SLB accident are we ll within the limits defined in GDC 19
 
and the requirements of 10 CFR 50.67.
The RCS operational leakage satisfies Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 27 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO)
Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO)
Reactor Coolant System operational leakage shall be limited to: a. PRESSURE BO UNDARY LEAKAGE No PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE is allowed, being indicative of material deterioration. Leakage of this ty pe is unacceptable as the leak itself could cause further deterioration, resulting in higher leakage. Violation of this LCO could result in continued degradat ion of the RCPB. Leakage past seals  
Reactor Coolant System operational leakage shall be limited to:
: a. PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE No PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE is allowed, being indicative of material deterioration. Leakage of this type is unacceptable as the leak itself could cause further deterioration, resulting in higher leakage. Violation of this LCO could result in continued degradation of the RCPB. Leakage past seals and gaskets is not PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE.
: b. UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE One gallon per minute (gpm) of UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is allowed as a reasonable minimum detectable amount that the containment air monitoring and containment sump level monitoring equipment can detect within a reasonable time period. Violation of this LCO could result in continued degradation of the RCPB, if the leakage is from the pressure boundary.
: c. Primary-to-Secondary Leakage Through Any One Steam Generator The limit of 150 gpm per steam generator is based on the operational leakage performance criterion in NEI 97-06, Steam Generator Program Guidelines (Ref. 4). The Steam Generator Program operational leakage performance criterion in NEI 97-06 states, "The RCS operational primary-to-secondary leakage through any one steam generator shall be limited to 150 gallons per day." The limit is based on operating experience with steam generator tube degradation mechanisms that result in tube leakage. The operational leakage rate criterion is conjunction with the implementation of the Steam Generator Program is an effective measure for minimizing the frequency of steam generator tube ruptures.


and gaskets is not PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE. b. UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
 
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       28 of 40 REVISION NO.:                    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
One gallon per minute (gpm) of UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is allowed as a reasonable minimum detectable amount that the containment air monitoring and containment sump level monitori ng equipment can detect within a reasonable time period. Violation of this LCO could result in continued degradation of the RCPB, if the leakage is from the pressure boundary. c. Primary-to-Secondary Leakage Through Any One Steam Generator The limit of 150 gpm per steam g enerator is based on the operational leakage performance crit erion in NEI 97-06, St eam Generator Program Guidelines (Ref. 4). The Steam Generator Program operational leakage performance criterion in NEI 97-06 states, "The RCS operational primary-to-secondary leakage through any one steam generator shall be limited to 150 gallons per day."  The limit is based on operating experience with steam generator tube degradation me chanisms that result in tube leakage. The operational leakage rate cr iterion is conjunction with the implementation of the Steam Generator Program is an effective m easure for minimizing the frequency of steam gener ator tube ruptures.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2     OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
SECTION NO.:
: d. IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE Up to 10 gpm of IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is considered allowable because leakage is from known sources that do not interfere with detection of UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and is well within the capability of the Reactor Coolant System Makeup System. IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE includes leakage to the containment from specifically know and located sources, but does not include PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE or controlled reactor coolant pump seal leakoff (a normal function not considered leakage). Violation of this LCO could result in continued degradation of a component or system.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 28 of 40 REVISION NO.:
Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve Leakage Leakage is measured through each individual PIV and can impact this LCO.
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
Of the two PIVs in series in each isolated line, leakage measured through one PIV does not result in RCS Leakage when the other is leaktight. If both valves leak and result in a loss of mass from the RCS, the loss must be included in the allowable IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
Applicability In POWER OPERATION, STARTUP, HOT STANDBY and HOT SHUTDOWN, the potential for PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE is greatest when the RCS is pressurized.
: d. IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE Up to 10 gpm of IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is considered allowable because leakage is from known sources that do not interfere with detection of UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and is well with in the capability of the Reactor Coolant System Makeup System. ID ENTIFIED LEAKAGE includes leakage to the containment from specifically know and located sources, but does not include PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE or controlled reactor coolant pump seal leakoff (a normal function not considered leakage). Violation of this LCO could result in continued degradation of a component or system.
Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve Leakage Leakage is measured through each individu al PIV and can impact this LCO.
Of the two PIVs in series in each is olated line, leakage measured through one PIV does not result in RCS Leakage wh en the other is leaktight. If both valves leak and result in a loss of mass from the RCS, the loss must be included in the allowable IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE. Applicability  
 
In POWER OPERATION, STAR TUP, HOT STANDBY and HOT SHUTDOWN, the potential for PR ESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE is greatest when the RCS is pressurized.
In COLD SHUTDOWN and REFUELING, leakage limits are not required because the reactor coolant pressure is far lower, resulting in lower stresses and reduced potentials for leakage.
In COLD SHUTDOWN and REFUELING, leakage limits are not required because the reactor coolant pressure is far lower, resulting in lower stresses and reduced potentials for leakage.
ACTIONS
ACTIONS a.
: a.
If any PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE exists, or primary-to-secondary leakage is not within limit, the reactor must be brought to HOT STANDBY with 6 hours and COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. This ACTION reduces the leakage and also reduces the factors that tend to degrade the pressure boundary.
If any PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE exis ts, or primary-to-secondary leakage is not within li mit, the reactor must be brought to HOT STANDBY with 6 hours and COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. This ACTION reduces the leakage and also reduces the factors that tend to degrade the pressure boundary.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 29 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
ACTIONS (continued)
: b. UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE or IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is excess of the LCO limits must be reduced to within the limits within 4 hours. This allows time to verify leakage rates and either identi fy UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE or reduce leakage to within limits bef ore the reactor must be s hut down. Otherwise, the reactor must be brought to HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. This ACTION is necessary to prevent further deterioration of the Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary.
: c. The leakage from any RCS Pressure Isolation Valve is sufficiently low to ensure early detection of possible in-series valve failure. It is apparent that when pressure isolation is provided by two manual or deactivated automatic valves and when failure of one valve in the pair can go undetected for a substantial length of time, ve rification of valve integrit y is required. With one or more RCS Pressure Isolation Valves with leakage greater than that


allowed by Specificat ion 3.4.6.2.e, within 4 hours, at least two valves in each high pressure line having a non-functional valve must be closed and remain  
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                          29 of 40 REVISION NO.:                    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2    OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
ACTIONS (continued) b.
UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE or IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is excess of the LCO limits must be reduced to within the limits within 4 hours. This allows time to verify leakage rates and either identify UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE or reduce leakage to within limits before the reactor must be shut down. Otherwise, the reactor must be brought to HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours. This ACTION is necessary to prevent further deterioration of the Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary.
c.
The leakage from any RCS Pressure Isolation Valve is sufficiently low to ensure early detection of possible in-series valve failure. It is apparent that when pressure isolation is provided by two manual or deactivated automatic valves and when failure of one valve in the pair can go undetected for a substantial length of time, verification of valve integrity is required. With one or more RCS Pressure Isolation Valves with leakage greater than that allowed by Specification 3.4.6.2.e, within 4 hours, at least two valves in each high pressure line having a non-functional valve must be closed and remain closed to isolate the affected line(s). In addition, the ACTION statement for the affected system must be followed and the leakage from the remaining Pressure Isolation Valves in each high pressure line having a valve not meeting the criteria of Table 3.4-1 shall be recorded daily. If these requirements are not met, the reactor must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours.


closed to isolate the affected line(s).
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
In addition, the ACTION statement for the affected system must be followed and the leakage from the remaining Pressure Isolation Valves in each high pressure line having a valve not meeting the criteria of Table 3.4-1 shall be recorded daily. If these
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       30 of 40 REVISION NO.:                    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
 
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2     OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
requirements are not met, the reactor must be br ought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30
ACTIONS (continued) d.
 
With RCS leakage alarmed and confirmed in a flow path with no flow indication, commencement of an RCS water inventory balance is required within 1 hour to determine the leak rate. This action is not applicable to primary-to-secondary leakage.
hours.
The allowed completion times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. In COLD SHUTDOWN, the pressure stresses acting on the Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary are much lower, and further deterioration is much less likely.
SECTION NO.:
Surveillance Requirements 4.4.6.2.1 Verifying Reactor Coolant System leakage to be within the LCO limits ensures the integrity of the Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary is maintained. PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE would at first appear as UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and can only be positively identified by inspection. It should be noted that leakage past seals and gaskets is not PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE. UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE are determined by performance of a Reactor Coolant System water inventory balance.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 30 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
ACTIONS (continued)
: d. With RCS leakage alarmed and confi rmed in a flow path with no flow indication, commencement of an RCS wa ter inventory balance is required within 1 hour to determine the leak rate. This action is not applicable to primary-to-secondary leakage.
The allowed completion times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required plant conditions fr om full power conditions in an orderly manner and without chal lenging plant systems. In COLD SHUTDOWN, the pressure stresses acting on the Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary are much lower, and further deterioration is much less likely. Surveillance Requirements 4.4.6.2.1  
 
Verifying Reactor Coolant System leakage to be within the LCO limits ensures the integrity of the Reacto r Coolant Pressure Boundary is maintained. PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE would at first appear as UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and can only be positively identified by  
 
inspection. It should be noted that leakage past seals and gaskets is not  
 
PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE.
UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE are determined by performance of a Reactor Coolant System water inventory balance.
: a. and b.
: a. and b.
These SRs demonstrate that the RCS oper ational leakage is within the LCO limits by monitoring the containment atmosphere gaseous and particulate radioactivity monitor and the contai nment sump level and discharge The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency  
These SRs demonstrate that the RCS operational leakage is within the LCO limits by monitoring the containment atmosphere gaseous and particulate radioactivity monitor and the containment sump level and discharge The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.


Control Program.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       31 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 31 of 40 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2     OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
Surveillance Requirements (continued) 4.4.6.2.1     (continued) c.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
The RCS water inventory balance must be performed with the reactor at steady state operating conditions (stable temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and reactor coolant pump seal injection and return flows). The Surveillance is modified by a note that states that this Surveillance Requirement is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishment of steady state operation. The 12 hour allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established.
Surveillance Requirements (continued) 4.4.6.2.1 (continued)
Steady state operation is required to perform a proper water inventory balance since calculations during maneuvering are not useful. For RCS operational leakage determination by water inventory balance, steady state is defined as stable RCS pressure, temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and Reactor Coolant Pump seal injection and return flows.
: c.
An early warning of PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE or UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is provided by the automatic systems that monitor containment atmosphere radioactivity, containment normal sump inventory and discharge, and reactor head flange leakoff. It should be noted that leakage past seals and gaskets is not PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE. The reactor cavity (containment) sump and containment atmosphere radioactivity leakage detection systems are specified in LCO 3.4.6.1, "Reactor Coolant System Leakage Detection Systems."
The RCS water inventory balance must be performed with the reactor at steady state operating conditions (st able temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and reactor coolant pump seal injection and return flows). The Surveillance is modified by a note that states that th is Surveillance Requirement is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishment of steady state operation. The 12 hour allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established.
The note also states that this SR is not applicable to primary-to secondary leakage because leakage of 150 gallons per day cannot be measured accurately by an RCS water inventory balance.
Steady state operation is required to perform a proper water inventory balance since calculations during m aneuvering are not useful. For RCS operational leakage determination by water inventory balance, steady state is defined as stable RCS pressure, temper ature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and Reactor Coolant Pump seal  
The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.


injection and return flows.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
An early warning of PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE or UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is provided by the automatic systems that monitor containment atmosphere radioactivity, containment normal sump inventory and discharge, and reactor head flange leakoff. It shoul d be noted that leak age past seals and gaskets is not PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE. The  reactor cavity (containment) sump and containment atmosphere radioactivity leakage detection systems are specified in LCO 3.4.6.1, "Reactor Coolant System Leakage Detection Systems." The note also states that this SR is not applicable to primary-to secondary leakage because leakage of 150 gall ons per day cannot be measured accurately by an RCS water inventory balance.
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       32 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2     OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
SECTION NO.:
Surveillance Requirements (continued) 4.4.6.2.1     (continued) d.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 32 of 40 REVISION NO.:
This SR demonstrates that the RCS operational leakage is within the LCO limits by monitoring the Reactor Head Flange Leakoff System. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
e.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
This Surveillance Requirement verifies that primary-to-secondary leakage is less than or equal to 150 gpd through any one steam generator. Satisfying the primary-to-secondary leakage limit ensures that the operational leakage performance criterion in the Steam Generator Program is met. If this Surveillance Requirement is not met, compliance with LCO 3.4.5, "Steam Generator Tube Integrity" should be evaluated. The 150 gpd limit is measured at room temperature as described in Reference 5. The operational leakage rate limit applies to leakage through any one steam generator. If it is not practical to assign the leakage to an individual steam generator, all the primary-to-secondary leakage should be conservatively assumed to be from one steam generator.
Surveillance Requirements (continued) 4.4.6.2.1 (continued)
The Surveillance Requirement is modified by a note, which states that the Surveillance is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishment of steady state operation. For Reactor Coolant System primary-to-secondary leakage determination, steady state is defined as stable Reactor Coolant System pressure, temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and reactor coolant pump seal injection and return flows.
: d.
The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.. The primary-to-secondary leakage is determined using continuous process radiation monitors or radiochemical grab sampling in accordance with the EPRI guidelines (Ref. 5).
This SR demonstrates t hat the RCS operational le akage is within the LCO limits by monitoring the Reactor Head Flange Leakoff System. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
: e.
This Surveillance Requirement verifies that primary-to-sec ondary leakage is less than or equal to 150 gpd through any one steam generat or. Satisfying the primary-to-secondary l eakage limit ensures that the operational leakage performance criterion in t he Steam Generator Program is met. If this Surveillance Requirement is not met, compliance with LCO 3.4.5, "Steam Generator Tube Integrity" should be evaluated. The 150 gpd limit is measured at room te mperature as described in Re ference 5. The operational leakage rate limit applies to leakage thr ough any one steam generat or. If it is not practical to assign the leakage to an individual steam generator, all the primary-to-secondary leakage should be co nservatively assumed to be from one steam generator.  


The Surveillance Requirement is modified by a note, which states that the Surveillance is not required to be performed until 12 hours after establishment of steady state operation. For Reactor Coolant System primary-to-secondary leakage determinati on, steady state is defined as stable Reactor Coolant System pre ssure, temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and reactor coolant pump seal injection and return flows. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.. The primary-to-secondary leakage is determined using continuous process radiation monitors or radiochemical grab sampling in accordance with the EPRI guidelines (Ref. 5).
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       33 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 33 of 40 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6       REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2     OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
Surveillance Requirements (continued) 4.4.6.2.2
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued) Surveillance Requirements (continued) 4.4.6.2.2
: a. through d.
: a. through d.
This Surveillance Requirement verifies RCS Pressure Isolation Valve check valve integrity thereby r educing the probability of gross valve failure and consequent intersystem LOCA. Leakage from the RCS pressure isolation check valve is IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and will be considered as a portion of the allowed limit.  
This Surveillance Requirement verifies RCS Pressure Isolation Valve check valve integrity thereby reducing the probability of gross valve failure and consequent intersystem LOCA. Leakage from the RCS pressure isolation check valve is IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and will be considered as a portion of the allowed limit.
 
4.4.6.2.3
4.4.6.2.3
: a. and b.
: a. and b.
This Surveillance Requirement verifies RCS Pressure Isolation Valve motor-operated valve integrity ther eby reducing the probability of gross valve failure and consequent intersystem LOCA.
This Surveillance Requirement verifies RCS Pressure Isolation Valve motor-operated valve integrity thereby reducing the probability of gross valve failure and consequent intersystem LOCA. Leakage from the RCS pressure isolation motor-operated valve is IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and will be considered as a portion of the allowed limit.
Leakage from the RCS pressure isolation motor-operated valve is IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and will be considered as a portion of the allowed limit. References
References
: 1. 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 30
: 1. 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 30
: 2. Regulatory Guide 1.45
: 2. Regulatory Guide 1.45
: 3. UFSAR, Section 15.6.3
: 3. UFSAR, Section 15.6.3
: 4. NEI 97-06, "Steam Generator Program Guidelines" 5. EPRI "PWR Primary-to-Secondary Leak Guidelines"  
: 4. NEI 97-06, "Steam Generator Program Guidelines"
: 5. EPRI "PWR Primary-to-Secondary Leak Guidelines"


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                  PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 34 of 40 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:   TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                     34 of 40 REVISION NO.:                    REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued) BASES (continued) 3/4.4.7 DELETED 3/4.4.8 SPECIFIC ACTIVITY The maximum allowable doses to an individual at the exclusion area boundary (EAB) distance for 2 hours following an accident, or at the low population zone (LPZ) outer boundary dist ance for the radiological release duration, are specified in 10 CFR 50.67 for design basis accidents using the alternative source term methodology and in Branch Technical Position 11-5 for the waste gas decay tank rupture accident. Dose limits to control room operators are given in 10 CFR 50.67 and in GDC 19. The RCS specific activity LCO limit s the allowable concentration of radionuclides in the reactor coolant to ensure that the dose consequences of limiting accidents do not exceed appropriate regulatory o ffsite and control room dose acceptance criteria. The LCO contains specific activity limits for both DOSE EQUIVALENT (DE) 1-131 and DOSE EQUIVALENT (DE) XE-133.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.7       DELETED 3/4.4.8       SPECIFIC ACTIVITY The maximum allowable doses to an individual at the exclusion area boundary (EAB) distance for 2 hours following an accident, or at the low population zone (LPZ) outer boundary distance for the radiological release duration, are specified in 10 CFR 50.67 for design basis accidents using the alternative source term methodology and in Branch Technical Position 11-5 for the waste gas decay tank rupture accident. Dose limits to control room operators are given in 10 CFR 50.67 and in GDC 19.
SECTION NO.:
The RCS specific activity LCO limits the allowable concentration of radionuclides in the reactor coolant to ensure that the dose consequences of limiting accidents do not exceed appropriate regulatory offsite and control room dose acceptance criteria. The LCO contains specific activity limits for both DOSE EQUIVALENT (DE) 1-131 and DOSE EQUIVALENT (DE) XE-133.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 35 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.8 SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (continued)
The radiological dose assessments assume the specific activity of the reactor coolant is at the LCO limits, and an existing reactor cool ant steam generator tube leakage rate at the applicable Technical Specification limit. The radiological dose assessments assume the specific activity of the secondary coolant is at its limit as specified in LCO 3.7.1.4, "Plant Systems - Activity." The ACTIONS allow operation when DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 is greater than 1.0 &#xb5;Ci/gram and less than 60 &#xb5;Ci/gr am. The ACTIONS require sampling within four hours and every four hours following to es tablish a trend. A note permits the use of the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.c. This allowance permits entry into the applicable MODE(S) while relying on the ACTIONS. This allowance is acceptable due to the significant conserva tism incorporated into the specific activity limit, the low probability of an event that is limiting due to exceeding this limit, and the ability to restore transient specific activity excursions while the plant remains at, or proceeds to power operations.
The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. One surveillance r equires the determination of the DE XE-133 specific activity as a measure of noble gas specific activity of the reactor coolant. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. A second surveillance is performed to ens ure that iodine specific activity remains within the LCO limit during normal operation. The second surveillance is also performed following rapid power changes when


iodine spiking is more apt to occu
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
: r. The frequency between two and six hours after a power change of greater than 15% RATED THERMAL POWER within a 1 hour period, is established because the iodine levels peak during this time following iodine spike initiation.
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                  BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                          35 of 40 REVISION NO.:                        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.8      SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (continued)
The radiological dose assessments assume the specific activity of the reactor coolant is at the LCO limits, and an existing reactor coolant steam generator tube leakage rate at the applicable Technical Specification limit. The radiological dose assessments assume the specific activity of the secondary coolant is at its limit as specified in LCO 3.7.1.4, "Plant Systems - Activity."
The ACTIONS allow operation when DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 is greater than 1.0 &#xb5;Ci/gram and less than 60 &#xb5;Ci/gram. The ACTIONS require sampling within four hours and every four hours following to establish a trend. A note permits the use of the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.c. This allowance permits entry into the applicable MODE(S) while relying on the ACTIONS. This allowance is acceptable due to the significant conservatism incorporated into the specific activity limit, the low probability of an event that is limiting due to exceeding this limit, and the ability to restore transient specific activity excursions while the plant remains at, or proceeds to power operations.
The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. One surveillance requires the determination of the DE XE-133 specific activity as a measure of noble gas specific activity of the reactor coolant.
The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. A second surveillance is performed to ensure that iodine specific activity remains within the LCO limit during normal operation. The second surveillance is also performed following rapid power changes when iodine spiking is more apt to occur. The frequency between two and six hours after a power change of greater than 15% RATED THERMAL POWER within a 1 hour period, is established because the iodine levels peak during this time following iodine spike initiation.
The RCS specific activity satisfies Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
The RCS specific activity satisfies Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 36 of 40 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       36 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.9       PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITS All components in the Reactor Coolant System are designed to withstand the effects of cyclic loads due to system temperature and pressure changes.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.9 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITS All components in the Reactor Coolant System are designed to withstand the effects of cyclic loads due to system temperature and pressure changes.
These cyclic loads are introduced by normal load transients, reactor trips, and startup and shutdown operations. The various categories of load cycles used for design purposes are provided in Section 5.2 of the UFSAR. During startup and shutdown, the rates of temperature and pressure changes are limited so that the maximum specified heatup and cooldown rates are consistent with the design assumptions and satisfy the stress limits for cyclic operation.
These cyclic loads are introduced by no rmal load transients, reactor trips, and startup and shutdown operations. The various categories of load cycles  
During heatup, the thermal gradients through the reactor vessel wall produce thermal stresses which are compressive at the reactor vessel inside surface and are tensile at the reactor vessel outside surface. Since reactor vessel internal pressure always produces tensile stresses at both the inside and outside surface locations, the total applied stress is greatest at the outside surface location. However, since neutron irradiation damage is larger at the inside surface location when compared to the outside surface, the inside surface flaw may be more limiting. Consequently, for the heatup analysis both the inside and outside surface flaw locations must be analyzed for the specific pressure and thermal loadings to determine which is more limiting.
During cooldown, the thermal gradients through the reactor vessel wall produce thermal stresses which are tensile at the reactor vessel inside surface and which are compressive at the reactor vessel outside surface.
Since reactor vessel internal pressure always produces tensile stresses at both the inside and outside surface locations, the total applied stress is greatest at the inside surface location. Since the neutron indication damage is also greatest at the inside surface location the inside surface flaw is the limiting location. Consequently, only the inside surface flaw must be evaluated for the cooldown analysis.
The heatup and cooldown limit curves Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 are composite curves which were prepared by determining the most conservative case, with either the inside or outside wall controlling, for any heatup rate of up to 50 degrees F per hour or cooldown rate of up to 100 degrees F per hour. The heatup and cooldown curves were prepared based upon the most limiting value of the predicted adjusted reference temperature at 47 EFPY, and they include adjustments for pressure differences between the reactor vessel beltline and pressurizer instrument taps.


used for design purposes are provided in Section 5.2 of the UFSAR. During startup and shutdown, the rates of te mperature and pressure changes are limited so that the maximum spec ified heatup and cooldown rates are consistent with the design assumptions and satisfy the stress limits for cyclic operation.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
During heatup, the therma l gradients through the reactor vessel wall produce thermal stresses which are compressive at the reactor vessel inside surface and are tensile at the reactor vessel outside surface. Since reactor vessel internal pressure always produces t ensile stresses at both the inside and outside surface locations, the total appl ied stress is greatest at the outside surface location. However, since neutro n irradiation damage is larger at the inside surface location when compared to the outside surface, the inside surface flaw may be more limiting. Consequently, for the heatup analysis both the inside and outside surface flaw locations must be analyzed for the specific pressure and thermal loadings to determine which is more limiting.
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                        37 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
During cooldown, the thermal gradient s through the reactor vessel wall produce thermal stresses which are t ensile at the reactor vessel inside surface and which are compressive at the reactor vessel outside surface. Since reactor vessel internal pressure always produces tensile stresses at
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.9      PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITS (continued)
The reactor vessel materials have been tested to determine their initial RTNDT; the results of these tests are shown in Table B 3/4.4-1. Reactor operation and resultant fast neutron (E greater than 1 MeV) irradiation will cause an increase in the RTNDT. An adjusted reference temperature can be predicated using a) the initial RTNDT, b) the fluence (E greater than 1 MeV),
including appropriate adjustments for neutron attenuation and neutron energy spectrum variations through the wall thickness, c) the copper and nickel contents of the material, and d) the transition temperature shift as recommended by Regulatory Guide 1.99, Revision 2, Effects of Residual Elements on Predicted Radiation Damage to Reactor Vessel Materials, or other approved method. The heatup and cooldown limit curves Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 include predicted adjustments for this shift in RTNDT at 47 EFPY.
The actual shift in RTNDT of the vessel materials will be benchmarked periodically during operation, by removing and evaluating, in accordance with 10 CFR 50 Appendix H and ASTM E185, reactor vessel material irradiation surveillance specimens installed near the inside wall of the reactor vessel in the core area. Since the neutron spectra at the irradiation samples and the vessel inside radius are essentially identical, the measured transition temperature shift in RTNDT for a set of material samples can be compared to the predictions of RTNDT that were used for preparations of the pressure/temperature limits curves. If the measured delta RTNDT values from the surveillance capsule are not conservatively within the measurement uncertainty of the prediction method, then heat up and cooldown curves must be re-evaluated.
The pressure-temperature limit lines shown on Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 for reactor criticality and for inservice leak and hydrostatic testing have been provided to assure compliance with the minimum temperature requirements for Appendix G to 10 CFR 50.
The maximum RTNDT all Reactor Coolant System pressure-retaining materials, with the exception of the reactor pressure vessel, has been determined to be 60F. The Lowest Service Temperature limit line shown on Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 is based upon this RTNDT since Article NB-2332 (Summer Addenda of 1972) of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code requires the Lowest Service Temperature to be RTNDT + 100F for piping, pumps, and valves. Below this temperature, the system pressure must be limited to a maximum of 20% of the systems hydrostatic test pressure.


both the inside and outside surface loca tions, the total applied stress is greatest at the inside surface location.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
Since the neutron indication damage is also greatest at the inside surface location the inside surface flaw is the limiting location. Consequently, only the inside surface flaw must be evaluated for the cooldown analysis.
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                       38 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4         REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
The heatup and cooldown limit curves Figures 3.4-2 and 3.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.9       PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITS (continued)
4-3 are composite curves which were prepared by determini ng the most conservative case, with either the inside or outside wall controlling, for any heatup rate of up to 50 degrees F per hour or cooldown rate of up to 100 degrees F per hour. The heatup and cooldown curves were pr epared based upon the most limiting value of the predicted adj usted reference temperatur e at 47 EFPY, and they include adjustments for pressure diffe rences between the reactor vessel beltline and pressurizer instrument taps.
The limitations imposed on the pressurizer heatup and cooldown rates are provided to assure that the pressurizer is operated within the design criteria assumed for the fatigue analysis performed in accordance with the ASME Code requirements.
SECTION NO.:
The OPERABILITY of two PORVs, two SDCRVs or an RCS vent opening of greater than 3.58 square inches ensures that the RCS will be protected from pressure transients which could exceed the limits of Appendix G to 10 CFR Part 50 when one or more of the RCS cold leg temperatures are less than or equal to the LTOP temperatures. The Low Temperature Overpressure Protection System has adequate relieving capability to protect the RCS from overpressurization when the transient is limited to either (1) a safety injection actuation in a water-solid RCS with the pressurizer heaters energized or (2) the start of an idle RCP with the secondary water temperature of the steam generator less than or equal to 40F above the RCS cold leg temperatures with the pressurizer water-solid.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 37 of 40 REVISION NO.:
LCO 3.4.9.3 Action d prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to inoperable PORVs used for LTOP. There is an increased risk associated with entering MODE 4 from MODE 5 with PORVs used for LTOP inoperable and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
3/4.4.10     REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM VENTS Reactor Coolant System vents are provided to exhaust noncondensible gases and/or steam from the primary system that could inhibit natural circulation core cooling. The OPERABILITY of at least one Reactor Coolant System vent path from the reactor vessel head and the pressurizer steam space ensures the capability exists to perform this function.
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.9 PRESSURE/T EMPERATURE LIMITS (continued) The reactor vessel materials have been tested to determine their initial RTNDT; the results of these tests are s hown in Table B 3/4.4-1. Reactor operation and resultant fast neutron (E greater than 1 MeV) irradiation will cause an increase in the RTNDT. An adjusted referenc e temperature can be predicated using a) the initial RT NDT , b) the fluence (E greater than 1 MeV), including appropriate adjustments fo r neutron attenuation and neutron energy spectrum variations through the wall thickness, c) the copper and nickel contents of the material, and d) t he transition temperature shift as recommended by Regulatory Guide 1.99, Revision 2, "Effects of Residual Elements on Predicted Radi ation Damage to Reactor Vessel Materials,"  or other approved method. The heatup and cooldown limit curves Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 include predicted adjus tments for this shift in RT NDT at 47 EFPY.
The redundancy design of the Reactor Coolant System vent systems serves to minimize the probability of inadvertent or irreversible actuation while ensuring that a single failure of a vent valve, power supply, or control system does not prevent isolation of the vent path.
The actual shift in RT NDT of the vessel materials will be benchmarked periodically during operation, by removing and evaluating, in accordance with 10 CFR 50 Appendix H and ASTM E185, reac tor vessel material irradiation surveillance specimens inst alled near the inside wall of the reactor vessel in the core area. Since the neutron spectra at the irradiation samples and the vessel inside radius are essentiall y identical, the measured transition temperature shift in RT NDT for a set of material samples can be compared to the predictions of RT NDT that were used for preparations of the pressure/temperature limits curv es. If the measured delta RT NDT values from the surveillance capsule are not cons ervatively within the measurement uncertainty of the prediction method, then heat up and cooldown curves must be re-evaluated.
The function, capabilities, and testing requirements of the Reactor Coolant System vent system are consistent with the requirements of Item II.b.1 of NUREG-0737, Clarification of TMI Action Plan Requirements, November 1980.
The pressure-temperature limit lines shown on Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 for reactor criticality and for inservice leak and hydrostatic testing have been


provided to assure compliance with the minimum temperature requirements for Appendix G to 10 CFR 50. The maximum RT NDT all Reactor Coolant S ystem pressure-retaining materials, with the exception of t he reactor pressure vessel, has been determined to be 60 F. The Lowest Service Tem perature limit line shown on Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 is based upon this RT NDT since Article NB-2332 (Summer Addenda of 1972) of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code requires the Lowest Service Temperature to be RT NDT + 100 F for piping, pumps, and valves. Below th is temperature, t he system pressure must be limited to a maximum of 20%
SECTION NO.:                                                                                                                                  PAGE:
of the system's hydrostatic test pressure.
TITLE:                               TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                                          BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                                                         39 of 40 REVISION NO.:                                                REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                                                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE B 3/4.4-1 REACTOR VESSEL TOUGHNESS Temperature of       Minimum Upper Shelf Cv Charpy V-Notch RT      energy for Transverse Drop Weight        (F) NDT              Direction Charpy(1)
SECTION NO.:
Piece No.      Code No.            Material          Vessel Location              Results        @ 50 ft-lb                    Ft-lb 122-102A        M-604-1          SA 533B C1 1          Upper Shell Plate              0                +50                        ---
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 38 of 40 REVISION NO.:
122-102B        M-604-2          SA 533B C1 1          Upper Shell Plate              +10              +50                        ---
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
122-102C        M-604-3          SA 533B C1 1          Upper Shell Plate              -10              +10                        ---
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.9 PRESSURE/T EMPERATURE LIMITS (continued)
124-102B        M-605-1          SA 533B C1 1      Immediate Shell Plate              0                +30                        105 124-102C        M-605-2          SA 533B C1 1      Immediate Shell Plate            -10              +10                        113 124-102A        M-605-3          SA 533B C1 1      Immediate Shell Plate            -20                0                        113 142-102C      M-4116-1          SA 533B C1 1          Lower Shell Plate              -30              +20                        91 142-102B      M-4116-2          SA 533B C1 1          Lower Shell Plate              -50              +20                        105 142-102A      M-4116-3          SA 533B C1 1          Lower Shell Plate              -40               +20                        100 102-101      M-4110-1          SA 533B C1 1            Closure Head                -10              +30                        ---
The limitations imposed on the pressu rizer heatup and cooldown rates are provided to assure that the pressurize r is operated within the design criteria assumed for the fatigue analysis perfo rmed in accordance with the ASME Code requirements.
106-101      M-4101-1          SA 508 C1 2        Closure Head Flange              0                0                          ---
The OPERABILITY of two PORVs, two SDCRVs or an RCS vent opening of greater than 3.58 square inches ensures that the RCS will be protected from pressure transients which could exceed the limits of Appendix G to 10 CFR
128-101A      M-4102-1          SA 508 C1 2            Inlet Nozzle                -20              -20                        ---
128-101D      M-4102-2          SA 508 C1 2            Inlet Nozzle                -20              -20                        ---
128-101B      M-4102-3           SA 508 C1 2            Inlet Nozzle                0                0                          ---
128-101C      M-4102-4           SA 508 C1 2            Inlet Nozzle                -10              -10                        ---
128-301B      M-4103-1          SA 508 C1 2            Outlet Nozzle                -20              -20                        ---
128-301A      M-4103-2          SA 508 C1 2            Outlet Nozzle                -30              -30                        ---
126-101        M-602-1          SA 508 C1 2          Vessel Flange                -30              -10                        ---
131-102A      M-4104-1          SA 508 C1 1      Inlet Nozzle Safe End            -20              +20                        ---
131-102D      M-4104-2          SA 508 C1 1      Inlet Nozzle Safe End            -20              +20                        ---
131-102B      M-4104-3          SA 508 C1 1      Inlet Nozzle Safe End            -20              +20                        ---
131-102C      M-4104-4           SA 508 C1 1      Inlet Nozzle Safe End            -20              +20                        ---
131-101B      M-4105-1          SA 508 C1 1      Outlet Nozzle Safe End            -10                0                          ---
131-101A      M-4105-2          SA 508 C1 1      Outlet Nozzle Safe End            -10                0                          ---
152-101      M-4112-1          SA 533B C1 1        Bottom Head Dome                -50              -40                        ---
154-102      M-4111-1          SA 533B C1 1        Bottom Head Torus              -40              +40                        ---
(A to F) 104-102      M-4109-1          SA 533B C1 1        Closure Head Torus              -60              -10(2)                      ---
(A to D)
(1) Reported only for beltline region plates (2) A 10F RTNDT increase shall be added to the Closure Head Torus as a result of using a temper bead weld procedure identified in PCM 03021.


Part 50 when one or more of the RCS co ld leg temperatures are less than or equal to the LTOP temperatures.
SECTION NO.:                                                                  PAGE:
The Low Temperature Overpressure Protection System has adequate relieving capability to protect the RCS from overpressurization when the transient is lim ited to either (1) a safety injection actuation in a water-solid RCS with t he pressurizer heaters energized or (2) the start of an idle RCP with the sec ondary water temperat ure of the steam generator less than or equal to 40F above the RCS cold leg temperatures with the pressurizer water-solid.
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4                 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04                    40 of 40 REVISION NO.:                      REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4        REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
LCO 3.4.9.3 Action d prohibits the applic ation of LCO 3.0.4.b to inoperable PORVs used for LTOP. There is an increased risk associated with entering MODE 4 from MODE 5 with PORVs used for LTOP inoperable and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.11      STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The inservice inspection and testing programs for ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 components ensure that the structural integrity and operational readiness of these components will be maintained at an acceptable level throughout the life of the plant. This programs are in accordance with Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable Addenda as required by 10 CFR Part 50.55a (g) except where specific written relief has been granted by the Commission pursuant to 10 CFR Part 50.55a (g) (6) (i).
Components of the reactor coolant system were designed to provide access to permit inservice inspections in accordance with Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 1971 Edition and Addenda through Winter 1973.


assessment addressing inoperable syst ems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.
Section No.
3/4.4.10 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM VENTS Reactor Coolant System vents are provided to exhaust noncondensible gases and/or steam from the primary system that could inhibit natural circulation core cooling. The OPERAB ILITY of at least one Reactor Coolant System vent path from the reactor vessel head and the pressurizer steam space ensures the capability exists to perform this function. The redundancy design of the Reactor Coolant System vent systems serves to minimize the probability of inadvert ent or irreversible actuation while ensuring that a single failure of a vent valve, power supply, or control system does not prevent isolation of the vent path.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                         3/4.5 Attachment No.
The function, capabilities, and testing requirements of the Reactor Coolant System vent system are consistent with the requirements of Item II.b.1 of NUREG-0737, "Clarification of TMI Ac tion Plan Requirements," November 1980.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 7
SECTION NO.:
BASES ATTACHMENT 7 Current Revision No.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 39 of 40 REVISION NO.:
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                                   6 Title:
17  TABLE B 3/4.4-1 REACTOR VESSEL TOUGHNESS Piece No. Code No. Material Vessel Location Drop Weight Results Temperature of Charpy V-Notch RT (F) NDT @ 50 ft-lb Minimum Upper Shelf Cv energy for Transverse Direction Charpy (1)  Ft-lb 122-102A M-604-1 SA 533B C1 1 Upper Shell Plate 0 +50 --- 122-102B M-604-2 SA 533B C1 1 Upper Shell Plate +10 +50 --- 122-102C M-604-3 SA 533B C1 1 Upper Shell Plate -10 +10 --- 124-102B M-605-1 SA 533B C1 1 Immediate Shell Plate 0 +30 105 124-102C M-605-2 SA 533B C1 1 Immediate Shell Plate -10 +10 113 124-102A M-605-3 SA 533B C1 1 Immediate Shell Plate -20 0 113 142-102C M-4116-1 SA 533B C1 1 Lower Shell Plate -30 +20 91 142-102B M-4116-2 SA 533B C1 1 Lower Shell Plate -50 +20 105 142-102A M-4116-3 SA 533B C1 1 Lower Shell Plate -40 +20 100 102-101 M-4110-1 SA 533B C1 1 Closure Head -10 +30 --- 106-101 M-4101-1 SA 508 C1 2 Closure Head Flange 0 0 --- 128-101A M-4102-1 SA 508 C1 2 Inlet Nozzle 20 --- 128-101D M-4102-2 SA 508 C1 2 Inlet Nozzle 20 --- 128-101B M-4102-3 SA 508 C1 2 Inlet Nozzle 0 0 --- 128-101C M-4102-4 SA 508 C1 2 Inlet Nozzle 10 --- 128-301B M-4103-1 SA 508 C1 2 Outlet Nozzle 20 --- 128-301A M-4103-2 SA 508 C1 2 Outlet Nozzle 30 --- 126-101 M-602-1 SA 508 C1 2 Vessel Flange 10 --- 131-102A M-4104-1 SA 508 C1 1 Inlet Nozzle Safe End -20 +20 --- 131-102D M-4104-2 SA 508 C1 1 Inlet Nozzle Safe End -20 +20 --- 131-102B M-4104-3 SA 508 C1 1 Inlet Nozzle Safe End -20 +20 --- 131-102C M-4104-4 SA 508 C1 1 Inlet Nozzle Safe End -20 +20 --- 131-101B M-4105-1 SA 508 C1 1 Outlet Nozzle Safe End -10 0 --- 131-101A M-4105-2 SA 508 C1 1 Outlet Nozzle Safe End -10 0 --- 152-101 M-4112-1 SA 533B C1 1 Bottom Head Dome 40 --- 154-102 M-4111-1 SA 533B C1 1 Bottom Head Torus -40 +40 --- (A to F)      104-102 M-4109-1 SA 533B C1 1 Closure Head Torus 10 (2) --- (A to D)
EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
(1)  Reported only for beltline region plates (2)  A 10 F RT NDT increase shall be added to the Closure Head Torus as a result of using a temper bead weld procedure identified in PCM 03021.
Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.4 40 of 40 REVISION NO.:
17  3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.4.11 STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The inservice inspection and testing programs for ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 components ensure that t he structural integrity and operational readiness of these components will be maintained at an acceptable level throughout the life of the plant. This programs are in accordance with Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable Addenda as required by 10 CFR Part 50.55a (g) except where specific written relief has been
 
granted by the Commission pursuant to 10 CFR Part 50.55a (g) (6) (i). Components of the reactor coolant system were designed to provide access to permit inservice inspections in accordance with Secti on XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 1971 Edition and Addenda through Winter
 
1973.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
3/4.5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
7 Current Revision No.
6 SAFETY RELATED Title: EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) Responsible Department:
Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 2210011 based on NRC approval of TSTF-545. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 2210011 based on NRC approval of TSTF-545.
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2143581 to update procedure number reference. (Author: N. Davidson)
(Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verb iage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)  
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2143581 to update procedure number reference.
(Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verbiage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1948043 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)
Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 1 - Incorporated PCR 04-3132 to implement amendments 194/136. (K. W. Frehafer, 11/24/04)
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
Revision            Approved By                Approval Date      UNIT #          UNIT 2 DATE 0                  R.G. West                    08/30/01        DOCT          PROCEDURE DOCN          Section 3/4.5 SYS 6                  R. Wright                    07/07/16        STATUS        COMPLETED REV                6
                                                                        # OF PGS


Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1948043 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5            BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04                                                    2 of 8 REVISION NO.:        EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.5 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) ..................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.5.1    SAFETY INJECTION TANKS ......................................... 3 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3            ECCS SUBSYSTEMS ............................... 4 3/4.5.4    REFUELING WATER TANK ........................................... 6


====4.0.4. (Author====
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
N. Elmore)
TITLE:       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5                BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04                             3 of 8 REVISION NO.:           EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.5 3/4.5         EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
 
BASES 3/4.5.1       SAFETY INJECTION TANKS The OPERABILITY of each of the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) safety injection tanks ensures that a sufficient volume of borated water will be immediately forced into the reactor core through each of the cold legs in the event the RCS pressure falls below the pressure of the safety injection tanks. This initial surge of water into the core provides the initial cooling mechanism during large RCS pipe ruptures.
Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU cond itions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR.  (Author: Don Pendagast)
 
Revision 1
- Incorporated PCR 04-3132 to implement amendments 194/136. (K. W. Frehafer, 11/24/04)
Revision 0
- Bases for Technical Specifications.  (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)  Revision  Approved By  Approval Date  UNIT # UNIT 2        DATE 0  R.G. West  08/30/01  DOCT PROCEDURE        DOCN Section 3/4.5 SYS  6  R. Wright  07/07/16  STATUS COMPLETED REV 6        # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.5 2 of 8 REVISION NO.:
6  TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.5 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEM S (ECCS) ..................... 3
 
BASES ............................................................................................ 3
 
3/4.5.1 SAFETY IN JECTION TA NKS ......................................... 3
 
3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS ............................... 4
 
3/4.5.4 REFUELIN G WATER TANK ........................................... 6  
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.5 3 of 8 REVISION NO.:
BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.5 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) BASES 3/4.5.1 SAFETY INJECTION TANKS The OPERABILITY of each of the Reac tor Coolant System (RCS) safety injection tanks ensures that a sufficient volume of borated water will be immediately forced into the reactor co re through each of the cold legs in the event the RCS pressure falls below the pressure of the safety injection tanks. This initial surge of water into the core provides the initial cooling mechanism during large RCS pipe ruptures.
The limits on safety injection tank volume, boron concentration, and pressure ensure that the assumptions used for safety injection tank injection in the safety analysis are met.
The limits on safety injection tank volume, boron concentration, and pressure ensure that the assumptions used for safety injection tank injection in the safety analysis are met.
The safety injection tank power-operated isolation valves are considered to be "operating bypasses" in the c ontext of IEEE Std. 279-1971, which requires that bypasses of a protective function be removed automatically whenever permissive conditions are not me
The safety injection tank power-operated isolation valves are considered to be operating bypasses in the context of IEEE Std. 279-1971, which requires that bypasses of a protective function be removed automatically whenever permissive conditions are not met. In addition, as these safety injection tank isolation valves fail to meet single failure criteria, removal of power to the valves is required.
: t. In addition, as these safety injection tank isolation valves fail to meet single failure criteria, removal of power to the valves is required.
The limit of 72 hours for operation with an SIT that is inoperable due to boron concentration not within limits, or due to the inability to verify liquid volume or cover-pressure, considers that the volume of the SIT is still available for injection in the event of a LOCA. If one SIT is inoperable for other reasons, the SIT may be unable to perform its safety function and, based on probability risk assessment, operation in this condition is limited to 24 hours.
The limit of 72 hours for operation wit h an SIT that is inoperable due to boron concentration not within limits, or due to the inability to verify liquid volume or cover-pressure, considers t hat the volume of the SIT is still available for injection in the event of a LOCA. If one SIT is inoperable for other reasons, the SIT may be unable to perform its safety function and, based on probability risk assessment, operation in this condition is limited to 24 hours.
The practice of calibrating and testing the SIT isolation valve interlock function below 515 psia (the current plant practice is to set and test the interlock function at 500 psia) meets the requirements of Technical Specification Surveillance 4.5.1.1.d.1. The staff accepted that testing the SIT isolation interlock at a more conservative setpoint demonstrates operability at and above the setpoint (NRC letter from William C. Gleaves to J.A. Stall dated November 2, 1999, subject St. Lucie Unit 2 -
The practice of calibrating and testi ng the SIT isolation valve interlock function below 515 psia (the current plant practice is to set and test the interlock function at 500 psia) meet s the requirements of Technical Specification Surveillance 4.5.1.1.d.1.
Amendment Request Regarding Safety Injection Tank and Shutdown Cooling System Isolation Interlock Surveillances (TAC No. MA5619).
The staff accept ed that testing the SIT isolation interlock at a more conservative setpoint demonstrates  


operability at and above the setpoint (NRC letter from William C. Gleaves to J.A. Stall dated November 2, 1 999, subject "St. Lucie Unit 2 - Amendment Request Regarding Safety Injection Tank and Shutdown Cooling System Isolation Interlo ck Surveillances (TAC No. MA5619)."
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5                BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04                        4 of 8 REVISION NO.:            EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5        EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS The OPERABILITY of two separate and independent ECCS subsystems ensures that sufficient emergency core cooling capability will be available in the event of a LOCA assuming the loss of one subsystem through any single failure consideration. Either subsystem operating in conjunction with the safety injection tanks is capable of supplying sufficient core cooling to limit the peak cladding temperatures within acceptable limits for all postulated break sizes ranging from the double-ended break of the largest RCS hot leg pipe downward. In addition, each ECCS subsystem provides long-term core cooling capability in the recirculation mode during the accident recovery period. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.
TS 3.5.2.c and 3.5.3 require that ECCS subsystem(s) have an independent OPERABLE flow path capable of automatically transferring suction to the containment on a Recirculation Actuation Signal. The containment sump is defined as the area of containment below the minimum flood level in the vicinity of the containment sump strainers. Therefore, the LCOs are satisfied when an independent OPERABLE flow path to the containment sump strainer is available.
TS 3.5.2.d requires that an ECCS subsystem(s) have an OPERABLE charging pump and associated flow path from the BAMT(s). Reference to TS 3.1.2.2 requires that the one charging pump flow path is from the BAMT(s) through the boric acid makeup pump(s). The second charging pump flowpath is from the BAMT(s) through the gravity feed valves.
TS 3.5.2, ACTION a.1. provides an allowed outage/action completion time (AOT) of up to 7 days from initial discovery of failure to meet the LCO provided the affected ECCS subsystem is inoperable only because its associated LPSI train is inoperable. This 7 day AOT is based on the findings of a deterministic and probabilistic safety analysis and is referred to as a risk-informed AOT extension. Entry into this ACTION requires that a risk assessment be performed in accordance with the Configuration Risk Management Program (CRMP) which is described in ER-AA-100-2002, that implements the Maintenance Rule pursuant to 10 CFR 50.65.
In Mode 3 with RCS pressure < 1750 psia and in Mode 4, one OPERABLE ECCS subsystem is acceptable without single failure consideration on the basis of the stable reactivity condition of the reactor and the limited core cooling requirements.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5                BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04                       5 of 8 REVISION NO.:            EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5         EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.5 4 of 8 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS (continued)
3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)
LCO 3.5.3 Action c prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to inoperable ECCS High Pressure Safety Injection subsystem. There is an increased risk associated with entering MODE 4 from MODE 5 with an inoperable ECCS High Pressure Safety Injection subsystem and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.
BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS The OPERABILITY of two separate and independent ECCS subsystems ensures that sufficient emergency core cooling capability will be available in the event of a LOCA assuming the loss of one subsystem through any single failure consideration. Either subsystem operating in conjunction with the safety injection tanks is capable of supplying sufficient core cooling to limit the peak cladding temperatures within acceptable limits for
The trisodium phosphate dodecahydrate (TSP) stored in dissolving baskets located in the containment basement is provided to minimize the possibility of corrosion cracking of certain metal components during operation of the ECCS following a LOCA. The TSP provided this protection by dissolving in the sump water and causing its final pH to be raised to greater than or equal to 7.0.
 
The requirement for one high pressure safety injection pump to be rendered inoperable prior to entering MODE 5, although the analysis supports actuation of safety injection in a water solid RCS with pressurizer heaters energized, provides additional administrative assurance that a mass addition pressure transient can be relieved by the operation of a single PORV or SDCRV. A limit on the maximum number of operable HPSI pumps is not necessary when the pressurizer manway cover or the reactor vessel head is removed.
all postulated break sizes ranging from the double-end ed break of the largest RCS hot leg pipe downward.
The Surveillance Requirements provided to ensure OPERABILITY of each component ensure that a minimum, the assumptions used in the accident analyses are met and that subsystem OPERABILITY is maintained. The Surveillance Requirement for throttle valve position stops, along with appropriate post-maintenance flow balance testing,* provides assurance that proper ECCS flows will be maintained in the event of a LOCA.
In addition, each ECCS subsystem provides long-term core cooling capabilit y in the recirculation mode during the accident recovery period. Managi ng of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling syst em OPERABILITY.
Maintenance of proper flow resistance and pressure drop in the piping system to each injection point is necessary to: (1) prevent total pump flow from exceeding runout conditions when the system is in its minimum resistance configuration, (2) provide the proper flow split between injection points in accordance with the assumptions used in the ECCS-LOCA analyses, and (3) provide an acceptable level of total ECCS flow to all injection points equal to or above that assumed in the ECCS-LOCA analyses. The requirement to dissolve a representative sample of TSP in a sample of RWT water provides assurance that the stored TSP will dissolve in borated water at the postulated post-LOCA temperatures.
TS 3.5.2.c and 3.5.3 requi re that ECCS subsyste m(s) have an independent OPERABLE flow path capable of automat ically transferring suction to the containment on a Recirculation Actuation Signal. The containment sump is
 
defined as the area of containment below the minimum flood level in the vicinity of the containment sump strai ners. Therefore, the LCOs are satisfied when an independent OPERABLE flow path to the containment sump strainer is available.  
 
TS 3.5.2.d requires that an ECCS subsystem(s) have an OPERABLE charging pump and associated flow path from the BAMT(s). Reference to TS 3.1.2.2 requires that the one charging pump flow path is from the BAMT(s) through the boric acid makeup pump(s). The second charging pump flowpath is from the BAMT(s) through the gravity feed valves. TS 3.5.2, ACTION a.1. provides an allowed outage/action completion time (AOT) of up to 7 days from initial discovery of failure to meet the LCO provided the affected ECCS subsystem is inoperable only because its associated LPSI train is inoperable.
This 7 day AOT is based on the findings of a deterministic and probabi listic safety analysis and is referred to as a "risk-informed" AOT extension.
Entry into this ACTION requires that a risk assessment be performed in accordance with the Configuration
 
Risk Management Program (CRMP) which is described in


ER-AA-100-2002, that implements the Maintenanc e Rule pursuant to 10 CFR 50.65.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
In Mode 3 with RCS pressure <
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5                BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04                       6 of 8 REVISION NO.:          EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5         EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)
1750 psia and in Mode 4, one OPERABLE ECCS subsystem is a cceptable without single failure consideration on the basis of the stable reactivity condition of the reactor and the limited core cooling requirements.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.5 5 of 8 REVISION NO.:
3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS (continued)
LCO 3.5.3 Action c prohibits the applic ation of LCO 3.0.4.b to inoperable ECCS High Pressure Safety Injection subsystem. There is an increased risk associated with entering MODE 4 from MODE 5 with an inoperable ECCS High Pressure Safety Injection subsystem and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk
TS Surveillance Requirement 4.5.2.b is modified by a Note which exempts system vent flow paths opened under administrative control. The administrative control should be proceduralized and include stationing a dedicated individual at the system vent flow path who is in continuous communication with the operators in the control room. The individual will have a method to rapidly close the system vent path if directed.
 
Periodic surveillance testing of ECCS pumps to detect gross degradation caused by impeller structural damage or other hydraulic component problems is required by Section XI of the ASME Code. This type of testing may be accomplished by measuring the pump developed head at only one point on the pump characteristic curve. This verifies both that the measured performance is within an acceptable tolerance of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the unit safety analysis. Surveillance Requirements are specified in the INSERVICE TESTING PROGRAM, which encompasses Section XI of the ASME Code. Section XI of the ASME Code provides the activities and frequencies necessary to satisfy the requirements.
assessment addressing inoperable syst ems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.
* Refer to UFSAR for flow balancing requirements The practice of calibrating and testing the SDC isolation valve interlock function below 515 psia (the current plant practice is to set and test the interlock function at 500 psia) meets the requirements of Technical Specification Surveillance 4.5.2.e.1. The staff accepted that testing the SDC isolation interlock at a more conservative setpoint demonstrates operability at and above the setpoint (NRC letter from William C. Gleaves to J.A. Stall dated November 2, 1999, subject St. Lucie Unit 2 -
The trisodium phosphate dodecahydra te (TSP) stored in dissolving baskets located in the containment bas ement is provided to minimize the possibility of corrosion cracking of certain metal components during operation of the ECCS following a LOCA. The TSP provided this protection by dissolving in the sump water and causing its final pH to be raised to greater than or equal to 7.0. The requirement for one high pressure safety injection pump to be rendered inoperable prior to entering MODE 5, although the analysis supports actuation of safety injection in a water solid RCS with pressurizer heaters energized, provides additional administrative assurance that a mass addition pressure transient can be relieved by the operation of a single PORV or SDCRV. A limit on the maximum number of operable HPSI pumps is not necessary when the pressurizer manway cover or the
Amendment Request Regarding Safety Injection Tank and Shutdown Cooling System Isolation Interlock Surveillances (TAC No. MA5619).
 
ECCS piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the ECCS and may also prevent a water hammer, pump cavitation, and pumping of noncondensible gas into the reactor vessel.
reactor vessel head is removed.
The Surveillance Requirements provided to ensure OPERABILITY of each component ensure that a minimum, t he assumptions used in the accident analyses are met and that subsystem OPERABILITY is maintained. The Surveillance Requirement for throttle valve position stops, along with appropriate post-maintenance flow balance testing,* provides assurance
 
that proper ECCS flows will be maintained in the event of a LOCA.
Maintenance of proper flow resistanc e and pressure drop in the piping system to each injection point is necessary to: (1) prevent total pump flow from exceeding runout conditions w hen the system is in its minimum resistance configuration, (2) provide the proper flow split between injection points in accordance with the assumptions used in the ECCS-LOCA analyses, and (3) provide an acceptable level of total ECCS flow to all injection points equal to or above that assumed in the ECCS-LOCA analyses. The requirement to dissolve a representative sample of TSP in a sample of RWT water provides assurance that the stored TSP will dissolve in borated water at the po stulated post-LOCA temperatures.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.5 6 of 8 REVISION NO.:
6  3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS (continued) TS Surveillance Requirement 4.5.2.b is modified by a Note which exempts system vent flow paths opened under administrative control. The administrative control should be proc eduralized and include stationing a dedicated individual at the system vent flow path who is in continuous  
 
communication with the operators in the control room. The individual will have a method to rapidly close the system vent path if directed. Periodic surveillance testing of ECCS pumps to detect gross degradation  
 
caused by impeller structural damage or other hydraulic component problems is required by Section XI of the ASME Code. This type of testing may be accomplished by measuring the pum p developed head at only one point on the pump characteristic curve. Th is verifies both that the measured performance is within an acceptable tole rance of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the unit safety analysis. Surveillance  
 
Requirements are specified in the INSERVICE TESTING PROGRAM, which encompasses Section XI of the ASME Code. Secti on XI of the ASME Code provides the activities and frequencies nec essary to satisfy the requirements.
* Refer to UFSAR for flow balancing requirements The practice of calibrating and testi ng the SDC isolation valve interlock  


function below 515 psia (the current plant practice is to set and test the interlock function at 500 psia) meet s the requirements of Technical Specification Surveillance 4.5.2.e.1.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
The staff accepted that testing the SDC isolation interlock at a more conservative setpoint demonstrates
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5                BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04                         7 of 8 REVISION NO.:            EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5         EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)
 
operability at and above the setpoint (NRC letter from William C. Gleaves to J.A. Stall dated November 2, 1 999, subject "St. Lucie Unit 2 - Amendment Request Regarding Safety Injection Tank and Shutdown Cooling System Isolation Interlo ck Surveillances (TAC No. MA5619)." ECCS piping and components have the potential to develop voids and
 
pockets of entrained gases. Prev enting and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the ECCS and may also prevent a water hammer, pump cavitation, and pumping of noncondensible
 
gas into the reactor vessel.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.5 7 of 8 REVISION NO.:
3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS (continued)
Selection of ECCS locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information , including piping and instrument  
Selection of ECCS locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations.
 
The design review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become sources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration.
drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The design review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientati on of important components that can become sources of ga s or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove duri ng system maintenance or restoration.
Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.
Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.
The ECCS is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumulated gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible location (o r the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the ECCS is not rendered  
The ECCS is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumulated gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible location (or the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the ECCS is not rendered inoperable by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met. Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.
 
inoperable by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declar ed met. Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.
ECCS locations susceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found, the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location.
ECCS locations susceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found, the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location.
Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which ar e subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a  
Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of susceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or environmental conditions, plant configuration, or personnel safety concerns.
For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible locations where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The accuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.
The Surveillance Frequency Control Program frequency takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the ECCS piping and the adequacy of the procedural controls governing system operation.


representative subset of susceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are i naccessible due to radiological or environmental conditions, plant configurat ion, or personnel safety concerns.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible loca tions where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The a ccuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5                BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04                          8 of 8 REVISION NO.:          EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5        EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.5.4      REFUELING WATER TANK The OPERABILITY of the Refueling Water Tank (RWT) as part of the ECCS ensures that a sufficient supply of borated water is available for injection by the ECCS in the event of a LOCA. The limits on RWT minimum volume and boron concentration ensure that (1) sufficient water is available within containment to permit recirculation cooling flow to the core, and (2) the reactor will remain subcritical in the cold condition following mixing of the RWT and the RCS water volumes with all control rods inserted except for the most reactive control assembly. These assumptions are consistent with the LOCA analyses.
The contained water volume limit includes an allowance for water not usable because of tank discharge line location or other physical characteristics.
The limits on contained water volume and boron concentration of the RWT also ensure a pH value of between 7.0 and 8.1 for the solution recirculated within containment after a LOCA. This pH band minimizes the evolution of iodine and minimizes the effect of chloride and caustic stress corrosion on mechanical systems and components.


sufficient to assure syste m OPERABILITY during the Sur veillance interval. The Surveillance Frequency Control Program frequency takes into
Section No.
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                       3/4.6 Attachment No.
consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the ECCS piping and the adequacy of the procedural cont rols governing system operation
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 8
.
BASES ATTACHMENT 8 Current Revision No.
SECTION NO.:
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                                 15 Title:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)
CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.5 8 of 8 REVISION NO.:
6   3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)  BASES (continued) 3/4.5.4 REFUELING WATER TANK The OPERABILITY of the Refueling Water Tank (RWT) as part of the ECCS ensures that a sufficient suppl y of borated water is available for injection by the ECCS in the event of a LOCA. The limits on RWT minimum volume and boron concentration ensure that (1) sufficient water
 
is available within containment to permit recirculation cooling flow to the core, and (2) the reactor will remain subcritical in the cold condition
 
following mixing of the RWT and the RCS water volumes with all control
 
rods inserted except for the most reactive control assembly. These assumptions are consistent with the LOCA analyses.
The contained water volume limit includes an allowance for water not usable because of tank discharge line location or other physical characteristics.
 
The limits on contained water volume and boron concentration of the RWT also ensure a pH value of betw een 7.0 and 8.1 for the solution recirculated within containment afte r a LOCA. This pH band minimizes the evolution of iodine and minimizes the effect of chloride and caustic stress corrosion on mechanical systems and components.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
3/4.6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
8 Current Revision No.
15 SAFETY RELATED Title: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS Responsible Department:
Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 15 - Incorporated PCR 2083645 to eliminate second completion times associated with TS 3.6.2.1, Containment Spray and Co oling Systems. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 15 - Incorporated PCR 2083645 to eliminate second completion times associated with TS 3.6.2.1, Containment Spray and Cooling Systems. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 14 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verbi age to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)  
Revision 14 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verbiage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)
 
Revision 13 - Incorporated PCR 02071738 for TSTF-426 as part of the original LAR review and approval (L-2014-160). (Author: M DiMarco)
Revision 13 - Incorporated PCR 02071738 for TSTF-426 as part of the original LAR review and approval (L-2014-160). (Author: M DiMarco)
Revision 12 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 11 - Incorporated PCR 1860924 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 10 - Incorporate PCR 1862724 to correct a typographical error and discuss use of terminology of sealed. (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 9 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 8 - Incorporated PCR 08-6765 for CR 2007-32178 for Bases changes to Technical Specifications 155 for License Amendments 152 and 153. Procedure changes to implement AST were reviewed in ORG 07-041 on 5/29/07 as part of the license amendment submittal.
(Author: Ken Frehafer)
Revision            Approved By                Approval Date      UNIT #          UNIT 2 DATE 0                  R. G. West                  08/30/01        DOCT          PROCEDURE DOCN          Section 3/4.6 SYS 15                E. Katzman                    12/18/15        STATUS        COMPLETED REV                15
                                                                        # OF PGS


Revision 12 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency c ontrol Program. (Aut hor: K. Frehafer)
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
Revision 11 - Incorporated PCR 1860924 to update for Un it 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6            BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                                                  2 of 14 REVISION NO.:                       CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.6 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ............................................................ 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.6.1    PRIMARY CONTAINMENT ............................................ 3 3/4.6.1.1        CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY ....................... 3 3/4.6.1.2        CONTAINMENT LEAKAGE ......................... 3 3/4.6.1.3        CONTAINMENT AIR LOCKS ....................... 4 3/4.6.1.4        INTERNAL PRESSURE ............................... 4 3/4.6.1.5        AIR TEMPERATURE ................................... 4 3/4.6.1.6        CONTAINMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY .................................................. 4 3/4.6.1.7        CONTAINMENT VENTILATION SYSTEM ... 5 3/4.6.2    DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS ....... 6 3/4.6.2.1        CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS .................................................... 6 3/4.6.2.2       IODINE REMOVAL SYSTEM ..................... 10 3/4.6.2.3        DELETED ................................................... 10 3/4.6.3    CONTAINMENT ISOLATION VALVES ......................... 10 3/4.6.4    DELETED ..................................................................... 11 3/4.6.5    VACUUM RELIEF VALVES .......................................... 11 3/4.6.6    SECONDARY CONTAINMENT .................................... 13 3/4.6.6.1        SHIELD BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM .................................................... 13 3/4.6.6.2       SHIELD BUILDING INTEGRITY ................ 14 3/4.6.6.3        SHIELD BUILDING STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY ................................................ 14
Revision 10 - Incorporate PCR 1862724 to correct a typographical error and discuss use of terminology of "sealed". (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 9 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU cond itions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)


Revision 8
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
- Incorporated PCR 08-6765 for CR 2007-3 2178 for Bases changes to Technical Specifications 155 for Lic ense Amendments 152 and 153. Proc edure changes to implement AST were reviewed in ORG 07-041 on 5/29/07 as part of the license amendment submittal.  (Author:  Ken Frehafer)  Revision  Approved By  Approval Date  UNIT # UNIT 2        DATE 0  R. G. West  08/30/01  DOCT PROCEDURE        DOCN Section 3/4.6 SYS  15  E. Katzman  12/18/15  STATUS COMPLETED REV 15        # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                           3 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.6 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.6.1      PRIMARY CONTAINMENT 3/4.6.1.1    CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY Primary CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY ensures that the release of radioactive materials from the containment atmosphere will be restricted to those leakage paths and associated leak rates assumed in the safety analyses. This restriction, in conjunction with the leakage rate limitation, will limit the offsite radiation doses to within the limits of 10 CFR 50.67 during accident conditions.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 2 of 14 REVISION NO.:
In accordance with Generic Letter 91-08, Removal of Component Component Lists from Technical Specifications, the opening of locked or sealed closed containment isolation valves on an intermittent basis under administrative control includes the following considerations: (1) stationing an operator, who is in constant communication with the control room, at the valve controls, (2) instructing this operator to close these valves in an accident situation, and (3) assuring that environmental conditions will not preclude access to close the valves and that this action will prevent the release of radioactivity outside the containment.
15  TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.6 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.6 CONTAINM ENT SYSTEMS ............................................................ 3
3/4.6.1.2    CONTAINMENT LEAKAGE The limitations on containment leakage rates ensure that total containment leakage volume will not exceed the value assumed in the accident analyses at the peak accident pressure, Pa (43.48 psig) which results from the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident.
The surveillance testing for measuring leakage rates is performed in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Program, and is consistent with the requirements of Appendix J of 10 CFR 50 Option B and Regulatory Guide 1.163 dated September, 1995, as modified by approved exemptions.


BASES ............................................................................................ 3
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                  BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                          4 of 14 REVISION NO.:                          CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.1      CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.3    CONTAINMENT AIR LOCKS The limitations on closure and leak rate for the containment air locks are required to meet the restrictions on CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY and containment leak rate. Surveillance testing of the air lock seals provides assurance that the overall air lock leakage will not become excessive due to seal damage during the intervals between air lock leakage tests.
3/4.6.1.4    INTERNAL PRESSURE The limitations on containment internal pressure ensure that (1) the containment structure is prevented from exceeding its design negative pressure differential with respect to the annulus atmosphere of 0.7 psi and (2) the containment peak pressure does not exceed the design pressure of 44 psig during loss of coolant accident conditions.
The maximum peak pressure expected to be obtained from a loss of coolant accident is 43.48 psig. The limit of 0.4 psig for initial positive containment pressure will limit the maximum peak pressure to less than the design pressure of 44 psig and is consistent with the safety analyses.
3/4.6.1.5    AIR TEMPERATURE The limitation on containment average air temperature ensures that the peak containment vessel temperature does not exceed the containment vessel design temperature of 264F during steam line break and loss of coolant accident conditions and is consistent with the safety analyses.
3/4.6.1.6    CONTAINMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment steel vessel will be maintained comparable to the original design standards for the life of the facility. Structural integrity is required to ensure that the vessel will withstand the maximum pressure of 43.48 psig in the event of the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident. A visual inspection in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Program is sufficient to demonstrate this capability.


3/4.6.1 PRIMAR Y CONTAINMENT ............................................ 3
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                      5 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.1      CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.7    CONTAINMENT VENTILATION SYSTEM The 48-inch containment purge supply and exhaust isolation valves are required to be closed during plant operation since these valves have not been demonstrated capable of closing during a LOCA or steam line break accident.
Maintaining these valves closed during plant operations ensures that excessive quantities of radioactive materials will not be released via the containment purge system. Therefore, these valves are required to be in the sealed position during MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4. To provide assurance that the 48-inch valves cannot be inadvertently opened, they are sealed closed in accordance with Standard Review Plan 6.2.4 which includes devices to lock the valve closed, or prevent power from being supplied to the valve operator.
In this application, the term sealed has no connotation of leak tightness.
The use of the containment purge lines is restricted to the 8-inch purge supply and exhaust isolation valves since, unlike the 48-inch valves, the 8-inch valves will close during a LOCA or steam line break accident and therefore the site boundary dose guidelines of 10 CFR 50.67 would not be exceeded in the event of an accident during purging operations.
Leakage integrity tests with a maximum allowable leakage rate for purge supply and exhaust isolation valves will provide early indication of resilient material seal degradation and will allow the opportunity for repair before gross leakage failure develops. The 0.60 La leakage limit shall not be exceeded when the leakage rates determined by the leakage integrity tests of these valves are added to the previously determined total for all valves and penetrations subject to Type B and C tests. Leakage integrity testing does not apply to valves FCV-25-1 and FCV-25-6 because these valves provide shield building ventilation system integrity. FCV-25-1 and FCV-25-6 do not provide a containment isolation function and are not required by design to satisfy GDC-56 criteria for containment penetration isolation (see evaluation PSL-ENG-SENS-00-012).


3/4.6.1.1 CONTAI NMENT INTEGRITY ....................... 3
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                        6 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2      DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS 3/4.6.2.1     CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS The OPERABILITY of the containment spray and cooling systems ensures that depressurization and cooling capability will be available to limit post-accident pressure and temperature in the containment to acceptable values.
During a Design Basis Accident (DBA), at least one containment cooling train and one containment spray train are capable of maintaining the peak pressure and temperature within design limits. One containment spray train has the capability, in conjunction with the Iodine Removal System, to remove iodine from the containment atmosphere and maintain concentrations below those assumed in the safety analyses. To ensure that these conditions can be met considering single-failure criteria, two spray trains and two cooling trains must be OPERABLE. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.
The 72 hour action interval specified in ACTION 1.a and ACTION 1.e, and the 7 day action interval specified in ACTION 1.b take into account the redundant heat removal capability and the iodine removal capability of the remaining operable systems, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period. It is possible to alternate between Actions in such a manner that operation could continue indefinitely without ever restoring systems to meet the LCO; however, doing so would be inconsistent with the basis for the Action Time. Alternating between Actions in order to continue operation indefinitely while not meeting the LCO is not allowed. If the system(s) cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the specified completion time, alternate actions are designed to bring the unit to a mode for which the LCO does not apply. The extended interval (54 hours) specified in ACTION 1.a to be in MODE 4 includes 48 hours of additional time for restoration of the inoperable CS train, and takes into consideration the reduced driving force for a release of radioactive material from the RCS when in MODE 3. With two required containment spray trains inoperable, at least one of the required containment spray trains must be restored to OPERABLE status within 24 hours. Both trains of containment cooling must be OPERABLE or Action e is also entered. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second containment spray train is intentionally declared inoperable. The Action does not apply to voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one train is inoperable for any reason and the second train is discovered to be inoperable, or if both trains are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. In addition, LCO 3.7.7, CREACS, must be verified to be met within 1 hour. The components in this degraded condition are capable of providing a greater than 100% of the heat removal needs after an accident. The Allowed Outage time is based on Reference 1 which demonstrated that the 24-hour Allowed Outage.


3/4.6.1.2 CONT AINMENT LE AKAGE ......................... 3
SECTION NO.:                                                                  PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6               BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                      7 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2      DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS 3/4.6.2.1    CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS Time is acceptable based on the redundant heat removal capabilities afforded by the Containment Cooling System, the iodine removal capability of the Control Room Emergency Air Cleanup System, the infrequent use of the Action, and the small incremental effect on plant risk. With any combination of three or more containment spray and containment cooling trains inoperable in MODES 1, 2, or Mode 3 with Pressurizer Pressure > 1750 psia, the unit is in a condition outside the accident analyses and LCO 3.0.3 must be entered immediately. In MODE 3 with Pressurizer Pressure < 1750 psia, containment spray is not required.
The specifications and bases for LCO 3.6.2.1 are consistent with NUREG-1432, Revision 0 (9/28/92), Specification 3.6.6A (Containment Spray and Cooling Systems; Credit taken from iodine removal by the Containment Spray System), and the plant safety analyses.
Ensuring that the containment spray pump discharge pressure is met satisfies the periodic surveillance requirement to detect gross degradation caused by impeller structural damage or other hydraulic component problems. Along with this requirement, Section XI of the ASME Code verifies the pump developed head at one point on the pump characteristic curve to verify both that the measured performance is within an acceptable tolerance of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the unit safety analysis. Surveillance Requirements are specified in the Inservice Testing Program, which encompasses Section XI of the ASME Code. Section XI of the ASME Code provides the activities and frequencies necessary to satisfy the requirements.
Containment Spray System flow path piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the containment spray trains and may also prevent a water hammer and pump cavitation.


3/4.6.1.3 CONTAI NMENT AIR LOCKS ....................... 4
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                        8 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2      DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.2.1    CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued)
Selection of Containment Spray System locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The design review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become sources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration. Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.
The Containment Spray System is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumulated gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible location (or the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump),
the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the Containment Spray System is not rendered inoperable by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met. Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.
Containment Spray System locations susceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found , the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location. Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of susceptible locations.
Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or environmental conditions, plant configuration, or personnel safety concerns. For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible locations where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The accuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.


3/4.6.1.4 INTE RNAL PRESSURE ............................... 4
SECTION NO.:                                                                  PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6               BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                      9 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2      DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.2.1    CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued)
The Surveillance Frequency Control Program frequency for SR 4.6.2.1.d takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the Containment Spray System piping and the procedural controls governing system operation.
TS Surveillance Requirement 4.6.2.1.a is modified by a Note which exempts system vent flow paths opened under administrative control. The administrative control should be proceduralized and include stationing a dedicated individual at the system vent flow path who is in continuous communication with the operators in the control room. The individual will have a method to rapidly close the system vent path if directed.
References
: 1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected Technical Specification for Conditions leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown, Revision 2, August 2010


3/4.6.1.5 AI R TEMPERATURE ................................... 4
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                        10 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2      DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.2.2    IODINE REMOVAL SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Iodine Removal System ensures that sufficient N2H4 is added to the containment spray in the event of a LOCA. The limits on N2H4 volume and concentration ensure a minimum of 50 ppm of N2H4 concentration available in the spray for a minimum of 6.5 hours per pump for a total of 13 hours to provide assumed iodine decontamination factors on the containment atmosphere during spray function and ensure a pH value of between 7.0 and 8.1 for the solution recirculated within containment after a LOCA. This pH band minimizes the evolution of iodine and minimizes the effect of chloride and caustic stress corrosion on mechanical systems and components. The contained water volume limit includes an allowance for water not usable because of tank discharge line location or other physical characteristics.
These assumptions are consistent with the iodine removal efficiency assumed in the safety analyses.
3/4.6.2.3    DELETED 3/4.6.3      CONTAINMENT ISOLATION VALVES The OPERABILITY of the containment isolation valves ensures that the containment atmosphere will be isolated from the outside environment in the event of a release of radioactive material to the containment atmosphere or pressurization of the containment and is consistent with the requirements of GDC 54 through GDC 57 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50. Containment isolation within the time limits specified for those isolation valves designed to close automatically ensures that the release of radioactive material to the environment will be consistent with the assumptions used in the analyses for a LOCA.


3/4.6.1.6 CONTAINMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY .................................................. 4
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                      11 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.4      DELETED 3/4.6.5      VACUUM RELIEF VALVES BACKGROUND: The vacuum relief valves protect the containment vessel against negative pressure (i.e., a lower pressure inside than outside).
Excessive negative pressure inside containment can occur if there is an inadvertent actuation of the containment cooling system or the containment spray system. Multiple equipment failures or human errors are necessary to have inadvertent actuation.
The containment pressure vessel contains two 100% vacuum relief lines installed in parallel that protect the containment from excessive external loading. The vacuum relief lines are 24-inch penetrations that connect the shield building annulus to the containment. Each vacuum relief line is isolated by a pneumatically operated butterfly valve in series with a check valve located on the containment side of the penetration.
A separate pressure controller that senses the differential pressure between the containment and the annulus actuates each butterfly valve. Each butterfly valve is provided with an air accumulator that allows the valve to open following a loss of instrument air. The combined pressure drop at rated flow through either vacuum relief line will not exceed the containment pressure vessel design external pressure differential of 0.7 psid with any prevailing atmospheric pressure.
APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES: Design of the vacuum relief lines involves calculating the effect of an inadvertent containment spray actuation that can reduce the atmospheric temperature (and hence pressure) inside containment.
Conservative assumptions are used for all the pertinent parameters in the calculation The resulting containment pressure versus time is calculated, including the effect of the vacuum relief valves opening when their negative pressure setpoint is reached. It is also assumed that one vacuum relief line fails to open.
The containment was designed for an external pressure load equivalent to 0.7 psig. The inadvertent actuation of the containment spray system was analyzed to determine the resulting reduction in containment pressure. This resulted in a differential pressure between the inside containment and the annulus of 0.615 psid, which is less than the design load.


3/4.6.1.7 CONTAINMENT VENTILATION SYSTEM ... 5  
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                      12 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.5      VACUUM RELIEF VALVES (continued)
The vacuum relief valves must also perform the containment isolation function in a containment high-pressure event. For this reason, the system is designed to take the full containment positive design pressure and the containment design basis accident (DBA) environmental conditions (temperature, pressure, humidity, radiation, chemical attack, etc.) associated with the containment DBA.
The vacuum relief valves satisfy Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
LCO: The LCO establishes the minimum equipment required to accomplish the vacuum relief function following the inadvertent actuation of the containment spray system. Two vacuum relief lines are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that at least one is available, assuming one or both valves in the other line fail to open.
APPLICABILITY SAFETY ANALYSES: In MODES 1, 2, and 3 with pressurizer pressure equal to or greater than 1750 psia, the containment cooling features, such as the containment spray system, are required to be OPERABLE to mitigate the effects of a DBA. Excessive negative pressure inside containment could occur whenever these systems are OPERABLE due to inadvertent actuation of these systems. In MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the containment internal pressure is maintained between specified limits. Therefore, the vacuum relief lines are required to be OPERABLE in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 to mitigate the effects of inadvertent actuation of the containment spray system or containment cooling system.
In MODES 5 and 6, the probability and consequences of a DBA are reduced due to the pressure and temperature limitations of these MODES. The containment spray system and containment cooling system are not required to be OPERABLE in MODES 5 and 6. Therefore, maintaining OPERABLE vacuum relief lines is not required in MODE 5 or 6.
ACTIONS: With one of the required vacuum relief lines inoperable, the inoperable line must be restored to OPERABLE status within 72 hours. The specified time period is consistent with other LCOs for the loss of one train of a system required to mitigate the consequences of a LOCA or other DBA. If the vacuum relief line cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required ACTION time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least MODE 3 within the next 6 hours and to MODE 5 within the following 30 hours. The allowed ACTION times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.


3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS ....... 6  
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                        13 of 14 REVISION NO.:                        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.5      VACUUM RELIEF VALVES (continued)
SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS: This SR references the Inservice Testing Program, which establishes the requirement that inservice testing of the ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps and valves shall be performed in accordance with Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable Addenda and approved relief requests. Therefore, the Inservice Testing Program governs SR interval. The butterfly valve setpoint is 9.850.35 inches of water gauge differential.
3/4.6.6      SECONDARY CONTAINMENT 3/4.6.6.1    SHIELD BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the shield building ventilation systems ensures that containment vessel leakage occurring during LOCA conditions into the annulus will be filtered through the HEPA filters and charcoal adsorber trains prior to discharge to the atmosphere and also reduces radioactive effluent releases to the environment during a fuel handling accident involving a recently irradiated fuel assembly in the spent fuel storage building. This requirement is necessary to meet the assumptions used in the safety analyses and limit the site boundary radiation doses to within the limits of 10 CFR 50.67 during LOCA conditions.
The fuel handling accident analysis assumes a minimum post reactor shutdown decay time of 72 hours. Therefore, recently irradiated fuel is defined as fuel that has occupied part of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours. This represents the applicability bases for fuel handling accidents.
Containment closure will have administrative controls in place to assure that a single normal or contingency method to promptly close the primary or secondary containment penetrations will be available. These prompt methods need not completely block the penetrations nor be capable of resisting pressure, but are to enable the ventilation systems to draw the release from the postulated fuel handling accident in the proper direction such that it can be treated and monitored.
The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
With respect to Surveillance 4.6.6.1.b, this SR verifies that the required Shield Building Ventilation System filter testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Testing Program (VFTP).


3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINM ENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS .................................................... 6
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6                   BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04                        14 of 14 REVISION NO.:                          CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6        CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.6      SECONDARY CONTAINMENT (continued) 3/4.6.6.1    SHIELD BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued)
If two shield building ventilation systems (SBVSs) are inoperable, at least one SBVS must be returned to OPERABLE status within 24 hours. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second SBVS is intentionally declared inoperable. The Action does not apply to voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one system is inoperable for any reason and the second system is discovered to be inoperable, or if both systems are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. In addition, at least one train of containment spray must be verified to be OPERBLE within 1 hour. In the event of an accident, containment spray reduces the potential radioactive release from the containment, which reduces the consequences of the inoperable SBVS. The allowed Outage Time is based on Reference 1 which demonstrated that the 24-hours Allowed Outage Time is acceptable based on the infrequent use of the Actions and the small incremental effect on plant risk.
References
: 1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected Technical Specifications for Conditions Leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown, Revision 2, August 2010.
3/4.6.6.2    SHIELD BUILDING INTEGRITY SHIELD BUILDING INTEGRITY ensures that the release of radioactive materials from the primary containment atmosphere will be restricted to those leakage paths and associated leak rates assumed in the safety analyses. This restriction, in conjunction with operation of the shield building ventilation system, will ensure that the site boundary radiation doses are below the guidelines established for design basis.
3/4.6.6.3    SHIELD BUILDING STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY This limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment shield building will be maintained comparable to the original design standards for the life of the facility. Structural integrity is required to provide (1) protection for the steel vessel from the external missiles, (2) radiation shielding in the event of a LOCA, and (3) an annulus surrounding the steel vessel that can be maintained at a negative pressure during accident conditions. A visual inspection is sufficient to demonstrate this capability.


3/4.6.2.2 IODINE REMOVAL SYSTEM ..................... 10
Section No.
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                   3/4.7 Attachment No.
3/4.6.2.3 DELETED ................................................... 10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 9
 
BASES ATTACHMENT 9 Current Revision No.
3/4.6.3 CONTAINMENT ISOLATION VALVES ......................... 10
OF ADM-25.04 Before use, verify revision and change documentation DATE VERIFIED__________ INITIAL__________
 
SAFETY RELATED                           11 Title:
3/4.6.4 DELETED ..................................................................... 11
FOR INFORMATION ONLY PLANT SYSTEMS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  
 
3/4.6.5 VACUUM RE LIEF VALVES .......................................... 11
 
3/4.6.6 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT .................................... 13
 
3/4.6.6.1 SHIELD BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM .................................................... 13
 
3/4.6.6.2 SHIELD BUILDING INTEGRITY ................ 14
 
3/4.6.6.3 SHIELD BUILDING STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY ................................................ 14
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 3 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.6 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.6.1 PRIMARY CONTAINMENT 3/4.6.1.1 CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY
 
Primary CONTAINMENT INTE GRITY ensures that the release of radioactive materials from the containment atmospher e will be restricted to those leakage paths and associated leak rates assum ed in the safety analyses. This restriction, in conjunction with the leakag e rate limitation, will limit the offsite radiation doses to within the limits of 10 CFR 50.67 during accident conditions.
In accordance with Generic Letter 91-08, "Removal of Component Component Lists from Technical Spec ifications," the opening of locked or sealed closed containment isolation valves on an in termittent basis under administrative control includes the following considerations: (1) stationing an operator, who is in constant communication with the c ontrol room, at the valve controls, (2) instructing this operator to close t hese valves in an accident situation, and (3) assuring that environmental conditions will not preclude access to close the valves and that this action will prevent the release of radioactivity outside the containment.
3/4.6.1.2 CONTAI NMENT LEAKAGE The limitations on containment leakage rates ensure that total containment leakage volume will not exceed the value assumed in the accident analyses at
 
the peak accident pressure, P a (43.48 psig) which resu lts from the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident.
The surveillance testing for measuring leakage rates is performed in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Program, and is consistent with the requirements of Appendix J of 10 CFR 50 Option B and Regulatory Guide 1.163 dated September, 1995, as modified by approved exemptions.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 4 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued)
 
3/4.6.1 CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.3 CONTAINMENT AIR LOCKS The limitations on closure and leak rate for the containment air locks are required to meet the restricti ons on CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY and containment leak rate. Surveillance te sting of the air lock seals provides assurance that the overall air lock leakage will not become excessive due to seal damage during the intervals between air lock leakage tests. 3/4.6.1.4 INTERNAL PRESSURE The limitations on containment inter nal pressure ensure that (1) the containment structure is prevented fr om exceeding its design negative pressure differential with respect to t he annulus atmosphere of 0.7 psi and (2) the containment peak pressure does not exceed the design pressure of 44 psig during loss of coolant accident conditions. The maximum peak pressure expected to be obtained from a loss of coolant accident is 43.48 psig. The limit of 0.4 psig for init ial positive containment pressure will limit the maximum peak pressure to less than the design pressure of 44 psig and is consistent with the safety analyses. 3/4.6.1.5 AIR TEMPERATURE The limitation on containment average air temperature ensures that the peak containment vessel temperature does not exceed the containment vessel design temperature of 264 F during steam line break and loss of coolant accident conditions and is consis tent with the safety analyses.
3/4.6.1.6 CONTAI NMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment steel vessel will be maintained comparable to t he original design standards for the life of the facility. Structural integrity is required to ensure that the vessel will withstand the maximum pressure of 43.48 psig in the event of the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident. A visual inspection in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Pr ogram is sufficient to demonstrate this capability.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 5 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued)
 
3/4.6.1 CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.7 CONTAINMENT VENTILATION SYSTEM The 48-inch containment purge supply and exhaust isolation valves are required to be closed during plant operation since these valves have not been demonstrated capable of closing during a LOCA or steam line break accident. 
 
Maintaining these valves closed duri ng plant operations ensures that excessive quantities of radioactive materials will not be released via the containment purge system. Therefore, t hese valves are required to be in the sealed position during MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4. To provide assurance that the 48-inch valves cannot be inadvertently opened, they are sealed closed in accordance with Standard Review Plan 6.2.4 which includes devices to lock the valve closed, or prevent power from being supplied to the valve operator.
In this application, the term "sealed" has no connotation of leak tightness.
The use of the containment purge lines is restricted to the 8-inch purge supply and exhaust isolation valves since, unlike the 48-inch valves, the 8-inch valves will close during a LOCA or steam line break accident and therefore the site boundary dose guidelines of 10 CFR 50.
67 would not be exceeded in the event of an accident during purging operations.
Leakage integrity tests with a maximum allowable leakage rate for purge supply and exhaust isolation valves will provide early indication of resilient material seal degradation and will allow the opportunity for repair before gross leakage failure develops. The 0.60 L a leakage limit shall not be exceeded when the leakage rates determined by the leakage integrity tests of these valves are added to the previously determined total for all valves and
 
penetrations subject to Type B and C tests. Leakage integrity testing does not apply to valves FCV-25-1 and FCV-25-6 because these valves provide shield building ventilation system integrity.
FCV-25-1 and FCV-25-6 do not provide a containment isolation function and are not required by design to satisfy GDC-56 criteria for containment penet ration isolation (see evaluation PSL-ENG-SENS-00-012).
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 6 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS 3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS The OPERABILITY of t he containment spray and cooling systems ensures that depressurization and cooling capability will be available to limit post-accident pressure and temperature in t he containment to acceptable values. During a Design Basis Accident (DBA), at least one containment cooling train
 
and one containment spray trai n are capable of maintain ing the peak pressure and temperature within desi gn limits. One containm ent spray train has the capability, in conjunction with the Iodine Removal Syst em, to remo ve iodine from the containment at mosphere and maintain concentrations below those assumed in the safety analyses. To ensure that these conditions can be met considering single-failure criteria, two sp ray trains and two cooling trains must be OPERABLE. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.
The 72 hour action interval specified in ACTION 1.a and ACTION 1.e, and the 7 day action interval specified in ACTION 1.b take into account the redundant heat removal capability and the iodine removal capability of the remaining operable systems, and the low probabili ty of a DBA occurring during this period. It is possible to alternate between Actions in such a manner that operation could continue i ndefinitely without ever restoring systems to meet the LCO;  however, doing so would be inconsistent with the basis for the Action Time. Alternating between Acti ons in order to continue operation indefinitely while not meeti ng the LCO is not allowed.
If the system(s) cannot be restored to OPERABLE status wit hin the specified completion time, alternate actions are designed to bring the unit to a mode for which the LCO
 
does not apply. The extended interval (54 hours) specified in ACTION 1.a to be in MODE 4 includes 48 hours of additi onal time for restoration of the inoperable CS train, and takes into consideration the reduced driving force for a release of radioactive material from the RCS when in MODE 3. With two required containment spray trains i noperable, at least one of the required containment spray trains must be restored to OPERABLE status within 24 hours. Both trains of containment c ooling must be OPERABLE or Action e is also entered. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the
 
second containment spray train is int entionally declared inoperable. The Action does not apply to voluntar y removal of r edundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one train is
 
inoperable for any reason and the second tr ain is discovered to be inoperable, or if both trains are disc overed to be inoperable at t he same time. In addition, LCO 3.7.7, "CREACS," must be veri fied to be met within 1 hour. The components in this degraded condition are capable of providi ng a greater than 100% of the heat removal needs after an accident. The Allowed Outage time is based on Reference 1 which dem onstrated that t he 24-hour Allowed Outage.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 7 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS 3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS Time is acceptable based on the redundant heat removal capabilities afforded by the Containment Coo ling System, the iodine re moval capability of the Control Room Emergency Air Cleanup System, the infrequent use of the Action, and the small incremental effect on plant risk. With any combination of three or more containment spray and containment cooling trains inoperable in MODES 1, 2, or M ode 3 with Pressurizer Pressure > 1750 psia, the unit is in a condition outside the accident analyses and LCO 3.0.3 must be entered
 
immediately. In MODE 3 with Pressurizer Pressure < 1750 psia, containment spray is not required.
The specifications and bases for LCO 3.6.2.1 are consistent with NUREG-1432, Revision 0 (9/28/92), Spec ification 3.6.6A (Containment Spray and Cooling Systems; Credit taken from iodine removal by the Containment Spray System), and the plant safety analyses.
 
Ensuring that the containment spray pum p discharge pressure is met satisfies the periodic surveillance requirement to detect gross degradation caused by impeller structural damage or other hydraul ic component problems. Along with this requirement, Section XI of the ASME Code verifies the pump developed head at one point on the pump characterist ic curve to verify both that the measured performance is within an accept able tolerance of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the unit safety analysis. Surveillance Requirements are specified in the Inservice Testing Program, which encompasses Section XI of the ASME Code. Section XI of the ASME Code provides the activities and frequencies ne cessary to satisfy the requirements.
Containment Spray System flow path piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the containment spray trains and ma y also prevent a water hammer and pump cavitation.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 8 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued)
Selection of Containment Spray Syst em locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The desi gn review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high po ints and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become s ources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration. Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.
The Containment Spray Syst em is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumu lated gas is discove red that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susc eptible location (or the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an
 
acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or di scharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the Containment Spray System is not rendered inoperable by the
 
accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met. Accumulated gas should be eliminated or
 
brought within the accept ance criteria limits. Containment Spray System locations susceptible to gas accumulation are
 
monitored and, if gas is found , the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location. Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be
 
verified by monitoring a representative subset of susceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to
 
radiological or environmental conditions , plant configuration, or personnel safety concerns. For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible locations where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and
 
determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The accuracy of the method used for monitoring the suscept ible locations and trending of the results should be sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 9 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued)
The Surveillance Frequency Control Program fre quency for SR 4.6.2.1.d takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the Containment Spray System piping and the procedural controls governing
 
system operation.
TS Surveillance Requirement 4.6
.2.1.a is modified by a Note which exempts system vent flow paths opened under administrative control. The administrative control should be proc eduralized and include stationing a dedicated individual at the system vent flow path who is in continuous communication with the operators in the control room. The individual will have a method to rapidly close the system vent path if directed. References 1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, "Justification for Risk-Informed M odifications to Selected Technical Specification for Conditions leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown," Revision 2, August 2010 SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 10 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.2.2 IODINE REMOVAL SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Iodine Removal System ensures that sufficient N 2 H 4 is added to the containment spray in t he event of a LOCA. The limits on N 2 H 4 volume and concentration ensure a minimum of 50 ppm of N 2 H 4 concentration available in the spray for a minimum of 6.5 hours per pump for a total of 13 hours to provide assumed iodine decontam ination factors on the containment atmosphere during spray function and ens ure a pH value of between 7.0 and 8.1 for the solution recirculated within containment after a LOCA. This pH band minimizes the evolution of iodine and minimizes the effect of chloride and caustic stress corrosion on mechanical systems and components. The contained water volume limit includes an allowance for water not usable because of tank discharge line location or other physical characteristics. These assumptions are consistent with the iodine removal efficiency assumed in the safety analyses.
3/4.6.2.3 DELETED 3/4.6.3 CONTAINMENT ISOLATION VALVES The OPERABILITY of the containment isolation valves ensures that the containment atmosphere will be isolated from the outside environment in the event of a release of radioactive materi al to the containment atmosphere or pressurization of the containment and is consistent with the requirements of GDC 54 through GDC 57 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50. Containment isolation within the time limits specified for those is olation valves designed to close automatically ensures that the release of radioactive material to the environment will be consistent with the assumptions used in the analyses for a
 
LOCA.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 11 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.6.4 DELETED 3/4.6.5 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES BACKGROUND: The vacuum relief valves protect the containment vessel against negative pressure (i.e., a lowe r pressure inside than outside). Excessive negative pressure inside cont ainment can occur if there is an inadvertent actuation of the containm ent cooling system or the containment spray system. Multiple equipment failures or human errors are necessary to have inadvertent actuation.
The containment pressure vessel cont ains two 100% vacuum relief lines installed in parallel that protect the containment from excessive external loading. The vacuum relief lines are 24-inch penetrations that connect the shield building annulus to the containment.
Each vacuum relief line is isolated by a pneumatically operated butterfly valve in series with a check valve located on the containment side of the penetration.
 
A separate pressure controller that senses the differential pressure between the containment and the annulus actuates each butterfly valve. Each butterfly valve is provided with an air accumulator that allows the valve to open
 
following a loss of instrument air. The combined pressu re drop at rated flow through either vacuum relief line will not exceed the containment pressure vessel design external pressure different ial of 0.7 psid with any prevailing atmospheric pressure. APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES: Design of the vacuum relief lines involves calculating the effect of an inadvertent containment spray actuation that can reduce the atmospheric temperature (and hence pressure) inside containment.
Conservative assumptions are used for all the pertinent parameters in the calculation  The resulting containment pressure versus time is calculated, including the effect of the vacuum relief valves opening when their negative pressure setpoint is reached. It is al so assumed that one vacuum relief line fails to open. The containment was designed for an external pressure load equivalent to 0.7 psig. The inadvertent actuation of the containment spray system was analyzed to determine the resulting reducti on in containment pressure. This resulted in a differential pressure between the inside containment and the annulus of 0.615 psid, which is less than the design load.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 12 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued)
 
3/4.6.5 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES (continued) The vacuum relief valves must also perfo rm the containment isolation function in a containment high-pressure event.
For this reason, the system is designed to take the full containment positiv e design pressure and the containment design basis accident (DBA) environmental conditions (temperature, pressure, humidity, radiation, chemical attack, etc.) associated with the containment DBA. The vacuum relief valves satisfy Cr iterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).
LCO: The LCO establishes the minimum equipment required to accomplish the vacuum relief function following the inadvertent actuation of the containment spray system. Two vacuum relief lines are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that at least one is available, assuming one or both valves in the other line fail to open. APPLICABILITY SAFETY ANALYSES: In MO DES 1, 2, and 3 with pressurizer pressure equal to or greater than 1750 ps ia, the containment cooling features, such as the containment spray syst em, are required to be OPERABLE to mitigate the effects of a DBA. Excessive negative pressure inside containment could occur whenever these systems ar e OPERABLE due to inadvertent actuation of these systems.
In MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the containment internal pressure is maintained between specified limits. Therefore, the vacuum relief lines are required to be OPERABLE in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 to mitigate the effects of inadvertent actuation of the containment spray system or containment cooling system.
In MODES 5 and 6, the probability and consequences of a DBA are reduced due to the pressure and temperature limitations of these MODES. The containment spray system and containment cooling system are not required to
 
be OPERABLE in MODES 5 and 6. T herefore, maintaining OPERABLE vacuum relief lines is not required in MODE 5 or 6.
ACTIONS: With one of the required vacuum relief lines inoperable, the inoperable line must be rest ored to OPERABLE status within 72 hours. The specified time period is consistent with other LCOs for the loss of one train of a system required to mitigate the consequences of a LOCA or other DBA. If the vacuum relief line cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required ACTION time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least MODE 3 within the next 6 hours and to MODE 5 within the following 30 hours. The allowed ACTION times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 13 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued)
 
3/4.6.5 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES (continued) SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS: This SR references the Inservice Testing Program, which establishes the requirement that inservice testing of the ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps and valves shall be performed in accordance
 
with Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable Addenda and approved relief requests.
Therefore, the In service Testing Program governs SR interval. The butterfly valve setpoint is 9.85 0.35 inches of water gauge differential.
3/4.6.6 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT 3/4.6.6.1 SHIELD BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the shield building ventilation systems ensures that containment vessel leakage occurring dur ing LOCA conditions into the annulus will be filtered through the HEPA filters and charcoal adsorber trains prior to discharge to the atmosphere and also reduces radioactive effluent releases to the environment during a fuel handling accident involving a recently irradiated fuel assembly in the spent fuel storage building. This requirement is necessary to meet the a ssumptions used in the safety analyses and limit the site boundary radiation doses to within the limits of 10 CFR 50.67 during LOCA conditions. The fuel handling accident analysis assumes a minimum post reactor shutdown decay time of 72 hours.
Therefore, recently irradiated fuel is defined as fuel that has occupied part of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours. This represents the applicability bases for fuel handling accidents.
Containment closure will have administrative controls in place to assure that a single normal or contingency method to promptly close the primary or secondary containment penetrations will be available. These prompt methods need not completely block the penetrations nor be capable of resisting
 
pressure, but are to enable the ventilation systems to draw the release from the postulated fuel handling accident in the proper direction such that it can be treated and monitored.
The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. With respect to Surveillance 4.6.6.1.b, this SR verifies that the required Shield Building Ventilation System filter testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Test ing Program (VFTP).
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.6 14 of 14 REVISION NO.:
15  3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.6 SECONDARY CONT AINMENT (continued) 3/4.6.6.1 SHIELD BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM (continued) BASES (continued) If two shield building ventilation systems (SBVSs) are inoperable, at least one SBVS must be returned to OPERABLE status within 24 hours. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second SBVS is intentionally declared i noperable. The Action does not apply to voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one system is inoperable for any reason and the second system is discovered to be inoperable, or if both systems are discovered to be inoperable at the same ti me. In addition, at leas t one train of containment spray must be verified to be OPERBLE wi thin 1 hour. In the event of an accident, containment spray reduces the potential radioactive release from the containment, which reduces the consequences of the inoperable SBVS. The allowed Outage Time is based on Refer ence 1 which demonstrated that the 24-hours Allowed Outage Time is accept able based on the infrequent use of the Actions and the small increm ental effect on plant risk. References 1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, "Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected Technical Specifications for Conditions Leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown," Revision 2, August 2010. 3/4.6.6.2 SHIELD BUILDING INTEGRITY SHIELD BUILDING INTEGRITY ensures that the release of radioactive materials from the primary containment atmosphere will be restricted to those leakage paths and associated leak rates as sumed in the safety analyses. This restriction, in conjunction with operation of the shield building ventilation system, will ensure that the site boundary radiation doses are below the guidelines established for design basis.
3/4.6.6.3 SHIELD BUILDI NG STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY This limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment shield building will be maintained comparable to th e original design standards for the life of the facility. Structural integrity is required to provide (1) protection for the steel vessel from the external missile s, (2) radiation shielding in the event of a LOCA, and (3) an annulus surroundi ng the steel vessel that can be maintained at a negative pressure during accident conditions. A visual inspection is sufficient to demonstrate this capability.
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
3/4.7 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
9 Current Revision No.
11 SAFETY RELATED Title: PLANT SYSTEMS Responsible Department:
Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 11 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 11 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in (if applicable) with a controlled index or document.
Revision 10 - Incorporated PCR 2129693 to correct typo s in section for Main Feedwater Line Isolation Valves. (Author: N. Davidson)
Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 10 - Incorporated PCR 2129693 to correct typos in section for Main Feedwater Line Isolation Valves. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 9 - Incorporated PCR 02071738 for TSTF-426 as part of the original LAR review and approval (L-2014-160). (Author: M DiMarco)
Revision 9 - Incorporated PCR 02071738 for TSTF-426 as part of the original LAR review and approval (L-2014-160). (Author: M DiMarco)
Revision 8 - Pages 10-17 have the high level section description as CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS. It should read the same as pages 3 through 8, which is PLANT SYSTEMS.
(Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 1948770 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 562709 to enhance AFW pump bases. (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision            Approved By            Approval Date      UNIT #          UNIT 2 DATE 0              R.G. West                08/30/01        DOCT        PROCEDURE DOCN        Section 3/4.7 SYS 11              R. Coffey                08/26/15        STATUS      COMPLETED REV                11
                                                                                                                                                                                              # OF PGS


Revision 8 -
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
Pages 10-17 have the high level sect ion description as CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS. It should read the same as pages 3 through 8, which is PLANT SYSTEMS. (Author: K. Frehafer)
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7            BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                                                  2 of 22 REVISION NO.:                              PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.7 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS .......................................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.7.1    TURBINE CYCLE ........................................................... 3 3/4.7.1.1        SAFETY VALVES ........................................ 3 3/4.7.1.2        AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM ........... 4 3/4.7.1.3        CONDENSATE STORAGE TANKS ............. 7 3/4.7.1.4        ACTIVITY ..................................................... 8 3/4.7.1.5        MAIN STEAM LINE ISOLATION VALVES ... 8 3/4.7.1.6        MAIN FEEDWATER LINE ISOLATION VALVES ....................................................... 9 3/4.7.1.7        ATMOSPHERIC DUMP VALVES............... 10 3/4.7.2    STEAM GENERATOR PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITATION .................................................................. 10 3/4.7.3    COMPONENT COOLING WATER SYSTEM ................ 10 3/4.7.4    INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM .......................... 11 3/4.7.5    ULTIMATE HEAT SINK ................................................ 13 3/4.7.6    FLOOD PROTECTION ................................................. 13 3/4.7.7   CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM ....................................................................... 14 3/4.7.8    ECCS AREA VENTILATION SYSTEM ......................... 20 3/4.7.9    SNUBBERS .................................................................. 21 3/4.7.10 SEALED SOURCE CONTAMINATION......................... 22 3/4.7.11 DELETED ..................................................................... 22
Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 1948770 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR
 
====4.0.4. (Author====
N. Elmore)


Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU cond itions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
SECTION NO.:                                                                       PAGE:
 
TITLE:   TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                         3 of 22 REVISION NO.:                             PLANT SYSTEMS 11                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.7 3/4.7         PLANT SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.7.1       TURBINE CYCLE 3/4.7.1.1     SAFETY VALVES The OPERABILITY of the main steam line code safety valves ensures that the secondary system pressure will be limited to within 110% (1100 psia) of its design pressure of 1000 psia during the most severe anticipated system operational transient. The maximum relieving capacity is adequate to maintain secondary side pressure below 110% of the design value after a turbine trip from 100% RATED THERMAL POWER coincident with an assumed loss of condenser heat sink (i.e., no steam bypass to the condenser).
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 562709 to enhance AFW pump bases.  (Author: K. Frehafer)  Revision  Approved By  Approval Date  UNIT # UNIT 2        DATE 0  R.G. West  08/30/01  DOCT PROCEDURE        DOCN Section 3/4.7 SYS  11  R. Coffey  08/26/15  STATUS COMPLETED REV 11        # OF PGS  FOR INFORMATION ONLY Before use, verify revision and change documentation (if applicable) with a controlled index or document.
The specified valve lift settings and relieving capacities are in accordance with the requirements of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 1971 Edition, and ASME Code for Pumps and Valves, Class II. The total relieving capacity for all valves on all of the steam lines is 12.49 x 106 lbs/hr. A minimum of two OPERABLE safety valves per steam generator ensures that sufficient relieving capacity is available for removing decay heat.
DATE VERIFIED__________
STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION is allowable with safety valves inoperable within the limitations of the ACTION requirements on the basis of the reduction in secondary system steam flow and THERMAL POWER required by the reduced reactor trip settings of the Power Level-High channels. The reactor trip set-point reductions are derived on the following bases:
INITIAL__________
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 2 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  TABLE OF CONTENTS  SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.7 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS .......................................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3
 
3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE ........................................................... 3
 
3/4.7.1.1 SAFETY VALVES ........................................ 3 3/4.7.1.2 AUXILIAR Y FEEDWATER SYSTEM ........... 4 3/4.7.1.3 CONDENS ATE STORAGE TANKS ............. 7
 
3/4.7.1.4 ACTIVITY ..................................................... 8 3/4.7.1.5 MAIN STEAM LINE ISOLATION VALVES ... 8
 
3/4.7.1.6 MAIN FEEDWATER LINE ISOLATION VALVES ....................................................... 9
 
3/4.7.1.7 ATMOSPHERIC DUMP VALVES
............... 10
 
3/4.7.2 STEAM GENERATO R PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITATION .................................................................. 10
 
3/4.7.3 COMPONENT C OOLING WATER SYSTEM ................ 10 3/4.7.4 INTAKE COOLIN G WATER SYSTEM .......................... 11 3/4.7.5 ULTIMATE HEAT SINK ................................................ 13
 
3/4.7.6 FLOOD PROTECTION ................................................. 13 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM ....................................................................... 14
 
3/4.7.8 ECCS AREA VENTILATION SYSTEM ......................... 20 3/4.7.9 SNUBBERS .................................................................. 21 3/4.7.10 SEALED SOURCE CONTAMINATION
......................... 22 3/4.7.11 DELETED ..................................................................... 22
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 3 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.7 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE 3/4.7.1.1 SAFETY VALVES The OPERABILITY of the main steam line code safety valves ensures that the secondary system pressure will be lim ited to within 110% (1100 psia) of its design pressure of 1000 psia during the most severe anticipated system operational transient. The maximum relieving capacity is adequate to maintain secondary side pressure below 110% of the design value after a turbine trip from 100% RATED THERMAL POWER coincident with an assumed loss of condenser heat sink (i.e., no steam bypass to the condenser). The specified valve lift settings and re lieving capacities are in accordance with the requirements of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 1971 Edition, and ASME Code fo r Pumps and Valves, Class II. The total relieving capacity for all valves on all of the steam lines is 12.49 x 10 6 lbs/hr. A minimum of two OPERABLE safety valves per steam generator ensures that sufficient relieving capacity is available for removing decay heat. STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION is allowable with safety valves inoperable within the limita tions of the ACTION requirements on the basis of the reduction in secondary system steam flow and THERMAL POWER required by the reduced reactor trip settings of the Power Level-High channels. The reactor trip set-point reductions are derived on the following bases:
For two loop operation:
For two loop operation:
where:     SP = reduced reactor trip setpoint in percent of RATED THERMAL POWER     V = maximum number of inoper able safety valves per steam line 0.9(107.0)x X(V)(Y)(X)SP SECTION NO.:
(X)  (Y)(V)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 4 of 22 REVISION NO.:
SP                x (107.0)  0.9 X
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
where:
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.1 SAFETY VALVES (continued)  107.0 = Power Level-High Trip Setpoint for two loop operation      0.9 = Equipment processing uncertainty        X = Total relieving capacity of all safety valves per steam line in lbs/hour (6.247 x  10 6 lbs/hr)        Y = Maximum relieving capacit y of any one safety valve in lbs/hour (7.74 x 10 5lbs/hr)  Surveillance Requirement 4.7.1.1 veri fies the OPERABIL ITY of the MSSVs by the verification of each MSSV lift setpoint in accordance with the Inservice Testing Program. The MSSV setpoint s are 1000 psia +/-3% (4 valves each header) and 1040 psia +2%/-3% (4 valves each header) for OPERABILITY; however, the valves are reset to 1000 psia +/- 1% and 1040 psia +/- 1%, respectively, during the Surv eillance to allow for drif
SP = reduced reactor trip setpoint in percent of RATED THERMAL POWER V   = maximum number of inoperable safety valves per steam line
: t. The LCO is expressed in units of psig for consistency with implementing procedures. 3/4.7.1.2 AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM  The Auxiliary Feedwater (AFW) System automatically supplies feedwater to the steam generators to remove decay heat from the Reactor Coolant System


upon the loss of normal feedwat er supply. The AFW System consists of two motor driven AFW pumps and one steam turbine driven pump configured into three trains. Each motor driven pump provides 100%
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
of AFW flow capacity; the turbine driven pump provides 100% of the requi red capacity to t he steam generators as assumed in the accident analysis. Each motor driven AFW pump is powered from an independent Class 1E power supply and feeds one steam generator, although each pump has the c apability to be realigned from the control room to feed the other steam generator. One pump at full flow is sufficient to remove decay heat and cool the unit to Shutdown Cooling (SDC)
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                      4 of 22 REVISION NO.:                              PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1      TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.1    SAFETY VALVES (continued) 107.0 = Power Level-High Trip Setpoint for two loop operation 0.9 = Equipment processing uncertainty X = Total relieving capacity of all safety valves per steam line in lbs/hour (6.247 x 106 lbs/hr)
Y = Maximum relieving capacity of any one safety valve in lbs/hour (7.74 x 105lbs/hr)
Surveillance Requirement 4.7.1.1 verifies the OPERABILITY of the MSSVs by the verification of each MSSV lift setpoint in accordance with the Inservice Testing Program. The MSSV setpoints are 1000 psia +/-3% (4 valves each header) and 1040 psia +2%/-3% (4 valves each header) for OPERABILITY; however, the valves are reset to 1000 psia +/- 1% and 1040 psia +/- 1%,
respectively, during the Surveillance to allow for drift. The LCO is expressed in units of psig for consistency with implementing procedures.
3/4.7.1.2    AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM The Auxiliary Feedwater (AFW) System automatically supplies feedwater to the steam generators to remove decay heat from the Reactor Coolant System upon the loss of normal feedwater supply. The AFW System consists of two motor driven AFW pumps and one steam turbine driven pump configured into three trains.
Each motor driven pump provides 100% of AFW flow capacity; the turbine driven pump provides 100% of the required capacity to the steam generators as assumed in the accident analysis. Each motor driven AFW pump is powered from an independent Class 1E power supply and feeds one steam generator, although each pump has the capability to be realigned from the control room to feed the other steam generator. One pump at full flow is sufficient to remove decay heat and cool the unit to Shutdown Cooling (SDC)
System entry conditions.
System entry conditions.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 5 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.2 AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM (continued)  The steam turbine-driven AFW pup receiv es steam from either main steam header upstream of the main steam isolatio n valve. Each of the steam feed lines will supply 100% of the requirem ents of the turbine driven AFW pump.
The turbine driven AFW pump supplies a common header capable of feeding


both steam generators, with DC powered control valves actuated to the appropriate steam generator by the Auxiliary Feedw ater Actuation System (AFAS). The AFW System supplies feedwater to the steam generators during normal unit startup, shutdown, and hot standby conditions.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                      5 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1      TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.2    AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM (continued)
The steam turbine-driven AFW pup receives steam from either main steam header upstream of the main steam isolation valve. Each of the steam feed lines will supply 100% of the requirements of the turbine driven AFW pump.
The turbine driven AFW pump supplies a common header capable of feeding both steam generators, with DC powered control valves actuated to the appropriate steam generator by the Auxiliary Feedwater Actuation System (AFAS).
The AFW System supplies feedwater to the steam generators during normal unit startup, shutdown, and hot standby conditions.
The AFW System mitigates the consequences of any event with a loss of normal feedwater. The limiting Design Basis Accidents and transients for the AFW System are as follows:
The AFW System mitigates the consequences of any event with a loss of normal feedwater. The limiting Design Basis Accidents and transients for the AFW System are as follows:
: 1. Feedwater Line Break, and
: 1.     Feedwater Line Break, and
: 2. Loss of normal feedwater. Action d prohibits the application of LC O 3.0.4.b to an inoperable AFW train.
: 2.     Loss of normal feedwater.
There is an increased risk associated with entering a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with an AFW train inoperable and the  
Action d prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to an inoperable AFW train.
There is an increased risk associated with entering a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with an AFW train inoperable and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.


provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with t he LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable syst ems and components, should not be
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                      6 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1      TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.2    AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM (continued)
Surveillance Requirement (SR) 4.7.1.2.d verifies that each AFW pumps developed head at the flow test point is greater than or equal to the required developed head ensures that AFW pump performance has not degraded during the cycle. Flow and differential head are normal tests of pump performance required by the ASME Code. Because it is undesirable to introduce cold AFW into the steam generators while they are operating, this testing is performed on recirculation flow. this test confirms one point on the pump design curve and is indicative of overall performance. Such inservice tests confirm component Operability, trend performance, and detect incipient failures by indicating abnormal performance. Performance of inservice testing, discussed in the ASME Code, at 3 month intervals satisfies this requirement. This SR is modified to defer performance until suitable test conditions are established for the steam turbine-driven AFW pump within 24 hours after entering Mode 3 and prior to entering Mode 2.


applied in this circumstance.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                  BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                       7 of 22 REVISION NO.:                             PLANT SYSTEMS 11                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7         PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 6 of 22 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1       TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.3    CONDENSATE STORAGE TANKS The Condensate Storage Tank (CST) provides a safety grade source of water to the steam generators for removing decay and sensible heat from the Reactor Coolant System (RCS). The CST provides a passive flow of water, by gravity, to the Auxiliary Feedwater (AFW) System. The AFW pumps operate with a continuous recirculation to the CST.
11   3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
When the main steam isolation valves are open, the preferred means of heat removal is to discharge steam to the condenser by the nonsafety grade path of the steam bypass valves. The condensed steam is returned to the CST by the condensate transfer pump. This has the advantage of conserving condensate while minimizing releases to the environment.
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.2 AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM (continued) Surveillance Requirement (SR) 4.7.
Because the CST is a principal component in removing residual heat from the RCS, it is designed to withstand earthquakes and other natural phenomena.
1.2.d verifies that each AFW pump's developed head at the flow test point is greater than or equal to the required developed head ensures that AFW pump performance has not degraded during the cycle. Flow and different ial head are normal tests of pump performance required by the ASME Code.
The CST is designed to Seismic Category I requirements to ensure availability of the feedwater supply.
Because it is undesirable to introduce cold AFW into the steam generat ors while they are operating, this
The LCO required minimum volume of 307,000 gallons ensures that sufficient water is available to maintain the unit in HOT STANDBY for 4 hours followed by an orderly cooldown to the shutdown cooling entry temperature. 154,000 gallons of water is required to complete this cooldown. An additional 130,500 gallons is reserved for the unlikely event that a vertical tornado missile ruptures the St. Lucie Unit 1 CST and the water contained in the Unit 1 CST is unavailable to St. Lucie Unit 1.
Included in the Unit 2 CST required volume of water is 9,203 gallons of unusable water in the tank and 4,230 gallons of water included for instrumentation error.


testing is performed on recirculation flow. this test confirms one point on the pump design curve and is indicative of overall performance. Such inservice
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                        8 of 22 REVISION NO.:                              PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1      TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.4    ACTIVITY The limitations on secondary system specific activity ensure that the resultant offsite radiation dose will comply with the dose criterion provided in 10 CFR 50.67 in the event of a steam line rupture. The dose also includes the effects of a coincident 1.0 gpm primary to secondary tube leak in the steam generator of the affected steam line and a concurrent loss of offsite electrical power. These values are consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.
3/4.7.1.5    MAIN STEAM LINE ISOLATION VALVES The OPERABILITY of the main steam line isolation valves ensures that no more than one steam generator will blow down in the event of a steam line rupture. This restriction is required to (1) minimize the positive reactivity effects of the Reactor Coolant System cooldown associated with the blowdown, and (2) limit the pressure rise within containment in the event the steam line rupture occurs within containment. The OPERABILITY of the main steam isolation valves within the closure times of the Surveillance Requirements is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.
The specified 6.75 second full closure time represents the addition of the maximum allowable instrument response time of 1.15 seconds and the maximum allowable valve stroke time of 5.6 seconds. These maximum allowable values should not be exceeded because they represent the design basis values for the plant.


tests confirm component Operability, trend performance, and detect incipient failures by indicating abnormal perfor mance. Performance of inservice testing, discussed in the ASME Code, at 3 month intervals satisfies this requirement. This SR is modified to defer performance until suitable test conditions are established for the steam turbine-driven AFW pump within 24 hours after entering Mode 3 and pr ior to entering Mode 2.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:   TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                         9 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7         PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 7 of 22 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1       TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.6    MAIN FEEDWATER LINE ISOLATION VALVES The main feedwater line isolation valves are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that (1) feedwater is terminated to the affected steam generator following a steam line break and (2) auxiliary feedwater is delivered to the intact steam generator following a feedwater line break. If feedwater is not terminated to a steam generator with a broken main steam line, two serious effects may result: (1) the post-trip return to power due to plant cooldown will be greater with resultant higher fuel failure and (2) the steam released to containment will exceed the design.
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
When the main feedwater isolation valves (MFIVs) are closed or isolated, they are performing their required safety function, e.g., to isolate the main feedwater line. The 72 hour action completion time for one inoperable MFIV in one or more main feedwater lines takes into account the redundancy afforded by the remaining operable MFIVs, and the low probability of an event occurring during this time period that would require isolation of the main feedwater flow paths. The 4 hour action completion time for two inoperable MFIVs in the same feedwater line is considered reasonable to close or isolate the affected flowpath. It is based on operating experience and the low probability of an event that would require main feedwater isolation during this time period.
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.3 CONDENSAT E STORAGE TANKS  The Condensate Storage Tank (CST) provides a safety grade source of  
The specified 5.15 second full closure time represents the addition of the maximum allowable instrument response time of 1.15 seconds and the maximum allowable valve stroke time of 4.0 seconds. These maximum allowable values should not be exceeded because they represent the design basis values for the plant.


water to the steam generators for remo ving decay and sensible heat from the Reactor Coolant System (RCS). The CS T provides a passive flow of water, by gravity, to the Auxiliary Feedw ater (AFW) System. The AFW pumps operate with a continuous recirculation to the CST. When the main steam isolation valves are open, the prefe rred means of heat removal is to discharge steam to the condenser by t he nonsafety grade path of the steam bypass valves. The condens ed steam is returned to the CST by the condensate transfer pump. Th is has the advantage of conserving condensate while minimizing releases to the environment.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
Because the CST is a principal com ponent in removing resi dual heat from the RCS, it is designed to withstand earthquakes and other nat ural phenomena. The CST is designed to Seismic Ca tegory I requirements to ensure availability of the feedwater supply.
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                      10 of 22 REVISION NO.:                              PLANT SYSTEMS 11                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
The LCO required minimum volume of 307,000 gallons ensures that sufficient water is available to maintain the unit in HOT STANDBY for 4 hours followed by an orderly cooldown to the shutdow n cooling entry temperature. 154,000 gallons of water is required to comple te this cooldown. An additional 130,500 gallons is reserved for the unlikely event that a vertical tornado missile ruptures the St. Lucie Unit 1 CST and the water contained in the Unit 1 CST is unavailable to St. Lucie Unit 1. Included in the Unit 2 CST required vo lume of water is 9,203 gallons of unusable water in the tank and 4,230 gallons of water included for
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1      TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.7    ATMOSPHERIC DUMP VALVES The limitation on maintaining the atmospheric dump valves in the manual mode of operation is to ensure the atmospheric dump valves will be closed in the event of a steam line break. For the steam line break with atmospheric dump valve control failure event, the failure of the atmospheric dump valves to close would be a valid concern were the system to be in the automatic mode during power operations.
3/4.7.2      STEAM GENERATOR PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITATION The limitation on steam generator pressure and temperature ensures that the pressure-induced stresses in the steam generators do not exceed the maximum allowable fracture toughness stress limits. The limitations to 100F and 200 psig are based on a steam generator RTNDT of 20F and are sufficient to prevent brittle fracture.
3/4.7.3      COMPONENT COOLING WATER SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Component Cooling Water System ensures that sufficient cooling capacity is available for continued operation of safety-related equipment during normal and accident conditions. The redundant cooling capacity of this system, assuming a single failure, is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.


instrumentation error.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                       11 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7         PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 8 of 22 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.3      COMPONENT COOLING WATER SYSTEM (continued)
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
If the inoperable component cooling water loop cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allowable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4 .a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.4 ACTIVITY  The limitations on secondary system specif ic activity ensure that the resultant offsite radiation dose will comply with the dose criterion provided in 10 CFR 50.67 in the event of a steam li ne rupture. The dose also includes the effects of a coincid ent 1.0 gpm primary to secondary tube leak in the steam generator of the a ffected steam line and a conc urrent loss of offsite electrical power. These values are c onsistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses. 3/4.7.1.5 MAIN STEAM LINE ISOLATION VALVES  The OPERABILITY of the main steam line isolation valves ensures that no more than one steam generator will blow down in the event of a steam line rupture. This restriction is required to (1) minimize the positive reactivity
However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
3/4.7.4      INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Intake Cooling Water System ensures that sufficient cooling capacity is available for continued operation of equipment during normal and accident conditions. The redundant cooling capacity of this system, assuming a single failure, is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.


effects of the Reactor Coolant S ystem cooldown associated with the blowdown, and (2) limit the pressure rise within containment in the event the steam line rupture occurs within containment. The OPERABILI TY of the main steam isolation valves within the closure times of the Surveillance Requirements is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses. The specified 6.75 second full closure time represents the addition of the maximum allowable instrument res ponse time of 1.15 seconds and the maximum allowable valve stroke time of 5.6 seconds. These maximum allowable values should not be exc eeded because they represent the design basis values for the plant.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
SECTION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                     12 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7         PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 9 of 22 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.4      INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM (continued)
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
If the inoperable intake cooling water loop cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allowable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.6 MAIN FEEDWATER LINE ISOLATION VALVES  The main feedwater line isolation va lves are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that (1) feedwater is termi nated to the affected steam generator following a steam line break and (2) auxi liary feedwater is delivered to the intact steam generator follo wing a feedwater line break.
However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
If feedwater is not terminated to a steam generat or with a broken main steam line, two serious effects may result:  (1) t he post-trip return to power due to plant cooldown will be greater with resultant higher fuel failure and (2) the steam released to containment will exceed the design. When the main feedwater isolation valves (MFIVs) are closed or isolated, they are performing their required safety function, e.g., to isolate the main feedwater line. The 72 hour action comp letion time for one inoperable MFIV in one or more main feedwater lines takes into account the redundancy afforded by the remaining operable MFIV s, and the low pr obability of an event occurring during this time period that would require isolation of the main feedwater flow paths. The 4 hour ac tion completion time for two inoperable MFIVs in the same feedwater line is considered reasonable to close or isolate the affected flowpath. It is based on operating experience and the low probability of an event that would require main feedwater isolation during this time period.
The specified 5.15 second full closure time represents the addition of the maximum allowable instrument res ponse time of 1.15 seconds and the maximum allowable valve stroke time of 4.0 seconds. These maximum allowable values should not be exc eeded because they represent the design basis values for the plant.  


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 10 of 22 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                       13 of 22 REVISION NO.:                              PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7         PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.5      ULTIMATE HEAT SINK The limitations on the ultimate heat sink level ensure that sufficient cooling capacity is available to either (1) provide normal cooldown of the facility, or (2) to mitigate the effects of accident conditions within acceptable limits.
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.7 ATMOSPHERIC DUMP VALVES  The limitation on maintaining the at mospheric dump valves in the manual mode of operation is to ensure the atmo spheric dump valves will be closed in the event of a steam line break. For the steam line break with atmospheric dump valve control failure event, the failure of the atmospheric dump valves to close would be a valid concern were the system to be in the automatic
The limitations on minimum water level is based on providing an adequate cooling water supply to safety-related equipment until cooling water can be supplied from Big Mud Creek.
Cooling capacity calculations are based on an ultimate heat sink temperature of 95F. It has been demonstrated by a temperature survey conducted from March 1976 to May 1981 that the Atlantic Ocean has never risen higher than 86F. Based on this conservatism, no ultimate heat sink temperature limitation is specified. (Note that with the implementation of the CCW heat exchanger performance monitoring program, the limiting ultimate heat sink temperature is treated as a variable with an upper limit of 95F without compromising any margin of safety. System operation is maintained well within safety design limits for the service conditions of the heat exchanger.)
3/4.7.6      FLOOD PROTECTION The limitation on flood protection ensures that facility protective actions will be taken in the event of flood conditions. The installation of the stoplogs ensures adequate protection for wave run-up effects where no permanent adjacent structures exist and provides protection to safety-related equipment. The maximum wave runup from the probable maximum flood (PMF) has been calculated to be elevation 18.0 feet Mean Low Water (MLW).


mode during power operations. 3/4.7.2 STEAM GENERATOR PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITATION The limitation on steam gener ator pressure and temper ature ensures that the pressure-induced stresses in the st eam generators do not exceed the maximum allowable fracture toughness st ress limits. The limitations to 100 F and 200 psig are based on a steam generator RT NDT of 20 F and are sufficient to prevent brittle fracture. 3/4.7.3 COMPONENT COOLING WATER SYSTEM  The OPERABILITY of t he Component Cooling Water System ensures that sufficient cooling capacity is avail able for continued operation of safety-related equipment during normal and a ccident condition
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
: s. The redundant cooling capacity of this system, assuming a single failure, is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                       14 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7         PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
SECTION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7      CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Control Room Emergency Air Cleanup System ensures that (1) the ambient air temperature does not exceed the allowable temperature for continuous duty rating for the equipment and instrumentation cooled by this system and (2) the control room will remain habitable for operations personnel during and following all credible accident conditions.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 11 of 22 REVISION NO.:
The OPERABILITY of this system in conjunction with control room design provisions is based on limiting the radiation exposure to personnel occupying the control room to 5 rems total effective dose equivalent.
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
The control room envelope (CRE) is the area within the confines of the CRE boundary that contains the spaces that control room occupants inhabit to control the unit during normal and accident conditions. This area encompasses the control room, and may encompass other non-critical areas to which frequent personnel access or continuous occupancy is not necessary in the event of an accident. The CRE is protected during normal operation, natural events, and accident conditions. The CRE boundary is the combination of walls, floor, roof, ducting, doors, penetrations and equipment that physically form the CRE. The OPERABILITY of the CRE boundary must be maintained to ensure that the inleakage of unfiltered air into the CRE will not exceed the inleakage assumed in the licensing basis analysis of design basis accident (DBA) consequences to CRE occupants. The CRE and its boundary are defined in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program.
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.3 COMPONENT COOLING WATER SYSTEM (continued)
The location of CREACS components and ducting within the CRE control room envelope ensures an adequate supply of filtered air to all areas requiring access. The CREVS provides airborne radiological protection for the CRE occupants, as demonstrated by occupant dose analyses for the most limiting design basis accident fission product release presented in the UFSAR, Chapter 15.
If the inoperable component cooling water loop cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allo wable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HO T STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the follo wing 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Ju stification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN.
This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4 .a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires perform ance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and co mponents, considerati on of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions , if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not pr eclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit. 3/4.7.4 INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Intake Cooling Water System ensures that sufficient cooling capacity is avail able for continued operation of equipment during normal and accident conditions.
The redundant cooling capacity of this system, assuming a single failure, is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 12 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.4 INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM (continued) If the inoperable intake cooling wa ter loop cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allo wable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HO T STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the follo wing 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Ju stification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN.
This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN dur ing startup with t he LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires perform ance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and co mponents, considerati on of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions , if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not pr eclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.  


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 13 of 22 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                       15 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7         PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7      CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.5 ULTIMATE HEAT SINK The limitations on the ultimate heat sink level ensure that sufficient cooling capacity is available to either (1) provide normal cooldown of the facility, or  
In order for the CREACS to be considered OPERABLE, the CRE boundary must be maintained such that the CRE occupant dose from a large radioactive release does not exceed the calculated dose in the licensing basis consequence analyses for DBAs, and that CRE occupants are protected from smoke.
The LCO is modified by a Note allowing the CRE boundary to be opened intermittently under administrative controls. This Note only applies to openings in the CRE boundary that can be rapidly restored to the design condition, such as doors, hatches, floor plugs, and access panels. For entry and exit through doors, the administrative control of the opening is performed by the person(s) entering or exiting the area. For other openings, these controls should be proceduralized and consist of stationing a dedicated individual at the opening who is in continuous communication with the operators in the CRE. This individual will have a method to rapidly close the opening and to restore the CRE boundary to a condition equivalent to the design condition when a need for CRE isolation is indicated.
In MODES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, the CREACS must be OPERABLE to ensure that the CRE will remain habitable to limit operator exposure during and following a DBA.
If the unfiltered inleakage of potentially contaminated air past the CRE boundary and into the CRE can result in CRE occupant radiological dose greater than the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences (allowed to be up to 5 rem total effective dose equivalent -
TEDE), or inadequate protection of CRE occupants from smoke, the CRE boundary is inoperable. Actions must be taken to restore an OPERABLE CRE boundary within 90 days.


(2) to mitigate the effect s of accident conditions within acceptable limits.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
The limitations on minimum water le vel is based on providing an adequate cooling water supply to safety-relat ed equipment until cooling water can be
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                          16 of 22 REVISION NO.:                              PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7      CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)
During the period that the CRE boundary is considered inoperable, action must be initiated to implement mitigating actions to lessen the effect on CRE occupants from the potential hazards of a radiological event or a challenge from smoke. Actions must be taken within 24 hours to verify that in the event of a DBA, the mitigating actions will ensure that CRE occupant radiological exposures will not exceed the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences, and that CRE occupants are protected from smoke.
These mitigating actions (i.e., actions that are taken to offset the consequences of the inoperable CRE boundary) should be preplanned for implementation upon entry into the condition, regardless of whether entry is intentional or unintentional. The 24 hour allowable outage time (AOT) is reasonable based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period, and the use of mitigating actions. The 90 day AOT is reasonable based on the determination that the mitigating actions will ensure protection of CRE occupants within analyzed limits while limiting the probability that CRE occupants will have to implement protective measures that may adversely affect their ability to control the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition in the event of a DBA. In addition, the 90 day AOT is a reasonable time to diagnose, plan and possibly repair, and test most problems with the CRE boundary.


supplied from Big Mud Creek. Cooling capacity calculations are based on an ultimate heat sink temperature of 95 F. It has been demonstrated by a temperature survey conducted from March 1976 to May 1981 that the Atlant ic Ocean has never risen higher than 86 F. Based on this conservatism, no ultimate heat sink temperature limitation is specified.  (Note that with the implementation of the CCW heat exchanger performance monito ring program, the limiti ng ultimate heat sink temperature is treated as a va riable with an upper limit of 95 F without compromising any margin of safety.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
System operation is maintained well within safety design limits for the service conditions of the heat exchanger.) 3/4.7.6 FLOOD PROTECTION The limitation on flood protec tion ensures that facility protective actions will be taken in the event of flood conditions.
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                     17 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7         PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
The installation of the stoplogs ensures adequate protection for wave run-up e ffects where no permanent adjacent structures exist and provides protec tion to safety-rela ted equipment. The maximum wave runup from the probable maximum flood (PMF) has been calculated to be elevation 18.0 feet Mean Low Water (MLW).
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7       CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)
SECTION NO.:
In MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, if the inoperable CREACS or the CRE boundary cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required AOT, the unit must be placed in a MODE that minimizes overall plant risk. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 14 of 22 REVISION NO.:
However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit. The AOT are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Control Room Emergency Air Cleanup System ensures that (1) the ambient air temperature does not exceed the allowable


temperature for continuous duty rating for the equipment and instrumentation cooled by this system and (2) the cont rol room will remain habitable for operations personnel during and following all credible accident conditions.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
The OPERABILITY of this system in conjunction with co ntrol room design provisions is based on limiting the radiation exposure to personnel occupying
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                        18 of 22 REVISION NO.:                              PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7      CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)
If both CREACS trains are inoperable in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4 for reasons other than an inoperable control room boundary (i.e., Action b), at least one CREACS train must be returned to OPERABLE status within 24 hours. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second CREACS b:ain is intentionally declared inoperable. The Action does not apply to voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one train is inoperable for any reason and the second train is discovered to be inoperable, or if both trains are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. During the period that the CREACS trains are inoperable, action must be initiated to implement mitigating actions to lessen the effect on CRE occupants from potential hazards while both trains of CREACS are inoperable. In the event of a DBA, the mitigating actions will reduce the consequences of radiological exposures to the CRE occupants.
Specification 3.4.8, "Specific Activity," allows limited operation with the reactor coolant system (RCS) activity significantly greater than the LCO limit. This presents a risk to the plant operator during an accident when all CREACS trains are inoperable. Therefore, it must be verified within 1 hour that LCO 3.4.8 is met. This Action does not require additional RCS sampling beyond that normally required by LCO 3 .4.8. At least one CREACS train must be returned to OPERABLE status within 24 hours. The Allowed Outage Time is based on Reference 1 which demonstrated that the 24-hour Allowed Outage Time is acceptable based on the infrequent use of the Actions and the small incremental effect on plant risk.
When in MODES 5 and or 6, or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, with both CREACS trains inoperable or with one or more CREACS trains inoperable due to an inoperable CRE boundary, action must be taken immediately to suspend activities that could result in a release of radioactivity that might require isolation of the CRE. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes the accident risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.


the control room to 5 rems total effective dose equivalent.
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
The control room envelope (CRE) is the ar ea within the confines of the CRE boundary that contains the spaces that control room occupants inhabit to  
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                        19 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                            ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7      CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)
The Surveillance Requirement (SR) 4.7.7.e verifies the OPERABILITY of the CRE boundary by testing for unfiltered air inleakage past the CRE boundary and into the CRE. The details of the testing are specified in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program.
The CRE is considered habitable when the radiological dose to CRE occupants calculated in the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences is no more than 5 rem TEDE and the CRE occupants are protected from hazardous chemicals and smoke. This SR verifies that the unfiltered air inleakage into the CRE is no greater than the flow rate assumed in the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences. When unfiltered air inleakage is greater than the assumed flow rate in Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4, ACTION b must be taken. Required ACTION b.3 allows time to restore the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status provided mitigating actions can ensure that the CRE remains within the licensing basis habitability limits for the occupants following an accident. Compensatory measures are discussed in Regulatory Guide 1.196, Section C.2.7.3, which endorses, with exceptions, NEI 99-03, Section 8.4 and Appendix F. These compensatory measures may also be used as mitigating actions as required by Required Action b.2.
Temporary analytical methods may also be used as compensatory measures to restore OPERABILITY, as discussed in letter from Eric J. Leeds (NRC) to James W. Davis (NEI) dated January 30, 2004, NEI Draft White Paper, Use of Generic Letter 91-18 Process and Alternative Source Terms in the Context of Control Room Habitability. Options for restoring the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status include changing the licensing basis DBA consequence analysis, repairing the CRE boundary, or a combination of these actions.
Depending upon the nature of the problem and the corrective action, a full scope inleakage test may not be necessary to establish that the CRE boundary has been restored to OPERABLE status.
References
: 1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected technical Specifications for Conditions Leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown, Revision 2, August 2010.


control the unit during normal and accident conditions. This area encompasses the control room, and ma y encompass other non-critical areas to which frequent personnel access or continuous occupancy is not
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                      20 of 22 REVISION NO.:                            PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.8      ECCS AREA VENTILATION SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the ECCS Area Ventilation System ensures that cooling air is provided for ECCS equipment.
If the inoperable ECCS area ventilation system cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allowable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable. low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.
However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
With respect to Surveillance 4.7.8.b, this SR verifies that the required ECCS Area Ventilation System filter testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Testing Program (VFTP).


necessary in the event of an accident. The CRE is protected during normal operation, natural events, and accident conditions. The CRE boundary is the  
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                      21 of 22 REVISION NO.:                              PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.9      SNUBBERS All safety related snubbers are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that the structural integrity of the Reactor Coolant System and all other safety related systems is maintained during and following a seismic or other event initiating dynamic loads. Snubbers excluded from this inspection program are those installed on nonsafety related systems and then only if their failure or failure of the system on which they are installed, would have no adverse effect on any safety related system.
Snubbers are classified and grouped by design and manufacturer but not by size. For example, mechanical snubbers utilizing the same design features of the 2 kip, 10 kip and 100 kip capacity manufactured by company A are of the same type. The same design mechanical snubber manufactured by company B, for purposes of this Specification, would be of a different type, as would hydraulic snubbers for either manufacturer.
The visual inspection frequency is based upon maintaining a constant level of snubber protection to systems. Therefore, the required inspection interval varies inversely with the observed snubber failures and is determined by the number of inoperable snubbers found during an inspection. Inspections performed before that interval has elapsed may be used as a new reference point to determine the next inspection. However, the results of such early inspections performed before the original required time interval has elapsed (nominal time less 25%) may not be used to lengthen the required inspection interval. Any inspection whose results require a shorter inspection interval will override the previous schedule.


combination of walls, floor, roof, duc ting, doors, penetrations and equipment that physically form the CRE. The O PERABILITY of the CRE boundary must be maintained to ensure that the inleak age of unfiltered air into the CRE will not exceed the inleakage assumed in the licensing basis analysis of design basis accident (DBA) consequences to CRE occupants. The CRE and its boundary are defined in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program. The location of CREACS components and ducting within the CRE control room envelope ensures an adequate supply of filtered air to all areas
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7                  BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04                      22 of 22 REVISION NO.:                              PLANT SYSTEMS 11                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7        PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.9      SNUBBERS (continued)
To provide assurance of snubber functional reliability, one of two sampling and acceptance criteria methods are used:
: 1.      Functionally test 10% of a type of snubber with an additional 10%
tested for each functional testing failure or
: 2.      Functionally test a sample size and determine sample acceptance or rejection using Figure 4.7-1.
Figures 4.7-1 was developed using Walds Sequential Probability Ratio Plan as described in Quality Control and Industrial Statistics by Acheson J.
Duncan.
All service life of a snubber is evaluated via manufacturer input and information through consideration of the snubber service conditions and associated installation and maintenance records (newly installed snubber, seal replaced, spring replaced, in high radiation area, in high temperature area, etc...). The requirement to monitor the snubber service life is included to ensure that the snubbers periodically undergo a performance evaluation in view of their age and operating conditions. These records will provide statistical bases for future consideration of snubber service life.
3/4.7.10      SEALED SOURCE CONTAMINATION The limitations on removable contamination for sources requiring leak testing, including alpha emitters, is based on 10 CFR 70.39(c) limits for plutonium.
This limitation will ensure that leakage from byproduct, source, and special nuclear material sources will not exceed allowable intake values.
Sealed sources are classified into three groups according to their use, with surveillance requirements commensurate with the probability of damage to a source in that group. Those sources which are frequently handled are required to be tested more often than those which are not. Sealed sources which are continuously enclosed within a shielded mechanism (i.e. sealed sources within radiation monitoring or boron measuring devices) are considered to be stored and need not be tested unless they are removed from the shield mechanism.
3/4.7.11      DELETED


requiring access. The CREVS provides airborne radiological protection for the CRE occupants, as demonstrated by occupant dose analyses for the most limiting design basis accident fission product release presented in the
Section No.
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                   3/4.8 Attachment No.
UFSAR, Chapter 15.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 10 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 Current Revision No.
SECTION NO.:
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                             8 Title:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 15 of 22 REVISION NO.:
ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)
In order for the CREACS to be c onsidered OPERABLE, the CRE boundary must be maintained such that the CRE occupant dose from a large radioactive release does not exceed the calculated dose in the licensing basis consequence analyses for DBAs, and that CRE occupants are protected from
 
smoke. The LCO is modified by a Note allowing the CRE boundary to be opened intermittently under administrative c ontrols. This Note only applies to openings in the CRE boundary that can be rapidly restored to the design condition, such as doors, hatches, fl oor plugs, and access panels. For entry and exit through doors, the administrativ e control of the opening is performed by the person(s) enteri ng or exiting the area.
For other openings, these controls should be proceduralized and consist of stationing a dedicated individual at the opening who is in continuous communication with the operators in the CRE. This individual will have a method to rapidly close the opening and to restore the CRE boundary to a condition equivalent to the design condition when a need for CRE isolation is indicated.
In MODES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, an d during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, the CREACS must be OPERAB LE to ensure that the CRE will remain habitable to limit operator exposure during and following a DBA. If the unfiltered inleakage of potentially contaminated air past the CRE boundary and into the CRE can result in CRE occupant radiological dose greater than the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences (allowed to be up to 5 rem total effective dose equivalent -
 
TEDE), or inadequate protection of CRE occupants from smoke, the CRE boundary is inoperable. Actions must be taken to restore an OPERABLE CRE boundary within 90 days.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 16 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)
During the period that the CRE boundar y is considered inoperable, action must be initiated to implement mitigati ng actions to lessen the effect on CRE occupants from the potential hazards of a radiological event or a challenge from smoke. Actions must be taken within 24 hours to verify that in the event of a DBA, the mitigating actions will ensure that CRE occupant radiological exposures will not exceed the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences, and that CRE occ upants are protect ed from smoke.
These mitigating actions (i.e., acti ons that are taken to offset the consequences of the inoperable CRE boundary) should be preplanned for implementation upon entry into the conditi on, regardless of whether entry is intentional or unintentional. The 24 hour allowable outage time (AOT) is reasonable based on the low pr obability of a DBA occurring during this time period, and the use of mitigating actions. The 90 day AOT is reasonable based on the determination that the miti gating actions will ensure protection of CRE occupants within analyzed limit s while limiting the probability that CRE occupants will have to implement protective measures that may adversely affect their ability to contro l the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition in the event of a DBA. In addition, the 90 day AOT is a reasonable time to diagnose, plan and possibly repair, and test most problems with the CRE boundary.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 17 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)
In MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, if t he inoperable CREACS or the CRE boundary cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required AOT, the unit must be placed in a MODE that minimizes overall plant risk. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HO T STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the follo wing 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Ju stification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN.
This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN dur ing startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires perform ance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and co mponents, considerati on of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions , if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not pr eclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit
. The AOT are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 18 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)
If both CREACS trains are inoperable in MO DE 1, 2, 3, or 4 for reasons other than an inoperable contro l room boundary (i.e., Ac tion b), at least one CREACS train must be returned to OPER ABLE status with in 24 hours. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second CREACS b:ain is intentionally declared inop erable. The Action does not apply to voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one train is inoperable for any reason and the second train is discovered to be inoperable, or if both trains are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. During the period that the CREACS trains are inoperable, action must be initiated to implement mitigating actions to lessen the effect on CRE occupants from potent ial hazards while both trains of CREACS are inoperable. In the event of a DBA, the mitigating actions will reduce the consequences of radiological exposures to the CRE occupants. Specification 3.4.8, "Specific Activity," allows limited operation with the reactor coolant system (RCS) activity signific antly greater than the LCO limit. This presents a risk to the pl ant operator during an a ccident when all CREACS trains are inoperable. Therefore, it mu st be verified within 1 hour that LCO 3.4.8 is met. This Action does not require additional RCS sampling beyond that normally required by LCO 3 .4.8. At least one CREACS train must be returned to OPERABLE status within 24 hours. The Allowed Outage Time is based on Reference 1 which demonstrat ed that the 24-hour Allowed Outage Time is acceptable based on the infrequent use of the Actions and the small incremental effect on plant risk.
When in MODES 5 and or 6, or du ring movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, with both CREACS trains inoperable or with one or more
 
CREACS trains inoperable due to an i noperable CRE boundary, action must be taken immediately to suspend activities that could result in a release of radioactivity that might require isolation of the CRE. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes the accident risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 19 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued) The Surveillance Requirement (SR) 4.7.
7.e verifies the OPERABILITY of the CRE boundary by testing for unfilter ed air inleakage past the CRE boundary and into the CRE. The details of the test ing are specified in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program. The CRE is considered habitable when the radiological dose to CRE occupants calculated in the licensing bas is analyses of DBA consequences is no more than 5 rem TEDE and the CRE occupants are protected from hazardous chemicals and smoke. This SR verifies that the unfiltered air inleakage into the CRE is no greater than the flow rate assumed in the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences. When unfiltered air
 
inleakage is greater than t he assumed flow rate in Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4, ACTION b must be taken. Required ACTI ON b.3 allows time to restore the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status pr ovided mitigating actions can ensure that the CRE remains within the lic ensing basis habitability limits for the occupants following an accident. Compensatory measures are discussed in
 
Regulatory Guide 1.196, Section C.2.7.3, which endorses, with exceptions, NEI 99-03, Section 8.4 and Appendix F.
These compensatory measures may also be used as mitigating actions as required by Required Action b.2.
Temporary analytical methods may also be used as compensatory measures to restore OPERABILITY, as discussed in letter from Eric J. Leeds (NRC) to James W. Davis (NEI) dated January 30, 2004, "NEI Draft White Paper, Use of Generic Letter 91-18 Process and Alternative Source Terms in the Context
 
of Control Room Habitability." Options for restoring the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status include changing the licensing basis DBA consequence analysis, repairing the CRE boundary, or a combination of these actions.
Depending upon the natur e of the problem and the co rrective action, a full scope inleakage test may not be nece ssary to establish that the CRE boundary has been restored to OPERABLE status. References 1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, "Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected technical Specifications fo r Conditions Leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown," Revision 2, August 2010.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 20 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.8 ECCS AREA VENTILATION SYSTEM  The OPERABILITY of t he ECCS Area Ventilation System ensures that cooling air is provided for ECCS equipment. If the inoperable ECCS area ventilation system cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allo wable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HO T STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the follo wing 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Ju stification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable. low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN.
This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN dur ing startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires perform ance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and co mponents, considerati on of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions , if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not pr eclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit. With respect to Surveillance 4.7.8.b, th is SR verifies that the required ECCS Area Ventilation System filter testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Test ing Program (VFTP).
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 21 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)  BASES (continued) 3/4.7.9 SNUBBERS  All safety related snubbers are requir ed to be OPERABLE to ensure that the structural integrity of t he Reactor Coolant System and all other safety related systems is maintained during and followi ng a seismic or other event initiating dynamic loads. Snubbers excluded from this inspection program are those installed on nonsafety related systems and then only if their failure or failure of the system on which they are insta lled, would have no adverse effect on any safety related system. Snubbers are classified and grouped by design and manufacturer but not by size. For example, mechanical snubbers ut ilizing the same des ign features of the 2 kip, 10 kip and 100 kip capacity manufactured by company "A" are of the same type. The same design mechanical snubber manufactured by company "B", for purposes of this Specif ication, would be of a different type, as would hydraulic snubbers for either manufacturer. The visual inspection frequency is based upon maintaining a constant level of snubber protection to systems. Therefore, the required inspection interval varies inversely with the observed snubber failures and is determined by the number of inoperable snubbers found during an inspection. Inspections performed before that interval has elapsed may be used as a new reference point to determine the next inspection.
However, the results of such early inspections performed before the original required time interval has elapsed (nominal time less 25%) may not be used to lengthen the required inspection
 
interval. Any inspection whose results require a shorter inspection interval will override the previous schedule.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 PLANT SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.7 22 of 22 REVISION NO.:
11  3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.7.9 SNUBBERS (continued)
To provide assurance of snubber func tional reliability, one of two sampling and acceptance criteria methods are used:
: 1. Functionally test 10% of a ty pe of snubber with an additional 10% tested for each functional testing failure or
: 2. Functionally test a sample size and determine sample acceptance or rejection using Figure 4.7-1.
Figures 4.7-1 was developed using "Wal d's Sequential Probability Ratio Plan" as described in "Quality Control and Industrial Statistics" by Acheson J. Duncan. All service life of a snubber is evaluated via manufacturer input and information through consideration of the snubber service conditions and associated installation and maintenance records (newly installed snubber, seal replaced, spring replaced, in hi gh radiation area, in high temperature area, etc...). The require ment to monitor the snubber service life is included to ensure that the snubbers periodicall y undergo a performanc e evaluation in view of their age and operating conditions. These records will provide statistical bases for future cons ideration of snubber service life. 3/4.7.10 SEALED SOURCE CONTAMINATION  The limitations on removable contaminat ion for sources requiring leak testing, including alpha emitters, is based on 10 CFR 70.39(c) limits for plutonium. This limitation will ensure that l eakage from byproduct, source, and special nuclear material sources will not exceed allowable intake values. Sealed sources are classified into three groups according to their use, with surveillance requirements commensurate with the probability of damage to a source in that group. Those s ources which are frequently handled are required to be tested more often than t hose which  are not. Sealed sources which are continuously enclosed within a shielded mechanism (i.e. sealed sources within radiation monitori ng or boron measuring devices) are considered to be stored and need not be tested unless they are removed from the shield mechanism.
3/4.7.11 DELETED
 
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
3/4.8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
10 Current Revision No.
8 SAFETY RELATED Title: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS Responsible Department:
Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 8 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 8 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency c ontrol Program. (Aut hor: K. Frehafer)
Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1948783 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 1671445 to update Diesel Fuel Oil Testing program TS changes required. (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 1880845 to update DC battery surveillance TS changes required. (Author: K. Frehafer)
Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 09-2643 to update EDG fuel oil testing ASTM standards.
(Author: K.W. Frehafer)
Revision 2 - Implemented License Amendment 207 and 155. Procedure changes to implement EDG Fuel Oil Test Program LAR were reviewed in ORG 08-034 on 6/26/08 as part of the license amendment submittal. (Author: K.W. Frehafer)
Revision 1 - Implemented License Amendment 123. (K.W. Frehafer, 12/17/01)
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
Revision            Approved By              Approval Date  UNIT #          UNIT 2 DATE 0                  R.G. West                08/30/01      DOCT          PROCEDURE DOCN          Section 3/4.8 SYS 8                  R. Coffey                08/26/15      STATUS        COMPLETED REV                8
                                                                  # OF PGS


Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1948783 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8            BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04                                                  2 of 10 REVISION NO.:                  ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.8 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ................................................. 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3              A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ......... 3 3/4.8.4    ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES . 10


====4.0.4. (Author====
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
N. Elmore)  
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8                BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04                      3 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.8 3/4.8        ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3      A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS The OPERABILITY of the A.C. and D.C. power sources and associated distribution systems during operation ensures that sufficient power will be available to supply the safety related equipment required for 1) the safe shutdown of the facility and 2) the mitigation and control of accident conditions within the facility. The minimum specified independent and redundant A.C. and D.C. power sources and distribution systems satisfy the requirements of General Design Criteria 17 of Appendix A to 10 CFR 50.
The ACTION requirements specified for the levels of degradation of the power sources provide restriction upon continued facility operation commensurate with the level of degradation. The OPERABILITY of the power sources are consistent with the initial condition assumptions of the safety analyses and are based upon maintaining at least one redundant set of onsite A.C. and D.C. power sources and associated distribution systems OPERABLE during accident conditions coincident with an assumed loss of offsite power and single failure of the other onsite A.C. source. The A.C.
and D.C. source allowable out-of-service times are based on Regulatory Guide 1.93, Availability of Electrical Power Sources, December 1974.
When one diesel generator is inoperable, there is an additional requirement to check that all required systems, subsystems, trains, components and devices (i.e., redundant features), that depend on the remaining OPERABLE diesel generator as a source of emergency power, are also OPERABLE, and that the steam-driven auxiliary feedwater pump is OPERABLE. These redundant required features are those that are assumed to function to mitigate an accident, coincident with a loss of offsite power, in the safety analysis, such as the emergency core cooling system and auxiliary feedwater system. Upon discovery of a concurrent inoperability of required redundant features the feature supported by the inoperable EDG is declared inoperable. Thus plant operators will be directed to supported feature TS action requirements for appropriate remedial actions for the inoperable required features.


Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 1671445 to update Diese l Fuel Oil Testing program TS changes required. (Author: K. Frehafer)
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 1880845 to update DC battery surveillance TS changes required. (Aut hor: K. Frehafer)
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8                BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04                      4 of 10 REVISION NO.:                     ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8        ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
Revision 3
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3      A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
- Incorporated PCR 09-2643 to update EDG fuel oil testing ASTM standards. (Author:  K.W. Frehafer)
The four hour completion time upon discovery that an opposite train required feature is inoperable is to provide assurance that a loss of offsite power, during the period that a EDG is inoperable, does not result in a complete loss of safety function of critical redundant required features.
Revision 2 - Implemented License Amendment 207 and 155. Procedure changes to implement EDG Fuel Oil Test Program LAR were reviewed in ORG 08-034 on 6/26/08 as part of the license amendment submittal. (Author:  K.W. Frehafer)  
The four hour completion time allows the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This completion time also allows for an exception to the normal time zero for beginning the allowed outage time clock. The four hour completion time only begins on discovery that both an inoperable EDG exists and a required feature on the other train is inoperable.
TS 3.8.1.1, ACTION b provides an allowed outage/action completion time (AOT) of up to 14 days to restore a single inoperable diesel generator to operable status. This AOT is based on the findings of a deterministic and probabilistic safety analysis and is referred to as a risk-informed AOT.
Entry into this action requires that a risk assessment be performed in accordance with the Configuration Risk Management Program (CRMP),
which is described in the Administrative Procedure that implements the Maintenance Rule pursuant to 10 CFR 50.65.
All EDG inoperabilities must be investigated for common-cause failures regardless of how long the EDG inoperability persists. When one diesel generator is inoperable, required ACTIONS 3.8.1.1.b and 3.8.1.1.c provide an allowance to avoid unnecessary testing of EDGs. If it can be determined that the cause of the inoperable EDG does not exist on the remaining OPERABLE EDG, then SR 4.8.1.1.2.a.4 does not have to be performed. Eight (8) hours is reasonable to confirm that the OPERABLE EDG is not affected by the same problem as the inoperable EDG. If it cannot otherwise be determined that the cause of the initial inoperable EDG does not exist on the remaining EDG, then satisfactory performance of SR 4.8.1.1.2.a.4 suffices to provide assurance of continued OPERABILITY of that EDG. If the cause of the initial inoperability exists on the remaining OPERABLE EDG, that EDG would also be declared inoperable upon discovery, and ACTION 3.8.1.1.e would be entered. Once the failure is repaired (on either EDG), the common-cause failure no longer exists.


Revision 1 - Implemented License Amendment 123. (K.W. Frehafer, 12/17/01)  
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8                BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04                      5 of 10 REVISION NO.:                      ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8        ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3        A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
Action g prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to an inoperable diesel generator. There is an increased risk associated with entering a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with an inoperable diesel generator and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.
The OPERABILITY of the minimum specified A.C. and D.C. power sources and associated distribution systems during shutdown and refueling ensures that 1) the facility can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended time periods and 2) sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status.
If the inoperable A.C. power source and associated distribution system or D.C. power source and associated distribution system cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allowable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.
However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.


Revision 0
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
- Bases for Technical Specifications.  (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)  Revision  Approved By  Approval Date  UNIT # UNIT 2        DATE 0  R.G. West  08/30/01  DOCT PROCEDURE        DOCN Section 3/4.8 SYS  8  R. Coffey  08/26/15  STATUS COMPLETED REV 8        # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
TITLE:       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8                  BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04                         6 of 10 REVISION NO.:                      ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8                                  ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8         ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.8 2 of 10 REVISION NO.:
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3        A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
8  TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.8 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ................................................. 3
The Surveillance Requirements for demonstrating the OPERABILTY of the DC system battery cell interconnection resistances are based on criteria recommended by the manufacturer. The table contained in TSSR 4.8.2.3.2.c.3 is provided to define the maximum individual and maximum average allowable values for battery cell interconnection resistances.
The maximum individual battery cell interconnection resistance values are based on the negligible impact of voltage drop and connection heating, during peak DC system load conditions. A maximum individual battery interconnection resistance value of  150 x 10-6 ohms is used for connections, which use inter-cell (bus-bar type) connections and for the battery set output terminal connections. The maximum individual battery interconnection resistance value of  200 x 10-6 ohms is used for the inter-tier and inter-rack connections, which are subject to additional resistance of the cables used to extend between the different level tiers of each battery rack and of the adjacent battery rack.
The maximum average battery cell interconnection resistance value of  50 x 10-6 ohms is the average of the interconnection resistance limit for all inter-cell, inter-tier, inter-rack and output terminals in the series-connected battery bank string. The  50 x 10-6 ohms criteria was selected in order to ensure that the battery cell interconnection voltage drop does not exceed the vendor criteria limit of less than 33.66 mV (average) for each battery cell interconnection, during the maximum design current load profile. The battery manufacturer has rated the battery bank set for full rated output, given adherence to limiting the average interconnection resistance to less than 33.66 mV drop between cells. For battery cell interconnections, which are monitored via multiple measurement points between two adjacent cells, these measurements must first be averaged for the connection between the affected adjacent cells, before averaging the values for all cells used in the full battery bank set.
4.8.1.1.2.c requires verification that the fuel oil properties of new and stored fuel oil are tested in accordance with, and maintained within the limits of the Diesel Fuel Oil Testing Program.


BASES ............................................................................................ 3
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8                BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04                        7 of 10 REVISION NO.:                      ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8        ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3      A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
The tests listed below are a means of determining whether new fuel oil is of the appropriate grade and has not been contaminated with substances that would have an immediate, detrimental impact on diesel engine combustion.
If results from these tests are within acceptable limits, the fuel oil may be added to the storage tanks without concern for contaminating the entire volume of fuel oil in the storage tanks. These tests are to be conducted prior to adding the new fuel to the storage tank(s), but in no case is the time between receipt of new fuel and conducting the tests to exceed 31 days. The tests, limits, and applicable ASTM Standards are as follows:
: a.     Sample the new fuel oil in accordance with ASTM D4057,
: b.     Verify in accordance with the tests specified in ASTM D975 that the sample has an absolute specific gravity at 60/60&deg;F of  0.83 and 0.89, or an API gravity at 60&deg;F of  27&deg; and  39&deg; when tested in accordance with ASTM D1298, a kinematic viscosity at 40&deg;C of 1.9 centistokes and  4.1 centistokes, and a flash point  125&deg;F, and
: c.     Verify that the new fuel oil has a clear and bright appearance with proper color when tested in accordance with ASTM D4176 or a water and sediment content within limits when tested in accordance with ASTM D2709.
Failure to meet any of the above limits is cause for rejecting the new fuel oil, but does not represent a failure to meet the LCO concern since the fuel oil is not added to the storage tanks.
Within 31 days following the initial new fuel oil sample, the fuel oil is analyzed to establish that the other properties specified in Table 1 of ASTM D975 are met for new fuel oil when tested in accordance with ASTM D975, except that the analysis for sulfur may be performed in accordance with ASTM D5453, ASTM D2622, or ASTM D3120. The 31 day period is acceptable because the fuel oil properties of interest, even if they were not within stated limits, would not have an immediate effect on DG operation.
This Surveillance ensures the availability of high quality fuel oil for the DGs.
Fuel oil degradation during long term storage shows up as an increase in particulate, due mostly to oxidation. The presence of particulate does not mean the fuel oil will not burn properly in a diesel engine. The particulate can cause fouling of filters and fuel oil injection equipment, however, which can cause engine failure.


3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ......... 3
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8                BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04                        8 of 10 REVISION NO.:                      ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8        ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3       A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
Particulate concentrations should be determined in accordance with ASTM D6217 or ASTM D2276. This method involves a gravimetric determination of total particulate concentration in the fuel oil and has a limit of 10 mg/l. It is acceptable to obtain a field sample for subsequent laboratory testing in lieu of field testing.
The Frequency of this test takes into consideration fuel oil degradation trends that indicate that particulate concentration is unlikely to change significantly between Frequency intervals.
ASTM Standards: D4057; D975 and D975 Table 1; D1298; D4176; D2709; D2622; D6217; D5453; D3120; D2276. ASTM Standard year designations are located in Chemistry Procedures COP-05.10 and COP-07.16.
This concludes the TS Bases discussion for SR 4.8.1.1.2.c.
The Surveillance Requirements for demonstrating the OPERABILITY of the diesel generators are in accordance with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.9 Selection of Diesel Generator Set Capacity for Standby Power Supplies, March 10, 1971, and 1.108 Periodic Testing of Diesel Generator Units Used as Onsite Electric Power Systems at Nuclear Power Plants, Revision 1, August 1977, and 1.137, Fuel Oil Systems for Standby Diesel Generators, Revision 1, October 1979, Generic Letter 84-15, Proposed Staff Actions to Improve and Maintain Diesel Generator Reliability, dated July 2, 1984, and NRC staff positions reflected in Amendment No. 48 to Facility Operating License NPF-7 for North Anna Unit 2, dated April 25, 1985; as modified by Generic Letter 93-05, Line-Item Technical Specifications Improvements to Reduce Surveillance Requirements for Testing During Power Operation, dated September 27, 1993, and Generic Letter 94-01, Removal of Accelerated Testing and Special Reporting Requirements for Emergency Diesel Generators, dated May 31, 1994. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.


3/4.8.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES . 10
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8                 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04                        9 of 10 REVISION NO.:                    ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8        ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3      A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
The Surveillance Requirement for demonstrating the OPERABILITY of the Station batteries are based on the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.129, Maintenance Testing and Replacement of Large Lead Storage Batteries for Nuclear Power Plants, February 1978, and IEEE Std 450-1980, IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and Substations. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
Verifying average electrolyte temperature above the minimum for which the battery was sized, total battery terminal voltage on float charge, connection resistance values and the performance of battery service and discharge tests ensures the effectiveness of the charging system, the ability to handle high discharge rates and compares the battery capacity at that time with the rated capacity.
Table 4.8-2 specifies the normal limits for each designated pilot cell and each connected cell for electrolyte level, float voltage and specific gravity.
The limits for the designated pilot cells float voltage and specific gravity, greater than 2.13 volts and .015 below the manufacturers full charge specific gravity or a battery charger current that had stabilized at a low value, is characteristic of a charged cell with adequate capacity. The normal limits for each connected cell for float voltage and specific gravity, greater than 2.13 volts and not more than .020 below the manufacturers full charge specific gravity with an average specific gravity of all the connected cells not more than .010 below the manufacturers full charge specific gravity, ensures the OPERABILITY and capability of the battery.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.8 3 of 10 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8                BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04                         10 of 10 REVISION NO.:                      ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8         ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
8  BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.8 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS The OPERABILITY of t he A.C. and D.C. power sources and associated distribution systems during operation ensures that su fficient power will be available to supply the safety related equipment required for 1) the safe shutdown of the facility and 2) the mitigation and control of accident conditions within the facility. The minimum specified independent and redundant A.C. and D.C. power source s and distribution systems satisfy the requirements of General Design Criteria 17 of Appendix "A" to 10 CFR
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3       A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
: 50. The ACTION requirements specified for the levels of degradation of the power sources provide restriction upon continued facility operation commensurate with the level of degradation. The OPERABILITY of the power sources are consistent with the initial condition assumptions of the safety analyses and are based upon maintaining at least one redundant set of onsite A.C. and D.C. power sour ces and associated distribution systems OPERABLE during accident conditions coincident with an assumed loss of
Operation with a battery cells parameter outside the normal limit but within the allowable value specified in Table 4.8-2 is permitted for up to 7 days.
During this 7 day period: (1) the allowable values for electrolyte level ensures no physical damage to the plates with an adequate electron transfer capability; (2) the allowable value for the average specific gravity of all the cells, not more than .020 below the manufacturers recommended full charge specific gravity, ensures that the decrease in rating will be less than the safety margin provided in sizing; (3) the allowable value for an individual cells specific gravity, ensures that an individual cells specific gravity will not be more than .040 below the manufacturers full charge specific gravity and that the overall capability of the battery will be maintained within an acceptable limit; and (4) the allowable value for an individual cells float voltage, greater than 2.07 volts, ensures the batterys capability to perform its design function.
3/4.8.4      ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES The OPERABILITY of the motor operated valves thermal overload protection and/or bypass devices ensures that these devices will not prevent safety related valves from performing their function. The Surveillance Requirements for demonstrating the OPERABILITY of these devices are in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.106 Thermal Overload Protection for Electric Motors on Motor Operated Valves, Revision 1, March 1977.


offsite power and single failure of the other onsite A.C. source. The A.C.
Section No.
and D.C. source allowable out-of-serv ice times are based on Regulatory Guide 1.93, "Availability of Electrical Power Sources," December 1974.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                         3/4.9 Attachment No.
When one diesel generator is inoper able, there is an additional requirement to check that all required systems, subsystems, trains, components and devices (i.e., red undant features), that depend on the remaining OPERABLE diesel generator as a source of emergency power, are also OPERABLE, and that the steam-driven auxiliary feedwater pump
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 11 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 Current Revision No.
 
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                                   6 Title:
is OPERABLE. These redundant requir ed features are those that are assumed to function to mitigate an accident, coincident with a loss of offsite power, in the safety analysis, such as the emergency core cooling system and auxiliary feedwater system. Upon discovery of a concurrent inoperability of required redundant features the f eature supported by the inoperable EDG is declared inoperabl
REFUELING OPERATIONS Responsible Department:                   Licensing REVISION  
: e. Thus plant operators will be directed to supported feature TS ac tion requirements for appropriate remedial actions for the inoperable required features.
 
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.8 4 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.
2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued) The four hour completion time upon discovery that an opposite train required feature is inoperable is to prov ide assurance that a loss of offsite power, during the period that a EDG is inoperable, does not result in a
 
complete loss of safety function of critical redun dant required features.
The four hour completion time allows the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabil ities. This completion time also allows for an exception to the normal "time zero
" for beginning the allowed outage time "clock."  The four hour completion time only begins on discovery that both an inoperable EDG exists and a requi red feature on t he other train is inoperable. TS 3.8.1.1, ACTION "b" provides an allowed outage/action completion time (AOT) of up to 14 days to restore a single inoperable diesel generator to operable status. This AOT is based on the findings of a deterministic and probabilistic safety analysis and is referr ed to as a "risk-informed" AOT.
Entry into this action requires that a risk assessment be performed in accordance with the Configurati on Risk Management Program (CRMP), which is described in the Administra tive Procedure that implements the Maintenance Rule pursuant to 10 CFR 50.65. All EDG inoperabilities must be invest igated for common-cause failures regardless of how long the EDG inoperability persists.
When one diesel generator is inoperable, required ACTION S 3.8.1.1.b and 3.
8.1.1.c provide an allowance to avoid unnecessary testing of EDGs. If it can be determined that the cause of the inoperable EDG does not exist on the remaining OPERABLE EDG, then SR 4.8.1.1.2.a.4 does not have to be performed. Eight (8) hours is reas onable to confirm th at the OPERABLE EDG is not affected by the same pr oblem as the inoperable EDG. If it cannot otherwise be determined that the cause of the initial inoperable EDG does not exist on the remaining EDG, then satisfactory performance of SR 4.8.1.1.2.a.4 suffices to provide assurance of continued OPERABILITY of that EDG.
If the cause of the in itial inoperability exists on the remaining OPERABLE EDG, that EDG would also be declared inoperable upon discovery, and ACTION 3.
8.1.1.e would be entered. Once the failure is repaired (on either ED G), the common-cause failure no longer exists.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.8 5 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.
2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
Action g prohibits the application of LC O 3.0.4.b to an inoperable diesel generator. There is an increased risk associated with entering a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with an inoperable diesel generator and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessm ent addressing inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.
The OPERABILITY of the minimum spec ified A.C. and D.C.
power sources and associated distribution systems duri ng shutdown and refueling ensures that 1) the facility can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended time periods and 2) sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitori ng and maintaining the unit status.
If the inoperable A.C. power source and associated distribution system or D.C. power source and associated di stribution system cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status withi n the allowable outage ti me, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the follo wing 6 hours. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Ju stification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN.
This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires perform ance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and co mponents, considerati on of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions , if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not pr eclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicabili ty that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.8 6 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.
2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
The Surveillance Requirements for demonstrating the OPERABILTY of the DC system battery cell interconnection re sistances are based on criteria recommended by the manufacturer.
The table contained in TSSR 4.8.2.3.2.c.3 is provided to defi ne the maximum individual and maximum average allowable values for battery cell interconnection resistances.
The maximum individual battery cell interconnection resistance values are based on the negligible impact of voltage drop and connection heating, during peak DC system load conditions. A maximum individual battery
 
interconnection resistance value of  150 x 10-6 ohms is used for connections, which use inter-cell (bus-bar type) connections and for the battery set output terminal connecti ons. The maximum individual battery interconnection resistance value of  200 x 10-6 ohms is used for the inter-tier and inter-rack connections, which are subject to additional
 
resistance of the cables used to extend between the different level tiers of each battery rack and of the adjacent battery rack. The maximum average battery cell interconnection resistance value of  50 x 10-6 ohms is the average of the interconnection re sistance limit for all inter-cell, inter-tier, inter-rack and output terminals in the series-connected
 
battery bank string. The  50 x 10-6 ohms criteria wa s selected in order to ensure that the battery cell interconnection voltage drop does not exceed the vendor criteria limit of less than 33.66 mV (average) for each battery cell interconnection, during the maximu m design current load profile. The
 
battery manufacturer has rated the ba ttery bank set for full rated output, given adherence to limiting the average interconnection resistance to less
 
than 33.66 mV drop between cells. For battery cell interconnections, which
 
are monitored via multiple measurem ent points between two adjacent cells, these measurements must first be averaged for the connection between the affected adjacent cells, before averaging the values for all cells used in the full battery bank set.
4.8.1.1.2.c requires verifi cation that the fuel o il properties of new and stored fuel oil are tested in accordance with, and maintained within the limits of the Diesel Fuel Oil Testing Program.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.8 7 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.
2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER  DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
The tests listed below are a means of de termining whether new fuel oil is of the appropriate grade and has not been cont aminated with substances that would have an immediate, detrimental impact on diesel engine combustion.
If results from these tests are within a cceptable limits, the fuel oil may be added to the storage tanks without concern for contaminating the entire volume of fuel oil in the storage t anks. These tests are to be conducted prior to adding the new fuel to the stor age tank(s), but in no case is the time between receipt of new fuel and conducting the tests to exceed 31 days. The tests, limits, and applic able ASTM Standards are as follows:
: a. Sample the new fuel oil in accordance with ASTM D4057, b. Verify in accordance with the tests specified in ASTM D975 that the sample has an absolute specif ic gravity at 60/60&deg;F of  0.83 and  0.89, or an API gravity at 60&deg;F of  27&deg; and  39&deg; when tested in accordance with ASTM D1298, a kinematic viscosity at 40&deg;C of 1.9 centistokes and  4.1 centistokes, and a flash point  125&deg;F, and c. Verify that the new fuel oil has a clear and bright appearance with proper color when tested in a ccordance with ASTM D4176 or a water and sediment content within limits when tested in accordance with ASTM D2709.
Failure to meet any of the above limits is cause for rejecting the new fuel oil, but does not represent a failure to meet the LCO concern since the fuel oil is not added to the storage tanks. Within 31 days following the initial new fuel oil sample, the fuel oil is
 
analyzed to establish that the other pr operties specified in Table 1 of ASTM D975 are met for new fuel oil when te sted in accordance with ASTM D975, except that the analysis for sulfur may be performed in accordance with ASTM D5453, ASTM D2622, or ASTM D3120. The 31 day period is acceptable because the fuel oil properties of interest, even if they were not within stated limits, would not have an immediate effect on DG operation. This Surveillance ensures the availability of high quality fuel oil for the DGs. Fuel oil degradation during long term storage shows up as an increase in particulate, due mostly to oxidation. The presence of particulate does not mean the fuel oil will not burn properly in a diesel engine. The particulate can cause fouling of filters and fuel oil injection equipment, however, which
 
can cause engine failure.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.8 8 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.
2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER  DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
Particulate concentrations should be determined in accordance with ASTM D6217 or ASTM D2276. This method involves a gravimetric determination of total particulate concentra tion in the fuel oil and has a limit of 10 mg/l. It is acceptable to obtain a field sample for subsequent laboratory testing in lieu of field testing. The Frequency of this test takes into consideration fuel oil degradation trends that indicate that particula te concentration is unlikely to change significantly between Frequency intervals.
ASTM Standards:  D4057; D975 and D975 Table 1; D1298; D4176; D2709; D2622; D6217; D5453; D3120; D2276. ASTM Standard "year" designations are located in Chem istry Procedures COP-05.10 and COP-07.16.
 
This concludes the TS Bases discussion for SR 4.8.1.1.2.c. The Surveillance Requirements for demonstrating the OPERABILITY of the diesel generators are in accordan ce with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.9 "Selection of Diesel Generator Set Capacity for Standby Power Supplies," March 10, 1971, and 1.108 "Periodic Testing of
 
Diesel Generator Units Used as Onsite Electric Power Systems at Nuclear Power Plants," Revision 1, August 1977, and 1.137, "Fuel Oil Systems for Standby Diesel Generators," Revisi on 1, October 1979, Generic Letter
 
84-15, "Proposed Staff Actions to Impr ove and Maintain Diesel Generator
 
Reliability," dated July 2, 1984, and NRC staff positions reflected in Amendment No. 48 to Facility Operating License NPF-7 for North Anna Unit 2, dated April 25, 1985; as modified by Generic Letter 93-05, "Line-Item Technical Specifications Improvements to Reduce Surveillance Requirements for Testing During Powe r Operation," dated September 27, 1993, and Generic Letter 94-01, "Remov al of Accelerated Testing and Special Reporting Requirements for Emergency Diesel G enerators," dated May 31, 1994. The Surveillanc e Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.8 9 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.
2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER  DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
The Surveillance Requirem ent for demonstrating t he OPERABILITY of the Station batteries are based on the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.129, "Maintenance Testing and Repl acement of Large Lead Storage Batteries for Nuclear Power Plants," February 1978, and IEEE Std 450-1980, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Large Lead Storage Batteri es for Generating Stations and Substations."  The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.
Verifying average electrolyte temperat ure above the minimum for which the battery was sized, total battery termi nal voltage on float charge, connection resistance values and the performance of battery service and discharge tests ensures the effectiveness of the charging system, the ability to handle high discharge rates and compares the battery capacity at that time with the rated capacity. Table 4.8-2 specifies the normal limits for each designated pilot cell and each connected cell for electrolyte level, float voltage and specific gravity.
The limits for the designated pilot cells float voltage and s pecific gravity, greater than 2.13 volts and .015 below the manufacturer's full charge specific gravity or a battery charger current that had stabilized at a low
 
value, is characteristic of a charged cell with adequate capacity. The normal limits for each connected cell for float voltage and specific gravity, greater than 2.13 volts and not more than .020 below the manufacturer's full charge specific gravity with an av erage specific gravity of all the connected cells not more than .010 below the manufacturer's full charge specific gravity, ensures the OPERABI LITY and capabilit y of the battery.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.8 10 of 10 REVISION NO.:
8  3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.
2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER  DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)
Operation with a battery cell's paramet er outside the normal limit but within the allowable value specified in Table 4.8-2 is permitted for up to 7 days.
During this 7 day period:  (1) the a llowable values for electrolyte level ensures no physical damage to t he plates with an adequate electron transfer capability; (2) the allowable value for the average specific gravity of all the cells, not more than .020 below the manufacturer's recommended full charge specific gravity, ensures that the decrease in rating will be less than the safety margin provided in sizing; (3) the allowable value for an individual cell's specific gravity, ensure s that an individual cell's specific gravity will not be more than .040 bel ow the manufacturer's full charge specific gravity and that the overall capability of the battery will be
 
maintained within an acceptable limit; and (4) the allowable value for an individual cell's float voltage, greater than 2.07 volt s, ensures the battery's capability to perform its design function. 3/4.8.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPM ENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES The OPERABILITY of the motor oper ated valves thermal overload protection and/or bypass devices ensur es that these devices will not prevent safety related valves from performing their function. The Surveillance Requirements for demons trating the OPERABILITY of these devices are in accordance with Regul atory Guide 1.106 "Thermal Overload Protection for Electric Motors on Mo tor Operated Valves," Revision 1, March 1977.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 Section No.
3/4.9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 Attachment No.
11 Current Revision No.
6 SAFETY RELATED Title: REFUELING OPERATIONS Responsible Department:   Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 2105627 to delete TS 3/4.9.5, Communications, and TS 3/4.9.6, Manipulator Crane Operability. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 2105627 to delete TS 3/4.9.5, Communications, and TS 3/4.9.6, Manipulator Crane Operability. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verb iage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)
Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verbiage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)
 
Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 04-1950 to delete BASES 3/4.9.7 and 3/4.9.12.
Revision 4
(Glenn Adams, 06/22/04)
- Incorporated PCR 04-1950 to delet e BASES 3/4.9.7 and 3/4.9.12. (Glenn Adams, 06/22/04)
Revision 3 - Changes made to reflect TS Amendment #127. (M. DiMarco, 09/20/02)
Revision 3 - Changes made to reflect TS Amendm ent #127. (M. DiMarco, 09/20/02)  
Revision 2 - Changes made to reflect TS Amendment #122. (K.W. Frehafer, 11/30/01)
 
Revision 1 - Modified bases for Containment Building Penetrations in accordance with NRC SER Containment Doors Open During Core Alterations per approved License Amendment No. 120. (M. DiMarco, 11/08/01)
Revision 2 - Changes made to reflect TS Am endment #122. (K.W. Frehafer, 11/30/01)
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
 
Revision           Approved By                 Approval Date     UNIT #         UNIT 2 DATE 0                 R.G. West                     08/30/01         DOCT         PROCEDURE DOCN         Section 3/4.9 SYS 6                 R. Wright                     05/11/16         STATUS       COMPLETED REV                 6
Revision 1 - Modified bases for Containment Building Penetrations in accordance with NRC SER "Containment Doors Open During Core Alte rations" per approved License Amendment No. 120. (M. DiMarco, 11/08/01)
                                                                        # OF PGS
 
Revision 0
- Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01) Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2       DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE       DOCN Section 3/4.9 SYS   6 R. Wright 05/11/16 STATUS COMPLETED REV 6       # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 REFUELING OPERATIONS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.9 2 of 9 REVISION NO.:
6  TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.9 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.9 REFUELIN G OPERATIONS ........................................................... 3
 
BASES ............................................................................................ 3
 
3/4.9.1 BORON CONCENTRATION ........................................ 3
 
3/4.9.2 INST RUMENTATION ................................................... 3
 
3/4.9.3 DE CAY TIME ............................................................... 3
 
3/4.9.4 CONTAINM ENT PENETR ATIONS .............................. 4
 
3/4.9.5 COMM UNICATIONS .................................................... 4
 
3/4.9.6 MANIPU LATOR CRANE .............................................. 5
 
3/4.9.7 DELETED ..................................................................... 5
 
3/4.9.8 SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION ............................................................. 6
 
3/4.9.9 CONTAINMEN T ISOLATION SYSTEM ....................... 7


3/4.9.4.10 and 3/4.9.11 WA TER LEVEL - REACTOR VESSEL AND SPENT FUEL STORAGE POOL .... 9  
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9            BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04                                                  2 of 9 REVISION NO.:                      REFUELING OPERATIONS 6                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.9 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS ........................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.9.1      BORON CONCENTRATION ........................................ 3 3/4.9.2      INSTRUMENTATION ................................................... 3 3/4.9.3      DECAY TIME ............................................................... 3 3/4.9.4      CONTAINMENT PENETRATIONS .............................. 4 3/4.9.5      COMMUNICATIONS .................................................... 4 3/4.9.6      MANIPULATOR CRANE .............................................. 5 3/4.9.7      DELETED ..................................................................... 5 3/4.9.8      SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION ............................................................. 6 3/4.9.9      CONTAINMENT ISOLATION SYSTEM ....................... 7 3/4.9.4.10 and 3/4.9.11 WATER LEVEL - REACTOR VESSEL AND SPENT FUEL STORAGE POOL .... 9 3/4.9.12    DELETED ..................................................................... 9


3/4.9.12 DELETED ..................................................................... 9
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9                 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04                          3 of 9 REVISION NO.:                        REFUELING OPERATIONS 6                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.9 3/4.9        REFUELING OPERATIONS BASES 3/4.9.1      BORON CONCENTRATION The limitations on reactivity conditions during REFUELING ensure that:
(1) the reactor will remain subcritical during CORE ALTERATIONS, and (2) a uniform boron concentration is maintained for reactivity control in the water volumes having direct access to the reactor vessel. These limitations are consistent with the initial conditions assumed for the boron dilution incident in the safety analyses. The value specified in the COLR for Keff includes a 1% delta k/k conservative allowance for uncertainties.
Similarly, the boron concentration value specified in the COLR includes a conservative uncertainty allowance of 50 ppm boron.
If the boron concentration of any coolant volume in the RCS, the refueling canal, or the refueling cavity is less than its limit, all operations involving CORE ALTERATIONS or positive reactivity additions must be suspended immediately. Operations that individually add limited positive reactivity (e.g., temperature fluctuations from inventory addition or temperature control fluctuations), but when combined with all other operations affecting core reactivity (e.g., intentional boration) result in overall net negative reactivity addition, are not precluded by this action. Suspension of CORE ALTERATIONS or positive reactivity additions shall not preclude moving a component to a safe position.
3/4.9.2      INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the startup neutron flux monitors ensures that redundant monitoring capability is available to detect changes in the reactivity condition of the core.
3/4.9.3      DECAY TIME The minimum requirement for reactor subcriticality prior to movement of irradiated fuel assemblies in the reactor pressure vessel ensures that sufficient time has elapsed to allow the radioactive decay of the short lived fission products. This decay time is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                        PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 REFUELING OPERATIONS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.9 3 of 9 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9                BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04                           4 of 9 REVISION NO.:                         REFUELING OPERATIONS 6                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9         REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
6   BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.9 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS BASES 3/4.9.1 BORON CONCENTRATION The limitations on reactivity conditions during REFUELING ensure that:
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.4      CONTAINMENT BUILDING PENETRATIONS The requirements on containment penetration closure and OPERABILITY ensure that a release of radioactive material within containment will be restricted from leakage to the environment. The OPERABILITY and closure restrictions are sufficient to restrict radioactive material release from a recently irradiated fuel element rupture based upon the lack of containment pressurization potential while in the REFUELING MODE.
(1) the reactor will remain subcritical during CORE ALTERATIONS, and (2) a uniform boron concentration is main tained for reactivity control in the water volumes having direct access to the reactor vessel. These limitations are consistent with the initial conditi ons assumed for the boron dilution incident in the safety analyses. The value specified in the COLR for K eff includes a 1% delta k/k conservative allowance for uncertainties.
The fuel handling accident analysis assumes a minimum post reactor shutdown decay time of 72 hours. Therefore, recently irradiated fuel is defined as fuel that has occupied part of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours. This represents the applicability bases for fuel handling accidents. Containment closure will have administrative controls in place to assure that a single normal or contingency method to promptly close the primary or secondary containment penetrations will be available.
Similarly, the boron concentration  val ue specified in the COLR includes a conservative uncertainty allowance of 50 ppm boron.
These prompt methods need not completely block the penetrations nor be capable of resisting pressure, but are to enable the ventilation systems to draw the release from the postulated fuel handling accident in the proper direction such that it can be treated and monitored.
If the boron concentration of any coolant volume in the RCS, the refueling canal, or the refueling cavity is less than its limit, all operations involving CORE ALTERATIONS or positive reacti vity additions must be suspended immediately. Operations that individually add limited positive reactivity (e.g., temperature fluctuations from inventory addition or temperature control fluctuations), but when combined with all other operations affecting core reactivity (e.g., intentional bo ration) result in overall net negative reactivity addition, are not precluded by this action. Suspension of CORE ALTERATIONS or positive reactivity additions shall not preclude moving a component to a safe position. 3/4.9.2 INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the startup neutron flux m onitors ensures that redundant monitoring capability is available to detect changes in the reactivity condition of the core.
FPL made the following regulatory commitment, which is consistent with NUMARC 93-01, Industry Guideline for Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants, Revision 3, Section 11.3.6, Assessment Methods for Shutdown Conditions, subheading 11.3.6.5, Containment - Primary (PWR)/Secondary (BWR).
3/4.9.3 DECAY TIME The minimum requirement for reactor s ubcriticality prior to movement of irradiated fuel assemblies in the r eactor pressure vessel ensures that sufficient time has elapsed to allow the radioactive decay of the short lived fission products. This decay time is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.  
The following guidelines are included in the assessment of systems removed from service during movement of irradiated fuel:
During fuel handling/core alterations, ventilation system and radiation monitor availability (as defined in NUMARC 91-06) should be assessed, with respect to filtration and monitoring of releases from the fuel. Following shutdown, radioactivity in the fuel decays away fairly rapidly. The basis of the Technical Specification operability amendment is the reduction in doses due to such decay. The goal of maintaining ventilation system and radiation monitor availability is to reduce doses even further below that provided by the natural decay and to avoid unmonitored releases.


SECTION NO.:
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 REFUELING OPERATIONS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.9 4 of 9 REVISION NO.:
TITLE:     TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9                BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04                         5 of 9 REVISION NO.:                         REFUELING OPERATIONS 6                               ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9         REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
6  3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.4       CONTAINMENT PENETRATIONS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.4 CONTAINMENT BUILDING PENETRATIONS The requirements on containment penet ration closure and OPERABILITY ensure that a release of radioactive material within containment will be restricted from leakage to the en vironment. The OPERABILITY and closure restrictions are sufficient to restrict radioactive material release from a recently irradiated fuel el ement rupture based upon the lack of containment pressurization potential while in the REFUELING MODE. The fuel handling accident analysis assumes a minimum post reactor shutdown decay time of 72 hours. Theref ore, recently irradiated fuel is defined as fuel that has occupied part of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours. This represent s the applicability bases for fuel handling accidents. Containment closur e will have administrative controls in place to assure that a single no rmal or contingency method to promptly close the primary or secondary containment penetrations will be available.
A single normal or contingency method to promptly close primary or secondary containment penetrations should be developed. Such prompt methods need not completely block the penetration or be capable of resisting pressure. The purpose of the prompt methods mentioned above are to enable ventilation systems to draw the release from a postulated fuel handling accident in the proper direction such that it can be treated and monitored.
These prompt methods need not complete ly block the penetrations nor be capable of resisting pressure, but are to enable the ventilation systems to draw the release from t he postulated fuel handling accident in the proper direction such that it c an be treated and monitored.
Availability as defined by NUMARC 91-06, Guidelines for Industry Actions to Assess Shutdown Management, December 1991, relies on the definitions of functional, and operable. The NUMARC 91-06 definitions for these three terms follow.
FPL made the following regulatory co mmitment, which is consistent with NUMARC 93-01, Industry Guideline for Moni toring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants , Revision 3, Section 11.3.6 , Assessment Methods for Shutdown Conditions, subheading 11.3.6.5, Containment - Primary (PWR)/Secondary (BWR). The following guidelines are inclu ded in the assessment of systems removed from service during mo vement of irradiated fuel:  During fuel handling/core alterati ons, ventilation system and radiation monitor availability (as defined in NUMARC 91-06) should be assessed, with respect to filtration and monitoring of releases from the fuel. Following shutdown, radioactivity in the fuel decays away fairly rapidly. The basis of t he Technical Specif ication operability amendment is the reduction in doses due to such decay. The goal of maintaining ventilation system and radiat ion monitor availability is to reduce doses even further below that provided by the natural decay
Available (Availability): The status of a system, structure, or component that is in service or can be placed in service in a functional or operable state by immediate manual or automatic actuation.
 
Functional (Functionality): The ability of a system, structure, or component to perform its intended service with considerations that applicable technical specification requirements or licensing/design basis assumptions may not be maintained.
and to avoid unmonitored releases.
Operable: The ability of a system to perform its specified function with all applicable TS requirements satisfied.
 
3/4.9.5       DELETED 3/4.9.6       DELETED 3/4.9.7       DELETED
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 REFUELING OPERATIONS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.9 5 of 9 REVISION NO.:
3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.4 CONTAINMENT PENETRATIONS (continued) A single normal or contingency method to promptly close primary or secondary containment penetrations should be developed. Such prompt methods need not complete ly block the penetration or be capable of resisting pressure. Th e purpose of the "prompt methods" mentioned above are to enable ventilation systems to draw the release from a postulated fuel handling accident in the proper  
 
direction such that it c an be treated and monitored. Availability as defined by NUMARC 91-06 , Guidelines for Industry Actions to Assess Shutdown Management , December 1991, relies on the definitions of functional , and operable. The NUMARC 91-06 definitions for these three terms follow. Available (Availability): The stat us of a system, structure, or component that is in service or can be placed in service in a  
 
functional or operable state by immediate manual or automatic actuation. Functional (Functionality): The ab ility of a system, structure, or component to perform its intended service with considerations that applicable technical specification requirements or licensing/design basis assumptions may not be maintained. Operable: The ability of a system to perform its specified function with all applicable TS requirements satisfied.
3/4.9.5 DELETED 3/4.9.6 DELETED 3/4.9.7 DELETED SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 REFUELING OPERATIONS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.9 6 of 9 REVISION NO.:
6  3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.8 SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION The requirement that at least one shutdown cooling loop be in operation ensures that (1) sufficient cooling capacity is available to remove decay heat and maintain the water in the reactor pressure vessel below 140 F as required during the REFUELING MODE, and (2) sufficient coolant circulation is maintained through the reac tor core to minimi ze the effects of a boron dilution incident and pr event boron stratification.
If SDC loop requirements ar e not met, there will be no forced circulation to provide mixing to establish unifo rm boron concentrations. Suspending positive reactivity additions that could re sult in failure to meet the minimum boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation. 


SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9                BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04                          6 of 9 REVISION NO.:                        REFUELING OPERATIONS 6                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9        REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.8      SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION The requirement that at least one shutdown cooling loop be in operation ensures that (1) sufficient cooling capacity is available to remove decay heat and maintain the water in the reactor pressure vessel below 140F as required during the REFUELING MODE, and (2) sufficient coolant circulation is maintained through the reactor core to minimize the effects of a boron dilution incident and prevent boron stratification.
If SDC loop requirements are not met, there will be no forced circulation to provide mixing to establish uniform boron concentrations. Suspending positive reactivity additions that could result in failure to meet the minimum boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation.
Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than what would be required in the RCS for minimum refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operations. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.
Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than what would be required in the RCS for minimum refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operations. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.
The requirement to have two shut down cooling loops OPERABLE when there is less than 23 feet of water above the reactor pressure vessel flange with irradiated fuel in the core ensures that a single failure of the operating shutdown cooling loop will not result in a complete loss of decay heat removal capability. With the reacto r vessel head removed and 23 feet of water above the reactor pressure vesse l flange with irradiated fuel in the  
The requirement to have two shutdown cooling loops OPERABLE when there is less than 23 feet of water above the reactor pressure vessel flange with irradiated fuel in the core ensures that a single failure of the operating shutdown cooling loop will not result in a complete loss of decay heat removal capability. With the reactor vessel head removed and 23 feet of water above the reactor pressure vessel flange with irradiated fuel in the core, a large heat sink is available for core cooling, thus in the event of a failure of the operating shutdown cooling loop, adequate time is provided to initiate emergency procedures to cool the core.
The footnote providing for a minimum reactor coolant flow rate of
              > 1850 gpm considers one of the two RCS injection points for a SDCS train to be isolated. The specified parameters include 50 gpm for flow measurement uncertainty, and 3F uncertainty for RCS and CCW temperature measurements. The conditions of minimum shutdown time, maximum RCS temperature, and maximum temperature of CCW to the shutdown cooling heat exchanger are initial conditions specified to assure that a reduction in flow rate from 3000 gpm to 1800 gpm will not result in a temperature transient exceeding 140F during conditions when the RCS water level is at an elevation > 29.5 feet.


core, a large heat sink is available for core cooling, thus in the event of a failure of the operating shutdown cooling loop, adequate time is provided to
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9                  BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04                      7 of 9 REVISION NO.:                          REFUELING OPERATIONS 6                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9        REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.8      SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)
Shutdown Cooling System piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the Shutdown Cooling loops and may also prevent water hammer, pump cavitation, and pumping of noncondensible gas into the reactor vessel.
Selection of Shutdown Cooling System locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The design review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become sources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration. Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.
The Shutdown Cooling System is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumulated gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible location (or the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the Shutdown Cooling System is not rendered inoperable by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met.
Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.


initiate emergency procedures to cool the core.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
The footnote providing for a minimum reactor coolant flow rate of > 1850 gpm considers one of the two RCS injection points for a SDCS train to be isolated. The specified parameters include 50 gpm for flow measurement uncertainty, and 3 F uncertainty for RCS and CCW temperature measurements.
TITLE:       TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9                BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04                         8 of 9 REVISION NO.:                         REFUELING OPERATIONS 6                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9         REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
The conditions of mi nimum shutdown time, maximum RCS temperature, and maxi mum temperature of CCW to the shutdown cooling heat exchanger are init ial conditions specified to assure that a reduction in flow rate from 3000 gpm to 1800 gpm will not result in a temperature trans ient exceeding 140 F during conditions when the RCS water level is at an elevation > 29.5 feet.
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.8       SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)
SECTION NO.:
Shutdown Cooling System locations susceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found, the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location. Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of susceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or environmental conditions, plant configuration, or personnel safety concerns.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 REFUELING OPERATIONS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.9 7 of 9 REVISION NO.:
For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible locations where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The accuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.
6  3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
The Surveillance Frequency Control program frequency for ensuring locations are sufficiently filled with water takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the Shutdown Cooling System piping and the procedural controls governing system operation.
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.8 SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued) Shutdown Cooling System piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the Shutdown Cooling loops and may also prevent water hammer, pump cavitation, and pumping of noncondensible gas into the reactor vessel. Selection of Shutdown Cooling Syst em locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The desi gn review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high po ints and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become s ources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration. Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions. The Shutdown Cooling System is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumula ted gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible lo cation (or the volu me of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the Shutdown Cooling System is not rendered inoper able by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met. Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.
SECTION NO.:
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 REFUELING OPERATIONS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.9 8 of 9 REVISION NO.:
3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.8 SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued) Shutdown Cooling System locations su sceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found, the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location. Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of su sceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or  


environmental conditions, plant configurat ion, or personnel safety concerns.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible loca tions where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The a ccuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be  
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9                  BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04                        9 of 9 REVISION NO.:                        REFUELING OPERATIONS 6                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9        REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.9      CONTAINMENT ISOLATION SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of this system ensures that the containment isolation valves will be automatically isolated upon detection of high radiation levels within the containment. The OPERABILITY of this system is required to restrict the release of radioactive material resulting from a fuel handling accident of a recently irradiated fuel assembly from the containment atmosphere to the environment. Recently irradiated fuel is defined as fuel that has occupied parts of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours.
3/4.9.4.10 and 3/4.9.11 WATER LEVEL - REACTOR VESSEL AND SPENT FUEL STORAGE POOL The restrictions on minimum water level ensure that sufficient water depth is available to remove 99% of the assumed 10% iodine gap activity released from the rupture of an irradiated fuel assembly. The minimum water depth is consistent with the assumptions of the safety analysis.
The limit on soluble boron concentration in LCO 3/4.9.11 is consistent with the minimum boron concentration specified for the RWT, and assures an additional subcritical margin to the value of keff which is calculated in the spent fuel storage pool criticality safety analysis to satisfy the acceptance criteria of Specification 5.6.1. Inadvertent dilution of the spent fuel storage pool by the quantity of unborated water necessary to reduce the pool boron concentration to a value that would invalidate the criticality safety analysis is not considered to be a credible event. The surveillance frequency specified for verifying the boron concentration is consistent with NUREG-1432 and satisfies, in part, acceptance criteria established by the NRC staff for approval of criticality safety analysis methods that take credit for soluble boron in the pool water. The ACTIONS required for this LCO are designed to preclude an accident from happening or to mitigate the consequences of an accident in progress, and shall not preclude moving a fuel assembly to a safe position.
3/4.9.12      DELETED


sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval. The Surveillance Frequency Control program frequ ency for ensuring locations are sufficiently filled with water takes in to consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the Shutdown Cooli ng System piping and the procedural controls governing system operation.
Section No.
SECTION NO.:
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                 3/4.10 Attachment No.
TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 REFUELING OPERATIONS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 PAGE: 3/4.9 9 of 9 REVISION NO.:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 12 BASES ATTACHMENT 12 Current Revision No.
6  3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)
OF ADM-25.04                                0 Effective Date SAFETY RELATED                          09/06/01 Title:
BASES (continued) 3/4.9.9 CONTAINMENT ISOLATION SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of this system ensures that the containment isolation valves will be automatically isolated upon detection of high radiation levels within the containment. The OPERABILITY of this system is required to restrict the release of radioactive ma terial resulting from a fuel handling accident of a recently irradiated f uel assembly from the containment atmosphere to the environment. Recently irradiated fuel is defined as fuel that has occupied parts of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours. 3/4.9.4.10 and 3/4.9.11 WATER LEVEL - REACTOR VESSEL AND SPENT FUEL STORAGE POOL The restrictions on minimum water level ensure that sufficient water depth is available to remove 99% of the assumed 10% iodine gap activity released from the rupture of an irr adiated fuel assembly. The minimum water depth is consistent with the a ssumptions of the safety analysis.
SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS Responsible Department:                  Licensing REVISION
The limit on soluble boron concentration in LCO 3/4.9.11 is consistent with the minimum boron concentration specified for the RWT, and assures an additional subcritical margin to the value of k eff which is calculated in the spent fuel storage pool criticality safe ty analysis to satisfy the acceptance criteria of Specification 5.6.1. Inadve rtent dilution of the spent fuel storage pool by the quantity of unborated water necessary to reduce the pool boron concentration to a value that would invalidate the criticality safety analysis is not considered to be a credible event. The surveillance frequency


specified for verifying the boron concentration is consistent with
==SUMMARY==
:
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
Revision  FRG Review Date        Approved By        Approval Date        S 2 OPS 0        08/30/01              R.G. West          08/30/01      DATE Plant General Manager                  DOCT PROCEDURE Revision  FRG Review Date        Approved By        Approval Date  DOCN Section 3/4.10 SYS Plant General Manager                  COM      COMPLETED ITM          0


NUREG-1432 and satisfies, in part, accept ance criteria established by the
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.10              BASES ATTACHMENT 12 OF ADM-25.04                                                  2 of 4 REVISION NO.:                    SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS 0                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.10 ................................................................................. 3 3/4.10 SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS ....................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.10.1    SHUTDOWN MARGIN ................................................. 3 3/4.10.2    MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT, GROUP HEIGHT, INSERTION AND POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS................................................ 3 3/4.10.3    REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS .................................... 3 3/4.10.4    CENTER CEA MISALIGNMENT .................................. 3 3/4.10.5    CEA INSERTION DURING ITC, MTC, AND POWER COEFFICIENT MEASUREMENTS .............................. 4


NRC staff for approval of criticality safe ty analysis methods that take credit for soluble boron in the pool water. The ACTIONS required for this LCO are designed to preclude an accident from happening or to mitigate the consequences of an accident in progre ss, and shall not preclude moving a fuel assembly to a safe position.
SECTION NO.:                                                                      PAGE:
3/4.9.12 DELETED
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.10                BASES ATTACHMENT 12 OF ADM-25.04                        3 of 4 REVISION NO.:                      SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS 0                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.10 3/4.10        SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS BASES 3/4.10.1      SHUTDOWN MARGIN This special test exception provides that a minimum amount of CEA worth is immediately available for reactivity control when CEA worth measurement tests are performed. This special test exception is required to permit the periodic verification of the actual versus predicted core reactivity condition occurring as a result of fuel burnup or fuel cycling operations.
Although CEA worth testing is conducted in MODE 2, during the performance of these tests sufficient negative reactivity is inserted to result in temporary entry into MODE 3. Because the intent is to immediately return to MODE 2 to continue CEA worth measurements, the special test exception allows limited operation in MODE 3 without having to borate to meet the SHUTDOWN MARGIN requirements of Technical Specification 3.1.1.1.
3/4.10.2      MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT, GROUP HEIGHT, INSERTION AND POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS This special test exception permits individual CEAs to be positioned outside of their normal group heights and insertion limits during the performance of such PHYSICS TESTS as those required to (1) measure CEA worth and (2) determine the reactor stability index and damping factor under xenon oscillation conditions.
3/4.10.3      REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS This special test exception permits reactor criticality under reduced flow conditions and is required to perform certain startup and PHYSICS TESTS while at low THERMAL POWER levels.
3/4.10.4      CENTER CEA MISALIGNMENT This special test exception permits the center CEA to be misaligned during PHYSICS TESTS required to determine the isothermal temperature coefficient and power coefficient.


Section No.ST. LUCIE UNIT 23/4.10Attachment No.
SECTION NO.:                                                                PAGE:
12Current Revision No.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSBASES ATTACHMENT 12OF ADM-25.04 0Effective DateSAFETY RELATED09/06/01Title: SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONSResponsible Department:  LicensingREVISION
TITLE:    TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.10                BASES ATTACHMENT 12 OF ADM-25.04                     4 of 4 REVISION NO.:                      SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS 0                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.10        SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS (continued)
BASES (continued) 3/4.10.5      CEA INSERTION DURING ITC, MTC, AND POWER COEFFICIENT MEASUREMENTS This special test exception permits the CEA groups to be misaligned during such PHYSICS TESTS as those required to determine the (1) isothermal temperature coefficient, (2) moderator temperature coefficient, and (3) power coefficient.


==SUMMARY==
:Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications.  (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)RevisionFRG Review DateApproved ByApproval DateS  2  OPS008/30/01R.G. West08/30/01DATEPlant General ManagerDOCTPROCEDURERevisionFRG Review DateApproved ByApproval DateDOCNSection 3/4.10SYSPlant General ManagerCOMCOMPLETEDITM 0 SECTION NO.:PAGE:3/4.10REVISION NO.:2 of 4 0TITLE:TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSBASES ATTACHMENT 12 OF ADM-25.04SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONSST. LUCIE UNIT 2TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTIONPAGEBASES FOR SECTION 3/4.10.................................................................................33/4.10SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS.......................................................3BASES............................................................................................3 3/4.10.1SHUTDOWN MARGIN.................................................3 3/4.10.2MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT,GROUP HEIGHT, INSERTION AND POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS................................................33/4.10.3REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS....................................3 3/4.10.4CENTER CEA MISALIGNMENT..................................3 3/4.10.5CEA INSERTION DURING ITC, MTC, AND POWERCOEFFICIENT MEASUREMENTS..............................4 SECTION NO.:PAGE:3/4.10REVISION NO.:3 of 4 0TITLE:TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSBASES ATTACHMENT 12 OF ADM-25.04SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONSST. LUCIE UNIT 2BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.103/4.10SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONSBASES3/4.10.1SHUTDOWN MARGINThis special test exception provides that a minimum amount of CEA worthis immediately available for reactivity control when CEA worth measurement tests are performed. This special test exception is required to permit the periodic verification of the actual versus predicted core reactivity condition occurring as a result of fuel burnup or fuel cycling operations.Although CEA worth testing is conducted in MODE 2, during theperformance of these tests sufficient negative reactivity is inserted to result in temporary entry into MODE 3. Because the intent is to immediately return to MODE 2 to continue CEA worth measurements, the special test exception allows limited operation in MODE 3 without having to borate to meet the SHUTDOWN MARGIN requirements of Technical Specification 3.1.1.1.3/4.10.2MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT, GROUP HEIGHT,INSERTION AND POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITSThis special test exception permits individual CEAs to be positionedoutside of their normal group heights and insertion limits during the performance of such PHYSICS TESTS as those required to (1) measure CEA worth and (2) determine the reactor stability index and damping factor under xenon oscillation conditions.3/4.10.3REACTOR COOLANT LOOPSThis special test exception permits reactor criticality under reduced flowconditions and is required to perform certain startup and PHYSICS TESTS while at low THERMAL POWER levels.3/4.10.4CENTER CEA MISALIGNMENTThis special test exception permits the center CEA to be misalignedduring PHYSICS TESTS required to determine the isothermal temperature coefficient and power coefficient.
SECTION NO.:PAGE:3/4.10REVISION NO.:4 of 4 0TITLE:TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSBASES ATTACHMENT 12 OF ADM-25.04SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONSST. LUCIE UNIT 23/4.10SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS (continued)BASES (continued)3/4.10.5CEA INSERTION DURING ITC, MTC, AND POWER COEFFICIENTMEASUREMENTSThis special test exception permits the CEA groups to be misalignedduring such PHYSICS TESTS as those required to determine the (1) isothermal temperature coefficient, (2) moderator temperature coefficient, and (3) power coefficient.
Section No.
Section No.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.11 Attachment No.
ST. LUCIE UNIT 2                                   3/4.11 Attachment No.
13 Current Revision No.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 13                                13 Current Revision No.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 13 OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 1 Title: RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS Responsible Department:
OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED                               1 Title:
Licensing REVISION  
RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION  


==SUMMARY==
==SUMMARY==
:
:
Revision 1 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU cond itions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 1 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)
Revision 0
Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)
- Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01) Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2       DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE       DOCN Section 3/4.11 SYS   1 R. Coffey 11/02/12 STATUS COMPLETED REV 1       # OF PGS SECTION NO.:
Revision           Approved By               Approval Date   UNIT #         UNIT 2 DATE 0               R.G. West                 08/30/01       DOCT         PROCEDURE DOCN         Section 3/4.11 SYS 1                 R. Coffey                 11/02/12       STATUS       COMPLETED REV                 1
PAGE: 3/4.11 REVISION NO.:
                                                                  # OF PGS
2 of 3 1 TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 13 OF ADM-25.04 RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE  BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.11.................................................................................3 3/4.11 RADIOACTI VE EFFLUENTS..........................................................3
 
BASES............................................................................................3
 
3/4.11.2.5 EXPLOS IVE GAS MIXTURE.....................................3
 
3/4.11.2.6 GAS STORAGE TANKS............................................3
 
SECTION NO.:
PAGE: 3/4.11 REVISION NO.:
3 of 3 1 TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 13 OF ADM-25.04 RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.11 3/4.11 RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS BASES Pages B 3/4 11-2 through B 3/4 11-3 (Amendment No. 61) have been deleted from the Technical Specificat ions. The next page is B 3/4 11-4. 3/4.11.2.5 EXPLOSIVE GAS MIXTURE This specification is provided to ensure that the concentration of potentially explosive gas mixtures contained in the waste gas holdup
 
system is maintained below the fl ammability limits of hydrogen and oxygen. Maintaining the concentration of hydrogen and oxygen below


their flammability limits provides assur ance that the releases of radioactive materials will be controlled in confo rmance with the requirements of General Design Criterion 60 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50. 3/4.11.2.6 GAS STORAGE TANKS Restricting the gaseous radioactive wa ste inventory in a gas storage tank provides assurance that in the event of an uncontrolled release of the tank's contents, the resulting total effective dose equivalent to an individual at the nearest exclusion area boundary will not exceed 0.1 rem. This is consistent with Branch Technical Position 11-5, "Pos tulated Radioactive Release Due to Waste Gas System Leak or Failure," of Standard Review Plan Chapter 11, "Radioactive Waste Management," of NUREG-0800. The waste gas decay
SECTION NO.:                                                                                          PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.11              BASES ATTACHMENT 13 OF ADM-25.04                                                  2 of 3 REVISION NO.:                      RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS 1                                ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION                                                                                              PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.11 ................................................................................. 3 3/4.11 RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS .......................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.11.2.5    EXPLOSIVE GAS MIXTURE ..................................... 3 3/4.11.2.6     GAS STORAGE TANKS............................................ 3


tank inventory of noble gases required to generate an exclusion area boundary dose of 0.1 rem is the basis fo r the limit of 165,000 dose equivalent curies Xe-133 and is derived based on the definition given in Technical Specification Task Force (TSTF*490), "Deletion of E bar Definition and Revision to RCS Specific Activity Tech Spec." /R1}}
SECTION NO.:                                                                    PAGE:
TITLE:      TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.11                  BASES ATTACHMENT 13 OF ADM-25.04                      3 of 3 REVISION NO.:                        RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS 1                              ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.11 3/4.11          RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS BASES Pages B 3/4 11-2 through B 3/4 11-3 (Amendment No. 61) have been deleted from the Technical Specifications. The next page is B 3/4 11-4.
3/4.11.2.5 EXPLOSIVE GAS MIXTURE This specification is provided to ensure that the concentration of potentially explosive gas mixtures contained in the waste gas holdup system is maintained below the flammability limits of hydrogen and oxygen. Maintaining the concentration of hydrogen and oxygen below their flammability limits provides assurance that the releases of radioactive materials will be controlled in conformance with the requirements of General Design Criterion 60 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50.
3/4.11.2.6 GAS STORAGE TANKS Restricting the gaseous radioactive waste inventory in a gas storage tank provides assurance that in the event of an uncontrolled release of the tanks contents, the resulting total effective dose equivalent to an individual at the nearest exclusion area boundary will not exceed 0.1 rem. This is consistent with Branch Technical Position 11-5, "Postulated Radioactive Release Due to Waste Gas System Leak or Failure," of Standard Review Plan Chapter 11,            /R1 Radioactive Waste Management," of NUREG-0800. The waste gas decay tank inventory of noble gases required to generate an exclusion area boundary dose of 0.1 rem is the basis for the limit of 165,000 dose equivalent curies Xe-133 and is derived based on the definition given in Technical Specification Task Force (TSTF*490), "Deletion of E bar Definition and Revision to RCS Specific Activity Tech Spec."}}

Revision as of 23:23, 19 October 2019

Technical Specification Bases Control Program Periodic Report of Bases Changes TS 6.8.4.j.4
ML19087A185
Person / Time
Site: Saint Lucie NextEra Energy icon.png
Issue date: 03/28/2019
From: Snyder M
Florida Power & Light Co
To:
Document Control Desk, Office of Nuclear Reactor Regulation
References
L-2019-076
Download: ML19087A185 (161)


Text

  • ~, .

./

U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Attn: Document Control Desk Washington, DC 20555 RE: St. Lucie Unit 2 Docket No. 50-389 Technical Specification Bases Control Program Periodic Report of Bases Changes TS 6.8.4.j.4 Pursuant to Technical Specification (TS) 6 .8.4.j.4, Florida Power & Light Company (FPL) is submitting the periodic report of changes made to the St. Lucie Unit 2 TS a

Bases without prior NRC approval. This periodic report is submitted on frequency consistent with 10 CFR 50.71(e) for amendments to the Updated Final Safety Analysis Report (UFSAR). This report covers the period of UFSAR Amendment No. 25 (March 23, 2017 through October 3, 2018).

FPL is submitting the current revision of ADM-25.04, St. Lucie Unit 2 Technical Specification Bases Attachments 1 through 13. Each attachment summarizes the revisions on the attachment cover page.

Please contact us if there are any questions regarding this submittal.

Sincerely, it(~-~p Michael J. Snyder Licensing Manager St. Lucie Plant MJS/rcs Attachments Florida Powe*r & Light Company 6501 S. Ocean Drive, Jensen Beach, FL 34957

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.0 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1

BASES ATTACHMENT 1 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 7 Title:

SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 2204276 to support use of AREVA fuel.

(Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1928076 to add of load on Page 7 under Pressurizer Pressure-High to match the description on the same attachment for Unit 1.

(Author: N. Elmore)

Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)

Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 05-0059 for PCM 04078 and Tech Spec Amendment No. 138 NRC Letter dated 01/31/05 regarding WCAP-9272 Reload Methodology and Implementing 30% SG Tube Plugging Limit. (George Madden, 01/27/05)

Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 03-1731 to change pressure to steam generator and reflect technical specification setpoint value. (Edgard Hernandez, 07/18/03)

Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 03-1249 to revise Section 2.1.1, Figure B2.1-1 and Section 2.2.1 in accordance with Tech Spec Amendment 131; LAR 2002-06; NRC letter dated 4/18/03 regarding reduction in minimum RCS flow. (M. DiMarco, 05/02/03)

Revision 1 - Modified to reflect use of the ABB-NV critical heat flux correlation in satisfying the departure from nucleate boiling reactor core safety limit approved by License Amendment No. 118. (M. DiMarco, 11/08/01)

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN SECTION 2.0 SYS 7 R. Coffey 12/15/14 STATUS COMPLETED REV 7

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 10 REVISION NO.: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 2.0 ...................................................................................... 3 2.1 SAFETY LIMITS ................................................................................ 3 BASES ............................................................................................... 3 2.1.1 REACTOR CORE ................................................................ 3 2.1.2 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE ..................... 4 FIGURE B 2.1-1 AXIAL POWER DISTRIBUTIONS FOR THERMAL MARGIN SAFETY LIMITS ............................................... 5 2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS .......................................... 6 BASES ............................................................................................... 6 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS ............................................. 6 Manual Reactor Trip ............................................................. 6 Variable Power Level-High ................................................... 6 Pressurizer Pressure-High ................................................... 7 Thermal Margin/Low Pressure ............................................. 7 Containment Pressure-High ................................................. 8 Steam Generator Pressure-Low ........................................... 8 Steam Generator Level-Low................................................. 8 Local Power Density-High .................................................... 9 RCP Loss of Component Cooling Water .............................. 9 Rate of Change of Power-High............................................. 9 Reactor Coolant Flow-Low ................................................. 10 Loss of Load (Turbine) ....................................................... 10 Asymmetric Steam Generator Transient Protective Trip Function (ASGTPTF) .......................................................... 10

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 10 REVISION NO.: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 2.0 2.1 SAFETY LIMITS BASES 2.1.1 REACTOR CORE The restrictions of this safety limit prevent overheating of the fuel cladding and possible cladding perforation which would result in the release of fission products to the reactor coolant. Overheating of the fuel is prevented by maintaining the steady-state peak linear heat rate below the level at which centerline fuel melting will occur. Overheating of the fuel cladding is prevented by restricting fuel operation to within the nucleate boiling regime where the heat transfer coefficient is large and the cladding surface temperature is slightly above the coolant saturation temperature.

Operation above the upper boundary of the nucleate boiling regime could result in excessive cladding temperatures because of the onset of departure from nucleate boiling (DNB) and the resultant sharp reduction in heat transfer coefficient. DNB is not a directly measurable parameter during operation and therefore THERMAL POWER and Reactor Coolant Temperature and Pressure have been related to DNB through the HTP correlation. The HTP DNB correlation has been developed to predict the DNB heat flux and the location of DNB for axially uniform and non-uniform heat flux distributions. The local DNB heat flux ratio, DNBR, defined as the ratio of the heat flux that would cause DNB at a particular core location to the local heat flux, is indicative of the margin to DNB.

The minimum value of the DNBR during steady state operation, normal operational transients, and anticipated transients is limited to the appropriate correlation limit for Specified Acceptable Fuel Design Limit for DNB (DNB-SAFDL). This value is derived through a statistical combination of the system parameter probability distribution functions with the HTP DNB correlation uncertainties. This value corresponds to a 95% probability at a 95%

confidence level that DNB will not occur and is chosen as an appropriate margin to DNB for all operating conditions.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 10 REVISION NO.: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.1 SAFETY LIMITS (continued)

BASES (continued) 2.1.1 REACTOR CORE (continued)

The curves of Figure 2.1-1 show conservative loci of points of THERMAL POWER, Reactor Coolant System pressure and vessel inlet temperature with four Reactor Coolant Pumps operating for which the DNB-SAFDL is not violated based on the HTP CHF correlation for the reference 1.55 Chopped Cosine Axial Shape and Design Limit FrT limit shown in Figure B 2.1-1. The dashed line is not a safety limit; however, operation above this line is not possible because of the actuation of the main steam line safety valves which limit the maximum value of reactor inlet temperature. Reactor operation at THERMAL POWER levels higher than 107% of RATED THERMAL POWER is prohibited by the high power level trip setpoint specified in Table 2.2-1. The area of safe transient condition is below and to the left of these lines.

The conditions for the Thermal Margin Safety Limit curves in Figure 2.1-1 to be valid are shown on the figure.

The Thermal Margin/Low Pressure and Local Power Density Trip Systems, in conjunction with Limiting Conditions for Operation, the Variable Overpower Trip and the Power Dependent Insertion Limits, assure that the DNB-SAFDL and Fuel Centerline Melt are not exceeded during normal operation and design basis Anticipated Operational Occurrences. Specific verification of the DNB-SAFDL limit using an appropriate DNB correlation ensures that the reactor core safety limit is satisfied.

2.1.2 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM PRESSURE The restriction of this Safety Limit protects the integrity of the Reactor Coolant System from overpressurization and thereby prevents the release of radionuclides contained in the reactor coolant from reaching the containment atmosphere.

The Reactor Coolant System components are designed to Section III, 1971 Edition including Addenda to the Summer, 1973, of the ASME Code for Nuclear Power Plant Components which permits a maximum transient pressure of 110% (2750 psia) of design pressure. The Safety Limit of 2750 psia is therefore consistent with the design criteria and associated code requirements.

The entire Reactor Coolant System was hydrotested at 3125 psia to demonstrate integrity prior to initial operation.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 10 REVISION NO.: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 FIGURE B 2.1-1 AXIAL POWER DISTRIBUTIONS FOR THERMAL MARGIN SAFETY LIMITS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 10 REVISION NO.: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS BASES 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS The Reactor Trip Setpoints specified in Table 2.2-1 are the values at which the Reactor Trips are set for each functional unit. The Trip Setpoints have been selected to ensure that the reactor core and reactor coolant system are prevented from exceeding their Safety Limits during normal operation and design basis anticipated operational occurrences and to assist the Engineered Safety Features Actuation System in mitigating the consequences of accidents.

Operation with a trip set less conservative than its Trip Setpoint but within its specified Allowable Value is acceptable on the basis that the difference between each Trip Setpoint and the Allowable Value is equal to or less than the drift allowance assumed for each trip in the safety analyses.

Manual Reactor Trip The Manual Reactor Trip is a redundant channel to the automatic protective instrumentation channels and provides manual reactor trip capability.

Variable Power Level-High A Reactor trip on Variable Overpower is provided to protect the reactor core during rapid positive reactivity addition excursions which are too rapid to be protected by a Pressurizer Pressure - High or Thermal Margin/Low Pressure Trip.

The Variable Power Level High trip setpoint is operator adjustable and can be set no higher than 9.61% above the indicated THERMAL POWER level.

Operator action is required to increase the trip setpoint as THERMAL POWER is increased. The trip setpoint is automatically decreased as THERMAL POWER decreases. The trip setpoint has a maximum value of 107.0% of RATED THERMAL POWER and a minimum setpoint of 15.0% of RATED THERMAL POWER. Adding to this maximum value the possible variation in trip point due to calibration and instrument errors, the maximum actual steady-state THERMAL POWER level at which a trip would be actuated is higher than 107% of RATED THERMAL POWER, which is the value used in the safety analysis.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 7 of 10 REVISION NO.: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued)

BASES (continued) 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued)

Pressurizer Pressure-High The Pressurizer Pressure-High trip, in conjunction with the pressurizer safety valves and main steam line safety valves, provides Reactor Coolant System protection against overpressurization in the event of loss of load without reactor trip. This trips setpoint is at less than or equal to 2375 psia which is below the nominal lift setting 2500 psia of the pressurizer safety valves and its operation minimizes the undesirable operation of the pressurizer safety valves.

Thermal Margin/Low Pressure The Thermal Margin/Low Pressure trip is provided to prevent operation when the DNBR is less than the appropriate correlation limit for DNB-SAFDL.

The trip is initiated whenever the Reactor Coolant System pressure signal drops below either 1900 psia or a computed value as described below, whichever is higher. The computed value is a function of the higher of T power or neutron power, reactor inlet temperature, the number of reactor coolant pumps operating and the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX. The minimum value of reactor coolant flow rate, the maximum AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT and the maximum CEA deviation permitted for continuous operation are assumed in the generation of this trip function. In addition, CEA group sequencing in accordance with Specifications 3.1.3.5 and 3.1.3.6 is assumed. Finally, the maximum insertion of CEA banks which can occur during any anticipated operational occurrence prior to a Power Level-High trip is assumed.

The Thermal Margin/Low Pressure trip setpoints are derived from the core safety limits through application of appropriate allowances for equipment response time, measurement uncertainties and processing error. The allowances include: a variable (power dependent) allowance to compensate for potential power measurement error, an allowance to compensate for potential temperature measurement uncertainty; an allowance to compensate for pressure measurement error; and an allowance to compensate for the time delay associated with providing effective termination of the occurrence that exhibits the most rapid decrease in margin to the safety limit.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 8 of 10 REVISION NO.: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued)

BASES (continued) 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued)

Containment Pressure-High The Containment Pressure-High trip provides assurance that a reactor trip is initiated prior to or concurrently with a safety injection (SIAS). This also provides assurance that a reactor trip is initiated prior to or concurrently with an MSIS.

Steam Generator Pressure-Low The Steam Generator Pressure-Low trip provides protection against an excessive rate of heat extraction from the steam generators and subsequent cooldown of the reactor coolant. The setting of 626 psia is sufficiently below the full load operating point so as not to interfere with normal operation, but still high enough to provide the required protection in the event of excessively high steam flow.

Steam Generator Level-Low The Steam Generator Level-Low trip provides protection against a loss of feedwater flow incident and assures that the design pressure of the Reactor Coolant System will not be exceeded due to loss of the steam generator heat sink. This specified setpoint provides allowance that there will be sufficient water inventory in the steam generator at the time of the trip to provide sufficient time for any operator action to initiate auxiliary feedwater before reactor coolant system subcooling is lost. This trip also protects against violation of the specified acceptable fuel design limits (SAFDL) for DNBR, offsite dose and the loss of shutdown margin for asymmetric steam generator transients such as the opening of a main steam safety valve or atmospheric dump valve. The trip setpoint is bounding relative to the accident and transient analyses which were performed using a lower, conservative trip setpoint.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 9 of 10 REVISION NO.: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued)

BASES (continued) 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued)

Local Power Density-High The Local Power Density-High trip, functioning from AXIAL SHAPE INDEX monitoring, is provided to ensure that the peak local power density in the fuel which corresponds to fuel centerline melting will not occur as a consequence of axial power maldistributions. A reactor trip is initiated whenever the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX exceeds the allowable limits of Figure 2.2-2. The AXIAL SHAPE INDEX is calculated from the upper and lower excore neutron detector channels. The calculated setpoints are generated as a function of THERMAL POWER level with the allowed CEA group position being inferred from the THERMAL POWER level. The trip is automatically bypassed below 15%

power.

The maximum AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT and maximum CEA misalignment permitted for continuous operation are assumed in generation of the setpoints.

In addition, CEA group sequencing in accordance with the Specifications 3.1.3.5 and 3.1.3.6 is assumed. Finally, the maximum insertion of CEA banks which can occur during any anticipated operational occurrence prior to a Power Level-High trip is assumed.

RCP Loss of Component Cooling Water A loss of component cooling water to the reactor coolant pumps causes a delayed reactor trip. This trip provides protection to the reactor coolant pumps by ensuring that plant operation is not continued without cooling water available. The trip is delayed 10 minutes following a reduction in flow to below the trip setpoint and the trip does not occur if flow is restored before 10 minutes elapses. No credit was taken for this trip in the safety analysis. Its functional capability at the specified trip setting is required to enhance the overall reliability of the Reactor Protective System.

Rate of Change of Power-High The Rate of Change of Power-High trip is provided to protect the core during startup operations and its use serves as a backup to the administratively enforced startup rate limit. The trip is not credited in any design basis accident evaluated in UFSAR Chapter 15; however, the trip is considered in the safety analysis in that the presence of this trip function precluded the need for specific analyses of other events initiated from subcritical conditions.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 1 OF ADM-25.04 10 of 10 REVISION NO.: SAFETY LIMITS AND LIMITING SAFETY SETTINGS 7 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 2.2 LIMITING SAFETY SYSTEM SETTINGS (continued)

BASES (continued) 2.2.1 REACTOR TRIP SETPOINTS (continued)

Reactor Coolant Flow-Low The Reactor Coolant Flow-Low trip provides core protection against DNB in the event of a sudden significant decrease in RCS flow. The Reactor trip setpoint on low RCS flow is calculated by a relationship between steam generator differential pressure, core inlet temperature, instrument errors and response times. When the calculated RCS flow falls below the trip setpoint in an automatic reactor trip signal is initiated. The trip setpoint and allowable values ensure that for a degradation of RCS flow resulting from expected transients, a reactor trip occurs to prevent violation of local power density or DNBR safety limits. The minimum reactor coolant flow with four pumps operating is specified in LCO 3.2.5.

Loss of Load (Turbine)

The Loss of Load (Turbine) trip is provided to trip the reactor when the turbine is tripped above a predetermined power level. This trip is an equipment protective trip only and is not required for plant safety. This trips setpoint does not correspond to a Safety Limit and no credit was taken in the safety analyses for operation of this trip. Its functional capability at the specified trip setting is required to enhance the overall reliability of the Reactor Protection System.

Asymmetric Steam Generator Transient Protective Trip Function (ASGTPTF)

The ASGTPTF utilizes steam generator pressure inputs to the TM/LP calculator, which causes a reactor trip when the difference in pressure between the two steam generators exceeds the trip setpoint. The ASGTPTF is designed to provide a reactor trip for those Anticipated Operational Occurrences associated with secondary system malfunctions which result in asymmetric primary loop coolant temperatures. The most limiting event is the loss of load to one steam generator caused by a single Main Steam Isolation Valve closure.

The equipment trip setpoint and allowable values are calculated to account for instrument uncertainties, and will ensure a trip at or before reaching the analysis setpoint.

Sections No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3.0 & 4.0 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 2

BASES ATTACHMENT 2 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 5 Title:

LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2246735 to make updates per TS Amendments 243 and 194.

(Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 1947991 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)

AND Incorporated PCR 2003212 to update NRC Regulatory Guide reference. (Author: N. Elmore)

Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1855383 to update editorial changes. (Author: R. Sciscente)

Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 09-1217 for CR 2009-4976 to incorporate TSTF-434 -

Overlap Testing - in Bases for SR 4.0.1. (Author: Ken Frehafer)

Revision 1 - Updated TS Bases for TS Amendment No. 129 - missed surveillances.

(Larry Donghia, 01/03/03)

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Sections 3.0 & 4.0 SYS 5 D. DeBoer 01/24/17 STATUS COMPLETED REV 5

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 2 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTIONS 3.0 & 4.0 .................................................................................... 3 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY ........................................................................................... 3 BASES ......................................................................................................... 3 3.0.1 ........................................................................................................... 3 3.0.2 ........................................................................................................... 3 3.0.3 ........................................................................................................... 5 3.0.4 ........................................................................................................... 7 3.0.5 ......................................................................................................... 10 4.0.1 ......................................................................................................... 12 4.0.2 ......................................................................................................... 14 4.0.3 ......................................................................................................... 14 4.0.4 ......................................................................................................... 16 4.0.5 ......................................................................................................... 17

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 3 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTIONS 3.0 & 4.0 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY BASES The specifications of this section establish the general requirements applicable to Limiting Conditions for Operation. These requirements are based on the requirements for Limiting Conditions for Operation stated in the Code of Federal Regulations, 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2):

"Limiting conditions for operation are the lowest functional capability or performance levels of equipment required for safe operation of the facility.

When a limiting condition for operation of a nuclear reactor is not met, the licensee shall shut down the reactor or follow any remedial action permitted by the technical specification until the condition can be met."

3.0.1 LCO 3.0.1 establishes the Applicability statement within each individual Specification as the requirement for when the LCO is required to be met (i.e. when the unit is in the MODES of other specified condition of the Applicability statement for each Specification).

3.0.2 This specification establishes that noncompliance with a specification exists when the requirements of the Limiting Condition for Operation are not met and the associated ACTION requirements have not been implemented within the specified time interval. The purpose of this specification is to clarify that (1) implementation of the ACTION requirements within the specified time interval constitutes compliance with a specification and (2) completion of the remedial measures of the ACTION requirements is not required when compliance with a Limiting Condition for Operation is restored within the time interval specified in the associated ACTION requirements.

There are two basic types of ACTION requirements. The first specifies the remedial measures that permit continued operation of the facility which is not further restricted by the time limits of the ACTION requirements. In this case, conformance to the ACTION requirements provides an acceptable level of safety for unlimited continued operation as long as the ACTION requirements continue to be met. The second type of ACTION requirement specifies a time limit in which conformance to the conditions of the Limiting Condition for Operation must be met. This time limit is the allowable outage time to restore an inoperable system or component to OPERABLE status or for restoring parameters within specified limits. If these actions are not completed within the allowable outage time limits, a shutdown is required to place the facility in a MODE or condition in which the specification no longer applies. It is not intended that the shutdown ACTION requirements be used as an operational convenience which permits (routine) voluntary removal of a system(s) or component(s) from service in lieu of other alternatives that would not result in redundant systems or components being inoperable.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 4 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 3.0.2 (continued)

The specified time limits of the ACTION requirements are applicable from the point in time it is identified that a Limiting Condition for Operation is not met.

The time limits of the ACTION requirements are also applicable when a system or component is removed from service for surveillance testing or investigation of operational problems. Individual specifications may include a specified time limit for the completion of a Surveillance Requirement when equipment is removed from service. In this case, the allowable outage time limits of the ACTION requirements are applicable when this limit expires if the surveillance has not been completed. When a shutdown is required to comply with ACTION requirements, the plant may have entered a MODE in which a new specification becomes applicable. In this case, the time limits of the ACTION requirements would apply from the point in time that the new specification becomes applicable if the requirements of the Limiting Condition for Operation are not met.

LCO 3.0.5 provides for an exception to LCO 3.0.2 for the limited purpose of performing required testing to demonstrate either the OPERABILITY of equipment being returned to service or the OPERABILITY of other equipment. Refer to the LCO 3.0.5 discussion for use.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 5 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 3.0.3 This specification establishes the shutdown ACTION requirements that must be implemented when a Limiting Condition for Operation is not met and the condition is not specifically address by the associated ACTION requirements.

The purpose of this specification is to delineate the time limits for placing the unit in a safe shutdown MODE when plant operation cannot be maintained within the limits for safe operation defined by the Limiting Conditions for Operation and its ACTION requirements. It is not intended to be used as an operational convenience which permits (routine) voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service in lieu of other alternatives that would not result in redundant systems or components being inoperable. One hour is allowed to prepare for an orderly shutdown before initiating a change in plant operation. This time permits the operator to coordinate the reduction in electrical generation with the load dispatcher to ensure the stability and availability of the electrical grid. The time limits specified to reach lower MODES of operation permit the shutdown to proceed in a controlled and orderly manner that is well within the specified maximum cooldown rate and within the cooldown capabilities of the facility assuming only the minimum required equipment is OPERABLE. This reduces thermal stresses on components of the primary coolant system and the potential for a plant upset that could challenge safety systems under conditions for which this specification applies.

If remedial measures permitting limited continued operation of the facility under the provisions of the ACTION requirements are completed, the shutdown may be terminated. The time limits of the ACTION requirements are applicable from the point in time there was a failure to meet a Limiting Condition for Operation. Therefore, the shutdown may be terminated if the ACTION requirements have been met or the time limits of the ACTION requirements have not expired, thus providing an allowance for the completion of the required actions.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 6 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 3.0.3 (continued)

The time limits of Specification 3.0.3 allow 37 hours4.282407e-4 days <br />0.0103 hours <br />6.117725e-5 weeks <br />1.40785e-5 months <br /> for the plant to be in the COLD SHUTDOWN MODE when a shutdown is required during the POWER MODE of operation. If the plant is in a lower MODE of operation when a shutdown is required, the time limit for reaching the next lower MODE of operation applies. However, if a lower MODE of operation is reached in less time than allowed, the total allowable time to reach COLD SHUTDOWN, or other applicable MODE, is not reduced. For example, if HOT STANDBY is reached in 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />, the time allowed to reach HOT SHUTDOWN is the next 11 hours1.273148e-4 days <br />0.00306 hours <br />1.818783e-5 weeks <br />4.1855e-6 months <br /> because the total time to reach HOT SHUTDOWN is not reduced from the allowable limit of 13 hours1.50463e-4 days <br />0.00361 hours <br />2.149471e-5 weeks <br />4.9465e-6 months <br />. Therefore, if remedial measures are completed that would permit a return to POWER operation, a penalty is not incurred by having to reach a lower MODE of operation in less than the total time allowed.

The same principle applies with regard to the allowable outage time limits of the ACTION requirements, if compliance with the ACTION requirements for one specification results in entry into a MODE or condition of operation for another specification in which the requirements of the Limiting Condition for Operation are not met. If the new specification becomes applicable in less time than specified, the difference may be added to the allowable outage time limits of the second specification. However, the allowable outage time limits of ACTION requirements for a higher MODE of operation may not be used to extend the allowable outage time that is applicable when a Limiting Condition for Operation is not met in a lower MODE of operation.

The shutdown requirements of Specification 3.0.3 do not apply in MODES 5 and 6, because the ACTION requirements of individual specifications define the remedial measures to be taken.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 7 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 3.0.4 LCO 3.0.4 establishes limitations on changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability when an LCO is not met. It allows placing the unit in a MODE or other specified condition stated in that Applicability (e.g., the Applicability desired to be entered) when unit conditions are such that the requirements of the LCO would not be met, in accordance with LCO 3.0.4.a, LCO 3.0.4.b, or LCO 3.0.4.c.

LCO 3.0.4.a allows entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met when the associated ACTIONS to be entered permit continued operation in the MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability for an unlimited period of time. Compliance with required Actions that permit continued operation of the unit for an unlimited period of time in a MODE or other specified condition provides an acceptable level of safety for continued operation. This is without regard to the status of the unit before or after the MODE change. Therefore, in such cases, entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability may be made in accordance with the provisions of the required Actions.

LCO 3.0.4.b allows entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering the MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 8 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 3.0.4 (continued)

The risk assessment may use quantitative, qualitative, or blended approaches, and the risk assessment will be conducted using the plant program, procedures, and criteria in place to implement 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4), which requires that risk impacts of maintenance activities to be assessed and managed. The risk assessment for the purposes of LCO 3.0.4.b, must take into account all inoperable Technical Specification equipment regardless of whether the equipment is included in the normal 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4) risk assessment scope.

The risk assessments will be conducted using the procedures and guidance endorsed by Regulatory Guide 1.160, Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants. Regulatory Guide 1.160 endorses Revision 4A of NUMARC 93-01 dated April 2011, Industry Guideline for Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants. These documents address general guidance for conduct of the risk assessment, quantitative and qualitative guidelines for establishing risk management actions, and example risk management actions. These include actions to plan and conduct other activities in a manner that controls overall risk, increased risk awareness by shift and management personnel, actions to reduce the duration of the condition, actions to minimize the magnitude of risk increases (establishment of backup success paths or compensatory measures), and determination that the proposed MODE change is acceptable. Consideration should also be given to the probability of completing restoration such that the requirements of the LCO would be met prior to the expiration of ACTIONS completion times that would require exiting the Applicability.

LCO 3.0.4.b may be used with single or multiple systems and components unavailable. NUMARC 93-01 provides guidance relative to consideration of simultaneous unavailability of multiple systems and components.

The results of the risk assessment shall be considered in determining the acceptability of entering the MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability, and any corresponding risk management actions. The LCO 3.0.4.b risk assessments do not have to be documented.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 9 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 3.0.4 (continued)

The Technical Specifications allow continued operation with equipment unavailable in MODE 1 for the duration of the completion time. Since this is allowable, and since in general the risk impact in that particular MODE bounds the risk of transitioning into and through the applicable MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability of the LCO, the use of the LCO 3.0.4.b allowance should be generally acceptable, as long as the risk is assessed and managed as stated above. However, there is a small subset of systems and components that have been determined to be more important to risk and use of the LCO 3.0.4.b allowance is prohibited. The LCOs governing these systems and components contain notes prohibiting the use of LCO 3.0.4.b by stating LCO 3.0.4.b is not applicable.

LCO 3.0.4.c allows entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met based on a note in the Specification which states LCO 3.0.4.c is applicable. These specific allowances permit entry into MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability when the associated ACTIONS to be entered do not provide for continued operation for an unlimited period of time and a risk assessment has not been performed. This allowance may apply to all the ACTIONS or to a specific required Action of a Specification.

The risk assessments performed to justify the use of LCO 3.0.4.b usually only consider systems and components. For this reason, LCO 3.0.4.c is typically applied to Specifications which describe values and parameters (e.g., Reactor Coolant System Specific Activity), and may be applied to other Specifications based on NRC plant-specific approval.

The provisions of this Specification should not be interpreted as endorsing the failure to exercise the good practice of restoring systems or components to OPERABLE status before entering an associated MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability.

The provisions of LCO 3.0.4 shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS. In addition, the provisions of LCO 3.0.4 shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that result from any unit shutdown. In this context, a unit shutdown is defined as a change in MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability associated with transitioning from MODE 1 to MODE 2, MODE 2 to MODE 3, MODE 3 to MODE 4, and MODE 4 to MODE 5.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 10 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 3.0.4 (continued)

Upon entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met, LCO 3.0.1 and LCO 3.0.2 require entry into the applicable Conditions and Required Actions until the Condition is resolved, until the LCO is met, or until the unit is not within the Applicability of the Technical Specification.

Surveillances do not have to be performed to be performed on the associated inoperable equipment (or on variables outside the specified limits), as permitted by SR 4.0.4 Therefore, utilizing LCO 3.0.4 is not a violation of SR 4.0.1 or SR 4.0.4 for any Surveillances that have not been performed on inoperable equipment. However, SRs must be met to ensure OPERABILITY prior to declaring the associated equipment OPERABLE (or variable within limits) and restoring compliance with the affected LCO.

3.0.5 LCO 3.0.5 establishes the allowance for restoring equipment to service under administrative controls when it has been removed from service or declared inoperable to comply with ACTIONS. The sole purpose of this Specification is to provide an exception to LCO 3.0.2 (e.g. to not comply with the applicable Required Action(s)) to allow the performance of required testing to demonstrate either:

1. The OPERABILITY of the equipment being returned to service or,
2. The OPERABILITY of other equipment.

The administrative controls ensure the time the equipment is returned to service in conflict with the requirements of the ACTIONS is limited to the time absolutely necessary to perform the required testing to demonstrate OPERABILITY. This Specification does not provide time to perform any other preventive or corrective maintenance.

LCO 3.0 .5 specifically states that equipment removed from service or declared inoperable to comply with ACTION(s) may be returned to service under administrative control solely to perform testing required to demonstrate the OPERABILITY of the equipment or that of other equipment. LCO 3.0.5 is limited to plant conditions where simultaneous testing and compliance with the required ACTION(s) is not possible. Hence LCO 3.0.5 may only be used if it is the only alternative to performing the required testing, regardless of whether the other alternatives present higher risk to the plant.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 11 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 3.0.5 (continued)

An example of demonstrating the OPERABILITY of equipment being returned to service is reopening a containment isolation valve that has been closed to comply with required ACTION(s) and must be reopened to perform the required testing.

An example of demonstrating the OPERABILITY of other equipment is taking an inoperable channel or trip system out of the tripped condition to prevent the trip function from occurring during the performance of required testing on another channel in the other trip system A similar example of demonstrating the OPERABILITY of other equipment is taking an inoperable channel or trip system out of the tripped condition to permit the logic to function and indicate the appropriate response during the performance of required testing on another channel in the same trip system.

References:

1. NUREG 1432, Standard Technical Specifications - Combustion Engineering Plants, Revision 4, Volume 2, Bases (ML12102A169)
2. Enclosure 10: Case Study 6: ANO 1 Use of LCO 3.0.5 Meeting Summary of the January 27 & 28 Meeting with NRC/TSTF (ML090640444)

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 12 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 4.0.1 SR 4.0.1 establishes the requirement that Surveillance Requirements (SR) must be met during the MODES or other specified conditions in the applicability for which the requirements of the Limiting Condition for Operation apply, unless otherwise specified in the individual SRs. This Specification is to ensure that SRs are performed to verify the OPERABILITY of systems and components, and that variables are within specified limits. Failure to meet a SR within the specified frequency, in accordance with SR 4.0.2, constitutes a failure to meet a Limiting Condition for Operation (except as allowed by SR 4.0.3). Surveillances may be performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total steps provided the entire Surveillance is performed within the specified Frequency. Additionally, the definitions related to instrument testing (e.g., CHANNEL CALIBRATION) specify that these tests are performed by means of any series of sequential, overlapping, or total steps.

Systems and components are assumed to be OPERABLE when the associated SRs have been met. Nothing in this Specification, however, is to be construed as implying that systems or components are OPERABLE when either:

a. the systems or components are known to be inoperable, although still meeting the SRs, or
b. the requirements of the SR(s) are known to be not met between required SR performances.

SRs do not have to be performed when the unit is in a MODE or other specified condition for which the requirements of the associated Limiting Condition for Operation are not applicable, unless otherwise specified. The SRs associated with a SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTION (STE) are only applicable when the STE is used as an allowable exception to the requirements of a Specification.

Unplanned events may satisfy the requirements (including applicable acceptance criteria) for a given SR. In this case, the unplanned event may be credited as fulfilling the performance of the SR. This allowance includes those SRs whose performance is normally precluded in a given MODE or other specified condition.

SRs, including SRs invoked by Required Actions, do not have to be performed on inoperable equipment because the ACTIONS define the remedial measures that apply. SRs have to be met and performed in accordance with SR 4.0.2, prior to returning equipment to OPERABLE status.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 13 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 4.0.1 (continued)

Upon completion of maintenance, appropriate post maintenance testing is required to declare equipment OPERABLE. This includes ensuring applicable SRs are not failed and their most recent performance is in accordance with SR 4.0.2. Post maintenance testing may not be possible in the current MODE or other specified conditions in the applicability due to the necessary unit parameters not having been established. In these situations, the equipment may be considered OPERABLE provided testing has been satisfactorily completed to the extent possible and the equipment is not otherwise believed to be incapable of performing its function. This will allow operation to proceed to a MODE or other specified condition where other necessary post maintenance tests can be completed.

Some examples of this process follow.

a. Auxiliary feedwater (AFW) pump turbine maintenance during refueling that requires testing at steam pressures > 800 psi.

However, if other appropriate testing is satisfactorily completed, the AFW System can be considered OPERABLE.

This allows startup and other necessary testing to proceed until the plant reaches the steam pressure required to perform the testing.

b. High pressure safety injection (HPSI) maintenance during shutdown that requires system functional tests at a specified pressure. Provided other appropriate testing is satisfactorily completed, startup can proceed with HPSI considered OPERABLE. This allows operation to reach the specified pressure to complete the necessary post maintenance testing.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 14 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 4.0.2 This specification establishes the limit for which the specified time interval for Surveillance Requirements may be extended. It permits an allowable extension of the normal surveillance interval to facilitate surveillance scheduling and consideration of plant operating conditions that may not be suitable for conducting the surveillance; e.g., transient conditions or other ongoing surveillance or maintenance activities. It also provides flexibility to accommodate the length of a fuel cycle for surveillances that are performed at each refueling outage and are specified within an 18-month surveillance interval. It is not intended that this provision be used repeatedly as a convenience to extend the surveillance intervals beyond that specified for surveillances that are not performed during refueling outages. The limitation of Specification 4.0.2 is based on engineering judgment and the recognition that most probable result of any particular surveillance being performed is the verification of conformance with the Surveillance Requirements. This provision is sufficient to ensure that the reliability ensured through surveillance activities is not significantly degraded beyond that obtained from the specified surveillance interval.

4.0.3 SR 4.0.3 establishes the flexibility to defer declaring affected equipment inoperable or an affected variable outside the specified limits when a SR has not been completed within the specified frequency. A delay period of up to 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> or up to the limit of the specified frequency, whichever is greater, applies from the point in time that it is discovered that the SR has not been performed in accordance with SR 4.0.2, and not at the time that the specified frequency was not met.

This delay period provides adequate time to complete SRs that have been missed. This delay period permits the completion of a SRs requirement before complying with required ACTION(s) or other remedial measures that might preclude completion of the SR.

The basis for this delay period includes consideration of unit conditions, adequate planning, availability of personnel, the time required to perform the SR, the safety significance of the delay in completing the required SR, and the recognition that the most probable result of any particular SR being performed is the verification of conformance with the requirements.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 15 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 4.0.3 (continued)

When a SR with a frequency based not on time intervals, but upon specified unit conditions, operating situations, or requirements of regulations (e.g., prior to entering MODE 1 after each fuel loading, or in accordance with 10 CFR 50, Appendix J, as modified by approved exemptions, etc.) is discovered to not have been performed when specified, SR 4.0.3 allows for the full delay period of up to the specified frequency to perform the SR. However, since there is not a time interval specified, the missed SR should be performed at the first reasonable opportunity.

SR 4.0.3 provides a time limit for, and allowances for the performance of, a SR that becomes applicable as a consequence of MODE changes imposed by required ACTION(s).

Failure to comply with the specified frequency for a SR is expected to be an infrequent occurrence. Use of the delay period established by SR 4.0.3 is a flexibility which is not intended to be used as an operational convenience to extend surveillance intervals. While up to 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> or the limit of the specified frequency is provided to perform the missed surveillance, it is expected that the missed SR will be performed at the first reasonable opportunity. The determination of the first reasonable opportunity should include consideration of the impact on plant risk (from delaying the surveillance as well as any plant configuration changes required or shutting the plant down to perform the SR) and impact on any analysis assumptions, in addition to unit conditions, planning, availability of personnel, and the time required to perform the SR. This risk impact should be managed through the program in place to implement 10 CFR 50.65(a)(4) and its implementation guidance, NRC Regulatory Guide 1.160, Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants. This Regulatory Guide addresses consideration of temporary and aggregate risk impacts, determination of risk management action thresholds, and risk management action up to and including plant shutdown. The missed surveillance should be treated as an emergent condition as discussed in the Regulatory Guide. The risk evaluation may use quantitative, qualitative, or blended methods. The degree of depth and rigor of the evaluation should be commensurate with the importance of the component. Missed SRs for important components should be analyzed quantitatively. If the results of the risk evaluation determine the risk increase is significant, this evaluation should be used to determine the course of action. All cases of a missed SR will be placed in the licensee's Corrective Action Program.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 16 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 4.0.3 (continued)

If a SR is not completed within the allowed delay period, then the equipment is considered inoperable or the variable is considered outside the specified limits and the completion times of the required ACTION(s) for the applicable Limiting Condition for Operation begin immediately upon expiration of the delay period. If a surveillance is failed within the delay period, then the equipment is inoperable, or the variable is outside the specified limits and the completion times of the required ACTION(s) for the applicable Limiting Condition for Operation begin immediately upon the failure of the surveillance.

Completion of the SR within the delay period allowed by this specification, or within the completion time of the ACTIONS, restores compliance with SR 4.0.1.

4.0.4 SR 4.0.4 establishes the requirement that all applicable SRs must be met before entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability.

This Specification ensures that system and component OPERABILITY requirements and variable limits are met before entry into MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability for which these systems and components ensure safe operation of the unit. The provisions of this Specification should not be interpreted as endorsing the failure to exercise the good practice of restoring systems or components to OPERABLE status before entering an associated MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability.

A provision is included to allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability when an LCO is not met due to Surveillance not being met in accordance with LCO 3.0.4.

SECTION NO.: TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE:

3.0 & 4.0 BASES ATTACHMENT 2 OF ADM-25.04 REVISION NO.: LIMITING CONDITIONS FOR OPERATION 17 of 17 AND SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS 5

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.0 APPLICABILITY (continued)

BASES (continued) 4.0.4 (continued)

However, in certain circumstances, failing to meet an SR will not result in SR 4.0.4 restricting a MODE change or other specified condition change. When a system, subsystem, division, component, device, or variable is inoperable or outside its specified limits, the associated SR(s) are not required to be performed, per SR 4.0.1, which states that surveillances do not have to be performed on inoperable equipment. When equipment is inoperable, SR 4.0.4 does not apply to the associated SR(s) since the requirement for the SR(s) to be performed is removed. Therefore, failing to perform the Surveillance(s) within the specified frequency does not result in an SR 4.0.4 restriction to changing MODES or other specified conditions of the Applicability. However, since the LCO is not met in this instance, LCO 3.0.4 will govern any restrictions that may (or may not) apply to MODE or other specified condition changes. SR 4.0.4 does not restrict changing MODES or other specified conditions of the Applicability when a Surveillance has not been performed within the specified frequency, provided the requirement to declare the LCO not met has been delayed in accordance with SR 4.0.3.

The provisions of SR 4.0.4 shall not prevent entry into MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS. In addition, the provisions of SR 4.0.4 shall not prevent changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that result from any unit shutdown. In this context, a unit shutdown is defined as a change in MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability associated with transitioning from MODE 1 to MODE 2, MODE 2 to MODE 3, MODE 3 to MODE 4, and MODE 4 to MODE 5.

4.0.5 This specification ensures that inservice inspection of ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 components will be performed in accordance with a periodically updated version of Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and Addenda as required by 10 CFR 50.55a. Relief from any of the above requirements has been provided in writing by the Commission and is not part of these Technical Specifications.

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3

BASES ATTACHMENT 3 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 8 Title:

REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 8 - Incorporated PCR 2157116 based on NRC approval of the EOC MTC test elimination. (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1998896 to reflect changes to the MTC surveillance testing.

(Author: N. Elmore)

Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)

Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 597926 to clarify actions to be taken with misaligned CEAs.

(Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 06-1727 for PCM 05197, CR 2006-15180 to update reactivity controls and RCS bases, and make corrections per CR. (Ken Frehafer, 05/25/06)

Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 04-3132 to implement amendments 194/136. (K. W. Frehafer, 11/24/04)

Revision 1 - Changes made to reflect TS Amendment #122. (K.W. Frehafer, 11/30/01)

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.1 SYS 8 R. Coffey 01/14/16 STATUS COMPLETED REV 8

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1 BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 10 REVISION NO.: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.1 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................................. 3 BASES ........................................................................................ 3 3/4.1.1 BORATION CONTROL ................................................... 3 3/4.1.1.1 and 3/4.1.1.2 SHUTDOWN MARGIN ............ 3 3/4.1.1.3 BORATION DILUTION ................................. 3 3/4.1.1.4 MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT ............................................. 4 3/4.1.1.5 MINIMUM TEMPERATURE FOR CRITICALITY ............................................... 5 3/4.1.2 BORATION SYSTEMS ................................................... 6 3/4.1.3 MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES............................. 8

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1 BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 10 REVISION NO.: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.1 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.1.1 BORATION CONTROL 3/4.1.1.1 and 3/4.1.1.2 SHUTDOWN MARGIN A sufficient SHUTDOWN MARGIN ensures that 1) the reactor can be made subcritical from all operating conditions, 2) the reactivity transients associated with postulated accident conditions are controllable within acceptable limits, and 3) the reactor will be maintained sufficiently subcritical to preclude inadvertent criticality in the shutdown condition.

SHUTDOWN MARGIN requirements vary throughout core life as a function of fuel depletion, RCS boron concentration, and RCS Tavg. The most restrictive condition occurs at EOL, with Tavg at no load operating temperature, and is associated with a postulated steam line break accident and resulting uncontrolled RCS cooldown. In the analysis of this accident, a minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN as specified in the COLR for Specification 3.1.1.1 is required to control the reactivity transient. Accordingly, the SHUTDOWN MARGIN requirement is based upon this limiting condition and is consistent with FSAR safety analysis assumptions. At earlier times in core life, the minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN required for the most restrictive conditions is less than that at EOL. With Tavg less than or equal to 200F, the reactivity transients resulting from any postulated accident are minimal and a SHUTDOWN MARGIN as specified in the COLR for Specification 3.1.1.2 provides adequate protection.

3/4.1.1.3 BORATION DILUTION A minimum flow rate of at least 3000 gpm provides adequate mixing, prevents stratification and ensures that reactivity changes will be gradual during boron concentration reductions in the Reactor Coolant System. A flow rate of at least 3000 gpm will circulate an equivalent Reactor Coolant System volume of 10,931 cubic feet in approximately 26 minutes. The reactivity change rate associated with boron concentration reductions will therefore be within the capability of operator recognition and control.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1 BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 10 REVISION NO.: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.1.1 BORATION CONTROL (continued) 3/4.1.1.4 MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT The limitations on moderator temperature coefficient (MTC) are provided to ensure that the assumptions used in the accident and transient analysis remain valid through each fuel cycle. The surveillance requirements for measurement of the MTC during each fuel cycle are adequate to confirm the MTC value since this coefficient changes slowly due principally to the reduction in RCS boron concentration associated with fuel burnup. The confirmation that the measured MTC value is within its limit provides assurances that the coefficient will be maintained within acceptable values throughout each fuel cycle.

For fuel cycles that meet the applicability requirements in WCAP-16011-P-A Rev. 0, Startup Test Activity Reduction Program, (STAR) and specifically, the acceptance criteria to substitute the measured value of MTC at hot zero power (HZP) with an alternate MTC value, SR 4.1.1.4.1 may be met prior to entering MODE 1 after each fuel loading by confirmation that the predicted MTC, when adjusted for the measured RCS boron concentration, is within the most positive (least negative) MTC limit specified in the LCO. If the adjusted predicted MTC value is used to meet the SR prior to entering MODE 1, a confirmation by measurement that MTC is within the upper MTC limit must be performed in MODE 1 within 7 Effective Full Power Days (EFPD) after reaching 40 EFPD of core burnup. The applicability requirements in WCAP-16011-P-A ensure core designs are not significantly different from those used to benchmark predictions and require that the measured RCS boron concentration meets specific test criteria. This provides assurance that the MTC obtained from the adjusted predicted MTC is accurate.

For fuel cycles that do not meet the applicability requirements in WCAP-16011-P-A, the verification of MTC required prior to entering Mode 1 after each fuel cycle loading is performed by calculation of the MTC based on measurement of the isothermal temperature coefficient. In this case, measurement of MTC within 7 EFPD after reaching 40 EFPD of core burnup is not required.

The requirements for MTC measurement prior to operation > 5% and/or within 7 EFPDs of reaching 40 EFPD core burnup satisfy the confirmatory check on the most positive (least negative) MTC value.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1 BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 10 REVISION NO.: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.1.1 BORATION CONTROL (continued) 3/4.1.1.4 MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (continued)

SR 4.1.1.4.2 is modified by a Note, which indicates that if the extrapolated MTC is more negative than the lower limit specified in the COLR, the Surveillance may be repeated, and the shutdown must occur prior to exceeding the minimum allowable boron concentration at which MTC is projected to exceed the lower limit. An evaluation to determine this minimum boron concentration is necessary to ensure the MTC limit used in the safety analyses is not violated.

The requirement for measurement, within 7 EFPD of reaching 2/3 core burnup, satisfies the confirmatory check of the most negative MTC value.

The measurement is performed at any THERMAL POWER, so that the projected EOC MTC may be evaluated before the reactor actually reaches the EOC condition. MTC values may be extrapolated and compensated to permit direct comparison to the MTC limits specified in the COLR.

SR 4.1.1.4.2 is only required if the MTC determined in SR 4.1.1.4.1 is not within +/-1.6 pcm/°F of the corresponding design value when the difference cannot be reconciled. Analysis has shown that if the results of the beginning of cycle moderator temperature coefficient verification fall within

+/-1.6 pcm/°F of the corresponding design values, then it can be assumed that the end of cycle coefficient will also agree with the design value within

+/-1.6 pcm/°F and the measurement at EOC is not required.

3/4.1.1.5 MINIMUM TEMPERATURE FOR CRITICALITY This specification ensures that the reactor will not be made critical with the Reactor Coolant System average temperature less than 515F. This limitation is required to ensure (1) the moderator temperature coefficient is within its analyzed temperature range, (2) the protective instrumentation is within its normal operating range, (3) the pressurizer is capable of being in an OPERABLE status with a steam bubble, and (4) the reactor pressure vessel is above its minimum RTNDT temperature.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1 BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 10 REVISION NO.: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.1.2 BORATION SYSTEMS The boron injection system ensures that negative reactivity control is available during each mode of facility operation. The components required to perform this function include (1) borated water sources, (2) charging pumps, (3) separate flow paths, (4) boric acid makeup pumps, and (5) an emergency power supply from OPERABLE diesel generators.

With the RCS average temperature above 200F, a minimum of two separate and redundant boron injection systems are provided to ensure single functional capability in the event an assumed failure renders one of the systems inoperable. Allowable out-of-service periods ensure that minor component repair or corrective action may be completed without undue risk to overall facility safety from injection system failures during the repair period.

The boration capability of either system is sufficient to provide a SHUTDOWN MARGIN from expected operating conditions of the limit specified in the COLR after xenon decay and cooldown to 200F. The maximum expected boration capability requirement occurs at EOL from full power equilibrium xenon conditions. This requirement can be met for a range of boric acid concentrations in the Boric Acid Makeup Tank (BAMT) and Refueling Water Tank (RWT). This range is bounded by 8,750 gallons of 3.1 weight percent (5420 ppm boron) from the BAMT and 10,492 gallons of 1900 ppm borated water from the RWT to 7,550 gallons of 3.5 weight percent (6119 ppm boron) boric acid from BAMT and 11,692 gallons of 1900 ppm borated water from the RWT. A minimum of 33,000 gallons of 1900 ppm boron is required from the RWT if it is to be used to borate the RCS alone. This volume requirement, however, is expected to always be bounded by the ECCS RWT volume requirements of Specification 3.5.4.

With the RCS temperature below 200F one injection system is acceptable without single failure consideration on the basis of the stable reactivity condition of the reactor and the additional restrictions prohibiting CORE ALTERATIONS and positive reactivity changes in the event the single injection system becomes inoperable.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1 BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 7 of 10 REVISION NO.: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.1.2 BORATION SYSTEMS (continued)

Temperature changes in the RCS impose reactivity changes by means of the moderator temperature coefficient. Plant temperature changes are allowed provided the temperature change is accounted for in the calculated SDM.

Small changes in RCS temperature are unavoidable and so long as the required SDM is maintained during these changes, any positive reactivity additions will be limited to acceptable levels. Introduction of temperature changes must be evaluated to ensure they do not result in a loss of required SDM.

The boron capability required below 200F is based upon providing a SHUTDOWN MARGIN corresponding to its COLR limit after xenon decay and cooldown from 200F to 140F. This condition can be satisfied by maintaining either 1443 gallons of 1900 ppm borated water from the refueling water tank or 1433 gallons of 3.1 weight percent boric acid solution from the boric acid makeup tanks.

The contained water volume limits includes allowance for water not available because of discharge line location and other physical characteristics.

The OPERABILITY of one boron injection system during REFUELING ensures that this system is available for reactivity control while in MODE 6.

The limits on contained water volume and boron concentration of the RWT also ensure a pH value of between 7.0 and 8.1 for the solution recirculated within containment after a LOCA. This pH band minimizes the evolution of iodine and minimizes the effect of chloride and caustic stress corrosion on mechanical systems and components.

Ensuring that the BAM pump discharge pressure is met satisfies the periodic surveillance requirement to detect gross degradation caused by impeller structural damage or other hydraulic component problems. Along with this requirement,Section XI of the ASME Code verifies the pump developed head at one point on the pump characteristic curve to verify both that the measured performance is within an acceptable tolerance of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the unit safety analysis. Surveillance Requirements are specified in the In-service Testing Program, which encompassesSection XI of the ASME Code.Section XI of the ASME Code provides the activities and frequencies necessary to satisfy the requirements.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1 BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 8 of 10 REVISION NO.: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.1.3 MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES The specifications of this section ensure that (1) acceptable power distribution limits are maintained, (2) the minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN is maintained, and (3) the potential effects of CEA misalignments are limited to acceptable levels.

The ACTION statements which permit limited variations from the basic requirements are accompanied by additional restrictions which ensure that the original design criteria are met.

The ACTION statements applicable to a stuck or untrippable CEA, to two or more inoperable CEAs and to a large misalignment (greater than or equal to 15 inches) of two or more CEAs, require a prompt shutdown of the reactor since either of these conditions may be indicative of a possible loss of mechanical functional capability of the CEAs and in the event of a stuck or untrippable CEA, the loss of SHUTDOWN MARGIN.

For small misalignments (less than 15 inches) of the CEAs, there is (1) a small effect on the time-dependent long-term power distributions relative to those used in generating LCOs and LSSS setpoints, (2) a small effect on the available SHUTDOWN MARGIN, and (3) a small effect on the ejected CEA worth used in the safety analysis. Therefore, the ACTION statement associated with small misalignments of CEAs permits a 1-hour time interval during which attempts may be made to restore the CEA to within its alignment requirements. The 1-hour time limit is sufficient to (1) identify causes of a misaligned CEA, (2) take appropriate corrective action to realign the CEAs, and (3) minimize the effects of xenon redistribution.

Overpower margin is provided to protect the core in the event of a large misalignment (> 15 inches) of a CEA. However, this misalignment would cause distortion of the core power distribution. This distribution may, in turn, have a significant effect on (1) the available SHUTDOWN MARGIN, (2) the time-dependent long-term power distributions relative to those used in generating LCOs and LSSS setpoints, and (3) the ejected CEA worth used in the safety analysis. Once the time constraint shown in COLR Figure 3.1-1a is exceeded, the ACTION statement associated with the large misalignment of a CEA requires a prompt downpower to 70% of RATED THERMAL POWER.

Once started, the downpower must continue at the maximum rate permitted by plant conditions not to exceed 5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1 BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 9 of 10 REVISION NO.: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.1.3 MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES (continued)

The ACTION statements applicable to misaligned or inoperable CEAs include requirements to align the OPERABLE CEAs in a given group with the inoperable CEA. Conformance with these alignment requirements brings the core, within a short period of time, to a configuration consistent with that assumed in generating LCO and LSSS setpoints. However, extended operation with CEAs significantly inserted in the core may lead to perturbations in (1) local burnup, (2) peaking factors, and (3) available shutdown margin which are more adverse than the conditions assumed to exist in the safety analyses and LCO and LSSS setpoints determination.

Therefore, time limits have been imposed on operation with inoperable CEAs to preclude such adverse conditions from developing.

The requirement to reduce power in certain time limits depending upon the previous F Tr is to eliminate a potential nonconservatism for situations when a CEA has been declared inoperable. A worst-case analysis has shown that a DNBR SAFDL violation may occur after the CEA misalignment if this time requirement is not met. This potential DNBR SAFDL violation is eliminated by limiting the time operation is permitted at full power before power reductions are required. These reductions will be necessary once the deviated CEA has been declared inoperable. This time allowed to continued operation at a reduced power level can be permitted for the following reasons:

1. The margin calculations that support the Technical Specifications are based on a steady-state radial peak of F Tr = the limits of Specification 3.2.3.
2. When the actual F Tr < the limits of Specification 3.2.3, significant additional margin exists.
3. This additional margin can be credited to offset the increase in F Tr with time that can occur following a CEA misalignment.
4. This increase in F Tr is caused by xenon redistribution.
5. The present analysis can support allowing a misalignment to exist without correction, if the time constraints and initial F Tr limits of COLR Figure 3.1-1a are met.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.1 BASES ATTACHMENT 3 OF ADM-25.04 10 of 10 REVISION NO.: REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.1 REACTIVITY CONTROL SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.1.3 MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES (continued)

Operability of at least two CEA position indicator channels is required to determine CEA positions and thereby ensure compliance with the CEA alignment and insertion limits. The CEA "Full In" and "Full Out" limits provide an additional independent means for determining the CEA positions when the CEAs are at either their fully inserted or fully withdrawn positions. Therefore, the ACTION statements applicable to inoperable CEA position indicators permit continued operations when the positions of CEAs with inoperable position indicators can be verified by the "Full In" or "Full Out" limits.

CEA positions and OPERABILITY of the CEA position indicators are required to be verified on a nominal basis of once per 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> with more frequent verifications required if an automatic monitoring channel is inoperable. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. These verification frequencies are adequate for assuring that the applicable LCOs are satisfied.

The maximum CEA drop time restriction is consistent with the assumed CEA drop time used in the safety analyses. Measurement with Tavg greater than or equal to 515F and with all reactor coolant pumps operating ensures that the measured drop times will be representative of insertion times experienced during a reactor trip at operating conditions.

The LSSS setpoints and the power distribution LCOs were generated based upon a core burnup which would be achieved with the core operating in an essentially unrodded configuration. Therefore, the CEA insertion limit specifications require that during MODES 1 and 2, the full length CEAs be nearly fully withdrawn. The amount of CEA insertion permitted by the Long Term Steady State Insertion Limits of Specification 3.1.3.6 will not have a significant effect upon the unrodded burnup assumption but will still provide sufficient reactivity control. The Power Dependent Insertion Limits of Specification 3.1.3.6 are provided to ensure that (1) acceptable power distribution limits are maintained, (2) the minimum SHUTDOWN MARGIN is maintained, and (3) the potential effects of a CEA ejection accident are limited to acceptable levels; however, long-term operation at these insertion limits could have adverse effects on core power distribution during subsequent operation in an unrodded configuration.

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.2 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 4

BASES ATTACHMENT 4 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 5 Title:

POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2204276 to support use of AREVA fuel.

(Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)

Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 05-0059 for PCM 04078 and Tech Spec Amendment No. 138 NRC Letter dated 01/31/05 regarding WCAP-9272 Reload Methodology and Implementing 30% SG Tube Plugging Limit. (George Madden, 01/27/05)

Revision 1 - Incorporated PCR 03-1249 to revise Section 3/4.2.5 in accordance with Tech Spec Amendment 131; LAR 2002-06; NRC letter dated 4/18/03 regarding reduction in minimum RCS flow. (M. DiMarco, 05/02/03)

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.2 SYS 5 R. Coffey 12/15/14 STATUS COMPLETED REV 5

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2 BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 6 REVISION NO.: POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.2 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS .................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.2.1 LINEAR HEAT RATE ...................................................... 3 3/4.2.3 and 3/4.2.4 TOTAL INTEGRATED RADIAL PEAKING FACTORS - F Tr AND AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT - Tq .... 5 3/4.2.5 DNB PARAMETERS ....................................................... 6

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2 BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 6 REVISION NO.: POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.2 3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS BASES 3/4.2.1 LINEAR HEAT RATE The limitation on linear heat rate ensures that in the event of a LOCA, the peak temperature of the fuel cladding will not exceed 2200F.

Either of the two core power distribution monitoring systems, the Excore Detector Monitoring System and the Incore Detector Monitoring System, provides adequate monitoring of the core power distribution and are capable of verifying that the linear heat rate does not exceed its limits. The Excore Detector Monitoring System performs this function by continuously monitoring the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX with the OPERABLE quadrant symmetric excore neutron flux detectors and verifying that the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX is maintained within the allowable limits of COLR Figure 3.2-2. In conjunction with the use of the excore monitoring system and in establishing the AXIAL SHAPE INDEX limits, the following assumptions are made: (1) the CEA insertion limits of Specifications 3.1.3.5 and 3.1.3.6 are satisfied, (2) the AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT restrictions of Specification 3.2.4 are satisfied, and (3) the measured linear heat rate obtained from a previous power distribution map using incore detectors meets the criteria of Specification 3.2.1.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2 BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 6 REVISION NO.: POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS (continued)

BASES (continued)

The Incore Detector Monitoring System continuously provides a direct measure of the peaking factors and the alarms which have been established for the individual incore detector segments ensure that the peak linear heat rates will be maintained within the allowable limits of COLR Figure 3.2-1. The setpoints for these alarms include allowances, set in conservative directions, for (1) a measurement-calculational uncertainty factor, (2) an engineering uncertainty factor, (3) an allowance for axial fuel densification and thermal expansion, and (4) a THERMAL POWER measurement uncertainty factor.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2 BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 6 REVISION NO.: POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.2.3 and 3/4.2.4 TOTAL INTEGRATED RADIAL PEAKING FACTOR - F Tr AND AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT - Tq The limitation on Tq is provided to ensure that the assumptions used in the analysis for establishing the Linear Heat Rate and Local Power Density - High LCOs and LSSS setpoints remain valid during operation at the various allowable CEA group insertion limits. The limitations on F Tr and Tq are provided to ensure that the assumptions used in the analysis establishing the DNB Margin LCO, the Thermal Margin/Low Pressure LSSS setpoints remain valid during operation at the various allowable CEA group insertion limits. If F Tr or Tq exceed their basic limitations, operation may continue under the additional restrictions imposed by the ACTION statements since these additional restrictions provide adequate provisions to assure that the assumptions used in establishing the Linear Heat Rate, Thermal Margin/Low Pressure and Local Power Density - High LCOs and LSSS setpoints remain valid.

An AZIMUTHAL POWER TILT > 0.10 is not expected and if it should occur, subsequent operation would be restricted to only those operations required to identify the cause of this unexpected tilt.

The requirement that the measured value of Tq be multiplied by the calculated values of Fr to determine F Tr is applicable only when Fr is calculated with a non-full core power distribution analysis code. When monitoring a reactor core power distribution, Fr with a full core power distribution analysis code the azimuthal tilt is explicitly accounted for as part of the radial power distribution used to calculate Fr.

The Surveillance Requirements for verifying that F Tr and Tq are within their limits provide assurance that the actual values of Fr and Tq do not exceed the assumed values. Verifying F Tr after each fuel loading prior to exceeding 75%

of RATED THERMAL POWER provides additional assurance that the core was properly loaded.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.2 BASES ATTACHMENT 4 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 6 REVISION NO.: POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS 5 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.2.5 DNB PARAMETERS The limits on the DNB-related parameters assure that each of the parameters are maintained within the normal steady-state envelope of operation assumed in the transient and safety analyses. The limits are consistent with the safety analyses assumptions and have been analytically demonstrated adequate to maintain a minimum DNBR of greater than or equal to the appropriate correlation limit for DNB-SAFDL throughout each analyzed transient. The limit for Reactor Coolant System total flow rate is maintained in the LCO. The remaining DNB parameter limits are cycle-specific and have been relocated to the COLR.

These variables are contained in the COLR to provide operating and analysis flexibility from cycle to cycle. Operating within these limits will result in meeting the DNBR criterion in the event of a DNB limited transient.

The Surveillance Frequencies are controlled under the Surveillance Frequency control Program.

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.3 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 5

BASES ATTACHMENT 5 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 6 Title:

INSTRUMENTATION Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 2225600 for Unit 1 Alternative Source Term licensing amendment 152 that incorporated response time testing surveillance requirements for the CROAI radiation monitors. At that time no Tech Spec Bases for the response time testing were documented. This PCR is intended to update the Unit 1 & 2 Tech Spec Bases documents, Section 4.3.3.2, to capture the unique response time testing methodology of the CROAI radiation monitors. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)

Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 08-6765 for CR 2007-32178 for Bases changes to Technical Specifications 155 for License Amendments 152 and 153. Procedure changes to implement AST were reviewed in ORG 07-041 on 5/29/07 as part of the license amendment submittal.

(Author: Ken Frehafer)

Revision 1 - Bases for Technical Specifications 137. (M. DiMarco, 12/21/04)

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.3 SYS 6 M. Jones 03/22/18 STATUS COMPLETED REV 6

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3 BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 7 REVISION NO.: INSTRUMENTATION 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.3 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION ...................................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 REACTOR PROTECTIVE AND ENGINEERED SAFETY FEATURES ACTUATION SYSTEMS INSTRUMENTATION ................................ 3 3/4.3.3 RADIATION MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION ......... 6 3/4.3.5 REMOTE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION ............................... 6 3/4.3.6 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION .......................... 7 3/4.3.7 DELETED ....................................................................................... 7 3/4.3.8 DELETED ....................................................................................... 7

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3 BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 7 REVISION NO.: INSTRUMENTATION 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.3 3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION BASES 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 REACTOR PROTECTIVE AND ENGINEERED SAFETY FEATURES ACTUATION SYSTEMS INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the reactor protective and Engineered Safety Features Actuation Systems instrumentation and bypasses ensure that (1) the associated Engineered Safety Features Actuation action and/or reactor trip will be initiated when the parameter monitored by each channel or combination thereof reaches its setpoint, (2) the specified coincidence logic is maintained, (3) sufficient redundancy is maintained to permit a channel to be out of service for testing or maintenance, and (4) sufficient system functional capability is available from diverse parameters.

The OPERABILITY of these systems is required to provide the overall reliability, redundancy, and diversity assumed available in the facility design for the protection and mitigation of accident and transient conditions.

The integrated operation of each of these systems is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.

The Surveillance Requirements specified for these systems ensure that the overall system functional capability is maintained comparable to the original design standards. The periodic surveillance tests are sufficient to demonstrate this capability. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. For the Steam Generator Water Level Low Functional Unit, the trip setpoint and methodology used to determine the trip setpoint, the as-found acceptance criteria band, and the as-left acceptance criteria are specified in the UFSAR. The two table notations are consistent with the recommended notes provided in NRCs letter to NEI Technical Specifications Methods Task Force for Setpoint Allowances dated September 5, 2005.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3 BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 7 REVISION NO.: INSTRUMENTATION 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 (continued)

ESFAS subgroup relay testing is performed in accordance with the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

The measurement of response time at the specified frequencies provides assurance that the protective and ESF action function associated with each channel is completed within the time limit assumed in the safety analyses.

No credit was taken in the analyses for those channels with response times indicated as not applicable. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency control Program.

Response time may be demonstrated by any series of sequential, overlapping or total channel measurements, including allocated sensor response time, provided that such tests demonstrate total channel response time as defined.

CEOG Topical Report CE NPSD-1167, and FPL No Significant Hazards Evaluation PSL-ENG-SEIS-03-043 provide the basis and methodology for using allocated sensor response times in the overall verification of the channel response time for specific sensors identified in these documents.

The allocated sensor response time must be verified prior to placing a new component in operation and re-verified after maintenance that may adversely affect the sensor response time (e.g., replacement of a transmitter DP cell or variable damping circuits). Sensor response time verification may be demonstrated by either 1) in place, onsite or offsite test measurements or

2) utilizing replacement sensors with certified response times.

The CEOG topical report and FPL evaluation only cover certain sensor model numbers. If sensors are replaced with types not previously evaluated, then periodic response time testing (RTT) for the new sensor must either be performed and the appropriate changes made to plant procedures, or an additional request for RTT elimination must be submitted and approved by the NRC. If, however, the replacement sensor is one for which RTT elimination has been approved, then FPL may modify the plant procedures, using an allocated response time based upon a vendor-supplied response time value, or upon statistical analysis of historical data for that transmitter type and model.

The Safety Injection Actuation Signal (SIAS) provides direct actuation of the Containment Isolation Signal (CIS) to ensure containment isolation in the event of a small break LOCA.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3 BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 7 REVISION NO.: INSTRUMENTATION 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.3.1 and 3/4.3.2 (continued)

For channels not restored to an OPERABLE status in accordance with ACTION 15, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. The allowed Completion Times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. ACTION 11 is modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.

However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3 BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 7 REVISION NO.: INSTRUMENTATION 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.3.3 RADIATION MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the radiation monitoring channels ensures that: (1) the radiation levels are continually measured in the areas served by the individual channels; and (2) the alarm or automatic action is initiated when the radiation level trip setpoint is exceeded; and (3) sufficient information is available on selected plant parameters to monitor and assess these variables following an accident. This capability is consistent with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.97, "Instrumentation for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Power Plants to Assess Plant and Environs Conditions During and Following an Accident," December 1980 and NUREG-0737, "Clarification of TMI Action Plan Requirements," November 1980.

Surveillance Requirement 4.3.3.2 ensures that the channel actuation response times are less than the maximum times assumed in the analyses.

Testing of the final actuating devices is included in the surveillance testing.

The Control Room Outside Air Intake (CROAI) Radiation Monitoring Response Time measurement provides assurance that the Control Room isolation function associated with each CROAI radiation monitoring channel is completed within the time limit assumed in the accident and Control Room habitability analyses. Response time may be demonstrated by applying a simulated step in radioactivity (i.e., detector count rate) above background to the channel. The magnitude of the radioactivity step shall be less than or equal to the radioactivity expected for the accident having the lowest radioactivity (i.e., detector count rate). Note that the count rate step value applied may significantly exceed the Technical Specification setpoint

(

Reference:

Engineering Evaluation PSL-ENG-SEIS-08-017).

For channels not restored to an OPERABLE status in accordance with ACTION 26, the control room emergency ventilation system must be initiated and maintained in the recirculation mode of operation within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. ACTION 26 is modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.3 BASES ATTACHMENT 5 OF ADM-25.04 7 of 7 REVISION NO.: INSTRUMENTATION 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.3 INSTRUMENTATION (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.3.5 REMOTE SHUTDOWN INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the remote shutdown instrumentation ensures that sufficient capability is available to permit shutdown and maintenance of HOT STANDBY of the facility from locations outside of the control room.

This capability is required in the event control room habitability is lost and is consistent with General Design Criteria 19 of 10 CFR 50.

The OPERABILITY of the remote shutdown system instrumentation ensures that a fire will not preclude achieving safe shutdown. The remote shutdown system instrumentation, control circuits, and transfer switches are independent of areas where a fire could damage systems normally used to shut down the reactor. This capability is consistent with General Design Criterion 3 and Appendix R to 10 CFR Part 50.

3/4.3.6 ACCIDENT MONITORING INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the accident monitoring instrumentation ensures that sufficient information is available on selected plant parameters to monitor and assess these variables following an accident. This capability is consistent with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.97, Instrumentation for Light-Water-Cooled Nuclear Plants to Assess Plant Conditions During and Following an Accident, December 1975 and NUREG 0578, TMI-2 Lessons Learned Task Force Status Report and Short-Term Recommendations."

3/4.3.7 DELETED 3/4.3.8 DELETED

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 6

BASES ATTACHMENT 6 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 Before use, verify revision and change documentation DATE VERIFIED__________ INITIAL__________

SAFETY RELATED 17 INFORMATION USE FOR INFORMATION ONLY Title:

REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM Responsible Department: Licensing (if applicable) with a controlled index or document.

REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 17 - Incorporated PCR 2210011 based on NRC approval of TSTF-545.

(Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 16 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 15 - Incorporated PCR 2139246 to correct cut and paste error in Section 3/4.4.9.

(Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 14 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verbiage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 13 - Incorporated PCR 1996408 to remove Technical Specification Limiting Condition for Operation 3/4.4.7, Chemistry. The requirements will be relocated to the UFSAR. (Author: J. Phillabaum)

Revision 12 - Incorporated PCR 02071738 for TSTF-426 as part of the original LAR review and approval (L-2014-160). (Author: M DiMarco)

Revision 11 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 10 - Incorporated PCR 1948027 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.4 SYS 17 R. Wright 07/07/16 STATUS COMPLETED REV 17

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.4 ............................................................................. 3 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM ............................................................. 3 BASES ............................................................................................................... 3 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION ... 3 3/4.4.2 SAFETY VALVES ........................................................................... 6 3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER ............................................................................... 7 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY ........................... 10 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE ................................. 19 3/4.4.7 DELETED ...................................................................................... 34 3/4.4.8 SPECIFIC ACTIVITY ..................................................................... 34 3/4.4.9 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITS .......................................... 36 3/4.4.10 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM VENTS ...................................... 38 TABLE B 3/4.4-1 REACTOR VESSEL TOUGHNESS ................................. 39 3/4.4.11 STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY .......................................................... 40

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.4 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM BASES 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION The plant is designed to operate with both reactor coolant loops and associated reactor coolant pumps in operation, and maintain DNBR above the DNBR limit during all normal operations and anticipated transients. In MODES 1 and 2 with one reactor coolant loop not in operation, this specification requires that the plant be in at least HOT STANDBY within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

In MODE 3, a single reactor coolant loop provides sufficient heat removal capability for removing decay heat; however, single failure considerations require that two loops be OPERABLE.

In MODE 4, and in MODE 5 with reactor coolant loops filled, a single reactor coolant loop or shutdown cooling loop provides sufficient heat removal capability for removing decay heat; but single failure considerations require that at least two loops (either shutdown cooling or RCS) be OPERABLE.

Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.

In MODE 5 with reactor coolant loops not filled, a single shutdown cooling loop provides sufficient heat removal capability for removing decay heat; but single failure considerations and the unavailability of the steam generators as a heat removing component, require that at least two shutdown cooling loops be OPERABLE. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.

The operation of one reactor coolant pump or one shutdown cooling pump provides adequate flow to ensure mixing, prevent stratification and produce gradual reactivity changes during boron concentration reductions in the Reactor Coolant System. The reactivity change rate associated with boron reductions will, therefore, be within the capability of operator recognition and control.

If no coolant loops are in operation during shutdown operations, suspending the introduction of coolant into the RCS with boron concentration less than required to meet the minimum SDM of LCO 3.1.1.1 or 3.1.1.2 is required to assure continued safe operation. Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than what would be required in the RCS for minimum SDM or refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operation.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)

If only one required shutdown cooling train is OPERABLE and in operation and no required RCS loops are OPERABLE, redundancy for heat removal is lost and the plant must be placed in a configuration that minimizes overall plant risk. This redundancy is obtained by making at least one steam generator available for decay heat removal via natural circulation because:

1. MODE 4 operation poses overall lower risk of core damage and large early radiation release than does MODE 5 (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). This is particularly true with shutdown cooling impaired.
2. In MODE 4, RCS and steam generator conditions may be maintained such that failure of the operating shutdown cooling train may be mitigated by natural circulation heat removal through one or more steam generators.

Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in MODE 4 is similar to or lower than MODE 5 (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001).

However, voluntary entry into MODE 5 may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met. However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)

The restriction on starting a reactor coolant pump in MODES 4 and 5, with two idle loops and one or more RCS cold leg temperatures less than or equal to that specified in Table 3.4-3 is provided to prevent RCS pressure transients, caused by energy additions from the secondary system from exceeding the limits of Appendix G to 10 CFR 50. The RCS will be protected against overpressure transients by (1) sizing each PORV to mitigate the pressure transient of an inadvertent safety injection actuation in a water-solid RCS with pressurizer heaters energized, (2) restricting starting of the RCPs to when the secondary water temperature of each steam generator is less than 40F above each of the RCS cold leg temperatures, (3) using SDCRVs to mitigate RCP start transients and the transients caused by inadvertent SIAS actuation and charging water, and (4) rendering one HPSI pump inoperable when the RCS is at low temperatures.

Shutdown Cooling System piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the required shutdown cooling loops and may also prevent water hammer, pump cavitation, and pumping of non-condensible gas into the reactor vessel.

Selection of Shutdown Cooling System locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The design review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become sources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration. Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.

The Shutdown Cooling System is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumulated gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible location (or the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the Shutdown Cooling System is not rendered inoperable by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met.

Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.1 REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)

Shutdown Cooling System locations susceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found, the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location. Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of susceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or environmental conditions, plant configuration, or personnel safety concerns.

For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible locations where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The accuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.

SR 4.4.1.3.4 is modified by a Note that states the Surveillance Requirement is not required to be performed until 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> after entering MODE 4. In a rapid shutdown, there may be insufficient time to verify all susceptible locations prior to entering MODE 4.

The Surveillance Frequency Control Program frequency for ensuring locations are sufficiently filled with water takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the SDC System piping and the procedural controls governing system operation.

3/4.4.2 SAFETY VALVES The pressurizer code safety valves operate to prevent the RCS from being pressurized above its Safety Limit of 2750 psia. Each safety valve is designed to relieve 212,182 lbs per hour of saturated steam at the valve setpoint. The relief capacity of a single safety valve is adequate to relieve any overpressure condition which could occur during shutdown. In the event that no safety valves are OPERABLE, an operating shutdown cooling loop, connected to the RCS, provides overpressure relief capability and will prevent RCS overpressurization. In addition, the Overpressure Protection System provides a diverse means of protection against RCS overpressurization at low temperatures.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 7 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.2 SAFETY VALVES (continued)

During operation, all pressurizer code safety valves must be OPERABLE to prevent the RCS from being pressurized above its safety limit of 2750 psia.

The combined relief capacity of these valves is sufficient to limit the system pressure to within its Safety Limit of 2750 psia following a complete loss of turbine generator load while operating at RATED THERMAL POWER and assuming no reactor trip until the first Reactor Protective System trip setpoint (Pressurizer Pressure-High) is reached (i.e., no credit is taken for a direct reactor trip on the loss of turbine) and also assuming no operation of the pressurizer power-operated relief valve or steam dump valves.

Surveillance Requirements are specified in the INSERVICE TESTING PROGRAM. Pressurizer code safety valves are to be tested in accordance with the requirements of Section XI of the ASME Code, which provides the activities and the frequency necessary to satisfy the Surveillance Requirements. No additional requirements are specified.

The pressurizer code safety valve as-found setpoint is 2500 psia +/- 3% for OPERABILITY; however, the valves are reset to 2500 psia +/- 1% during the Surveillance to allow for drift. The LCO is expressed in units of psig for consistency with implementing procedures.

3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER A OPERABLE pressurizer provides pressure control for the Reactor Coolant System during operations with both forced reactor coolant flow and with natural circulation flow. The minimum water level in the pressurizer assures the pressurizer heaters, which are required to achieve and maintain pressure control, remain covered with water to prevent failure, which could occur if the heaters were energized uncovered. The maximum water level in the pressurizer ensures that this parameter is maintained within the envelope of operation assumed in the safety analysis. The maximum water level also ensures that the RCS is not a hydraulically solid system and that a steam bubble will be provided to accommodate pressure surges during operation.

The steam bubble also protects the pressurizer code safety valves against water relief. The requirement to verify that on an Engineered Safety Features Actuation test signal concurrent with a loss of offsite power the pressurizer heaters are automatically shed from the emergency power sources is to ensure that the non-Class 1E heaters do not reduce the reliability of or overload the emergency power source. The requirement that a minimum number of pressurizer heaters be OPERABLE enhances the capability to control Reactor Coolant System pressure and establish and maintain natural circulation.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 8 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.3 PRESSURIZER (continued)

If two required groups of pressurizer heaters are inoperable, restoring at least one group of pressurizer heaters to OPERABLE status is required within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second group of required pressurized heaters is intentionally declared inoperable. The Action is not intended for voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one group of required pressurized heaters is inoperable for any reason and the second group of required pressurized heaters is discovered to be inoperable, or if both groups of required pressurized heaters are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. If both required groups of pressurizer heaters are inoperable, the pressurizer heaters may not be available to help maintain subcooling in the RCS loops during a natural circulation cooldown following a loss of offsite power. The inoperability of two groups of required pressurizer heaters during the 24-hours Allowed Outage Time has been shown to be acceptable based on the infrequent use of the Action and the small incremental effects on plant risk (Reference 1).

References

1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected technical Specifications for Conditions Leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown, Revision 2, August 2010.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 9 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.4 PORV BLOCK VALVES The power-operated relief valves (PORVs) and steam bubble function to relieve RCS pressure during all design transients up to and including the design step load decrease with steam dump. Operation of the PORVs in conjunction with a reactor trip on a Pressurizer Pressure-High signal minimizes the undesirable opening of the spring-loaded pressurizer code safety valves. The opening of the PORVs fulfills no safety-related function and no credit is taken for their operation in the safety analysis for MODE 1, 2, or 3.

Each PORV has a remotely operated block valve to provide a positive shutoff capability should a relief valve become inoperable. Since it is impractical and undesirable to actually open the PORVs to demonstrate their reclosing, it becomes necessary to verify OPERABILITY of the PORV block valves to ensure capability to isolate a malfunctioning PORV. As the PORVs are pilot operated and require some system pressure to operate, it is impractical to test them with the block valve closed.

The PORVs are sized to provide low temperature overpressure protection (LTOP). Since both PORVs must be OPERABLE when used for LTOP, both block valves will be open during operation with the LTOP range. As the PORV capacity required to perform the LTOP function is excessive for operation in MODE 1, 2, or 3, it is necessary that the operation of more than one PORV be precluded during these MODES. Thus, one block valve must be shut during MODES 1, 2, and 3.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 10 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY

Background

Steam generator (SG) tubes are small diameter, thin walled tubes that carry primary coolant through the primary to secondary heat exchangers. The SG tubes have a number of important safety functions. SG tubes are an integral part of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) and, as such, are relied on to maintain the primary system's pressure and inventory. The SG tubes isolate the radioactive fission products in the primary coolant from the secondary system. In addition, as part of the RCPB, the SG tubes are unique in that they act as the heat transfer surface between the primary and secondary systems to remove heat from the primary system. This Specification addresses only the RCPB integrity function of the SG. The SG heat removal function is addressed by LCO 3.4.1.1, "Reactor Coolant Loops and Coolant Circulation, Startup and Power Operation," LCO 3.4.1.2, "Hot Standby," LCO 3.4.1.3, "Hot Shutdown," LCO 3.4.1.4.1, "Cold Shutdown

- Loops Filled," and LCO 3.4.1.4.2, "Cold Shutdown - Loops Not Filled."

SG tube integrity means that the tubes are capable of performing their intended RCPB safety function consistent with the licensing basis, including applicable regulatory requirements.

SG tubing is subject to a variety of degradation mechanism. SG tubes may experience tube degradation related to corrosion phenomena, such as wastage, pitting, intergranular attack, and stress corrosion cracking, along with other mechanically induced phenomena such as denting and wear.

These degradation mechanisms can impair tube integrity if they are not managed effectively. The SG performance criteria are used to manage SG tube degradation.

Specification 6.8.4.l, "Steam Generator (SG) Program," requires that a program be established and implemented to ensure that SG tube integrity is maintained. Pursuant to Specification 6.8.4.l, tube integrity is maintained when the SG performance criteria are met. There are three SG performance criteria: structural integrity, accident induced leakage, and operational leakage. The SG performance criteria are described in Specification 6.8.4.l.

Meeting the SG performance criteria provides reasonable assurance of maintaining tube integrity at normal and accident conditions.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 11 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)

Background (continued)

Specification 6.8.4.l has two parts to address the replacement SG and original SG designs. Specification 6.8.4.l.1. applies to the replacement SG design. TS 6.8.4.l.2 applies to the original SGs and contains requirements such as a sleeving repair method, alternate repair criteria and additional inspection requirements, which apply only to the original SG design and can be removed following SG replacement.

The processes used to meet the SG performance criteria are defined by the Steam Generator Program Guidelines (Ref. 1).

Applicable Safety Analyses The steam generator tube rupture (SGTR) accident is the limiting design basis event for SG tubes and avoiding a SGTR is the basis for this Specification. The analysis of a SGTR event assumes a bounding primary-to-secondary leakage rate equal to the operational leakage rate limits in LCO 3.4.6.2, "Reactor Coolant System Operational Leakage," plus the leakage rate associated with a double-ended rupture of a single tube.

The accident analysis for a SGTR assumes that contaminated secondary fluid is released via the main steam safety valves and/or atmospheric dump valves. The majority of the activity released to the atmosphere results from the tube rupture.

The analysis for design basis accidents and transients other than a SGTR assume the SG tubes retain their structural integrity (i.e., they are assumed not to rupture). In these analyses the activity in the steam discharged to the atmosphere is based on two sources: 1) the total primary-to-secondary leakage from all SGs of 0.5 gpm total and 0.25 gpm through any one SG as a result of accident induced conditions and 2) the pre-existing secondary side fluid inventory. For accidents that do not involve fuel damage, the primary coolant activity is assumed to be equal to the limits in LCO 3.4.8, "Reactor Coolant System Specific Activity," and the secondary coolant system activity is assumed to be equal to the limits in LCO 3.7.1.4, Plant Systems - Activity."

For accidents that assume fuel damage, the primary coolant activity is a function of the amount of activity released from the damaged fuel. The dose consequences of these events are within the limits of GDC 19 (Ref. 2) and the requirements of 10 CFR 50.67 (Ref. 7).

Steam generator tube integrity satisfies Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 12 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)

Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO)

The LCO requires that SG tube integrity be maintained. The LCO also requires that all SG tubes that satisfy the repair criteria be plugged or repaired in accordance with the Steam Generator Program.

During a SG inspection, any inspected tube that satisfies the Steam Generator Program repair criteria is repaired or removed from service by plugging. If a tube was determined to satisfy the repair criteria but was not plugged or repaired, the tube may still have tube integrity. Tube repair (i.e., sleeving) is applicable only to the original SGs.

In the context of this Specification, a SG tube for the replacement SGs is defined as the entire length of the tube, including the tube wall, between the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube inlet and the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube outlet. For the original SGs, when the alternate repair criteria in TS Section 6.8.4.l.2.c.4 are applied a SG tube is defined as the length of the tube, including the tube wall and any repairs made to it, between 10.3 inches below the bottom of the hot leg expansion transition or top of the tubesheet (whichever is lower) and the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube outlet. If a portion of a tube sleeve extends below 10.3 inches from the bottom of the hot leg expansion transition or the top of the tubesheet (whichever is lower) a SG tube is defined as the length of the tube between the bottom of the sleeve to the tube-to-tubesheet weld at the tube outlet. The tube-to-tubesheet weld is not considered part of the tube.

A SG tube has tube integrity when it satisfies the SG performance criteria.

The SG performance criteria are defined in Specification 6.8.4.l., "Steam Generator Program," and describe acceptable SG tube performance. The Steam Generator Program also provides the evaluation process for determining conformance with the SG performance criteria.

There are three SG performance criteria: structural integrity, accident induced leakage, and operational leakage. Failure to meet any one of these criteria is considered failure to meet the LCO.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 13 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)

Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO) (continued)

The structural integrity performance criterion provides a margin of safety against tube burst or collapse under normal and accident conditions, and ensures structural integrity of the SG tubes under all anticipated transients included in the design specification. Tube burst is defined as, "The gross structural failure of the tube wall. The condition typically corresponds to an unstable opening displacement (e.g., opening area increased in response to constant pressure) accompanied by ductile (plastic) tearing of the tube material at the ends of the degradation." Tube collapse is defined as, "For the load displacement curve for a given structure, collapse occurs at the top of the load versus displacement curve where the slope of the curve becomes zero." The structural integrity performance criterion provides guidance on assessing loads that have a significant effect on burst or collapse. In that context, the term "significant" is defined as "An accident loading condition other than differential pressure is considered significant when the addition of such loads in the assessment of the structural integrity performance criterion could cause a lower structural limit or limiting burst/collapse condition to be established." For tube integrity evaluations, except for circumferential degradation, axial thermal loads are classified as secondary loads. For circumferential degradation, the classification of axial thermal loads as primary or secondary loads will be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. The division between primary and secondary classifications will be based on detailed analysis and/or testing.

Structural integrity requires that the primary membrane stress intensity in a tube not exceed the yield strength for all ASME Code,Section III, Service Level A (normal operating conditions) and Service Level B (upset or abnormal conditions) transients included in the design specification. This includes safety factors and applicable design basis loads based on ASME Code,Section III, Subsection NB (Ref. 4) and Draft Regulatory Guide 1.121 (Ref. 5).

The accident induced leakage performance criterion ensures that the primary-to-secondary leakage caused by a design basis accident, other than a SGTR, is within the accident analysis assumptions. The accident analysis assumes that accident induced leakage does not exceed 0.5 gpm total and 0.25 gpm through any one SG. The accident induced leakage rate includes any primary-to-secondary leakage existing prior to the accident in addition to primary-to-secondary leakage induced during the accident.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 14 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)

Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO) (continued)

The operational leakage performance criterion provides an observable indication of SG tube conditions during plant operation. The limit on operational leakage is contained in LCO 3.4.6.2, "Reactor Coolant System operational leakage," and limits primary-to-secondary leakage through any one SG to 150 gpd at room temperature. This limit is based on the assumption that a single crack leaking this amount would not propagate to a SGTR under the stress conditions of a LOCA or a main steam line break.

If this amount of leakage is due to more than one crack, the cracks are very small, and the above assumption is conservative.

Applicability SG tube integrity is challenged when the pressure differential across the tubes is large. Large differential pressures across SG tubes can only be experienced in POWER OPERATION, STARTUP, HOT STANDBY and HOT SHUTDOWN.

RCS conditions are far less challenging in COLD SHUTDOWN and REFUELING than during POWER OPERATION, STARTUP, HOT STANDBY and HOT SHUTDOWN. In COLD SHUTDOWN and REFUELING, primary-to-secondary differential pressure is low, resulting in lower stresses and reduced potential for leakage.

ACTIONS The ACTIONS are modified by a Note clarifying that the CONDITIONS may be entered independently for each SG tube. This is acceptable because the required ACTIONS provide appropriate compensatory actions for each affected SG tube. Complying with the required ACTIONS may allow for continued operation, and subsequently affected SG tubes are governed by subsequent Condition entry and application of associated required ACTIONS.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 15 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)

ACTIONS (continued) a.1 and a.2 ACTIONS a.1 and a.2 apply if it is discovered that one or more SG tubes examined in an inservice inspection satisfy the tube repair criteria but were not plugged or repaired in accordance with the Steam Generator Program as required by Surveillance Requirement (SR) 4.4.5.2. Tube repair (i.e., sleeving) is applicable only to the original SGs. An evaluation of SG tube integrity of the affected tube(s) must be made. SG tube integrity is based on meeting the SG performance criteria described in the Steam Generator Program. The SG repair criteria define limits on SG tube degradation that allow for flaw growth between inspections while still providing assurance that the SG performance criteria will continue to be met.

In order to determine if a SG tube that should have been plugged or repaired has tube integrity, an evaluation must be completed that demonstrates that the SG performance criteria will continue to be met until the next refueling outage or SG tube inspection. The tube integrity determination is based on the estimated condition of the tube at the time the situation is discovered and the estimated growth of the degradation prior to the next SG tube inspection.

If it is determined that tube integrity is not being maintained, ACTION b applies.

An allowable completion time of seven days is sufficient to complete the evaluation while minimizing the risk of plant operation with a SG tube that may not have tube integrity.

If the evaluation determines that the affected tube(s) have tube integrity, ACTION a.2 allows plant operation to continue until the next refueling outage or SG inspection provided the inspection interval continues to be supported by an operational assessment that reflects the affected tubes. However, the affected tube(s) must be plugged or repaired prior to entering HOT SHUTDOWN following the next refueling outage or SG inspection. This allowable completion time is acceptable since operation until the next inspection is supported by the operational assessment.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 16 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)

ACTIONS (continued) b.

If the requirements and associated completion time of ACTION a are not met or if SG tube integrity is not being maintained, the reactor must be brought to HOT STANDBY within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and COLD SHUTDOWN within the next 30 hours3.472222e-4 days <br />0.00833 hours <br />4.960317e-5 weeks <br />1.1415e-5 months <br />. The allowable completion times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the desired plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

Surveillance Requirements SR 4.4.5.1 During shutdown periods the SGs are inspected as required by this SR and the Steam Generator Program. NEI 97-06, "Steam Generator Program Guidelines" (Ref. 1), and its referenced EPRI Guidelines, establish the content of the Steam Generator Program. Use of the Steam Generator program ensures that the inspection is appropriate and consistent with accepted industry practices.

During SG inspections a condition monitoring assessment of the SG tubes is performed. The condition monitoring assessment determines the "as found" condition of the SG tubes. The purpose of the condition monitoring assessment is to ensure that the SG performance criteria have been met for the previous operating period.

The Steam Generator Program determines the scope of the inspection and the methods used to determine whether the tubes contain flaws satisfying the tube repair criteria. Inspection scope (i.e., which tubes or areas of tubing within the SG are to be inspected) is a function of existing and potential degradation locations. The Steam Generator Program also specifies the inspection methods to be used to find potential degradation. Inspection methods are a function of degradation morphology, non-destructive examination (NDE) technique capabilities, and inspection locations.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 17 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)

Surveillance Requirements (continued)

The Steam Generator Program defines the frequency of SR 4.4.5.1.

The frequency is determined by the operational assessment and other limits in the SG examination guidelines (Ref. 6). The Steam Generator Program uses information on existing degradations and growth rates to determine an inspection frequency that provides reasonable assurance that the tubing will meet the SG performance criteria at the next scheduled inspection.

In addition, Specification 6.8.4.l contains prescriptive requirements concerning inspection intervals to provide added assurance that the SG performance criteria will be met between scheduled inspections.

SR 4.4.5.2 During a SG inspection any inspected tube that satisfies the Steam Generator Program repair criteria is repaired or removed from service by plugging. The tube repair criteria delineated in Specification 6.8.4.I are intended to ensure that tubes accepted for continued service satisfy the SG performance criteria with allowance for error in the flaw size measurement and for future flaw growth. In addition, the tube repair criteria, in conjunction with other elements of the Steam Generator Program, ensure that the SG performance criteria will continue to be met until the next inspection of the subject tube(s). Reference 1 provides guidance for performing operational assessments to verify that the tubes remaining in service will continue to meet the SG performance criteria.

Steam generator tube repairs are only performed using approved repair methods as described in the Steam Generator Program (Specification 6.8.4.l.2.). Tube repair (i.e., sleeving) is applicable only to original SGs.

The frequency of prior to entering HOT SHUTDOWN following a SG tube inspection ensures that the Surveillance has been completed and all tubes meeting the repair criteria are plugged or repaired prior to subjecting the SG tubes to significant primary-to-secondary pressure differential.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 18 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.5 STEAM GENERATOR (SG) TUBE INTEGRITY (continued)

References

1. NEI 97-06, "Steam Generator Program Guidelines"
2. 10 CFR 50 Appendix A, GDC 19
3. Deleted
4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,Section III, Subsection NB
5. Draft Regulatory Guide 1.121, "Bases for Plugging Degraded PWR Steam Generator Tubes," August 1976
6. EPRI "Pressurized Water Reactor Steam Generator Examination Guidelines"
7. 10 CFR 50.67

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 19 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS BACKGROUND GDC 30 of Appendix A to 10 CFR 50 requires means for detecting and, to the extent practical, identifying the location of the source of RCS LEAKAGE. Regulatory Guide 1.45, Revision 0, describes acceptable methods for selecting leakage detection systems. Leakage detection systems must have the capability to detect significant reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) degradation as soon after occurrence as practical to minimize the potential for propagation to a gross failure. Thus, an early indication or warning signal is necessary to permit proper evaluation of all unidentified LEAKAGE.

The containment sump used to collect unidentified LEAKAGE is instrumented to alarm for increases in the normal flow rates.

The reactor coolant contains radioactivity that, when released to the containment, may be detected by radiation monitoring instrumentation.

Radioactivity detection systems are included for monitoring both particulate and gaseous activities, because of their sensitivities and rapid responses to RCS LEAKAGE.

Other indications may be used to detect an increase in unidentified LEAKAGE; however, they are not required to be OPERABLE by this LCO.

An increase in humidity of the containment atmosphere would indicate release of water vapor to the containment. Dew point temperature measurements can thus be used to monitor humidity levels of the containment atmosphere as an indicator of potential RCS LEAKAGE.

Since the humidity level is influenced by several factors, a quantitative evaluation of an indicated leakage rate by this means may be questionable and should be compared to observed increases in liquid flow into or from the containment sump. Humidity level monitoring is considered most useful as an indirect alarm or indication to alert the operator to a potential problem.

Humidity monitors are not required by this LCO.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 20 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)

BACKGROUND (continued)

Air temperature and pressure monitoring methods may also be used to infer unidentified LEAKAGE to the containment. Containment temperature and pressure fluctuate slightly during plant operation, but a rise above the normally indicated range of values may indicate RCS LEAKAGE into the containment. The relevance of temperature and pressure measurements is affected by containment free volume and, for temperature, detector location. Alarm signals from these instruments can be valuable in recognizing rapid and sizable leakage to the containment. Temperature and pressure monitors are not required by this LCO.

The above-mentioned LEAKAGE detection methods or systems differ in sensitivity and response time.

APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSIS The need to evaluate the severity of an alarm or an indication is important to the operators, and the ability to compare and verify with indications from other systems is necessary.

The safety significance of RCS LEAKAGE varies widely depending on its source, rate, and duration. Therefore, detecting and monitoring RCS LEAKAGE into the containment area are necessary. Quickly separating the identified LEAKAGE from the unidentified LEAKAGE provides quantitative information to the operators, allowing them to take corrective action should leakage occur detrimental to the safety of the facility and the public.

RCS leakage detection instrumentation satisfies Criterion 1 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

LCO This LCO requires instruments of diverse monitoring principles to be OPERABLE to provide confidence that small amounts of unidentified LEAKAGE are detected in time to allow actions to place the plant in a safe condition when RCS LEAKAGE indicates possible RCPB degradation.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 21 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)

LCO (continued)

The LCO requires instruments to be OPERABLE. The containment sump is used to collect unidentified LEAKAGE. The monitor on the containment sump detects flow rate and is instrumented to detect when there is leakage of 1 gpm. The identification of unidentified LEAKAGE will be delayed by the time required for the unidentified LEAKAGE to travel to the containment sump and it may take longer than one hour to detect a 1 gpm increase in unidentified LEAKAGE, depending on the origin and magnitude of the LEAKAGE. This sensitivity is acceptable for containment sump monitor OPERABILITY.

The reactor coolant contains radioactivity that, when released to the containment, can be detected by the gaseous or particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitor. Only one of the two detectors is required to be OPERABLE. Radioactivity detection systems are included for monitoring both particulate and gaseous activities because of their sensitivities and rapid responses to RCS LEAKAGE, but have recognized limitations. Reactor coolant radioactivity levels will be low during initial reactor startup and for a few weeks thereafter, until activated corrosion products have been formed and fission products appear from fuel element cladding contamination or cladding defects. If there are few fuel element cladding defects and low levels of activation products, it may not be possible for the gaseous or particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitors to detect a 1 gpm increase within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> during normal operation. However, the gaseous or particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitor is OPERABLE when it is capable of detecting a 1 gpm increase in unidentified LEAKAGE within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> given an RCS activity equivalent to that assumed in the design calculations for the monitors.

The LCO is satisfied when monitors of diverse measurement means are available. Thus, the containment sump monitor, in combination with a particulate or gaseous radioactivity monitor, provides an acceptable minimum. APPLICABILITY Because of elevated RCS temperature and pressure in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, RCS leakage detection instrumentation is required to be OPERABLE.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 22 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)

LCO (continued)

In MODE 5 or 6, the temperature is 200°F and pressure is maintained low or at atmospheric pressure. Since the temperatures and pressures are far lower than those for MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the likelihood of leakage and crack propagation is much smaller. Therefore, the requirements of this LCO are not applicable in MODES 5 and 6.

ACTION a If the containment sump monitor is inoperable, no other form of sampling can provide the equivalent information.

For this action, the containment atmosphere particulate radioactivity monitor will provide indications of changes in leakage. Together with the containment particulate atmosphere radioactivity monitor, the periodic surveillance for RCS water inventory balance must be performed at an increased frequency of 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to provide information that is adequate to detect leakage. A Note is added allowing that the RCS water inventory balance is not required to be performed until 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> after establishing steady state operation (stable temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and RCP seal injection and return flows). The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established.

Restoration of the sump monitor to OPERABLE status is required to regain the function in an allowed outage time of 30 days after the monitor's failure.

This time is acceptable considering the frequency and adequacy of the RCS water inventory balance required by this action.

ACTION b If the containment sump monitor is inoperable, no other form of sampling can provide the equivalent information.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 23 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)

ACTION b (continued)

For this action, the containment atmosphere gaseous radioactivity monitor will provide indications of changes in leakage. Together with the containment gaseous atmosphere radioactivity monitor, the periodic surveillance for RCS water inventory balance must be performed at an increased frequency of 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to provide information that is adequate to detect leakage. A Note is added allowing that the RCS water inventory balance is not required to be performed until 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> after establishing steady state operation (stable temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and RCP seal injection and return flows). The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established.

However, the containment atmosphere gaseous radioactivity monitor typically cannot detect a 1 gpm leak within one hour when RCS activity is low. In addition, this configuration does not provide the required diverse means of leakage detection. Indirect methods of monitoring RCS leakage must be implemented. Grab samples of the containment atmosphere must be taken and analyzed must be performed every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> to provide alternate periodic information. The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> interval is sufficient to detect increasing RCS leakage.

The action provides 7 days to restore another RCS leakage monitor to OPERABLE status to regain the intended leakage detection diversity. If the sump monitor is recovered, the action is exited. If the containment atmosphere particulate radioactivity monitor is restored, the action b is exited, the time spent in action b is subtracted from the 30-day allowed outage time of action a, and action a is entered. The 7 day allowed outage time ensures that the plant will not be operated in a degraded configuration for a lengthy time period.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 24 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.1 LEAKAGE DETECTION SYSTEMS (continued)

ACTION c With both gaseous and particulate containment atmosphere radioactivity monitoring instrumentation channels inoperable, alternative action is required. Either grab samples of the containment atmosphere must be taken and analyzed, or water inventory balances, must be performed to provide alternate periodic information. With a sample obtained and analyzed or an inventory balance performed every 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />, the reactor may be operated for up to 30 days to allow restoration of at least one of the radioactivity monitors.

The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> interval provides periodic information that is adequate to detect leakage. A Note is added allowing that the RCS water inventory balance is not required to be performed until 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> after establishing steady state operation (stable temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and RCP seal injection and return flows). The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established. The 30 day Completion Time recognizes at least one other form of leakage detection is available.

ACTION d If all required monitors are inoperable, no automatic means of monitoring leakage are available and immediate plant shutdown in accordance with LCO 3.0.3 is required.

SURVEILLANCE SR 4.4.6.1 REQUIREMENTS SR 4.4.6.1 requires the performance of CHANNEL CHECKs, CHANNEL FUNCTIONAL TESTs, and CHANNEL CALIBRATIONs of the required leakage detection monitors. These checks give reasonable confidence the channels are operating properly.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 25 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE

Background

Components that contain or transport the coolant to or from the reactor core make up the reactor coolant system (RCS). Component joints are made by welding, bolting, rolling, or pressure loading, and valves isolate connecting systems from the RCS.

During plant life, the joint and valve interfaces can produce varying amounts of reactor coolant leakage, through either normal operational wear or mechanical deterioration. The purpose of the RCS operational leakage LCO is to limit system operation in the presence of leakage from these sources to amounts that do not compromise safety. This LCO specifies the types and amounts of leakage.

10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 30 (Ref. 1), requires means for detecting and, to the extent practical, identifying the sources of reactor coolant leakage.

Regulatory Guide 1.45 (Ref. 2) describes acceptable methods for selecting leakage detection systems.

The safety significance of RCS leakage varies widely depending on its source, rate, and duration. Therefore, detecting and monitoring reactor coolant leakage into the containment area is necessary. Quickly separating the IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE from the UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is necessary to provide quantitative information to the operators, allowing them to take corrective action should a leak occur that is detrimental to the safety of the facility and the public.

A limited amount of leakage inside containment is expected from auxiliary systems that cannot be made 100% leaktight. Leakage from these systems should be detected, located, and isolated from the containment atmosphere, if possible, to not interfere with RCS leakage detection.

This LCO deals with protection of the reactor coolant pressure boundary (RCPB) from degradation and the core from inadequate cooling, in addition to preventing the accident analyses radiation release assumptions from being exceeded. The consequences of violating this LCO include the possibility of a loss of coolant accident (LOCA).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 26 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)

Applicable Safety Analyses The safety analysis for an event resulting in steam discharge to the atmosphere assumes that primary to secondary leakage from all steam generators (SGs) is 0.5 gpm total through all SGs and 0.25 gpm through any one SG or is assumed to increase to 0.5 gpm total through all SGs and 0.25 gpm through any one SG as a result of accident induced conditions.

The LCO requirements to limit primary-to-secondary leakage through any one steam generator to less than or equal to 150 gpd is based on room temperature conditions. When this value is adjusted for operating conditions, it is less than the leakage limit of 0.25 gpm (measured at operating temperature) through any one SG assumed in the accident analysis.

Primary to secondary leakage is a factor in the dose releases outside containment resulting from a steam line break (SLB) accident. To a lesser extent, other accidents or transients involve secondary steam release to the atmosphere, such as a steam generator tube rupture (SGTR). The leakage contaminates the secondary fluid.

The UFSAR (Ref. 3) analysis for SGTR assumes the contaminated secondary fluid is released mainly via the safety valves or atmospheric dump valves and only briefly steamed to the condenser. The 0.5 gpm total through all SGs and 0.25 gpm through any one SG primary to secondary leakage safety analysis assumption is relatively inconsequential.

The SLB is more limiting for site radiation releases. The safety analysis for the SLB accident assumes a value of 0.25 gpm primary to secondary leakage through each generator as an initial condition. The dose consequences resulting from the SLB accident are well within the limits defined in GDC 19 and the requirements of 10 CFR 50.67.

The RCS operational leakage satisfies Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 27 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)

Limiting Condition for Operation (LCO)

Reactor Coolant System operational leakage shall be limited to:

a. PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE No PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE is allowed, being indicative of material deterioration. Leakage of this type is unacceptable as the leak itself could cause further deterioration, resulting in higher leakage. Violation of this LCO could result in continued degradation of the RCPB. Leakage past seals and gaskets is not PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE.
b. UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE One gallon per minute (gpm) of UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is allowed as a reasonable minimum detectable amount that the containment air monitoring and containment sump level monitoring equipment can detect within a reasonable time period. Violation of this LCO could result in continued degradation of the RCPB, if the leakage is from the pressure boundary.
c. Primary-to-Secondary Leakage Through Any One Steam Generator The limit of 150 gpm per steam generator is based on the operational leakage performance criterion in NEI 97-06, Steam Generator Program Guidelines (Ref. 4). The Steam Generator Program operational leakage performance criterion in NEI 97-06 states, "The RCS operational primary-to-secondary leakage through any one steam generator shall be limited to 150 gallons per day." The limit is based on operating experience with steam generator tube degradation mechanisms that result in tube leakage. The operational leakage rate criterion is conjunction with the implementation of the Steam Generator Program is an effective measure for minimizing the frequency of steam generator tube ruptures.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 28 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)

d. IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE Up to 10 gpm of IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is considered allowable because leakage is from known sources that do not interfere with detection of UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and is well within the capability of the Reactor Coolant System Makeup System. IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE includes leakage to the containment from specifically know and located sources, but does not include PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE or controlled reactor coolant pump seal leakoff (a normal function not considered leakage). Violation of this LCO could result in continued degradation of a component or system.

Reactor Coolant System Pressure Isolation Valve Leakage Leakage is measured through each individual PIV and can impact this LCO.

Of the two PIVs in series in each isolated line, leakage measured through one PIV does not result in RCS Leakage when the other is leaktight. If both valves leak and result in a loss of mass from the RCS, the loss must be included in the allowable IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE.

Applicability In POWER OPERATION, STARTUP, HOT STANDBY and HOT SHUTDOWN, the potential for PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE is greatest when the RCS is pressurized.

In COLD SHUTDOWN and REFUELING, leakage limits are not required because the reactor coolant pressure is far lower, resulting in lower stresses and reduced potentials for leakage.

ACTIONS a.

If any PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE exists, or primary-to-secondary leakage is not within limit, the reactor must be brought to HOT STANDBY with 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours3.472222e-4 days <br />0.00833 hours <br />4.960317e-5 weeks <br />1.1415e-5 months <br />. This ACTION reduces the leakage and also reduces the factors that tend to degrade the pressure boundary.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 29 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)

ACTIONS (continued) b.

UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE or IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is excess of the LCO limits must be reduced to within the limits within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />. This allows time to verify leakage rates and either identify UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE or reduce leakage to within limits before the reactor must be shut down. Otherwise, the reactor must be brought to HOT STANDBY within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours3.472222e-4 days <br />0.00833 hours <br />4.960317e-5 weeks <br />1.1415e-5 months <br />. This ACTION is necessary to prevent further deterioration of the Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary.

c.

The leakage from any RCS Pressure Isolation Valve is sufficiently low to ensure early detection of possible in-series valve failure. It is apparent that when pressure isolation is provided by two manual or deactivated automatic valves and when failure of one valve in the pair can go undetected for a substantial length of time, verification of valve integrity is required. With one or more RCS Pressure Isolation Valves with leakage greater than that allowed by Specification 3.4.6.2.e, within 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br />, at least two valves in each high pressure line having a non-functional valve must be closed and remain closed to isolate the affected line(s). In addition, the ACTION statement for the affected system must be followed and the leakage from the remaining Pressure Isolation Valves in each high pressure line having a valve not meeting the criteria of Table 3.4-1 shall be recorded daily. If these requirements are not met, the reactor must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and COLD SHUTDOWN within the following 30 hours3.472222e-4 days <br />0.00833 hours <br />4.960317e-5 weeks <br />1.1415e-5 months <br />.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 30 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)

ACTIONS (continued) d.

With RCS leakage alarmed and confirmed in a flow path with no flow indication, commencement of an RCS water inventory balance is required within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> to determine the leak rate. This action is not applicable to primary-to-secondary leakage.

The allowed completion times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems. In COLD SHUTDOWN, the pressure stresses acting on the Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary are much lower, and further deterioration is much less likely.

Surveillance Requirements 4.4.6.2.1 Verifying Reactor Coolant System leakage to be within the LCO limits ensures the integrity of the Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary is maintained. PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE would at first appear as UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and can only be positively identified by inspection. It should be noted that leakage past seals and gaskets is not PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE. UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE are determined by performance of a Reactor Coolant System water inventory balance.

a. and b.

These SRs demonstrate that the RCS operational leakage is within the LCO limits by monitoring the containment atmosphere gaseous and particulate radioactivity monitor and the containment sump level and discharge The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 31 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)

Surveillance Requirements (continued) 4.4.6.2.1 (continued) c.

The RCS water inventory balance must be performed with the reactor at steady state operating conditions (stable temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and reactor coolant pump seal injection and return flows). The Surveillance is modified by a note that states that this Surveillance Requirement is not required to be performed until 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> after establishment of steady state operation. The 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> allowance provides sufficient time to collect and process all necessary data after stable plant conditions are established.

Steady state operation is required to perform a proper water inventory balance since calculations during maneuvering are not useful. For RCS operational leakage determination by water inventory balance, steady state is defined as stable RCS pressure, temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and Reactor Coolant Pump seal injection and return flows.

An early warning of PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE or UNIDENTIFIED LEAKAGE is provided by the automatic systems that monitor containment atmosphere radioactivity, containment normal sump inventory and discharge, and reactor head flange leakoff. It should be noted that leakage past seals and gaskets is not PRESSURE BOUNDARY LEAKAGE. The reactor cavity (containment) sump and containment atmosphere radioactivity leakage detection systems are specified in LCO 3.4.6.1, "Reactor Coolant System Leakage Detection Systems."

The note also states that this SR is not applicable to primary-to secondary leakage because leakage of 150 gallons per day cannot be measured accurately by an RCS water inventory balance.

The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 32 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)

Surveillance Requirements (continued) 4.4.6.2.1 (continued) d.

This SR demonstrates that the RCS operational leakage is within the LCO limits by monitoring the Reactor Head Flange Leakoff System. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

e.

This Surveillance Requirement verifies that primary-to-secondary leakage is less than or equal to 150 gpd through any one steam generator. Satisfying the primary-to-secondary leakage limit ensures that the operational leakage performance criterion in the Steam Generator Program is met. If this Surveillance Requirement is not met, compliance with LCO 3.4.5, "Steam Generator Tube Integrity" should be evaluated. The 150 gpd limit is measured at room temperature as described in Reference 5. The operational leakage rate limit applies to leakage through any one steam generator. If it is not practical to assign the leakage to an individual steam generator, all the primary-to-secondary leakage should be conservatively assumed to be from one steam generator.

The Surveillance Requirement is modified by a note, which states that the Surveillance is not required to be performed until 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> after establishment of steady state operation. For Reactor Coolant System primary-to-secondary leakage determination, steady state is defined as stable Reactor Coolant System pressure, temperature, power level, pressurizer and makeup tank levels, makeup and letdown, and reactor coolant pump seal injection and return flows.

The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.. The primary-to-secondary leakage is determined using continuous process radiation monitors or radiochemical grab sampling in accordance with the EPRI guidelines (Ref. 5).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 33 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.6 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM LEAKAGE (continued) 3/4.4.6.2 OPERATIONAL LEAKAGE (continued)

Surveillance Requirements (continued) 4.4.6.2.2

a. through d.

This Surveillance Requirement verifies RCS Pressure Isolation Valve check valve integrity thereby reducing the probability of gross valve failure and consequent intersystem LOCA. Leakage from the RCS pressure isolation check valve is IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and will be considered as a portion of the allowed limit.

4.4.6.2.3

a. and b.

This Surveillance Requirement verifies RCS Pressure Isolation Valve motor-operated valve integrity thereby reducing the probability of gross valve failure and consequent intersystem LOCA. Leakage from the RCS pressure isolation motor-operated valve is IDENTIFIED LEAKAGE and will be considered as a portion of the allowed limit.

References

1. 10 CFR 50, Appendix A, GDC 30
2. Regulatory Guide 1.45
3. UFSAR, Section 15.6.3
4. NEI 97-06, "Steam Generator Program Guidelines"
5. EPRI "PWR Primary-to-Secondary Leak Guidelines"

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 34 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.7 DELETED 3/4.4.8 SPECIFIC ACTIVITY The maximum allowable doses to an individual at the exclusion area boundary (EAB) distance for 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> following an accident, or at the low population zone (LPZ) outer boundary distance for the radiological release duration, are specified in 10 CFR 50.67 for design basis accidents using the alternative source term methodology and in Branch Technical Position 11-5 for the waste gas decay tank rupture accident. Dose limits to control room operators are given in 10 CFR 50.67 and in GDC 19.

The RCS specific activity LCO limits the allowable concentration of radionuclides in the reactor coolant to ensure that the dose consequences of limiting accidents do not exceed appropriate regulatory offsite and control room dose acceptance criteria. The LCO contains specific activity limits for both DOSE EQUIVALENT (DE) 1-131 and DOSE EQUIVALENT (DE) XE-133.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 35 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.8 SPECIFIC ACTIVITY (continued)

The radiological dose assessments assume the specific activity of the reactor coolant is at the LCO limits, and an existing reactor coolant steam generator tube leakage rate at the applicable Technical Specification limit. The radiological dose assessments assume the specific activity of the secondary coolant is at its limit as specified in LCO 3.7.1.4, "Plant Systems - Activity."

The ACTIONS allow operation when DOSE EQUIVALENT 1-131 is greater than 1.0 µCi/gram and less than 60 µCi/gram. The ACTIONS require sampling within four hours and every four hours following to establish a trend. A note permits the use of the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.c. This allowance permits entry into the applicable MODE(S) while relying on the ACTIONS. This allowance is acceptable due to the significant conservatism incorporated into the specific activity limit, the low probability of an event that is limiting due to exceeding this limit, and the ability to restore transient specific activity excursions while the plant remains at, or proceeds to power operations.

The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. One surveillance requires the determination of the DE XE-133 specific activity as a measure of noble gas specific activity of the reactor coolant.

The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program. A second surveillance is performed to ensure that iodine specific activity remains within the LCO limit during normal operation. The second surveillance is also performed following rapid power changes when iodine spiking is more apt to occur. The frequency between two and six hours after a power change of greater than 15% RATED THERMAL POWER within a 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> period, is established because the iodine levels peak during this time following iodine spike initiation.

The RCS specific activity satisfies Criterion 2 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 36 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.9 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITS All components in the Reactor Coolant System are designed to withstand the effects of cyclic loads due to system temperature and pressure changes.

These cyclic loads are introduced by normal load transients, reactor trips, and startup and shutdown operations. The various categories of load cycles used for design purposes are provided in Section 5.2 of the UFSAR. During startup and shutdown, the rates of temperature and pressure changes are limited so that the maximum specified heatup and cooldown rates are consistent with the design assumptions and satisfy the stress limits for cyclic operation.

During heatup, the thermal gradients through the reactor vessel wall produce thermal stresses which are compressive at the reactor vessel inside surface and are tensile at the reactor vessel outside surface. Since reactor vessel internal pressure always produces tensile stresses at both the inside and outside surface locations, the total applied stress is greatest at the outside surface location. However, since neutron irradiation damage is larger at the inside surface location when compared to the outside surface, the inside surface flaw may be more limiting. Consequently, for the heatup analysis both the inside and outside surface flaw locations must be analyzed for the specific pressure and thermal loadings to determine which is more limiting.

During cooldown, the thermal gradients through the reactor vessel wall produce thermal stresses which are tensile at the reactor vessel inside surface and which are compressive at the reactor vessel outside surface.

Since reactor vessel internal pressure always produces tensile stresses at both the inside and outside surface locations, the total applied stress is greatest at the inside surface location. Since the neutron indication damage is also greatest at the inside surface location the inside surface flaw is the limiting location. Consequently, only the inside surface flaw must be evaluated for the cooldown analysis.

The heatup and cooldown limit curves Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 are composite curves which were prepared by determining the most conservative case, with either the inside or outside wall controlling, for any heatup rate of up to 50 degrees F per hour or cooldown rate of up to 100 degrees F per hour. The heatup and cooldown curves were prepared based upon the most limiting value of the predicted adjusted reference temperature at 47 EFPY, and they include adjustments for pressure differences between the reactor vessel beltline and pressurizer instrument taps.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 37 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.9 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITS (continued)

The reactor vessel materials have been tested to determine their initial RTNDT; the results of these tests are shown in Table B 3/4.4-1. Reactor operation and resultant fast neutron (E greater than 1 MeV) irradiation will cause an increase in the RTNDT. An adjusted reference temperature can be predicated using a) the initial RTNDT, b) the fluence (E greater than 1 MeV),

including appropriate adjustments for neutron attenuation and neutron energy spectrum variations through the wall thickness, c) the copper and nickel contents of the material, and d) the transition temperature shift as recommended by Regulatory Guide 1.99, Revision 2, Effects of Residual Elements on Predicted Radiation Damage to Reactor Vessel Materials, or other approved method. The heatup and cooldown limit curves Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 include predicted adjustments for this shift in RTNDT at 47 EFPY.

The actual shift in RTNDT of the vessel materials will be benchmarked periodically during operation, by removing and evaluating, in accordance with 10 CFR 50 Appendix H and ASTM E185, reactor vessel material irradiation surveillance specimens installed near the inside wall of the reactor vessel in the core area. Since the neutron spectra at the irradiation samples and the vessel inside radius are essentially identical, the measured transition temperature shift in RTNDT for a set of material samples can be compared to the predictions of RTNDT that were used for preparations of the pressure/temperature limits curves. If the measured delta RTNDT values from the surveillance capsule are not conservatively within the measurement uncertainty of the prediction method, then heat up and cooldown curves must be re-evaluated.

The pressure-temperature limit lines shown on Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 for reactor criticality and for inservice leak and hydrostatic testing have been provided to assure compliance with the minimum temperature requirements for Appendix G to 10 CFR 50.

The maximum RTNDT all Reactor Coolant System pressure-retaining materials, with the exception of the reactor pressure vessel, has been determined to be 60F. The Lowest Service Temperature limit line shown on Figures 3.4-2 and 3.4-3 is based upon this RTNDT since Article NB-2332 (Summer Addenda of 1972) of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code requires the Lowest Service Temperature to be RTNDT + 100F for piping, pumps, and valves. Below this temperature, the system pressure must be limited to a maximum of 20% of the systems hydrostatic test pressure.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 38 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.9 PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITS (continued)

The limitations imposed on the pressurizer heatup and cooldown rates are provided to assure that the pressurizer is operated within the design criteria assumed for the fatigue analysis performed in accordance with the ASME Code requirements.

The OPERABILITY of two PORVs, two SDCRVs or an RCS vent opening of greater than 3.58 square inches ensures that the RCS will be protected from pressure transients which could exceed the limits of Appendix G to 10 CFR Part 50 when one or more of the RCS cold leg temperatures are less than or equal to the LTOP temperatures. The Low Temperature Overpressure Protection System has adequate relieving capability to protect the RCS from overpressurization when the transient is limited to either (1) a safety injection actuation in a water-solid RCS with the pressurizer heaters energized or (2) the start of an idle RCP with the secondary water temperature of the steam generator less than or equal to 40F above the RCS cold leg temperatures with the pressurizer water-solid.

LCO 3.4.9.3 Action d prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to inoperable PORVs used for LTOP. There is an increased risk associated with entering MODE 4 from MODE 5 with PORVs used for LTOP inoperable and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.

3/4.4.10 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM VENTS Reactor Coolant System vents are provided to exhaust noncondensible gases and/or steam from the primary system that could inhibit natural circulation core cooling. The OPERABILITY of at least one Reactor Coolant System vent path from the reactor vessel head and the pressurizer steam space ensures the capability exists to perform this function.

The redundancy design of the Reactor Coolant System vent systems serves to minimize the probability of inadvertent or irreversible actuation while ensuring that a single failure of a vent valve, power supply, or control system does not prevent isolation of the vent path.

The function, capabilities, and testing requirements of the Reactor Coolant System vent system are consistent with the requirements of Item II.b.1 of NUREG-0737, Clarification of TMI Action Plan Requirements, November 1980.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 39 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE B 3/4.4-1 REACTOR VESSEL TOUGHNESS Temperature of Minimum Upper Shelf Cv Charpy V-Notch RT energy for Transverse Drop Weight (F) NDT Direction Charpy(1)

Piece No. Code No. Material Vessel Location Results @ 50 ft-lb Ft-lb 122-102A M-604-1 SA 533B C1 1 Upper Shell Plate 0 +50 ---

122-102B M-604-2 SA 533B C1 1 Upper Shell Plate +10 +50 ---

122-102C M-604-3 SA 533B C1 1 Upper Shell Plate -10 +10 ---

124-102B M-605-1 SA 533B C1 1 Immediate Shell Plate 0 +30 105 124-102C M-605-2 SA 533B C1 1 Immediate Shell Plate -10 +10 113 124-102A M-605-3 SA 533B C1 1 Immediate Shell Plate -20 0 113 142-102C M-4116-1 SA 533B C1 1 Lower Shell Plate -30 +20 91 142-102B M-4116-2 SA 533B C1 1 Lower Shell Plate -50 +20 105 142-102A M-4116-3 SA 533B C1 1 Lower Shell Plate -40 +20 100 102-101 M-4110-1 SA 533B C1 1 Closure Head -10 +30 ---

106-101 M-4101-1 SA 508 C1 2 Closure Head Flange 0 0 ---

128-101A M-4102-1 SA 508 C1 2 Inlet Nozzle -20 -20 ---

128-101D M-4102-2 SA 508 C1 2 Inlet Nozzle -20 -20 ---

128-101B M-4102-3 SA 508 C1 2 Inlet Nozzle 0 0 ---

128-101C M-4102-4 SA 508 C1 2 Inlet Nozzle -10 -10 ---

128-301B M-4103-1 SA 508 C1 2 Outlet Nozzle -20 -20 ---

128-301A M-4103-2 SA 508 C1 2 Outlet Nozzle -30 -30 ---

126-101 M-602-1 SA 508 C1 2 Vessel Flange -30 -10 ---

131-102A M-4104-1 SA 508 C1 1 Inlet Nozzle Safe End -20 +20 ---

131-102D M-4104-2 SA 508 C1 1 Inlet Nozzle Safe End -20 +20 ---

131-102B M-4104-3 SA 508 C1 1 Inlet Nozzle Safe End -20 +20 ---

131-102C M-4104-4 SA 508 C1 1 Inlet Nozzle Safe End -20 +20 ---

131-101B M-4105-1 SA 508 C1 1 Outlet Nozzle Safe End -10 0 ---

131-101A M-4105-2 SA 508 C1 1 Outlet Nozzle Safe End -10 0 ---

152-101 M-4112-1 SA 533B C1 1 Bottom Head Dome -50 -40 ---

154-102 M-4111-1 SA 533B C1 1 Bottom Head Torus -40 +40 ---

(A to F) 104-102 M-4109-1 SA 533B C1 1 Closure Head Torus -60 -10(2) ---

(A to D)

(1) Reported only for beltline region plates (2) A 10F RTNDT increase shall be added to the Closure Head Torus as a result of using a temper bead weld procedure identified in PCM 03021.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.4 BASES ATTACHMENT 6 OF ADM-25.04 40 of 40 REVISION NO.: REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM 17 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.4 REACTOR COOLANT SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.4.11 STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The inservice inspection and testing programs for ASME Code Class 1, 2 and 3 components ensure that the structural integrity and operational readiness of these components will be maintained at an acceptable level throughout the life of the plant. This programs are in accordance with Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable Addenda as required by 10 CFR Part 50.55a (g) except where specific written relief has been granted by the Commission pursuant to 10 CFR Part 50.55a (g) (6) (i).

Components of the reactor coolant system were designed to provide access to permit inservice inspections in accordance with Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 1971 Edition and Addenda through Winter 1973.

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 7

BASES ATTACHMENT 7 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 6 Title:

EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)

Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 2210011 based on NRC approval of TSTF-545.

(Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2143581 to update procedure number reference.

(Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verbiage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 1948043 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)

Revision 2 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)

Revision 1 - Incorporated PCR 04-3132 to implement amendments 194/136. (K. W. Frehafer, 11/24/04)

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.5 SYS 6 R. Wright 07/07/16 STATUS COMPLETED REV 6

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5 BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 8 REVISION NO.: EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.5 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) ..................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.5.1 SAFETY INJECTION TANKS ......................................... 3 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS ............................... 4 3/4.5.4 REFUELING WATER TANK ........................................... 6

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5 BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 8 REVISION NO.: EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.5 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS)

BASES 3/4.5.1 SAFETY INJECTION TANKS The OPERABILITY of each of the Reactor Coolant System (RCS) safety injection tanks ensures that a sufficient volume of borated water will be immediately forced into the reactor core through each of the cold legs in the event the RCS pressure falls below the pressure of the safety injection tanks. This initial surge of water into the core provides the initial cooling mechanism during large RCS pipe ruptures.

The limits on safety injection tank volume, boron concentration, and pressure ensure that the assumptions used for safety injection tank injection in the safety analysis are met.

The safety injection tank power-operated isolation valves are considered to be operating bypasses in the context of IEEE Std. 279-1971, which requires that bypasses of a protective function be removed automatically whenever permissive conditions are not met. In addition, as these safety injection tank isolation valves fail to meet single failure criteria, removal of power to the valves is required.

The limit of 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> for operation with an SIT that is inoperable due to boron concentration not within limits, or due to the inability to verify liquid volume or cover-pressure, considers that the volume of the SIT is still available for injection in the event of a LOCA. If one SIT is inoperable for other reasons, the SIT may be unable to perform its safety function and, based on probability risk assessment, operation in this condition is limited to 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />.

The practice of calibrating and testing the SIT isolation valve interlock function below 515 psia (the current plant practice is to set and test the interlock function at 500 psia) meets the requirements of Technical Specification Surveillance 4.5.1.1.d.1. The staff accepted that testing the SIT isolation interlock at a more conservative setpoint demonstrates operability at and above the setpoint (NRC letter from William C. Gleaves to J.A. Stall dated November 2, 1999, subject St. Lucie Unit 2 -

Amendment Request Regarding Safety Injection Tank and Shutdown Cooling System Isolation Interlock Surveillances (TAC No. MA5619).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5 BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 8 REVISION NO.: EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS The OPERABILITY of two separate and independent ECCS subsystems ensures that sufficient emergency core cooling capability will be available in the event of a LOCA assuming the loss of one subsystem through any single failure consideration. Either subsystem operating in conjunction with the safety injection tanks is capable of supplying sufficient core cooling to limit the peak cladding temperatures within acceptable limits for all postulated break sizes ranging from the double-ended break of the largest RCS hot leg pipe downward. In addition, each ECCS subsystem provides long-term core cooling capability in the recirculation mode during the accident recovery period. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.

TS 3.5.2.c and 3.5.3 require that ECCS subsystem(s) have an independent OPERABLE flow path capable of automatically transferring suction to the containment on a Recirculation Actuation Signal. The containment sump is defined as the area of containment below the minimum flood level in the vicinity of the containment sump strainers. Therefore, the LCOs are satisfied when an independent OPERABLE flow path to the containment sump strainer is available.

TS 3.5.2.d requires that an ECCS subsystem(s) have an OPERABLE charging pump and associated flow path from the BAMT(s). Reference to TS 3.1.2.2 requires that the one charging pump flow path is from the BAMT(s) through the boric acid makeup pump(s). The second charging pump flowpath is from the BAMT(s) through the gravity feed valves.

TS 3.5.2, ACTION a.1. provides an allowed outage/action completion time (AOT) of up to 7 days from initial discovery of failure to meet the LCO provided the affected ECCS subsystem is inoperable only because its associated LPSI train is inoperable. This 7 day AOT is based on the findings of a deterministic and probabilistic safety analysis and is referred to as a risk-informed AOT extension. Entry into this ACTION requires that a risk assessment be performed in accordance with the Configuration Risk Management Program (CRMP) which is described in ER-AA-100-2002, that implements the Maintenance Rule pursuant to 10 CFR 50.65.

In Mode 3 with RCS pressure < 1750 psia and in Mode 4, one OPERABLE ECCS subsystem is acceptable without single failure consideration on the basis of the stable reactivity condition of the reactor and the limited core cooling requirements.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5 BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 8 REVISION NO.: EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS (continued)

LCO 3.5.3 Action c prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to inoperable ECCS High Pressure Safety Injection subsystem. There is an increased risk associated with entering MODE 4 from MODE 5 with an inoperable ECCS High Pressure Safety Injection subsystem and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.

The trisodium phosphate dodecahydrate (TSP) stored in dissolving baskets located in the containment basement is provided to minimize the possibility of corrosion cracking of certain metal components during operation of the ECCS following a LOCA. The TSP provided this protection by dissolving in the sump water and causing its final pH to be raised to greater than or equal to 7.0.

The requirement for one high pressure safety injection pump to be rendered inoperable prior to entering MODE 5, although the analysis supports actuation of safety injection in a water solid RCS with pressurizer heaters energized, provides additional administrative assurance that a mass addition pressure transient can be relieved by the operation of a single PORV or SDCRV. A limit on the maximum number of operable HPSI pumps is not necessary when the pressurizer manway cover or the reactor vessel head is removed.

The Surveillance Requirements provided to ensure OPERABILITY of each component ensure that a minimum, the assumptions used in the accident analyses are met and that subsystem OPERABILITY is maintained. The Surveillance Requirement for throttle valve position stops, along with appropriate post-maintenance flow balance testing,* provides assurance that proper ECCS flows will be maintained in the event of a LOCA.

Maintenance of proper flow resistance and pressure drop in the piping system to each injection point is necessary to: (1) prevent total pump flow from exceeding runout conditions when the system is in its minimum resistance configuration, (2) provide the proper flow split between injection points in accordance with the assumptions used in the ECCS-LOCA analyses, and (3) provide an acceptable level of total ECCS flow to all injection points equal to or above that assumed in the ECCS-LOCA analyses. The requirement to dissolve a representative sample of TSP in a sample of RWT water provides assurance that the stored TSP will dissolve in borated water at the postulated post-LOCA temperatures.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5 BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 8 REVISION NO.: EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS (continued)

TS Surveillance Requirement 4.5.2.b is modified by a Note which exempts system vent flow paths opened under administrative control. The administrative control should be proceduralized and include stationing a dedicated individual at the system vent flow path who is in continuous communication with the operators in the control room. The individual will have a method to rapidly close the system vent path if directed.

Periodic surveillance testing of ECCS pumps to detect gross degradation caused by impeller structural damage or other hydraulic component problems is required by Section XI of the ASME Code. This type of testing may be accomplished by measuring the pump developed head at only one point on the pump characteristic curve. This verifies both that the measured performance is within an acceptable tolerance of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the unit safety analysis. Surveillance Requirements are specified in the INSERVICE TESTING PROGRAM, which encompassesSection XI of the ASME Code.Section XI of the ASME Code provides the activities and frequencies necessary to satisfy the requirements.

  • Refer to UFSAR for flow balancing requirements The practice of calibrating and testing the SDC isolation valve interlock function below 515 psia (the current plant practice is to set and test the interlock function at 500 psia) meets the requirements of Technical Specification Surveillance 4.5.2.e.1. The staff accepted that testing the SDC isolation interlock at a more conservative setpoint demonstrates operability at and above the setpoint (NRC letter from William C. Gleaves to J.A. Stall dated November 2, 1999, subject St. Lucie Unit 2 -

Amendment Request Regarding Safety Injection Tank and Shutdown Cooling System Isolation Interlock Surveillances (TAC No. MA5619).

ECCS piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the ECCS and may also prevent a water hammer, pump cavitation, and pumping of noncondensible gas into the reactor vessel.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5 BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 7 of 8 REVISION NO.: EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.5.2 and 3/4.5.3 ECCS SUBSYSTEMS (continued)

Selection of ECCS locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations.

The design review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become sources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration.

Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.

The ECCS is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumulated gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible location (or the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the ECCS is not rendered inoperable by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met. Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.

ECCS locations susceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found, the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location.

Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of susceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or environmental conditions, plant configuration, or personnel safety concerns.

For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible locations where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The accuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.

The Surveillance Frequency Control Program frequency takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the ECCS piping and the adequacy of the procedural controls governing system operation.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.5 BASES ATTACHMENT 7 OF ADM-25.04 8 of 8 REVISION NO.: EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.5 EMERGENCY CORE COOLING SYSTEMS (ECCS) (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.5.4 REFUELING WATER TANK The OPERABILITY of the Refueling Water Tank (RWT) as part of the ECCS ensures that a sufficient supply of borated water is available for injection by the ECCS in the event of a LOCA. The limits on RWT minimum volume and boron concentration ensure that (1) sufficient water is available within containment to permit recirculation cooling flow to the core, and (2) the reactor will remain subcritical in the cold condition following mixing of the RWT and the RCS water volumes with all control rods inserted except for the most reactive control assembly. These assumptions are consistent with the LOCA analyses.

The contained water volume limit includes an allowance for water not usable because of tank discharge line location or other physical characteristics.

The limits on contained water volume and boron concentration of the RWT also ensure a pH value of between 7.0 and 8.1 for the solution recirculated within containment after a LOCA. This pH band minimizes the evolution of iodine and minimizes the effect of chloride and caustic stress corrosion on mechanical systems and components.

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 8

BASES ATTACHMENT 8 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 15 Title:

CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 15 - Incorporated PCR 2083645 to eliminate second completion times associated with TS 3.6.2.1, Containment Spray and Cooling Systems. (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 14 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verbiage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 13 - Incorporated PCR 02071738 for TSTF-426 as part of the original LAR review and approval (L-2014-160). (Author: M DiMarco)

Revision 12 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 11 - Incorporated PCR 1860924 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)

Revision 10 - Incorporate PCR 1862724 to correct a typographical error and discuss use of terminology of sealed. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 9 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)

Revision 8 - Incorporated PCR 08-6765 for CR 2007-32178 for Bases changes to Technical Specifications 155 for License Amendments 152 and 153. Procedure changes to implement AST were reviewed in ORG 07-041 on 5/29/07 as part of the license amendment submittal.

(Author: Ken Frehafer)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R. G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.6 SYS 15 E. Katzman 12/18/15 STATUS COMPLETED REV 15

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.6 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS ............................................................ 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.6.1 PRIMARY CONTAINMENT ............................................ 3 3/4.6.1.1 CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY ....................... 3 3/4.6.1.2 CONTAINMENT LEAKAGE ......................... 3 3/4.6.1.3 CONTAINMENT AIR LOCKS ....................... 4 3/4.6.1.4 INTERNAL PRESSURE ............................... 4 3/4.6.1.5 AIR TEMPERATURE ................................... 4 3/4.6.1.6 CONTAINMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY .................................................. 4 3/4.6.1.7 CONTAINMENT VENTILATION SYSTEM ... 5 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS ....... 6 3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS .................................................... 6 3/4.6.2.2 IODINE REMOVAL SYSTEM ..................... 10 3/4.6.2.3 DELETED ................................................... 10 3/4.6.3 CONTAINMENT ISOLATION VALVES ......................... 10 3/4.6.4 DELETED ..................................................................... 11 3/4.6.5 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES .......................................... 11 3/4.6.6 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT .................................... 13 3/4.6.6.1 SHIELD BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM .................................................... 13 3/4.6.6.2 SHIELD BUILDING INTEGRITY ................ 14 3/4.6.6.3 SHIELD BUILDING STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY ................................................ 14

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.6 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.6.1 PRIMARY CONTAINMENT 3/4.6.1.1 CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY Primary CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY ensures that the release of radioactive materials from the containment atmosphere will be restricted to those leakage paths and associated leak rates assumed in the safety analyses. This restriction, in conjunction with the leakage rate limitation, will limit the offsite radiation doses to within the limits of 10 CFR 50.67 during accident conditions.

In accordance with Generic Letter 91-08, Removal of Component Component Lists from Technical Specifications, the opening of locked or sealed closed containment isolation valves on an intermittent basis under administrative control includes the following considerations: (1) stationing an operator, who is in constant communication with the control room, at the valve controls, (2) instructing this operator to close these valves in an accident situation, and (3) assuring that environmental conditions will not preclude access to close the valves and that this action will prevent the release of radioactivity outside the containment.

3/4.6.1.2 CONTAINMENT LEAKAGE The limitations on containment leakage rates ensure that total containment leakage volume will not exceed the value assumed in the accident analyses at the peak accident pressure, Pa (43.48 psig) which results from the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident.

The surveillance testing for measuring leakage rates is performed in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Program, and is consistent with the requirements of Appendix J of 10 CFR 50 Option B and Regulatory Guide 1.163 dated September, 1995, as modified by approved exemptions.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.1 CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.3 CONTAINMENT AIR LOCKS The limitations on closure and leak rate for the containment air locks are required to meet the restrictions on CONTAINMENT INTEGRITY and containment leak rate. Surveillance testing of the air lock seals provides assurance that the overall air lock leakage will not become excessive due to seal damage during the intervals between air lock leakage tests.

3/4.6.1.4 INTERNAL PRESSURE The limitations on containment internal pressure ensure that (1) the containment structure is prevented from exceeding its design negative pressure differential with respect to the annulus atmosphere of 0.7 psi and (2) the containment peak pressure does not exceed the design pressure of 44 psig during loss of coolant accident conditions.

The maximum peak pressure expected to be obtained from a loss of coolant accident is 43.48 psig. The limit of 0.4 psig for initial positive containment pressure will limit the maximum peak pressure to less than the design pressure of 44 psig and is consistent with the safety analyses.

3/4.6.1.5 AIR TEMPERATURE The limitation on containment average air temperature ensures that the peak containment vessel temperature does not exceed the containment vessel design temperature of 264F during steam line break and loss of coolant accident conditions and is consistent with the safety analyses.

3/4.6.1.6 CONTAINMENT VESSEL STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY The limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment steel vessel will be maintained comparable to the original design standards for the life of the facility. Structural integrity is required to ensure that the vessel will withstand the maximum pressure of 43.48 psig in the event of the limiting design basis loss of coolant accident. A visual inspection in accordance with the Containment Leakage Rate Testing Program is sufficient to demonstrate this capability.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.1 CONTAINMENT VESSEL (continued) 3/4.6.1.7 CONTAINMENT VENTILATION SYSTEM The 48-inch containment purge supply and exhaust isolation valves are required to be closed during plant operation since these valves have not been demonstrated capable of closing during a LOCA or steam line break accident.

Maintaining these valves closed during plant operations ensures that excessive quantities of radioactive materials will not be released via the containment purge system. Therefore, these valves are required to be in the sealed position during MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4. To provide assurance that the 48-inch valves cannot be inadvertently opened, they are sealed closed in accordance with Standard Review Plan 6.2.4 which includes devices to lock the valve closed, or prevent power from being supplied to the valve operator.

In this application, the term sealed has no connotation of leak tightness.

The use of the containment purge lines is restricted to the 8-inch purge supply and exhaust isolation valves since, unlike the 48-inch valves, the 8-inch valves will close during a LOCA or steam line break accident and therefore the site boundary dose guidelines of 10 CFR 50.67 would not be exceeded in the event of an accident during purging operations.

Leakage integrity tests with a maximum allowable leakage rate for purge supply and exhaust isolation valves will provide early indication of resilient material seal degradation and will allow the opportunity for repair before gross leakage failure develops. The 0.60 La leakage limit shall not be exceeded when the leakage rates determined by the leakage integrity tests of these valves are added to the previously determined total for all valves and penetrations subject to Type B and C tests. Leakage integrity testing does not apply to valves FCV-25-1 and FCV-25-6 because these valves provide shield building ventilation system integrity. FCV-25-1 and FCV-25-6 do not provide a containment isolation function and are not required by design to satisfy GDC-56 criteria for containment penetration isolation (see evaluation PSL-ENG-SENS-00-012).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS 3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS The OPERABILITY of the containment spray and cooling systems ensures that depressurization and cooling capability will be available to limit post-accident pressure and temperature in the containment to acceptable values.

During a Design Basis Accident (DBA), at least one containment cooling train and one containment spray train are capable of maintaining the peak pressure and temperature within design limits. One containment spray train has the capability, in conjunction with the Iodine Removal System, to remove iodine from the containment atmosphere and maintain concentrations below those assumed in the safety analyses. To ensure that these conditions can be met considering single-failure criteria, two spray trains and two cooling trains must be OPERABLE. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.

The 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> action interval specified in ACTION 1.a and ACTION 1.e, and the 7 day action interval specified in ACTION 1.b take into account the redundant heat removal capability and the iodine removal capability of the remaining operable systems, and the low probability of a DBA occurring during this period. It is possible to alternate between Actions in such a manner that operation could continue indefinitely without ever restoring systems to meet the LCO; however, doing so would be inconsistent with the basis for the Action Time. Alternating between Actions in order to continue operation indefinitely while not meeting the LCO is not allowed. If the system(s) cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the specified completion time, alternate actions are designed to bring the unit to a mode for which the LCO does not apply. The extended interval (54 hours6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br />) specified in ACTION 1.a to be in MODE 4 includes 48 hours5.555556e-4 days <br />0.0133 hours <br />7.936508e-5 weeks <br />1.8264e-5 months <br /> of additional time for restoration of the inoperable CS train, and takes into consideration the reduced driving force for a release of radioactive material from the RCS when in MODE 3. With two required containment spray trains inoperable, at least one of the required containment spray trains must be restored to OPERABLE status within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. Both trains of containment cooling must be OPERABLE or Action e is also entered. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second containment spray train is intentionally declared inoperable. The Action does not apply to voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one train is inoperable for any reason and the second train is discovered to be inoperable, or if both trains are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. In addition, LCO 3.7.7, CREACS, must be verified to be met within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. The components in this degraded condition are capable of providing a greater than 100% of the heat removal needs after an accident. The Allowed Outage time is based on Reference 1 which demonstrated that the 24-hour Allowed Outage.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 7 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS 3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS Time is acceptable based on the redundant heat removal capabilities afforded by the Containment Cooling System, the iodine removal capability of the Control Room Emergency Air Cleanup System, the infrequent use of the Action, and the small incremental effect on plant risk. With any combination of three or more containment spray and containment cooling trains inoperable in MODES 1, 2, or Mode 3 with Pressurizer Pressure > 1750 psia, the unit is in a condition outside the accident analyses and LCO 3.0.3 must be entered immediately. In MODE 3 with Pressurizer Pressure < 1750 psia, containment spray is not required.

The specifications and bases for LCO 3.6.2.1 are consistent with NUREG-1432, Revision 0 (9/28/92), Specification 3.6.6A (Containment Spray and Cooling Systems; Credit taken from iodine removal by the Containment Spray System), and the plant safety analyses.

Ensuring that the containment spray pump discharge pressure is met satisfies the periodic surveillance requirement to detect gross degradation caused by impeller structural damage or other hydraulic component problems. Along with this requirement,Section XI of the ASME Code verifies the pump developed head at one point on the pump characteristic curve to verify both that the measured performance is within an acceptable tolerance of the original pump baseline performance and that the performance at the test flow is greater than or equal to the performance assumed in the unit safety analysis. Surveillance Requirements are specified in the Inservice Testing Program, which encompassesSection XI of the ASME Code.Section XI of the ASME Code provides the activities and frequencies necessary to satisfy the requirements.

Containment Spray System flow path piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the containment spray trains and may also prevent a water hammer and pump cavitation.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 8 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued)

Selection of Containment Spray System locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The design review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become sources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration. Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.

The Containment Spray System is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumulated gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible location (or the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump),

the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the Containment Spray System is not rendered inoperable by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met. Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.

Containment Spray System locations susceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found , the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location. Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of susceptible locations.

Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or environmental conditions, plant configuration, or personnel safety concerns. For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible locations where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The accuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 9 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.2.1 CONTAINMENT SPRAY AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued)

The Surveillance Frequency Control Program frequency for SR 4.6.2.1.d takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the Containment Spray System piping and the procedural controls governing system operation.

TS Surveillance Requirement 4.6.2.1.a is modified by a Note which exempts system vent flow paths opened under administrative control. The administrative control should be proceduralized and include stationing a dedicated individual at the system vent flow path who is in continuous communication with the operators in the control room. The individual will have a method to rapidly close the system vent path if directed.

References

1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected Technical Specification for Conditions leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown, Revision 2, August 2010

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 10 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.2 DEPRESSURIZATION AND COOLING SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.2.2 IODINE REMOVAL SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Iodine Removal System ensures that sufficient N2H4 is added to the containment spray in the event of a LOCA. The limits on N2H4 volume and concentration ensure a minimum of 50 ppm of N2H4 concentration available in the spray for a minimum of 6.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> per pump for a total of 13 hours1.50463e-4 days <br />0.00361 hours <br />2.149471e-5 weeks <br />4.9465e-6 months <br /> to provide assumed iodine decontamination factors on the containment atmosphere during spray function and ensure a pH value of between 7.0 and 8.1 for the solution recirculated within containment after a LOCA. This pH band minimizes the evolution of iodine and minimizes the effect of chloride and caustic stress corrosion on mechanical systems and components. The contained water volume limit includes an allowance for water not usable because of tank discharge line location or other physical characteristics.

These assumptions are consistent with the iodine removal efficiency assumed in the safety analyses.

3/4.6.2.3 DELETED 3/4.6.3 CONTAINMENT ISOLATION VALVES The OPERABILITY of the containment isolation valves ensures that the containment atmosphere will be isolated from the outside environment in the event of a release of radioactive material to the containment atmosphere or pressurization of the containment and is consistent with the requirements of GDC 54 through GDC 57 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50. Containment isolation within the time limits specified for those isolation valves designed to close automatically ensures that the release of radioactive material to the environment will be consistent with the assumptions used in the analyses for a LOCA.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 11 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.4 DELETED 3/4.6.5 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES BACKGROUND: The vacuum relief valves protect the containment vessel against negative pressure (i.e., a lower pressure inside than outside).

Excessive negative pressure inside containment can occur if there is an inadvertent actuation of the containment cooling system or the containment spray system. Multiple equipment failures or human errors are necessary to have inadvertent actuation.

The containment pressure vessel contains two 100% vacuum relief lines installed in parallel that protect the containment from excessive external loading. The vacuum relief lines are 24-inch penetrations that connect the shield building annulus to the containment. Each vacuum relief line is isolated by a pneumatically operated butterfly valve in series with a check valve located on the containment side of the penetration.

A separate pressure controller that senses the differential pressure between the containment and the annulus actuates each butterfly valve. Each butterfly valve is provided with an air accumulator that allows the valve to open following a loss of instrument air. The combined pressure drop at rated flow through either vacuum relief line will not exceed the containment pressure vessel design external pressure differential of 0.7 psid with any prevailing atmospheric pressure.

APPLICABLE SAFETY ANALYSES: Design of the vacuum relief lines involves calculating the effect of an inadvertent containment spray actuation that can reduce the atmospheric temperature (and hence pressure) inside containment.

Conservative assumptions are used for all the pertinent parameters in the calculation The resulting containment pressure versus time is calculated, including the effect of the vacuum relief valves opening when their negative pressure setpoint is reached. It is also assumed that one vacuum relief line fails to open.

The containment was designed for an external pressure load equivalent to 0.7 psig. The inadvertent actuation of the containment spray system was analyzed to determine the resulting reduction in containment pressure. This resulted in a differential pressure between the inside containment and the annulus of 0.615 psid, which is less than the design load.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 12 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.5 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES (continued)

The vacuum relief valves must also perform the containment isolation function in a containment high-pressure event. For this reason, the system is designed to take the full containment positive design pressure and the containment design basis accident (DBA) environmental conditions (temperature, pressure, humidity, radiation, chemical attack, etc.) associated with the containment DBA.

The vacuum relief valves satisfy Criterion 3 of 10 CFR 50.36(c)(2)(ii).

LCO: The LCO establishes the minimum equipment required to accomplish the vacuum relief function following the inadvertent actuation of the containment spray system. Two vacuum relief lines are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that at least one is available, assuming one or both valves in the other line fail to open.

APPLICABILITY SAFETY ANALYSES: In MODES 1, 2, and 3 with pressurizer pressure equal to or greater than 1750 psia, the containment cooling features, such as the containment spray system, are required to be OPERABLE to mitigate the effects of a DBA. Excessive negative pressure inside containment could occur whenever these systems are OPERABLE due to inadvertent actuation of these systems. In MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4, the containment internal pressure is maintained between specified limits. Therefore, the vacuum relief lines are required to be OPERABLE in MODES 1, 2, 3, and 4 to mitigate the effects of inadvertent actuation of the containment spray system or containment cooling system.

In MODES 5 and 6, the probability and consequences of a DBA are reduced due to the pressure and temperature limitations of these MODES. The containment spray system and containment cooling system are not required to be OPERABLE in MODES 5 and 6. Therefore, maintaining OPERABLE vacuum relief lines is not required in MODE 5 or 6.

ACTIONS: With one of the required vacuum relief lines inoperable, the inoperable line must be restored to OPERABLE status within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. The specified time period is consistent with other LCOs for the loss of one train of a system required to mitigate the consequences of a LOCA or other DBA. If the vacuum relief line cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required ACTION time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which the LCO does not apply. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least MODE 3 within the next 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and to MODE 5 within the following 30 hours3.472222e-4 days <br />0.00833 hours <br />4.960317e-5 weeks <br />1.1415e-5 months <br />. The allowed ACTION times are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required plant conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging plant systems.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 13 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.6.5 VACUUM RELIEF VALVES (continued)

SURVEILLANCE REQUIREMENTS: This SR references the Inservice Testing Program, which establishes the requirement that inservice testing of the ASME Code Class 1, 2, and 3 pumps and valves shall be performed in accordance with Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable Addenda and approved relief requests. Therefore, the Inservice Testing Program governs SR interval. The butterfly valve setpoint is 9.850.35 inches of water gauge differential.

3/4.6.6 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT 3/4.6.6.1 SHIELD BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the shield building ventilation systems ensures that containment vessel leakage occurring during LOCA conditions into the annulus will be filtered through the HEPA filters and charcoal adsorber trains prior to discharge to the atmosphere and also reduces radioactive effluent releases to the environment during a fuel handling accident involving a recently irradiated fuel assembly in the spent fuel storage building. This requirement is necessary to meet the assumptions used in the safety analyses and limit the site boundary radiation doses to within the limits of 10 CFR 50.67 during LOCA conditions.

The fuel handling accident analysis assumes a minimum post reactor shutdown decay time of 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. Therefore, recently irradiated fuel is defined as fuel that has occupied part of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. This represents the applicability bases for fuel handling accidents.

Containment closure will have administrative controls in place to assure that a single normal or contingency method to promptly close the primary or secondary containment penetrations will be available. These prompt methods need not completely block the penetrations nor be capable of resisting pressure, but are to enable the ventilation systems to draw the release from the postulated fuel handling accident in the proper direction such that it can be treated and monitored.

The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

With respect to Surveillance 4.6.6.1.b, this SR verifies that the required Shield Building Ventilation System filter testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Testing Program (VFTP).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.6 BASES ATTACHMENT 8 OF ADM-25.04 14 of 14 REVISION NO.: CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS 15 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.6 CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS (continued) 3/4.6.6 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT (continued) 3/4.6.6.1 SHIELD BUILDING VENTILATION SYSTEM (continued)

BASES (continued)

If two shield building ventilation systems (SBVSs) are inoperable, at least one SBVS must be returned to OPERABLE status within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second SBVS is intentionally declared inoperable. The Action does not apply to voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one system is inoperable for any reason and the second system is discovered to be inoperable, or if both systems are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. In addition, at least one train of containment spray must be verified to be OPERBLE within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />. In the event of an accident, containment spray reduces the potential radioactive release from the containment, which reduces the consequences of the inoperable SBVS. The allowed Outage Time is based on Reference 1 which demonstrated that the 24-hours Allowed Outage Time is acceptable based on the infrequent use of the Actions and the small incremental effect on plant risk.

References

1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected Technical Specifications for Conditions Leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown, Revision 2, August 2010.

3/4.6.6.2 SHIELD BUILDING INTEGRITY SHIELD BUILDING INTEGRITY ensures that the release of radioactive materials from the primary containment atmosphere will be restricted to those leakage paths and associated leak rates assumed in the safety analyses. This restriction, in conjunction with operation of the shield building ventilation system, will ensure that the site boundary radiation doses are below the guidelines established for design basis.

3/4.6.6.3 SHIELD BUILDING STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY This limitation ensures that the structural integrity of the containment shield building will be maintained comparable to the original design standards for the life of the facility. Structural integrity is required to provide (1) protection for the steel vessel from the external missiles, (2) radiation shielding in the event of a LOCA, and (3) an annulus surrounding the steel vessel that can be maintained at a negative pressure during accident conditions. A visual inspection is sufficient to demonstrate this capability.

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 9

BASES ATTACHMENT 9 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 Before use, verify revision and change documentation DATE VERIFIED__________ INITIAL__________

SAFETY RELATED 11 Title:

FOR INFORMATION ONLY PLANT SYSTEMS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 11 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in (if applicable) with a controlled index or document.

Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 10 - Incorporated PCR 2129693 to correct typos in section for Main Feedwater Line Isolation Valves. (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 9 - Incorporated PCR 02071738 for TSTF-426 as part of the original LAR review and approval (L-2014-160). (Author: M DiMarco)

Revision 8 - Pages 10-17 have the high level section description as CONTAINMENT SYSTEMS. It should read the same as pages 3 through 8, which is PLANT SYSTEMS.

(Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 1948770 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)

Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)

Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 562709 to enhance AFW pump bases. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.7 SYS 11 R. Coffey 08/26/15 STATUS COMPLETED REV 11

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.7 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS .......................................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE ........................................................... 3 3/4.7.1.1 SAFETY VALVES ........................................ 3 3/4.7.1.2 AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM ........... 4 3/4.7.1.3 CONDENSATE STORAGE TANKS ............. 7 3/4.7.1.4 ACTIVITY ..................................................... 8 3/4.7.1.5 MAIN STEAM LINE ISOLATION VALVES ... 8 3/4.7.1.6 MAIN FEEDWATER LINE ISOLATION VALVES ....................................................... 9 3/4.7.1.7 ATMOSPHERIC DUMP VALVES............... 10 3/4.7.2 STEAM GENERATOR PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITATION .................................................................. 10 3/4.7.3 COMPONENT COOLING WATER SYSTEM ................ 10 3/4.7.4 INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM .......................... 11 3/4.7.5 ULTIMATE HEAT SINK ................................................ 13 3/4.7.6 FLOOD PROTECTION ................................................. 13 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM ....................................................................... 14 3/4.7.8 ECCS AREA VENTILATION SYSTEM ......................... 20 3/4.7.9 SNUBBERS .................................................................. 21 3/4.7.10 SEALED SOURCE CONTAMINATION......................... 22 3/4.7.11 DELETED ..................................................................... 22

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.7 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE 3/4.7.1.1 SAFETY VALVES The OPERABILITY of the main steam line code safety valves ensures that the secondary system pressure will be limited to within 110% (1100 psia) of its design pressure of 1000 psia during the most severe anticipated system operational transient. The maximum relieving capacity is adequate to maintain secondary side pressure below 110% of the design value after a turbine trip from 100% RATED THERMAL POWER coincident with an assumed loss of condenser heat sink (i.e., no steam bypass to the condenser).

The specified valve lift settings and relieving capacities are in accordance with the requirements of Section III of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, 1971 Edition, and ASME Code for Pumps and Valves, Class II. The total relieving capacity for all valves on all of the steam lines is 12.49 x 106 lbs/hr. A minimum of two OPERABLE safety valves per steam generator ensures that sufficient relieving capacity is available for removing decay heat.

STARTUP and/or POWER OPERATION is allowable with safety valves inoperable within the limitations of the ACTION requirements on the basis of the reduction in secondary system steam flow and THERMAL POWER required by the reduced reactor trip settings of the Power Level-High channels. The reactor trip set-point reductions are derived on the following bases:

For two loop operation:

(X) (Y)(V)

SP x (107.0) 0.9 X

where:

SP = reduced reactor trip setpoint in percent of RATED THERMAL POWER V = maximum number of inoperable safety valves per steam line

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.1 SAFETY VALVES (continued) 107.0 = Power Level-High Trip Setpoint for two loop operation 0.9 = Equipment processing uncertainty X = Total relieving capacity of all safety valves per steam line in lbs/hour (6.247 x 106 lbs/hr)

Y = Maximum relieving capacity of any one safety valve in lbs/hour (7.74 x 105lbs/hr)

Surveillance Requirement 4.7.1.1 verifies the OPERABILITY of the MSSVs by the verification of each MSSV lift setpoint in accordance with the Inservice Testing Program. The MSSV setpoints are 1000 psia +/-3% (4 valves each header) and 1040 psia +2%/-3% (4 valves each header) for OPERABILITY; however, the valves are reset to 1000 psia +/- 1% and 1040 psia +/- 1%,

respectively, during the Surveillance to allow for drift. The LCO is expressed in units of psig for consistency with implementing procedures.

3/4.7.1.2 AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM The Auxiliary Feedwater (AFW) System automatically supplies feedwater to the steam generators to remove decay heat from the Reactor Coolant System upon the loss of normal feedwater supply. The AFW System consists of two motor driven AFW pumps and one steam turbine driven pump configured into three trains.

Each motor driven pump provides 100% of AFW flow capacity; the turbine driven pump provides 100% of the required capacity to the steam generators as assumed in the accident analysis. Each motor driven AFW pump is powered from an independent Class 1E power supply and feeds one steam generator, although each pump has the capability to be realigned from the control room to feed the other steam generator. One pump at full flow is sufficient to remove decay heat and cool the unit to Shutdown Cooling (SDC)

System entry conditions.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.2 AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM (continued)

The steam turbine-driven AFW pup receives steam from either main steam header upstream of the main steam isolation valve. Each of the steam feed lines will supply 100% of the requirements of the turbine driven AFW pump.

The turbine driven AFW pump supplies a common header capable of feeding both steam generators, with DC powered control valves actuated to the appropriate steam generator by the Auxiliary Feedwater Actuation System (AFAS).

The AFW System supplies feedwater to the steam generators during normal unit startup, shutdown, and hot standby conditions.

The AFW System mitigates the consequences of any event with a loss of normal feedwater. The limiting Design Basis Accidents and transients for the AFW System are as follows:

1. Feedwater Line Break, and
2. Loss of normal feedwater.

Action d prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to an inoperable AFW train.

There is an increased risk associated with entering a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with an AFW train inoperable and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.2 AUXILIARY FEEDWATER SYSTEM (continued)

Surveillance Requirement (SR) 4.7.1.2.d verifies that each AFW pumps developed head at the flow test point is greater than or equal to the required developed head ensures that AFW pump performance has not degraded during the cycle. Flow and differential head are normal tests of pump performance required by the ASME Code. Because it is undesirable to introduce cold AFW into the steam generators while they are operating, this testing is performed on recirculation flow. this test confirms one point on the pump design curve and is indicative of overall performance. Such inservice tests confirm component Operability, trend performance, and detect incipient failures by indicating abnormal performance. Performance of inservice testing, discussed in the ASME Code, at 3 month intervals satisfies this requirement. This SR is modified to defer performance until suitable test conditions are established for the steam turbine-driven AFW pump within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> after entering Mode 3 and prior to entering Mode 2.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 7 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.3 CONDENSATE STORAGE TANKS The Condensate Storage Tank (CST) provides a safety grade source of water to the steam generators for removing decay and sensible heat from the Reactor Coolant System (RCS). The CST provides a passive flow of water, by gravity, to the Auxiliary Feedwater (AFW) System. The AFW pumps operate with a continuous recirculation to the CST.

When the main steam isolation valves are open, the preferred means of heat removal is to discharge steam to the condenser by the nonsafety grade path of the steam bypass valves. The condensed steam is returned to the CST by the condensate transfer pump. This has the advantage of conserving condensate while minimizing releases to the environment.

Because the CST is a principal component in removing residual heat from the RCS, it is designed to withstand earthquakes and other natural phenomena.

The CST is designed to Seismic Category I requirements to ensure availability of the feedwater supply.

The LCO required minimum volume of 307,000 gallons ensures that sufficient water is available to maintain the unit in HOT STANDBY for 4 hours4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> followed by an orderly cooldown to the shutdown cooling entry temperature. 154,000 gallons of water is required to complete this cooldown. An additional 130,500 gallons is reserved for the unlikely event that a vertical tornado missile ruptures the St. Lucie Unit 1 CST and the water contained in the Unit 1 CST is unavailable to St. Lucie Unit 1.

Included in the Unit 2 CST required volume of water is 9,203 gallons of unusable water in the tank and 4,230 gallons of water included for instrumentation error.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 8 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.4 ACTIVITY The limitations on secondary system specific activity ensure that the resultant offsite radiation dose will comply with the dose criterion provided in 10 CFR 50.67 in the event of a steam line rupture. The dose also includes the effects of a coincident 1.0 gpm primary to secondary tube leak in the steam generator of the affected steam line and a concurrent loss of offsite electrical power. These values are consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.

3/4.7.1.5 MAIN STEAM LINE ISOLATION VALVES The OPERABILITY of the main steam line isolation valves ensures that no more than one steam generator will blow down in the event of a steam line rupture. This restriction is required to (1) minimize the positive reactivity effects of the Reactor Coolant System cooldown associated with the blowdown, and (2) limit the pressure rise within containment in the event the steam line rupture occurs within containment. The OPERABILITY of the main steam isolation valves within the closure times of the Surveillance Requirements is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.

The specified 6.75 second full closure time represents the addition of the maximum allowable instrument response time of 1.15 seconds and the maximum allowable valve stroke time of 5.6 seconds. These maximum allowable values should not be exceeded because they represent the design basis values for the plant.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 9 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.6 MAIN FEEDWATER LINE ISOLATION VALVES The main feedwater line isolation valves are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that (1) feedwater is terminated to the affected steam generator following a steam line break and (2) auxiliary feedwater is delivered to the intact steam generator following a feedwater line break. If feedwater is not terminated to a steam generator with a broken main steam line, two serious effects may result: (1) the post-trip return to power due to plant cooldown will be greater with resultant higher fuel failure and (2) the steam released to containment will exceed the design.

When the main feedwater isolation valves (MFIVs) are closed or isolated, they are performing their required safety function, e.g., to isolate the main feedwater line. The 72 hour8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> action completion time for one inoperable MFIV in one or more main feedwater lines takes into account the redundancy afforded by the remaining operable MFIVs, and the low probability of an event occurring during this time period that would require isolation of the main feedwater flow paths. The 4 hour4.62963e-5 days <br />0.00111 hours <br />6.613757e-6 weeks <br />1.522e-6 months <br /> action completion time for two inoperable MFIVs in the same feedwater line is considered reasonable to close or isolate the affected flowpath. It is based on operating experience and the low probability of an event that would require main feedwater isolation during this time period.

The specified 5.15 second full closure time represents the addition of the maximum allowable instrument response time of 1.15 seconds and the maximum allowable valve stroke time of 4.0 seconds. These maximum allowable values should not be exceeded because they represent the design basis values for the plant.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 10 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.1 TURBINE CYCLE (continued) 3/4.7.1.7 ATMOSPHERIC DUMP VALVES The limitation on maintaining the atmospheric dump valves in the manual mode of operation is to ensure the atmospheric dump valves will be closed in the event of a steam line break. For the steam line break with atmospheric dump valve control failure event, the failure of the atmospheric dump valves to close would be a valid concern were the system to be in the automatic mode during power operations.

3/4.7.2 STEAM GENERATOR PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITATION The limitation on steam generator pressure and temperature ensures that the pressure-induced stresses in the steam generators do not exceed the maximum allowable fracture toughness stress limits. The limitations to 100F and 200 psig are based on a steam generator RTNDT of 20F and are sufficient to prevent brittle fracture.

3/4.7.3 COMPONENT COOLING WATER SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Component Cooling Water System ensures that sufficient cooling capacity is available for continued operation of safety-related equipment during normal and accident conditions. The redundant cooling capacity of this system, assuming a single failure, is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 11 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.3 COMPONENT COOLING WATER SYSTEM (continued)

If the inoperable component cooling water loop cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allowable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4 .a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.

However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.

3/4.7.4 INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Intake Cooling Water System ensures that sufficient cooling capacity is available for continued operation of equipment during normal and accident conditions. The redundant cooling capacity of this system, assuming a single failure, is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 12 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.4 INTAKE COOLING WATER SYSTEM (continued)

If the inoperable intake cooling water loop cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allowable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.

However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 13 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.5 ULTIMATE HEAT SINK The limitations on the ultimate heat sink level ensure that sufficient cooling capacity is available to either (1) provide normal cooldown of the facility, or (2) to mitigate the effects of accident conditions within acceptable limits.

The limitations on minimum water level is based on providing an adequate cooling water supply to safety-related equipment until cooling water can be supplied from Big Mud Creek.

Cooling capacity calculations are based on an ultimate heat sink temperature of 95F. It has been demonstrated by a temperature survey conducted from March 1976 to May 1981 that the Atlantic Ocean has never risen higher than 86F. Based on this conservatism, no ultimate heat sink temperature limitation is specified. (Note that with the implementation of the CCW heat exchanger performance monitoring program, the limiting ultimate heat sink temperature is treated as a variable with an upper limit of 95F without compromising any margin of safety. System operation is maintained well within safety design limits for the service conditions of the heat exchanger.)

3/4.7.6 FLOOD PROTECTION The limitation on flood protection ensures that facility protective actions will be taken in the event of flood conditions. The installation of the stoplogs ensures adequate protection for wave run-up effects where no permanent adjacent structures exist and provides protection to safety-related equipment. The maximum wave runup from the probable maximum flood (PMF) has been calculated to be elevation 18.0 feet Mean Low Water (MLW).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 14 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the Control Room Emergency Air Cleanup System ensures that (1) the ambient air temperature does not exceed the allowable temperature for continuous duty rating for the equipment and instrumentation cooled by this system and (2) the control room will remain habitable for operations personnel during and following all credible accident conditions.

The OPERABILITY of this system in conjunction with control room design provisions is based on limiting the radiation exposure to personnel occupying the control room to 5 rems total effective dose equivalent.

The control room envelope (CRE) is the area within the confines of the CRE boundary that contains the spaces that control room occupants inhabit to control the unit during normal and accident conditions. This area encompasses the control room, and may encompass other non-critical areas to which frequent personnel access or continuous occupancy is not necessary in the event of an accident. The CRE is protected during normal operation, natural events, and accident conditions. The CRE boundary is the combination of walls, floor, roof, ducting, doors, penetrations and equipment that physically form the CRE. The OPERABILITY of the CRE boundary must be maintained to ensure that the inleakage of unfiltered air into the CRE will not exceed the inleakage assumed in the licensing basis analysis of design basis accident (DBA) consequences to CRE occupants. The CRE and its boundary are defined in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program.

The location of CREACS components and ducting within the CRE control room envelope ensures an adequate supply of filtered air to all areas requiring access. The CREVS provides airborne radiological protection for the CRE occupants, as demonstrated by occupant dose analyses for the most limiting design basis accident fission product release presented in the UFSAR, Chapter 15.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 15 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)

In order for the CREACS to be considered OPERABLE, the CRE boundary must be maintained such that the CRE occupant dose from a large radioactive release does not exceed the calculated dose in the licensing basis consequence analyses for DBAs, and that CRE occupants are protected from smoke.

The LCO is modified by a Note allowing the CRE boundary to be opened intermittently under administrative controls. This Note only applies to openings in the CRE boundary that can be rapidly restored to the design condition, such as doors, hatches, floor plugs, and access panels. For entry and exit through doors, the administrative control of the opening is performed by the person(s) entering or exiting the area. For other openings, these controls should be proceduralized and consist of stationing a dedicated individual at the opening who is in continuous communication with the operators in the CRE. This individual will have a method to rapidly close the opening and to restore the CRE boundary to a condition equivalent to the design condition when a need for CRE isolation is indicated.

In MODES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, the CREACS must be OPERABLE to ensure that the CRE will remain habitable to limit operator exposure during and following a DBA.

If the unfiltered inleakage of potentially contaminated air past the CRE boundary and into the CRE can result in CRE occupant radiological dose greater than the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences (allowed to be up to 5 rem total effective dose equivalent -

TEDE), or inadequate protection of CRE occupants from smoke, the CRE boundary is inoperable. Actions must be taken to restore an OPERABLE CRE boundary within 90 days.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 16 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)

During the period that the CRE boundary is considered inoperable, action must be initiated to implement mitigating actions to lessen the effect on CRE occupants from the potential hazards of a radiological event or a challenge from smoke. Actions must be taken within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> to verify that in the event of a DBA, the mitigating actions will ensure that CRE occupant radiological exposures will not exceed the calculated dose of the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences, and that CRE occupants are protected from smoke.

These mitigating actions (i.e., actions that are taken to offset the consequences of the inoperable CRE boundary) should be preplanned for implementation upon entry into the condition, regardless of whether entry is intentional or unintentional. The 24 hour2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br /> allowable outage time (AOT) is reasonable based on the low probability of a DBA occurring during this time period, and the use of mitigating actions. The 90 day AOT is reasonable based on the determination that the mitigating actions will ensure protection of CRE occupants within analyzed limits while limiting the probability that CRE occupants will have to implement protective measures that may adversely affect their ability to control the reactor and maintain it in a safe shutdown condition in the event of a DBA. In addition, the 90 day AOT is a reasonable time to diagnose, plan and possibly repair, and test most problems with the CRE boundary.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 17 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)

In MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4, if the inoperable CREACS or the CRE boundary cannot be restored to OPERABLE status within the required AOT, the unit must be placed in a MODE that minimizes overall plant risk. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.

However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit. The AOT are reasonable, based on operating experience, to reach the required unit conditions from full power conditions in an orderly manner and without challenging unit systems.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 18 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)

If both CREACS trains are inoperable in MODE 1, 2, 3, or 4 for reasons other than an inoperable control room boundary (i.e., Action b), at least one CREACS train must be returned to OPERABLE status within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. The Action is modified by a Note stating it is not applicable if the second CREACS b:ain is intentionally declared inoperable. The Action does not apply to voluntary removal of redundant systems or components from service. The Action is only applicable if one train is inoperable for any reason and the second train is discovered to be inoperable, or if both trains are discovered to be inoperable at the same time. During the period that the CREACS trains are inoperable, action must be initiated to implement mitigating actions to lessen the effect on CRE occupants from potential hazards while both trains of CREACS are inoperable. In the event of a DBA, the mitigating actions will reduce the consequences of radiological exposures to the CRE occupants.

Specification 3.4.8, "Specific Activity," allows limited operation with the reactor coolant system (RCS) activity significantly greater than the LCO limit. This presents a risk to the plant operator during an accident when all CREACS trains are inoperable. Therefore, it must be verified within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> that LCO 3.4.8 is met. This Action does not require additional RCS sampling beyond that normally required by LCO 3 .4.8. At least one CREACS train must be returned to OPERABLE status within 24 hours2.777778e-4 days <br />0.00667 hours <br />3.968254e-5 weeks <br />9.132e-6 months <br />. The Allowed Outage Time is based on Reference 1 which demonstrated that the 24-hour Allowed Outage Time is acceptable based on the infrequent use of the Actions and the small incremental effect on plant risk.

When in MODES 5 and or 6, or during movement of irradiated fuel assemblies, with both CREACS trains inoperable or with one or more CREACS trains inoperable due to an inoperable CRE boundary, action must be taken immediately to suspend activities that could result in a release of radioactivity that might require isolation of the CRE. This places the unit in a condition that minimizes the accident risk. This does not preclude the movement of fuel to a safe position.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 19 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.7 CONTROL ROOM EMERGENCY AIR CLEANUP SYSTEM (continued)

The Surveillance Requirement (SR) 4.7.7.e verifies the OPERABILITY of the CRE boundary by testing for unfiltered air inleakage past the CRE boundary and into the CRE. The details of the testing are specified in the Control Room Envelope Habitability Program.

The CRE is considered habitable when the radiological dose to CRE occupants calculated in the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences is no more than 5 rem TEDE and the CRE occupants are protected from hazardous chemicals and smoke. This SR verifies that the unfiltered air inleakage into the CRE is no greater than the flow rate assumed in the licensing basis analyses of DBA consequences. When unfiltered air inleakage is greater than the assumed flow rate in Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4, ACTION b must be taken. Required ACTION b.3 allows time to restore the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status provided mitigating actions can ensure that the CRE remains within the licensing basis habitability limits for the occupants following an accident. Compensatory measures are discussed in Regulatory Guide 1.196, Section C.2.7.3, which endorses, with exceptions, NEI 99-03, Section 8.4 and Appendix F. These compensatory measures may also be used as mitigating actions as required by Required Action b.2.

Temporary analytical methods may also be used as compensatory measures to restore OPERABILITY, as discussed in letter from Eric J. Leeds (NRC) to James W. Davis (NEI) dated January 30, 2004, NEI Draft White Paper, Use of Generic Letter 91-18 Process and Alternative Source Terms in the Context of Control Room Habitability. Options for restoring the CRE boundary to OPERABLE status include changing the licensing basis DBA consequence analysis, repairing the CRE boundary, or a combination of these actions.

Depending upon the nature of the problem and the corrective action, a full scope inleakage test may not be necessary to establish that the CRE boundary has been restored to OPERABLE status.

References

1. WCAP-16125-NP-A, Justification for Risk-Informed Modifications to Selected technical Specifications for Conditions Leading to Exigent Plant Shutdown, Revision 2, August 2010.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 20 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.8 ECCS AREA VENTILATION SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of the ECCS Area Ventilation System ensures that cooling air is provided for ECCS equipment.

If the inoperable ECCS area ventilation system cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allowable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable. low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.

However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.

With respect to Surveillance 4.7.8.b, this SR verifies that the required ECCS Area Ventilation System filter testing is performed in accordance with the Ventilation Filter Testing Program (VFTP).

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 21 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.9 SNUBBERS All safety related snubbers are required to be OPERABLE to ensure that the structural integrity of the Reactor Coolant System and all other safety related systems is maintained during and following a seismic or other event initiating dynamic loads. Snubbers excluded from this inspection program are those installed on nonsafety related systems and then only if their failure or failure of the system on which they are installed, would have no adverse effect on any safety related system.

Snubbers are classified and grouped by design and manufacturer but not by size. For example, mechanical snubbers utilizing the same design features of the 2 kip, 10 kip and 100 kip capacity manufactured by company A are of the same type. The same design mechanical snubber manufactured by company B, for purposes of this Specification, would be of a different type, as would hydraulic snubbers for either manufacturer.

The visual inspection frequency is based upon maintaining a constant level of snubber protection to systems. Therefore, the required inspection interval varies inversely with the observed snubber failures and is determined by the number of inoperable snubbers found during an inspection. Inspections performed before that interval has elapsed may be used as a new reference point to determine the next inspection. However, the results of such early inspections performed before the original required time interval has elapsed (nominal time less 25%) may not be used to lengthen the required inspection interval. Any inspection whose results require a shorter inspection interval will override the previous schedule.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.7 BASES ATTACHMENT 9 OF ADM-25.04 22 of 22 REVISION NO.: PLANT SYSTEMS 11 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.7 PLANT SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.7.9 SNUBBERS (continued)

To provide assurance of snubber functional reliability, one of two sampling and acceptance criteria methods are used:

1. Functionally test 10% of a type of snubber with an additional 10%

tested for each functional testing failure or

2. Functionally test a sample size and determine sample acceptance or rejection using Figure 4.7-1.

Figures 4.7-1 was developed using Walds Sequential Probability Ratio Plan as described in Quality Control and Industrial Statistics by Acheson J.

Duncan.

All service life of a snubber is evaluated via manufacturer input and information through consideration of the snubber service conditions and associated installation and maintenance records (newly installed snubber, seal replaced, spring replaced, in high radiation area, in high temperature area, etc...). The requirement to monitor the snubber service life is included to ensure that the snubbers periodically undergo a performance evaluation in view of their age and operating conditions. These records will provide statistical bases for future consideration of snubber service life.

3/4.7.10 SEALED SOURCE CONTAMINATION The limitations on removable contamination for sources requiring leak testing, including alpha emitters, is based on 10 CFR 70.39(c) limits for plutonium.

This limitation will ensure that leakage from byproduct, source, and special nuclear material sources will not exceed allowable intake values.

Sealed sources are classified into three groups according to their use, with surveillance requirements commensurate with the probability of damage to a source in that group. Those sources which are frequently handled are required to be tested more often than those which are not. Sealed sources which are continuously enclosed within a shielded mechanism (i.e. sealed sources within radiation monitoring or boron measuring devices) are considered to be stored and need not be tested unless they are removed from the shield mechanism.

3/4.7.11 DELETED

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 10 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 8 Title:

ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 8 - Incorporated PCR 2087288 based on NRC approval of TSTF-422, Change in Technical Specifications End States (CE NPSD-1186). (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 7 - Incorporated PCR 2053666 based on NRC approval of the TSTF-425 LAR that implements the Surveillance Frequency control Program. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 1948783 to modify TS requirements for Mode change limitations in LCO 3.0.4 and SR 4.0.4. (Author: N. Elmore)

Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 1671445 to update Diesel Fuel Oil Testing program TS changes required. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 1880845 to update DC battery surveillance TS changes required. (Author: K. Frehafer)

Revision 3 - Incorporated PCR 09-2643 to update EDG fuel oil testing ASTM standards.

(Author: K.W. Frehafer)

Revision 2 - Implemented License Amendment 207 and 155. Procedure changes to implement EDG Fuel Oil Test Program LAR were reviewed in ORG 08-034 on 6/26/08 as part of the license amendment submittal. (Author: K.W. Frehafer)

Revision 1 - Implemented License Amendment 123. (K.W. Frehafer, 12/17/01)

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.8 SYS 8 R. Coffey 08/26/15 STATUS COMPLETED REV 8

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 10 REVISION NO.: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.8 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS ................................................. 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS ......... 3 3/4.8.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES . 10

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 10 REVISION NO.: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.8 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS BASES 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS The OPERABILITY of the A.C. and D.C. power sources and associated distribution systems during operation ensures that sufficient power will be available to supply the safety related equipment required for 1) the safe shutdown of the facility and 2) the mitigation and control of accident conditions within the facility. The minimum specified independent and redundant A.C. and D.C. power sources and distribution systems satisfy the requirements of General Design Criteria 17 of Appendix A to 10 CFR 50.

The ACTION requirements specified for the levels of degradation of the power sources provide restriction upon continued facility operation commensurate with the level of degradation. The OPERABILITY of the power sources are consistent with the initial condition assumptions of the safety analyses and are based upon maintaining at least one redundant set of onsite A.C. and D.C. power sources and associated distribution systems OPERABLE during accident conditions coincident with an assumed loss of offsite power and single failure of the other onsite A.C. source. The A.C.

and D.C. source allowable out-of-service times are based on Regulatory Guide 1.93, Availability of Electrical Power Sources, December 1974.

When one diesel generator is inoperable, there is an additional requirement to check that all required systems, subsystems, trains, components and devices (i.e., redundant features), that depend on the remaining OPERABLE diesel generator as a source of emergency power, are also OPERABLE, and that the steam-driven auxiliary feedwater pump is OPERABLE. These redundant required features are those that are assumed to function to mitigate an accident, coincident with a loss of offsite power, in the safety analysis, such as the emergency core cooling system and auxiliary feedwater system. Upon discovery of a concurrent inoperability of required redundant features the feature supported by the inoperable EDG is declared inoperable. Thus plant operators will be directed to supported feature TS action requirements for appropriate remedial actions for the inoperable required features.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 10 REVISION NO.: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)

The four hour completion time upon discovery that an opposite train required feature is inoperable is to provide assurance that a loss of offsite power, during the period that a EDG is inoperable, does not result in a complete loss of safety function of critical redundant required features.

The four hour completion time allows the operator time to evaluate and repair any discovered inoperabilities. This completion time also allows for an exception to the normal time zero for beginning the allowed outage time clock. The four hour completion time only begins on discovery that both an inoperable EDG exists and a required feature on the other train is inoperable.

TS 3.8.1.1, ACTION b provides an allowed outage/action completion time (AOT) of up to 14 days to restore a single inoperable diesel generator to operable status. This AOT is based on the findings of a deterministic and probabilistic safety analysis and is referred to as a risk-informed AOT.

Entry into this action requires that a risk assessment be performed in accordance with the Configuration Risk Management Program (CRMP),

which is described in the Administrative Procedure that implements the Maintenance Rule pursuant to 10 CFR 50.65.

All EDG inoperabilities must be investigated for common-cause failures regardless of how long the EDG inoperability persists. When one diesel generator is inoperable, required ACTIONS 3.8.1.1.b and 3.8.1.1.c provide an allowance to avoid unnecessary testing of EDGs. If it can be determined that the cause of the inoperable EDG does not exist on the remaining OPERABLE EDG, then SR 4.8.1.1.2.a.4 does not have to be performed. Eight (8) hours is reasonable to confirm that the OPERABLE EDG is not affected by the same problem as the inoperable EDG. If it cannot otherwise be determined that the cause of the initial inoperable EDG does not exist on the remaining EDG, then satisfactory performance of SR 4.8.1.1.2.a.4 suffices to provide assurance of continued OPERABILITY of that EDG. If the cause of the initial inoperability exists on the remaining OPERABLE EDG, that EDG would also be declared inoperable upon discovery, and ACTION 3.8.1.1.e would be entered. Once the failure is repaired (on either EDG), the common-cause failure no longer exists.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 10 REVISION NO.: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)

Action g prohibits the application of LCO 3.0.4.b to an inoperable diesel generator. There is an increased risk associated with entering a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with an inoperable diesel generator and the provisions of LCO 3.0.4.b, which allow entry into a MODE or other specified condition in the Applicability with the LCO not met after performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, should not be applied in this circumstance.

The OPERABILITY of the minimum specified A.C. and D.C. power sources and associated distribution systems during shutdown and refueling ensures that 1) the facility can be maintained in the shutdown or refueling condition for extended time periods and 2) sufficient instrumentation and control capability is available for monitoring and maintaining the unit status.

If the inoperable A.C. power source and associated distribution system or D.C. power source and associated distribution system cannot be restored to an OPERABLE status within the allowable outage time, the plant must be brought to a MODE in which overall plant risk is minimized. To achieve this status, the plant must be brought to at least HOT STANDBY within 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> and to HOT SHUTDOWN within the following 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />. Remaining within the Applicability of the LCO is acceptable because the plant risk in HOT SHUTDOWN is similar to or lower than COLD SHUTDOWN (reference CE NPSD-1186-A, Technical Justification for the Risk Informed Modification to Selected Required Action End States for CEOG PWRs, October 2001). In HOT SHUTDOWN there are more accident mitigation systems available and there is more redundancy and diversity in core heat removal mechanisms than in COLD SHUTDOWN. However, voluntary entry into COLD SHUTDOWN may be made as it is also an acceptable low-risk state. These ACTIONs are modified by a Note that states that LCO 3.0.4.a is not applicable when entering HOT SHUTDOWN. This Note prohibits the use of LCO 3.0.4.a to enter HOT SHUTDOWN during startup with the LCO not met.

However, there is no restriction on the use of LCO 3.0.4.b, if applicable, because LCO 3.0.4.b requires performance of a risk assessment addressing inoperable systems and components, consideration of the results, determination of the acceptability of entering HOT SHUTDOWN, and establishment of risk management actions, if appropriate. LCO 3.0.4 is not applicable to, and the Note does not preclude, changes in MODES or other specified conditions in the Applicability that are required to comply with ACTIONS or that are part of a shutdown of the unit.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 10 REVISION NO.: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)

The Surveillance Requirements for demonstrating the OPERABILTY of the DC system battery cell interconnection resistances are based on criteria recommended by the manufacturer. The table contained in TSSR 4.8.2.3.2.c.3 is provided to define the maximum individual and maximum average allowable values for battery cell interconnection resistances.

The maximum individual battery cell interconnection resistance values are based on the negligible impact of voltage drop and connection heating, during peak DC system load conditions. A maximum individual battery interconnection resistance value of 150 x 10-6 ohms is used for connections, which use inter-cell (bus-bar type) connections and for the battery set output terminal connections. The maximum individual battery interconnection resistance value of 200 x 10-6 ohms is used for the inter-tier and inter-rack connections, which are subject to additional resistance of the cables used to extend between the different level tiers of each battery rack and of the adjacent battery rack.

The maximum average battery cell interconnection resistance value of 50 x 10-6 ohms is the average of the interconnection resistance limit for all inter-cell, inter-tier, inter-rack and output terminals in the series-connected battery bank string. The 50 x 10-6 ohms criteria was selected in order to ensure that the battery cell interconnection voltage drop does not exceed the vendor criteria limit of less than 33.66 mV (average) for each battery cell interconnection, during the maximum design current load profile. The battery manufacturer has rated the battery bank set for full rated output, given adherence to limiting the average interconnection resistance to less than 33.66 mV drop between cells. For battery cell interconnections, which are monitored via multiple measurement points between two adjacent cells, these measurements must first be averaged for the connection between the affected adjacent cells, before averaging the values for all cells used in the full battery bank set.

4.8.1.1.2.c requires verification that the fuel oil properties of new and stored fuel oil are tested in accordance with, and maintained within the limits of the Diesel Fuel Oil Testing Program.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 7 of 10 REVISION NO.: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)

The tests listed below are a means of determining whether new fuel oil is of the appropriate grade and has not been contaminated with substances that would have an immediate, detrimental impact on diesel engine combustion.

If results from these tests are within acceptable limits, the fuel oil may be added to the storage tanks without concern for contaminating the entire volume of fuel oil in the storage tanks. These tests are to be conducted prior to adding the new fuel to the storage tank(s), but in no case is the time between receipt of new fuel and conducting the tests to exceed 31 days. The tests, limits, and applicable ASTM Standards are as follows:

a. Sample the new fuel oil in accordance with ASTM D4057,
b. Verify in accordance with the tests specified in ASTM D975 that the sample has an absolute specific gravity at 60/60°F of 0.83 and 0.89, or an API gravity at 60°F of 27° and 39° when tested in accordance with ASTM D1298, a kinematic viscosity at 40°C of 1.9 centistokes and 4.1 centistokes, and a flash point 125°F, and
c. Verify that the new fuel oil has a clear and bright appearance with proper color when tested in accordance with ASTM D4176 or a water and sediment content within limits when tested in accordance with ASTM D2709.

Failure to meet any of the above limits is cause for rejecting the new fuel oil, but does not represent a failure to meet the LCO concern since the fuel oil is not added to the storage tanks.

Within 31 days following the initial new fuel oil sample, the fuel oil is analyzed to establish that the other properties specified in Table 1 of ASTM D975 are met for new fuel oil when tested in accordance with ASTM D975, except that the analysis for sulfur may be performed in accordance with ASTM D5453, ASTM D2622, or ASTM D3120. The 31 day period is acceptable because the fuel oil properties of interest, even if they were not within stated limits, would not have an immediate effect on DG operation.

This Surveillance ensures the availability of high quality fuel oil for the DGs.

Fuel oil degradation during long term storage shows up as an increase in particulate, due mostly to oxidation. The presence of particulate does not mean the fuel oil will not burn properly in a diesel engine. The particulate can cause fouling of filters and fuel oil injection equipment, however, which can cause engine failure.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 8 of 10 REVISION NO.: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)

Particulate concentrations should be determined in accordance with ASTM D6217 or ASTM D2276. This method involves a gravimetric determination of total particulate concentration in the fuel oil and has a limit of 10 mg/l. It is acceptable to obtain a field sample for subsequent laboratory testing in lieu of field testing.

The Frequency of this test takes into consideration fuel oil degradation trends that indicate that particulate concentration is unlikely to change significantly between Frequency intervals.

ASTM Standards: D4057; D975 and D975 Table 1; D1298; D4176; D2709; D2622; D6217; D5453; D3120; D2276. ASTM Standard year designations are located in Chemistry Procedures COP-05.10 and COP-07.16.

This concludes the TS Bases discussion for SR 4.8.1.1.2.c.

The Surveillance Requirements for demonstrating the OPERABILITY of the diesel generators are in accordance with the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.9 Selection of Diesel Generator Set Capacity for Standby Power Supplies, March 10, 1971, and 1.108 Periodic Testing of Diesel Generator Units Used as Onsite Electric Power Systems at Nuclear Power Plants, Revision 1, August 1977, and 1.137, Fuel Oil Systems for Standby Diesel Generators, Revision 1, October 1979, Generic Letter 84-15, Proposed Staff Actions to Improve and Maintain Diesel Generator Reliability, dated July 2, 1984, and NRC staff positions reflected in Amendment No. 48 to Facility Operating License NPF-7 for North Anna Unit 2, dated April 25, 1985; as modified by Generic Letter 93-05, Line-Item Technical Specifications Improvements to Reduce Surveillance Requirements for Testing During Power Operation, dated September 27, 1993, and Generic Letter 94-01, Removal of Accelerated Testing and Special Reporting Requirements for Emergency Diesel Generators, dated May 31, 1994. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 9 of 10 REVISION NO.: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)

The Surveillance Requirement for demonstrating the OPERABILITY of the Station batteries are based on the recommendations of Regulatory Guide 1.129, Maintenance Testing and Replacement of Large Lead Storage Batteries for Nuclear Power Plants, February 1978, and IEEE Std 450-1980, IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Large Lead Storage Batteries for Generating Stations and Substations. The Surveillance Frequency is controlled under the Surveillance Frequency Control Program.

Verifying average electrolyte temperature above the minimum for which the battery was sized, total battery terminal voltage on float charge, connection resistance values and the performance of battery service and discharge tests ensures the effectiveness of the charging system, the ability to handle high discharge rates and compares the battery capacity at that time with the rated capacity.

Table 4.8-2 specifies the normal limits for each designated pilot cell and each connected cell for electrolyte level, float voltage and specific gravity.

The limits for the designated pilot cells float voltage and specific gravity, greater than 2.13 volts and .015 below the manufacturers full charge specific gravity or a battery charger current that had stabilized at a low value, is characteristic of a charged cell with adequate capacity. The normal limits for each connected cell for float voltage and specific gravity, greater than 2.13 volts and not more than .020 below the manufacturers full charge specific gravity with an average specific gravity of all the connected cells not more than .010 below the manufacturers full charge specific gravity, ensures the OPERABILITY and capability of the battery.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.8 BASES ATTACHMENT 10 OF ADM-25.04 10 of 10 REVISION NO.: ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS 8 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.8 ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.8.1, 3/4.8.2 and 3/4.8.3 A.C. SOURCES, D.C. SOURCES and ONSITE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS (continued)

Operation with a battery cells parameter outside the normal limit but within the allowable value specified in Table 4.8-2 is permitted for up to 7 days.

During this 7 day period: (1) the allowable values for electrolyte level ensures no physical damage to the plates with an adequate electron transfer capability; (2) the allowable value for the average specific gravity of all the cells, not more than .020 below the manufacturers recommended full charge specific gravity, ensures that the decrease in rating will be less than the safety margin provided in sizing; (3) the allowable value for an individual cells specific gravity, ensures that an individual cells specific gravity will not be more than .040 below the manufacturers full charge specific gravity and that the overall capability of the battery will be maintained within an acceptable limit; and (4) the allowable value for an individual cells float voltage, greater than 2.07 volts, ensures the batterys capability to perform its design function.

3/4.8.4 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES The OPERABILITY of the motor operated valves thermal overload protection and/or bypass devices ensures that these devices will not prevent safety related valves from performing their function. The Surveillance Requirements for demonstrating the OPERABILITY of these devices are in accordance with Regulatory Guide 1.106 Thermal Overload Protection for Electric Motors on Motor Operated Valves, Revision 1, March 1977.

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 11 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 6 Title:

REFUELING OPERATIONS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 6 - Incorporated PCR 2105627 to delete TS 3/4.9.5, Communications, and TS 3/4.9.6, Manipulator Crane Operability. (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 5 - Incorporated PCR 2084029 to include verbiage to verify that system locations susceptible to gas accumulation are sufficiently filled with water. (Author: N. Davidson)

Revision 4 - Incorporated PCR 04-1950 to delete BASES 3/4.9.7 and 3/4.9.12.

(Glenn Adams, 06/22/04)

Revision 3 - Changes made to reflect TS Amendment #127. (M. DiMarco, 09/20/02)

Revision 2 - Changes made to reflect TS Amendment #122. (K.W. Frehafer, 11/30/01)

Revision 1 - Modified bases for Containment Building Penetrations in accordance with NRC SER Containment Doors Open During Core Alterations per approved License Amendment No. 120. (M. DiMarco, 11/08/01)

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.9 SYS 6 R. Wright 05/11/16 STATUS COMPLETED REV 6

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 9 REVISION NO.: REFUELING OPERATIONS 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.9 ................................................................................... 3 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS ........................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.9.1 BORON CONCENTRATION ........................................ 3 3/4.9.2 INSTRUMENTATION ................................................... 3 3/4.9.3 DECAY TIME ............................................................... 3 3/4.9.4 CONTAINMENT PENETRATIONS .............................. 4 3/4.9.5 COMMUNICATIONS .................................................... 4 3/4.9.6 MANIPULATOR CRANE .............................................. 5 3/4.9.7 DELETED ..................................................................... 5 3/4.9.8 SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION ............................................................. 6 3/4.9.9 CONTAINMENT ISOLATION SYSTEM ....................... 7 3/4.9.4.10 and 3/4.9.11 WATER LEVEL - REACTOR VESSEL AND SPENT FUEL STORAGE POOL .... 9 3/4.9.12 DELETED ..................................................................... 9

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 9 REVISION NO.: REFUELING OPERATIONS 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.9 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS BASES 3/4.9.1 BORON CONCENTRATION The limitations on reactivity conditions during REFUELING ensure that:

(1) the reactor will remain subcritical during CORE ALTERATIONS, and (2) a uniform boron concentration is maintained for reactivity control in the water volumes having direct access to the reactor vessel. These limitations are consistent with the initial conditions assumed for the boron dilution incident in the safety analyses. The value specified in the COLR for Keff includes a 1% delta k/k conservative allowance for uncertainties.

Similarly, the boron concentration value specified in the COLR includes a conservative uncertainty allowance of 50 ppm boron.

If the boron concentration of any coolant volume in the RCS, the refueling canal, or the refueling cavity is less than its limit, all operations involving CORE ALTERATIONS or positive reactivity additions must be suspended immediately. Operations that individually add limited positive reactivity (e.g., temperature fluctuations from inventory addition or temperature control fluctuations), but when combined with all other operations affecting core reactivity (e.g., intentional boration) result in overall net negative reactivity addition, are not precluded by this action. Suspension of CORE ALTERATIONS or positive reactivity additions shall not preclude moving a component to a safe position.

3/4.9.2 INSTRUMENTATION The OPERABILITY of the startup neutron flux monitors ensures that redundant monitoring capability is available to detect changes in the reactivity condition of the core.

3/4.9.3 DECAY TIME The minimum requirement for reactor subcriticality prior to movement of irradiated fuel assemblies in the reactor pressure vessel ensures that sufficient time has elapsed to allow the radioactive decay of the short lived fission products. This decay time is consistent with the assumptions used in the safety analyses.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 9 REVISION NO.: REFUELING OPERATIONS 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.9.4 CONTAINMENT BUILDING PENETRATIONS The requirements on containment penetration closure and OPERABILITY ensure that a release of radioactive material within containment will be restricted from leakage to the environment. The OPERABILITY and closure restrictions are sufficient to restrict radioactive material release from a recently irradiated fuel element rupture based upon the lack of containment pressurization potential while in the REFUELING MODE.

The fuel handling accident analysis assumes a minimum post reactor shutdown decay time of 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. Therefore, recently irradiated fuel is defined as fuel that has occupied part of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />. This represents the applicability bases for fuel handling accidents. Containment closure will have administrative controls in place to assure that a single normal or contingency method to promptly close the primary or secondary containment penetrations will be available.

These prompt methods need not completely block the penetrations nor be capable of resisting pressure, but are to enable the ventilation systems to draw the release from the postulated fuel handling accident in the proper direction such that it can be treated and monitored.

FPL made the following regulatory commitment, which is consistent with NUMARC 93-01, Industry Guideline for Monitoring the Effectiveness of Maintenance at Nuclear Power Plants, Revision 3, Section 11.3.6, Assessment Methods for Shutdown Conditions, subheading 11.3.6.5, Containment - Primary (PWR)/Secondary (BWR).

The following guidelines are included in the assessment of systems removed from service during movement of irradiated fuel:

During fuel handling/core alterations, ventilation system and radiation monitor availability (as defined in NUMARC 91-06) should be assessed, with respect to filtration and monitoring of releases from the fuel. Following shutdown, radioactivity in the fuel decays away fairly rapidly. The basis of the Technical Specification operability amendment is the reduction in doses due to such decay. The goal of maintaining ventilation system and radiation monitor availability is to reduce doses even further below that provided by the natural decay and to avoid unmonitored releases.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 5 of 9 REVISION NO.: REFUELING OPERATIONS 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.9.4 CONTAINMENT PENETRATIONS (continued)

A single normal or contingency method to promptly close primary or secondary containment penetrations should be developed. Such prompt methods need not completely block the penetration or be capable of resisting pressure. The purpose of the prompt methods mentioned above are to enable ventilation systems to draw the release from a postulated fuel handling accident in the proper direction such that it can be treated and monitored.

Availability as defined by NUMARC 91-06, Guidelines for Industry Actions to Assess Shutdown Management, December 1991, relies on the definitions of functional, and operable. The NUMARC 91-06 definitions for these three terms follow.

Available (Availability): The status of a system, structure, or component that is in service or can be placed in service in a functional or operable state by immediate manual or automatic actuation.

Functional (Functionality): The ability of a system, structure, or component to perform its intended service with considerations that applicable technical specification requirements or licensing/design basis assumptions may not be maintained.

Operable: The ability of a system to perform its specified function with all applicable TS requirements satisfied.

3/4.9.5 DELETED 3/4.9.6 DELETED 3/4.9.7 DELETED

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 6 of 9 REVISION NO.: REFUELING OPERATIONS 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.9.8 SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION The requirement that at least one shutdown cooling loop be in operation ensures that (1) sufficient cooling capacity is available to remove decay heat and maintain the water in the reactor pressure vessel below 140F as required during the REFUELING MODE, and (2) sufficient coolant circulation is maintained through the reactor core to minimize the effects of a boron dilution incident and prevent boron stratification.

If SDC loop requirements are not met, there will be no forced circulation to provide mixing to establish uniform boron concentrations. Suspending positive reactivity additions that could result in failure to meet the minimum boron concentration limit is required to assure continued safe operation.

Introduction of coolant inventory must be from sources that have a boron concentration greater than what would be required in the RCS for minimum refueling boron concentration. This may result in an overall reduction in RCS boron concentration, but provides acceptable margin to maintaining subcritical operations. Managing of gas voids is important to shutdown cooling system OPERABILITY.

The requirement to have two shutdown cooling loops OPERABLE when there is less than 23 feet of water above the reactor pressure vessel flange with irradiated fuel in the core ensures that a single failure of the operating shutdown cooling loop will not result in a complete loss of decay heat removal capability. With the reactor vessel head removed and 23 feet of water above the reactor pressure vessel flange with irradiated fuel in the core, a large heat sink is available for core cooling, thus in the event of a failure of the operating shutdown cooling loop, adequate time is provided to initiate emergency procedures to cool the core.

The footnote providing for a minimum reactor coolant flow rate of

> 1850 gpm considers one of the two RCS injection points for a SDCS train to be isolated. The specified parameters include 50 gpm for flow measurement uncertainty, and 3F uncertainty for RCS and CCW temperature measurements. The conditions of minimum shutdown time, maximum RCS temperature, and maximum temperature of CCW to the shutdown cooling heat exchanger are initial conditions specified to assure that a reduction in flow rate from 3000 gpm to 1800 gpm will not result in a temperature transient exceeding 140F during conditions when the RCS water level is at an elevation > 29.5 feet.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 7 of 9 REVISION NO.: REFUELING OPERATIONS 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.9.8 SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)

Shutdown Cooling System piping and components have the potential to develop voids and pockets of entrained gases. Preventing and managing gas intrusion and accumulation is necessary for proper operation of the Shutdown Cooling loops and may also prevent water hammer, pump cavitation, and pumping of noncondensible gas into the reactor vessel.

Selection of Shutdown Cooling System locations susceptible to gas accumulation is based on a review of system design information, including piping and instrument drawings, isometric drawings, plan and elevation drawings, and calculations. The design review is supplemented by system walkdowns to validate the system high points and to confirm the location and orientation of important components that can become sources of gas or could otherwise cause gas to be trapped or difficult to remove during system maintenance or restoration. Susceptible locations depend on plant and system configuration, such as standby versus operating conditions.

The Shutdown Cooling System is OPERABLE when it is sufficiently filled with water. Acceptance criteria are established for the volume of accumulated gas at susceptible locations. If accumulated gas is discovered that exceeds the acceptance criteria for the susceptible location (or the volume of accumulated gas at one or more susceptible locations exceeds an acceptance criterion for gas volume at the suction or discharge of a pump), the Surveillance is not met. If it is determined by subsequent evaluation that the Shutdown Cooling System is not rendered inoperable by the accumulated gas (i.e., the system is sufficiently filled with water), the Surveillance may be declared met.

Accumulated gas should be eliminated or brought within the acceptance criteria limits.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 8 of 9 REVISION NO.: REFUELING OPERATIONS 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.9.8 SHUTDOWN COOLING AND COOLANT CIRCULATION (continued)

Shutdown Cooling System locations susceptible to gas accumulation are monitored and, if gas is found, the gas volume is compared to the acceptance criteria for the location. Susceptible locations in the same system flow path which are subject to the same gas intrusion mechanisms may be verified by monitoring a representative subset of susceptible locations. Monitoring may not be practical for locations that are inaccessible due to radiological or environmental conditions, plant configuration, or personnel safety concerns.

For these locations, alternative methods (e.g., operating parameters, remote monitoring) may be used to monitor the susceptible locations. Monitoring is not required for susceptible locations where the maximum potential accumulated gas void volume has been evaluated and determined to not challenge system OPERABILITY. The accuracy of the method used for monitoring the susceptible locations and trending of the results should be sufficient to assure system OPERABILITY during the Surveillance interval.

The Surveillance Frequency Control program frequency for ensuring locations are sufficiently filled with water takes into consideration the gradual nature of gas accumulation in the Shutdown Cooling System piping and the procedural controls governing system operation.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.9 BASES ATTACHMENT 11 OF ADM-25.04 9 of 9 REVISION NO.: REFUELING OPERATIONS 6 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.9 REFUELING OPERATIONS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.9.9 CONTAINMENT ISOLATION SYSTEM The OPERABILITY of this system ensures that the containment isolation valves will be automatically isolated upon detection of high radiation levels within the containment. The OPERABILITY of this system is required to restrict the release of radioactive material resulting from a fuel handling accident of a recently irradiated fuel assembly from the containment atmosphere to the environment. Recently irradiated fuel is defined as fuel that has occupied parts of a critical reactor core within the previous 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.

3/4.9.4.10 and 3/4.9.11 WATER LEVEL - REACTOR VESSEL AND SPENT FUEL STORAGE POOL The restrictions on minimum water level ensure that sufficient water depth is available to remove 99% of the assumed 10% iodine gap activity released from the rupture of an irradiated fuel assembly. The minimum water depth is consistent with the assumptions of the safety analysis.

The limit on soluble boron concentration in LCO 3/4.9.11 is consistent with the minimum boron concentration specified for the RWT, and assures an additional subcritical margin to the value of keff which is calculated in the spent fuel storage pool criticality safety analysis to satisfy the acceptance criteria of Specification 5.6.1. Inadvertent dilution of the spent fuel storage pool by the quantity of unborated water necessary to reduce the pool boron concentration to a value that would invalidate the criticality safety analysis is not considered to be a credible event. The surveillance frequency specified for verifying the boron concentration is consistent with NUREG-1432 and satisfies, in part, acceptance criteria established by the NRC staff for approval of criticality safety analysis methods that take credit for soluble boron in the pool water. The ACTIONS required for this LCO are designed to preclude an accident from happening or to mitigate the consequences of an accident in progress, and shall not preclude moving a fuel assembly to a safe position.

3/4.9.12 DELETED

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.10 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 12 BASES ATTACHMENT 12 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 0 Effective Date SAFETY RELATED 09/06/01 Title:

SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision FRG Review Date Approved By Approval Date S 2 OPS 0 08/30/01 R.G. West 08/30/01 DATE Plant General Manager DOCT PROCEDURE Revision FRG Review Date Approved By Approval Date DOCN Section 3/4.10 SYS Plant General Manager COM COMPLETED ITM 0

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.10 BASES ATTACHMENT 12 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 4 REVISION NO.: SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS 0 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.10 ................................................................................. 3 3/4.10 SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS ....................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.10.1 SHUTDOWN MARGIN ................................................. 3 3/4.10.2 MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT, GROUP HEIGHT, INSERTION AND POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS................................................ 3 3/4.10.3 REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS .................................... 3 3/4.10.4 CENTER CEA MISALIGNMENT .................................. 3 3/4.10.5 CEA INSERTION DURING ITC, MTC, AND POWER COEFFICIENT MEASUREMENTS .............................. 4

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.10 BASES ATTACHMENT 12 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 4 REVISION NO.: SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS 0 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.10 3/4.10 SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS BASES 3/4.10.1 SHUTDOWN MARGIN This special test exception provides that a minimum amount of CEA worth is immediately available for reactivity control when CEA worth measurement tests are performed. This special test exception is required to permit the periodic verification of the actual versus predicted core reactivity condition occurring as a result of fuel burnup or fuel cycling operations.

Although CEA worth testing is conducted in MODE 2, during the performance of these tests sufficient negative reactivity is inserted to result in temporary entry into MODE 3. Because the intent is to immediately return to MODE 2 to continue CEA worth measurements, the special test exception allows limited operation in MODE 3 without having to borate to meet the SHUTDOWN MARGIN requirements of Technical Specification 3.1.1.1.

3/4.10.2 MODERATOR TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT, GROUP HEIGHT, INSERTION AND POWER DISTRIBUTION LIMITS This special test exception permits individual CEAs to be positioned outside of their normal group heights and insertion limits during the performance of such PHYSICS TESTS as those required to (1) measure CEA worth and (2) determine the reactor stability index and damping factor under xenon oscillation conditions.

3/4.10.3 REACTOR COOLANT LOOPS This special test exception permits reactor criticality under reduced flow conditions and is required to perform certain startup and PHYSICS TESTS while at low THERMAL POWER levels.

3/4.10.4 CENTER CEA MISALIGNMENT This special test exception permits the center CEA to be misaligned during PHYSICS TESTS required to determine the isothermal temperature coefficient and power coefficient.

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.10 BASES ATTACHMENT 12 OF ADM-25.04 4 of 4 REVISION NO.: SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS 0 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.10 SPECIAL TEST EXCEPTIONS (continued)

BASES (continued) 3/4.10.5 CEA INSERTION DURING ITC, MTC, AND POWER COEFFICIENT MEASUREMENTS This special test exception permits the CEA groups to be misaligned during such PHYSICS TESTS as those required to determine the (1) isothermal temperature coefficient, (2) moderator temperature coefficient, and (3) power coefficient.

Section No.

ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 3/4.11 Attachment No.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BASES ATTACHMENT 13 13 Current Revision No.

OF ADM-25.04 SAFETY RELATED 1 Title:

RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS Responsible Department: Licensing REVISION

SUMMARY

Revision 1 - Incorporated PCR 1792591 to update for Unit 2 EPU conditions as modified per EC 249985 and the Unit 2 EPU LAR. (Author: Don Pendagast)

Revision 0 - Bases for Technical Specifications. (E. Weinkam, 08/30/01)

Revision Approved By Approval Date UNIT # UNIT 2 DATE 0 R.G. West 08/30/01 DOCT PROCEDURE DOCN Section 3/4.11 SYS 1 R. Coffey 11/02/12 STATUS COMPLETED REV 1

  1. OF PGS

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.11 BASES ATTACHMENT 13 OF ADM-25.04 2 of 3 REVISION NO.: RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS 1 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION PAGE BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.11 ................................................................................. 3 3/4.11 RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS .......................................................... 3 BASES ............................................................................................ 3 3/4.11.2.5 EXPLOSIVE GAS MIXTURE ..................................... 3 3/4.11.2.6 GAS STORAGE TANKS............................................ 3

SECTION NO.: PAGE:

TITLE: TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3/4.11 BASES ATTACHMENT 13 OF ADM-25.04 3 of 3 REVISION NO.: RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS 1 ST. LUCIE UNIT 2 BASES FOR SECTION 3/4.11 3/4.11 RADIOACTIVE EFFLUENTS BASES Pages B 3/4 11-2 through B 3/4 11-3 (Amendment No. 61) have been deleted from the Technical Specifications. The next page is B 3/4 11-4.

3/4.11.2.5 EXPLOSIVE GAS MIXTURE This specification is provided to ensure that the concentration of potentially explosive gas mixtures contained in the waste gas holdup system is maintained below the flammability limits of hydrogen and oxygen. Maintaining the concentration of hydrogen and oxygen below their flammability limits provides assurance that the releases of radioactive materials will be controlled in conformance with the requirements of General Design Criterion 60 of Appendix A to 10 CFR Part 50.

3/4.11.2.6 GAS STORAGE TANKS Restricting the gaseous radioactive waste inventory in a gas storage tank provides assurance that in the event of an uncontrolled release of the tanks contents, the resulting total effective dose equivalent to an individual at the nearest exclusion area boundary will not exceed 0.1 rem. This is consistent with Branch Technical Position 11-5, "Postulated Radioactive Release Due to Waste Gas System Leak or Failure," of Standard Review Plan Chapter 11, /R1 Radioactive Waste Management," of NUREG-0800. The waste gas decay tank inventory of noble gases required to generate an exclusion area boundary dose of 0.1 rem is the basis for the limit of 165,000 dose equivalent curies Xe-133 and is derived based on the definition given in Technical Specification Task Force (TSTF*490), "Deletion of E bar Definition and Revision to RCS Specific Activity Tech Spec."